diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-25 08:57:49 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-25 08:57:49 -0800 |
| commit | 9114e0a42db12404f8eda1e1725e4c008601a8f0 (patch) | |
| tree | 94ab695f09742f9b83a973b88f033c3996d46163 | |
| parent | 55242ce3a29f2db9c6d0105dc342b474a1b290cc (diff) | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-0.txt | 6330 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-0.zip | bin | 113045 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h.zip | bin | 2992785 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/69724-h.htm | 6986 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/images/new-cover.jpg | bin | 258823 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/images/plate01.jpg | bin | 487201 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/images/plate02.jpg | bin | 525277 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/images/plate03.jpg | bin | 462244 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/images/plate04.jpg | bin | 534804 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/images/plate05.jpg | bin | 442111 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/images/threefish.png | bin | 26790 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/images/titlepage.png | bin | 69775 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/images/wave.png | bin | 54353 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69724-h/images/yale-logo.png | bin | 15268 -> 0 bytes |
17 files changed, 17 insertions, 13316 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..124233a --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #69724 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/69724) diff --git a/old/69724-0.txt b/old/69724-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 4021a37..0000000 --- a/old/69724-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6330 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of At the gateways of the day, by Padraic -Colum - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: At the gateways of the day - -Author: Padraic Colum - -Illustrator: Juliette May Fraser - -Release Date: January 7, 2023 [eBook #69724] - -Language: English - -Produced by: Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed Proofreading - Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project Gutenberg (This - file was produced from images generously made available by - The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE GATEWAYS OF THE -DAY *** - - - - - At the - Gateways of the Day - - - by Padraic Colum - with illustrations by Juliette May Fraser - - - New Haven - Published for The Hawaiian Legend & Folklore - Commission by the Yale University Press - - London · Humphrey Milford · Oxford University Press - 1924 - - - - - - - - - I DEDICATE THIS VOLUME - TO THE MEMBERS OF - THE HAWAIIAN LEGEND AND FOLKLORE COMMISSION - - JOHN R. GALT - EDNA J. HILL - MARY S. LAWRENCE - EMMA AHUENA D. TAYLOR - - AND TO FIVE KAMA AINA WHO HELPED ME - - JOSEPH S. EMERSON - WILLIAM HYDE RICE - JULIE JUDD SWANZY - THOMAS G. THRUM - WILLIAM DRAKE WESTERVELT - - - - - - - - -TABLE OF CONTENTS. - - - Introduction xiii - The Boy Pu-nia and the King of the Sharks 1 - The Seven Great Deeds of Ma-ui 7 - How Ma-ui won a place for himself in the House 7 - How Ma-ui lifted up the Sky 10 - How Ma-ui fished up the Great Island 15 - How Ma-ui snared the Sun and made Him go more slowly - across the Heavens 20 - How Ma-ui won fire for Men 27 - How Ma-ui overcame Kuna Loa the Long Eel 32 - The Search that Ma-ui’s Brother made for his Sister - Hina-of-the-Sea 38 - How Ma-ui strove to win Immortality for Men 41 - Au-ke-le the Seeker 45 - Pi-ko-i: The Boy Who Was Good at Shooting Arrows 69 - Paka: The Boy Who Was Reared in the Land that the Gods - Have Since Hidden 81 - The Story of Ha-le-ma-no and the Princess Kama 93 - The Arrow and the Swing 107 - The Daughter of the King of Ku-ai-he-lani 117 - The Fish-Hook of Pearl 131 - The Story of Kana, the Youth Who Could Stretch - Himself Upwards 137 - The Me-ne-hu-ne 149 - The Story of Mo-e Mo-e: Also a Story about Po-o and - about Kau-hu-hu the Shark-God, and about Mo-e Mo-e’s - Son, the Man Who Was Bold in His Wish 165 - The Woman from Lalo-hana, the Country under the Sea 193 - Hina, the Woman in the Moon 199 - Notes 203 - - - - - - -LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. - - - Facing page - - “Then Pu-nia dived ... into the cave, took two lobsters in - his hands, and came up on the place that he had spoken from” 2 - “Four birds ... came and lit on the yards, and asked of those - below what they had come for” 52 - “The owl of Ka-ne came and sat on the stones and stared at him” 150 - “Koni-konia and Hina ... climbed to the tops of the trees that - were on the tops of the mountains” 198 - “It made an arching path for her from the rocks up to the - heavens. With the net in her hands she went along that path” 200 - - - - - - - - -HELPS TO PRONUNCIATION. - - -There are three simple rules which practically control Hawaiian -pronunciation: (1) Pronounce each vowel. (2) Never allow a consonant to -close a syllable. (3) Give the vowels the following values: - - - a = a in father - e = ey in they - i = i in machine - o = o in note - u = oo in tool - - - - - - - - -INTRODUCTION. - - -If you draw a line from the tip of New Zealand to the top of the -Hawaiian Islands, you will be able to indicate the true Polynesian -area. On the islands towards the Malay Peninsula there is a mixed -people who show the Papuan strain that is in them. They are the -Melanesians. On the American side of the line there is a singularly -homogeneous people who are of a type like to our own. They are the -Polynesians. We have been able to pay ourselves the compliment of -admiring them ever since the chronicler of Mendaña’s voyages looked -upon the men and women of the Marquesas and found that “they had -beautiful faces and the most promising animation of countenance; and -were in all things so becoming that the pilot-mayor Quiros affirmed -nothing in his life caused him so much regret as leaving such fine -creatures to be lost in that country.” [1] - -And yet the Polynesians, so like us physically, have in their romances -none of the familiar veins that one can discover in, let us say, the -folk-tales of the darker peoples in the lands around India. I take up -Studies in Religion, Folk-lore, and Custom in North Borneo and the -Malay Peninsula, [2] and I strike at once into: - - - Now the Raja had given it out that whoever could remove the - dragon’s head should marry his daughter, who was shut up in an - inner room and enclosed by a seven-fold fence of ivory; but nobody - could do it, for the dragon’s head was as big as a mountain. - - -This is from a folk-tale told amongst the aboriginal tribes of the -Malay Peninsula. And when I read the opening of another tale I am in an -imaginative land so familiar that I know every turn and track in it.— - - - “Oh,” said Serunggal, “it is no use my stopping here. I had better - go and marry a Raja’s daughter.” - - -The tale goes on, and we have the Raja setting the adventurous youth -three tasks, just as the King or the Enchanter sets the youth three -tasks in a story that has been told in every village in Ireland and -Serbia, in Spain and Sweden, in Russia and Italy; in a story that was -given literary form in classic Greece in Jason and Medea, and in -mediæval Wales in Kulhwch and Olwen. And this tale of Serunggal and the -Raja’s daughter belongs to one of the dark tribes of Borneo. - -There are animal helpers in this particular tale, just as there are -animal helpers in the ancient Greek folk-tale of Cupid and Psyche. -Indeed, the stories belonging to Borneo and the Malay Peninsula are -well filled with animals—turtles and deer, elephants and ant-eaters; -they might be the material out of which Rudyard Kipling made his -unforgettable Jungle Book and his Just-So Stories. - -In Polynesia we find no romance that is based on formulæ familiar to -us. Only occasionally does a helping creature appear. There are -practically no animal stories, for the sufficient reason that the -Polynesian did not have opportunities for forming a wide animal -acquaintanceship. He brought the pig and the dog to the Islands with -him; and the shark and the turtle, the owl and the plover, were the -only creatures that aroused an interest in him. Even the way of -counting things is changed when we get into Polynesian romance: instead -of three, seven, and nine, we have four, eight, and sixteen for the -cabalistic numbers. - -And yet, as all human desire is the same, and as human mentality -compels a certain sequence of incident, and there seem to be patterns -in incident that all human beings find it delightful to work out, the -Polynesian stories have the elements and the combination of elements -that make fine narrative. Often the Polynesian story-teller rediscovers -a formula that we have used to make a memorable tale. Thus, in the -present collection, the daughter of the King of Ku-ai-he-lani will -recall Cinderella, and the story of Au-ke-le will recall the story of -the Irish hero Oisin and all the other stories of men who travelled far -and returned to their own land; it will remind us of Odysseus and Rip -Van Winkle. - -In the folk-romance and in the mythological stories of Europe there are -places that may not be entered, and there are women whom a man must not -approach. There is Blue Beard’s Chamber; there is Danaë, and there is -the Eithlinn of Celtic mythology. Polynesian romance has places that -may not be entered, and women who must not be approached by men. And it -has these instances in almost every story. Indeed, without the guarded -maiden and the forbidden place a Polynesian story-teller would find it -difficult to carry on. And one knows that when he was dealing with one -or the other he was dealing with the life around him: the place was -tapu, [3] the maiden was tapu. And the place or the maiden was tapu -simply because a king or a chief with the privilege of declaring tapu -had so declared it. When we read the story of Ka-we-lu in The Arrow and -the Swing, or of Kama in The Story of Ha-le-ma-no and the Princess -Kama, we can easily see how, as the simplicity of tapu was forgotten, -the maiden would be given a fantastic security like that of Danaë in -her brazen tower, or like that of Eithlinn in her inaccessible island, -and we can see how motives would be invented for keeping her apart: -Danaë’s son and Eithlinn’s son are destined to slay their grandfathers. -Every race has had tapu. But the Polynesians held to it and made it -their single discipline. In these Polynesian stories we are at the very -beginning of a romance that for Europeans has grown to be fraught with -magic and mystery. - - - -I spent the months of January, February, March, and April of 1923 in -the Hawaiian Islands. I went there under the following circumstances: -The Hawaiian Legislature had formed a Commission on Myth and Folk-lore; -the function of the Commission was to have a survey made of the stories -that had been collected and that belonged to myth and folk-lore of the -Islands, and to have them made over into stories for children—primarily -for the children of the Hawaiian Islands. By an arrangement made -between the Commission and the Yale University Press, I was invited to -make the survey and to reshape the stories. - -I learned something of the language; I sought out those who still had -the tradition of Hawaiian romance and who could recite it in the -traditional way; I made a study of all the material that had been -collected; I placed myself in the hands of the very distinguished group -of Polynesian scholars that is in Honolulu. Quite early in my -researches I came to the conclusion that my work should be based on the -Fornander Collection of Hawaiian Antiquities and Folk-lore, published -by the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Polynesian Ethnology and Natural -History, in Honolulu, and I made it my main task to understand the -background of the stories given in that collection, and to hear as many -of them as possible from the lips of the surviving custodians of the -Polynesian tradition in Hawaii. - -I found in the Hawaiian Islands conditions that are lamentably like the -conditions in certain European countries where separate and interesting -cultures are being pushed aside by this or that culture that is -politically and commercially important. In Hawaii there is a great -breach in the native tradition: I have been in houses where a -grandmother or grandfather knew traditional Hawaiian poems (mele) and -could chant them in the traditional way, while a son or daughter would -be able to translate them, but not able to chant them, and a grandchild -would be able neither to chant the poems nor translate them. Once, I -remember, in such a house, I went to see what a little girl, the -granddaughter of a lady who had chanted mele to me for about an hour, -was studying. This child had not allowed herself to be interrupted -either by the chanting of her grandmother or by the translating that -her father did for me; she was bent on mastering a lesson in a book -that she kept before her—an American school geography. “Stockholm is -the capital of Sweden, Vienna is the capital of Austria,” was one of -the items that had kept her absorbed. - -I discovered that of the stories which I knew from the Fornander -Collection, few lived in the memory of the generations at present in -the Islands. On the Island of Maui I met a distinguished Hawaiian lady -who had been at the court of King Kalakaua, and who, in her youth, had -been a trained story-teller. She tried to give me some of the stories -that belonged to her repertoire. But no sooner had she begun than she -declared that she was no longer familiar with the language in which the -stories were told—they were in the idiom of the Alii or the Chiefs, an -idiom that she had not used since her days at court. - -I heard many stories told, some by men, some by women. One of the best -story-tellers that I came across was a young man whom I met on the -Island of Molokai. His father was Chinese, and he had learnt the -stories from his grandmother. He told me several stories; one of them -was the story of the rescue of Hina by her son Kana, a story given in -Fornander, and evidently belonging to the folk. - -What impressed me most in these recitals was the gesture of the -story-teller. Every feature, every finger of the man or woman becomes -alive, becomes dramatic, as the recital is entered on. The gesture of -the Hawaiian makes the telling of a story a dramatic entertainment. -Scholars have written of the long and monotonous stories told in the -old days in Hawaii. The stories were long, but the gesture of the -story-teller must have saved them from an unrelieved monotony. I was -made to recall again and again Melville’s description of an -entertainment given him by a genial Marquesan youth; it is a -description that gives the spirit in which the unspoiled Polynesian -dramatizes his moods and his reactions. Says Melville: “Upon my -signifying my desire that he should pluck me the young fruit of some -particular tree, the handsome savage, throwing himself into a sudden -attitude of surprise, feigns astonishment at the apparent absurdity of -the request. Maintaining this position for a moment, the strange -emotions depicted on his countenance soften down into one of humorous -resignation to my will, and then looking wistfully up to the tufted top -of the tree, he stands on tip-toe, straining his neck and elevating his -arm, as though endeavoring to reach the fruit from the ground where he -stands. As if defeated in this childish attempt, he now sinks to the -earth despondingly, beating his breast in well-acted despair; and then, -starting to his feet all at once, and throwing back his head, raises -both hands, like a school boy about to catch a falling ball. And -continuing this for a moment or two, as if in expectation that the -fruit was going to be tossed down to him by some good spirit on the -tree-top, he turns wildly round in another fit of despair, and scampers -off to a distance of thirty or forty yards. Here he remains a while, -eyeing the tree, the very picture of misery; but the next moment, -receiving, as it were, a flash of inspiration, he rushes again towards -it, and clasping both arms about the trunk, with one elevated a little -above the other, he presses the soles of his feet close together -against the tree, extending his legs from it until they are nearly -horizontal, and his body becomes doubled into an arch; then, hand over -hand and foot after foot he rises from the earth with steady rapidity, -and almost before you are aware of it, has gained the cradled and -embowered nest of nuts, and with boisterous glee flings the fruit to -the ground.” Imagine this spontaneous gesture applied to the telling of -a story, every incident of which gives rise to gesture. But the gesture -in the story-recital was not merely spontaneous; it was trained, as was -the gesture in the hula or Polynesian ballet. Dr. Nathaniel Emerson has -a chapter on gesture in his Unwritten Literature of Hawaii, and he -gives this instance amongst others: “To indicate death, the death of a -person, the finger-tips, placed in apposition, are drawn away from each -other with a sweeping gesture and at the same time lowered till the -palms face the ground. In this case also we find diversity. One old -man, well acquainted with hula matters, being asked to signify in -pantomimic fashion ‘The king is sick,’ went through the following -motions: He first pointed upward, to indicate the heaven-born one, the -king; then he brought his hands to his body and threw his face into a -painful grimace. To indicate the death of the king he threw his hands -upward towards the sky, as if to signify a removal by flight.” - -This unconstrained, dramatic gesture is being lost. There is no longer -a school for gesture in the hula. And the Hawaiian is checking his -movements towards gesture. It used to be said: “Tie an Hawaiian’s hands -and he can’t talk.” The older men and women still have that wonderful -command of their features and their hands—a command that made them the -greatest ballet-performers that the world, I believe, has ever had—but -the younger generation feel that to use gesture is to be rustic, to be -“Kanaka.”. - -There is still, amongst the Hawaiians who live in the old Polynesian -way, in villages along the beaches, with the taro patches near, a great -treasury of poetry and native lore. But the newspaper and the victrola -are taking up the time and the interest that used to be devoted to -poetry, traditional games, riddles, and the like. I have been in -cottages where the people still sit or lie on their mats on the floor, -ignoring tables, chairs, and beds, and where they eat with their -fingers, lifting the poi out of the common bowl. In such houses I have -found a real scholarship, a delight in poetry, and the possession of -such a quantity of it as would put to shame a cultivated American, -Englishman, or Frenchman. But even in such houses I was aware that the -tradition was passing. Sitting on the floor in one such house, around a -petroleum lamp also on the floor, I have spelled out news items in an -Hawaiian newspaper that told of the French in the Ruhr and preparations -for elections in Ireland. - -The world surges in on the Hawaiian Islands. And the Hawaiian can no -longer give himself solely to the tradition that bound him to the -valleys and the mountains, and that knit him to Wakea and Papa, who -begat and brought forth the islands and the men and women upon them. -That separate tradition, which for thousands of years he lived by, is -being broken up, as the surge breaks up the lava on his coast. The -Hawaiian who, at the time when the Americans were making their -declaration of independence, was still working with tools of stone, -knowing nothing of metals, of pottery, of the loom, and knowing of no -animal larger than a dog or a pig, has now to take some account of the -continents. - - - -With one exception the titles in this collection cover stories that are -Hawaiian in the sense that they were given their shape upon the -Hawaiian Islands. That exception is The Seven Great Deeds of Ma-ui. -Although the scene of the demi-god’s adventures is Hawaiian, I have -used incidents related of him in other Polynesian islands—in New -Zealand, Samoa, and the lesser islands. I have treated Ma-ui, not as an -Hawaiian, but as the Pan-Polynesian hero that he is. With this -exception the stories are all out of the Hawaiian tradition, or rather -out of the Polynesian tradition as it has been shaped in Hawaii. - -And the stories are mainly taken from that treasure house of Hawaiian -lore, the Fornander Collection of Hawaiian Antiquities and Folk-lore, -which form Volumes IV–VI of the Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop -Museum of Honolulu, published 1916–1919. I have gone outside the -Fornander Collection in several instances. The Seven Great Deeds of -Ma-ui comes out of Mr. Westervelt’s valuable book, Ma-ui the Demi-God; -the stories of the Me-ne-hu-ne come out of Mr. Thrum’s Stories of the -Menehunes and Mr. Rice’s Hawaiian Legends; and I have drawn the story -about Hina, the Woman of Lalo-hana, from David Malo’s Hawaiian -Antiquities, and the story about the Shark-god from an old publication -of the Islands, The Maile Quarterly. But it is the Fornander Collection -that has given a cast to this book, and I must now give a brief account -of it. - -Abraham Fornander, the author of The Polynesian Race, lived on the -Islands for over forty years. He edited a journal called The -Polynesian, and he was Superintendent of Public Instruction on the -Islands in 1865–1866. He had married an Hawaiian lady, and he was a -strong partisan of the native race. - -The theory which he expounds in The Polynesian Race is that the -Polynesian people carried with them into the islands of the Pacific a -culture and a set of ideas that connect them with the East Indians—with -the pre-Sanscrit culture and with an Arabian culture that touched both -the Hebrews and the East Indians. There is no reason to take this -theory into account now. The important thing is that Abraham Fornander, -in order to substantiate it, made an appeal to the traditions that were -then current amongst the natives of Hawaii. - -At that time, over forty years ago, there was considerable native -scholarship. Haleole, who made an attempt to found a native literature -with his romance Laieikawai, was writing and publishing. The Mission -School in Lahainaluna on the Island of Maui had become a sort of -Hawaiian university. Abraham Fornander had the good sense to appeal to -native scholars, and he was able to get the best of them to interest -themselves in his project of collecting all the native lore that could -throw a light on the migrations of the Polynesian people. The Hawaiian -monarchy was then in undisputed existence; native institutions were -still vigorous; everywhere there were men and women whose memories were -stocked with the historical traditions and the romances of Hawaii. - -With the help of a corps of native scholars a great deal of the -surviving tradition of Hawaii was collected by Fornander. Some of it -was published in the Hawaiian newspapers of the time, but no extensive -publication was given to it. The manuscripts were kept together; then, -on the death of Abraham Fornander in 1887, the collection was acquired -by Charles R. Bishop, the husband of Bernice Pauahi, an Hawaiian -royalty whose estate went to the foundation of the Bernice Pauahi -Bishop Museum of Polynesian Ethnology and Natural History in Honolulu. - -Forty years after it had been got together, the publication of the -material was begun by the Bishop Museum. That was in 1916. The volumes -have appeared under the editorship of that veteran Hawaiian scholar, -Mr. Thomas Thrum, with the Hawaiian text on one page and the English -translation by Mr. John Wise on the other. It is Mr. Wise’s -translations that have furnished me with the bulk of the material for -this book. - -Although the stories are described in the Museum publications as -folk-lore, I doubted from the time of my first reading of them that -they were folk-lore in the strict sense of the word; that is, I doubted -their coming out of an unlearned and popular tradition. The greater -number of them seemed to me to be deliberate compositions intended for -a rather select audience. And then I found that a great master of -Hawaiian tradition, Mr. William Hyde Rice, favored this opinion. In the -Introduction to his Hawaiian Legends [4] it is said: - - - Mr. Rice’s theory as to the origin of these legends is based on the - fact that in the old days, before the discovery of the Islands by - Captain Cook, there were bards and story-tellers, either itinerant - or attached to the courts of the chiefs, similar to the minstrels - and tale-tellers of mediæval Europe. These men formed a distinct - class, and lived only at the courts of the high chiefs. - Accordingly, their stories were heard by none except those people - attached to the service of the chiefs. This accounts for the loss - of many legends, in later years, as they were not commonly known. - These bards or story-tellers sometimes used historical incidents or - natural phenomena for the foundation of their stories, which were - handed down from generation to generation. Other legends were - simply fabrications of the imagination, in which the greatest - “teller of tales” was awarded the highest place in the chief’s - favor. All these elements, fiction combined with fact, and shrouded - in the mist of antiquity, came, by repetition, to be more or less - believed as true. This class of men were skillful in the art of the - “apo”—that is, “catching,” literally, or memorizing instantly at - the first hearing. One man would recite or chant for two or three - hours at a stretch, and when he had finished, his auditor would - start at the beginning of the chant and go through the whole mele - or story without missing or changing a word. These trained men - received through their ears as we receive through our eyes, and in - that way the ancient Hawaiians had a spoken literature much as we - have a written one. - - -And as to the substance of this spoken literature, Miss Martha Warren -Beckwith, who has made by her edition of Haleole’s romance of -Laieikawai a valuable contribution to the knowledge of Polynesian -poetry and romance, states that the traditional Hawaiian romance -belongs to no isolated group but to the whole Polynesian area. “We -find,” she says, “the same story told in New Zealand and Hawaii, -scarcely changed, even in name.” Miss Beckwith thinks that the bulk of -Hawaiian romance consists of stories about the demi-gods—beings -descended from the gods, or adopted or endowed by them. These legendary -tales reflect actual Polynesian conditions—“Gods and men are, in fact, -to the Polynesian mind, one family under different forms, the gods -having superior control over certain phenomena, a control which they -can impart to their offspring on earth.... The supernatural blends with -the natural in exactly the same way as to the Polynesian mind gods -relate themselves to men, facts about one being regarded as, even -though removed to the heavens, quite as objective as those which belong -to the other, and being employed to explain social customs and physical -appearances in actual experience.” - -The bulk of the stories in the present volume are founded, then, on -Polynesian literature rather than on Polynesian folk-lore. They are -based on the compositions of men who were trained in the handling of -character and incident. There are stories in the volume that obviously -belong to folk-lore, however. The stories of the Me-ne-hu-ne, which are -not given in the Fornander Collection, but are taken from the work of -Mr. Thrum and Mr. Rice, are folk-lore, I believe. The stories of Ma-ui -the demi-god are folk-lore, too. The story of Hina coming from the land -under the sea, and the other story of her going to the moon and -becoming the woman in the moon, undoubtedly belong to Polynesian -folk-lore. - -I do not believe that the Polynesian language, with its sounds that -seem to belong to the forest and the sea, is going or that it has to -go. Indeed, there may be a Polynesian revival similar to the national -revivals which we have seen in European countries; the Polynesian, with -tragic exceptions in the case of the people of the Marquesas, is coming -back. He has turned the corner; our diseases no longer threaten his -very existence. And yet, although his language and parts of his culture -will probably remain for many generations, his children, if they are in -the American territory of Hawaii, and if they are to read the romances -of old Hawaii, will have to read them in English. For them, and for the -neo-Hawaiian children—the children of American, British, Portuguese, -Japanese, and Chinese parents, mixed or unmixed with Hawaiian -blood—these stories have been reshaped. I have had to condense, expand, -heighten, subdue, rearrange—in a word, I have had to retell the -stories, using the old romances as material for wonder-stories. The old -stories were not for children; they gave an image of life to kings and -soldiers, to courtiers and to ruling women. As in all stories not -originally intended for children, much has had to be suppressed in -retelling them for a youthful audience. - -And retelling them has meant that I have had to find a new form for the -stories. The form that I choose to give them is that of the European -folk-tale. - -In Hawaiian romance there is a feeling that is rare in any body of -popular European romance—a feeling for the beauty of nature, for -flowers and trees, the aspect of the clouds, the look of the sea, the -sight of mountains, for the beauty of the rainbow and the waterfall. -And part of the delight in retelling these stories is in recalling the -beauties of places that are beautifully named. To be true in any -measure to the originals these stories of my retelling should have in -them the rainbow and the waterfall, the volcano, the forest, the surf -as it foams over the reef of coral. In the hula or Hawaiian ballet, and -in the poetry that is related to the hula, there is, as Dr. Nathaniel -Emerson has observed, always an idyllic feeling. This idyllic feeling -pervades Hawaiian romance also. The scene of many of the stories, when -not laid in lands that are frankly mythical, is laid in an Hawaiian -Arcadia. And how memorable these lands are!—Ku-ai-he-lani, the Country -that Supports the Heavens, and Pali-uli, the easeful land that the gods -have since hidden. Who would not roam through these lands with those -who first told of them and who first heard of them—the gracious and -vivid children of Wakea and Papa? - - - PADRAIC COLUM. - - - - - - - - -THE BOY PU-NIA AND THE KING OF THE SHARKS. - - -On one side of the Island there lived a great shark: Kai-ale-ale he was -named; he was the King of the Sharks of that place, and he had ten -sharks under him. He lived near a cave that was filled with lobsters. -But no one dared to dive down, and go into that cave, and take lobsters -out of it, on account of Kai-ale-ale and the ten sharks he had under -him; they stayed around the cave night and day, and if a diver ventured -near they would bite him and devour him. - -There was a boy named Pu-nia, whose father had been killed by the -sharks. Now after his father had been killed, there was no one to catch -fish for Pu-nia and his mother; they had sweet potatoes to eat, but -they never had any fish to eat with them. Often Pu-nia heard his mother -say that she wished she had a fish or lobster to eat with the sweet -potatoes. He made up his mind that they should have lobsters. - -He came above the cave where the lobsters were. Looking down he saw the -sharks—Kai-ale-ale and his ten sharks; they were all asleep. While he -was watching them, they wakened up. Pu-nia pretended that he did not -know that the sharks had wakened. He spoke loudly so that they would -hear him, and he said: “Here am I, Pu-nia, and I am going into the cave -to get lobsters for myself and my mother. That great shark, -Kai-ale-ale, is asleep now, and I can dive to the point over there, and -then go into the cave; I will take two lobsters in my hands, and my -mother and I will have something to eat with our sweet potatoes.” So -Pu-nia said, speaking loudly and pretending that he thought the sharks -were still asleep. - -Said Kai-ale-ale, speaking softly to the other sharks: “Let us rush to -the place where Pu-nia dives, and let us devour him as we devoured his -father.” But Pu-nia was a very cunning boy and not at all the sort that -could be caught by the stupid sharks. He had a stone upon his hand -while he was speaking, and he flung it towards the point that he said -he was going to dive to. Just as soon as the stone struck the water the -sharks made a rush to the place, leaving the cave of the lobsters -unguarded. Then Pu-nia dived. He went into the cave, took two lobsters -in his hands, and came up on the place that he had spoken from before. - -He shouted down to the sharks: “Here is Pu-nia, and he has come back -safely. He has two lobsters, and he and his mother have something to -live on. It was the first shark, the second shark, the third shark, the -fourth shark, the fifth shark, the sixth shark, the seventh shark, the -eighth shark, the ninth shark, the tenth shark—it was the tenth shark, -the one with the thin tail, that showed Pu-nia what to do.” - -When the King of the Sharks, Kai-ale-ale, heard this from Pu-nia, he -ordered all the sharks to come together and stay in a row. He counted -them, and there were ten of them, and the tenth one had a thin tail. -“So it was you, Thin Tail,” he said, “that told the boy Pu-nia what to -do. You shall die.” Then, according to the orders of Kai-ale-ale, the -thin-tailed shark was killed. Pu-nia called out to them, “You have -killed one of your own kind.” With the two lobsters in his hands, he -went back to his mother’s. - -Pu-nia and his mother now had something to eat with their sweet -potatoes. And when the lobsters were all eaten, Pu-nia went back to the -place above the cave. He called out, the same as he had done the first -time: “I can dive to the place over there and then slip into the cave, -for the sharks are all asleep; I can get two lobsters for myself and my -mother, so that we’ll have something to eat with our sweet potatoes.” -Then he threw down a stone and made ready to dive to another point. - -When the stone struck the water the sharks rushed over, leaving the -cave unguarded. Then Pu-nia dived down and went into the cave. He took -two lobsters in his hands and got back to the top of the water, and -when he got to the place that he had spoken from before, he shouted -down to the sharks: “It was the first shark, the second shark, the -third shark, the fourth shark, the fifth shark, the sixth shark, the -seventh shark, the eighth shark, the ninth shark—it was the ninth -shark, the one with the big stomach, that told Pu-nia what to do.” - -Then the King of the Sharks, Kai-ale-ale, ordered the sharks to get -into a line. He counted them, and he found that the ninth shark had a -big stomach. “So it was you that told Pu-nia what to do,” he said; and -he ordered the big-stomached shark to be killed. After that Pu-nia went -home with his two lobsters, and he and his mother had something to eat -with their sweet potatoes. - -Pu-nia continued to do this. He would deceive the sharks by throwing a -stone to the place that he said he was going to dive to; when he got -the sharks away from the cave, he would dive down, slip in, and take -two lobsters in his hands. And always, when he got to the top of the -water, he would name a shark. “The first shark, the second shark, the -third shark—the shark with the little eye, the shark with the grey spot -on him—told Pu-nia what to do,” he would say; and each time he would -get one of the sharks killed. He kept on doing this until only one of -the sharks was left; this one was Kai-ale-ale, the King of the Sharks. - -After that, Pu-nia went into the forest; he hewed out two hard pieces -of wood, each about a yard long; then he took sticks for lighting a -fire—the au-li-ma to rub with, and the au-na-ki to rub on; he got -charcoal to burn as a fire, and he got food. He put all into a bag, and -he carried the bag down to the beach. He came above the cave that -Kai-ale-ale was watching, and he said, speaking in a loud voice: “If I -dive now, and if Kai-ale-ale bites me, my blood will come to the top of -the water, and my mother will see the blood and will bring me back to -life again. But if I dive down and Kai-ale-ale takes me into his mouth -whole, I shall die and never come back to life again.” Kai-ale-ale was -listening, of course. He said to himself: “No, I will not bite you, you -cunning boy; I will take you into my mouth and swallow you whole, and -then you will never come back to life again. I shall open my mouth wide -enough to take you in. Yes, indeed, this time I will get you.” - -Pu-nia dived, holding his bag. Kai-ale-ale opened his mouth wide and -got Pu-nia into it. But as soon as the boy got within, he opened his -bag and took out the two pieces of wood which he had hewn out in the -forest. He put them between the jaws of the shark so that Kai-ale-ale -was not able to close his jaws. With his mouth held open, Kai-ale-ale -went dashing through the water. - -Pu-nia was now inside the big shark; he took the fire-sticks out of his -bag and rubbed them together, making a fire. He kindled the charcoal -that he had brought, and he cooked his food at the fire that he had -made. With the fire in his insides, the shark could not keep still; he -went dashing here and there through the ocean. - -At last the shark came near the Island of Hawaii again. “If he brings -me near the breakers, I am saved,” said Pu-nia, speaking aloud; “but if -he takes me to the sand near where the grass grows, I shall die; I -cannot be saved.” Kai-ale-ale, when he heard Pu-nia say this, said to -himself: “I will not take him near the breakers; I will take him where -the dry sand is, near the grass.” Saying this, he dashed in from the -ocean and up to where the shrubs grew on the shore. No shark had ever -gone there before; and when Kai-ale-ale got there, he could not get -back again. - -Then Pu-nia came out of the shark. He shouted out, “Kai-ale-ale, -Kai-ale-ale, the King of the Sharks, has come to visit us.” And the -people, hearing about their enemy Kai-ale-ale, came down to the shore -with their spears and their knives and killed him. And that was the end -of the ugly and wicked King of the Sharks. - -Every day after that, Pu-nia was able to go down into the cave and get -lobsters for himself and his mother. And all the people rejoiced when -they knew that the eleven sharks that guarded the cave had been got rid -of by the boy Pu-nia. - - - - - - - - -THE SEVEN GREAT DEEDS OF MA-UI. - - -There is no hero who is more famous than Ma-ui. In all the Islands of -the Great Ocean, from Kahiki-mo-e to Hawaii nei, his name and his deeds -are spoken of. His deeds were many, but seven of them were very great, -and it is about those seven great deeds that I shall tell you. - - - - -HOW MA-UI WON A PLACE FOR HIMSELF IN THE HOUSE. - -When Ma-ui, the last of her five sons, was born, his mother thought she -would have no food for him. So she took him down to the shore of the -sea, she cut off her hair and tied it around him, and she gave him to -the waves. But Ma-ui was not drowned in the sea: first of all the -jelly-fish came; it folded him in its softness, and it kept him warm -while he floated on. And then the God of the Sea found the child and -took charge of him: he brought him to his house and warmed and -cherished him, and little Ma-ui grew up in the land where lived the God -of the Sea. - -But while he was still a boy he went back to his mother’s country. He -saw his mother and his four brothers, and he followed them into a -house; it was a house that all the people of the country were going -into. He sat there with his brothers. And when his mother called her -children to take them home, she found this strange child with them. She -did not know him, and she would not take him with the rest of the -children. But Ma-ui followed them. And when his four brothers came out -of their own house they found him there, and he played with them. At -first they played hide-and-seek, but then they made themselves spears -from canes and began throwing the spears at the house. - -The slight spears did not go through the thatch of grass that was at -the outside of the house. And then Ma-ui made a charm over the cane -that was his spear—a charm that toughened it and made it heavy. He -flung it again, and a great hole was made in the grass-thatch of the -house. His mother came out to chastise the boy and drive him away. But -when she stood at the door and saw him standing there so angry, and saw -how he was able to break down the house with the throws of his spear, -she knew in him the great power that his father had, and she called to -him to come into the house. He would not come in until she had laid her -hands upon him. When she did this his brothers were jealous that their -mother made so much of this strange boy, and they did not want to have -him with them. It was then that the elder brother spoke and said, -“Never mind; let him be with us and be our dear brother.” And then they -all asked him to come into the house. - -The door-posts, Short Post and Tall Post, that had been put there to -guard the house, would not let him come in. Then Ma-ui lifted up his -spear, and he threw it at Tall Post and overthrew him. He threw his -spear again and overthrew Short Post. And after that he went into his -mother’s house and was with his brothers. The overthrowing of the two -posts that guarded the house was the first of the great deeds of Ma-ui. - -In those days, say the people who know the stories of the old times, -the birds were not seen by the men and women of the Islands. They flew -around the houses, and the flutter of their wings was heard, and the -stirring of the branches and the leaves as they were lit upon. Then -there would be music. But the people who had never seen the birds -thought that this was music made by gods who wanted to remain unseen by -the people. Ma-ui could see the birds; he rejoiced in their brilliant -colors, and when he called to them they would come and rest upon the -branches around the place where he was; there they would sing their -happiest songs to him. - -There was a visitor who came from another land to the country that -Ma-ui lived in. He boasted of all the wonderful things that were in his -country, and it seemed to the people of Ma-ui’s land that they had -nothing that was fine or that could be spoken about. Then Ma-ui called -to the birds. They came and they made music on every side. The visitor -who had boasted so much was made to wonder, and he said that there was -nothing in his country that was so marvellous as the music made by -Ma-ui’s friends, the birds. - -Then, that they might be honored by all, Ma-ui said a charm by which -the birds came to be seen by men—the red birds, the i-i-wi and the -aha-hani, and the yellow birds, the o-o and the mamo, and all the other -bright birds. The delight of seeing them was equal to the delight of -hearing the music that they made. Ever afterwards the birds were seen -and heard, and the people all rejoiced in them. This Ma-ui did when he -was still a boy growing up with his brothers and with his sister in his -mother’s house. But this is not counted amongst the great deeds of -Ma-ui the hero. - - - - -HOW MA-UI LIFTED UP THE SKY. - -Then he lifted up the sky to where it is now. This was the second of -Ma-ui’s great deeds. - -When he was growing up in his mother’s house the sky was so low that -the trees touched it and had their leaves flattened out. Men and women -burned with the heat because the sky was so near to them. The clouds -were so close that there was much darkness on the earth. Something had -to be done about it, and Ma-ui made up his mind that he would lift up -the sky. - -Somewhere he got a mark tattooed on his arm that was a magic mark and -that gave him great strength. Then he went to lift up the sky. And from -some woman he got a drink that made his strength greater. “Give me to -drink out of your gourd,” he said, “and I will push up the sky.” The -woman gave him her gourd to drink from. Then Ma-ui pushed at the sky. -He lifted it high, to where the trees have their tops now. He pushed at -it again, and he put it where the mountains have their tops now. And -then he pushed it to where it rests, on the tops of the highest -mountains. - -Then the men and women were able to walk about all over the earth, and -they had light now and clear air. The trees grew higher and higher, and -they grew more and more fruit. But even to this day their leaves are -flattened out: it is from the time when their leaves were flattened -against the sky. - -When the sky was lifted up Ma-ui went and made a kite for himself. From -his mother he got the largest and strongest piece of tapa-cloth she had -ever made, and he formed it into a kite with a frame and cross-sticks -of hau wood. The tail of the kite was fifteen fathoms long, and he got -a line of olona vine for it that was twenty times forty fathoms in -length. He started the kite. But it rose very slowly; the wind barely -held it up. - -Then the people said: “Look at Ma-ui! He lifted the sky up, and now he -can’t fly a kite.” Ma-ui was made angry when he heard them say this: he -drew the kite this way and that way, but still he was not able to make -it rise up. He cried out his incantation— - - - “Strong wind, come; - Soft wind, come”— - - -but still the kite would not rise. - -Then he remembered that in the Valley of Wai-pio there was a wizard who -had control of the winds. Over the mountains and down into the valley -Ma-ui went. He saw the calabash that the wizard kept the winds in, and -he asked him to loose them and direct them to blow along the river to -the place where he was going to fly his kite. Then Ma-ui went back. He -stood with his feet upon the rocks along the bank of the Wai-lu-ku -River; he stood there braced to hold his kite, and where he stood are -the marks of his feet to this day. He called out: - - - “O winds, winds of Wai-pio, - Come from the calabash—‘the Calabash of perpetual winds.’ - O wind, O wind of Hilo, - Come quickly; come with power.” - - -The call that Ma-ui gave went across the mountains and down into the -valley of Wai-pio. No sooner did he hear it than the wizard opened his -calabash. The winds rushed out. They went into the bay of Hilo, and -they dashed themselves against the water. The call of Ma-ui came to -them: - - - “O winds, winds of Hilo, - Hurry, hurry and come to me.” - - -The winds turned from the sea. They rushed along the river. They came -to where Ma-ui stood, and then they saw the great, strange bird that he -held. - -They wanted to fall upon that bird and dash it up against the sky. But -the great kite was strong. The winds flung it up and flung it this way -and that way. But they could not carry it off or dash it against the -sky as they wanted to. - -Ma-ui rejoiced. How grand it was to hold a kite that the winds strove -to tear away! He called out again: - - - “O winds, O winds of Hilo, - Come to the mountains, come.” - - -Then came the west wind that had been dashing up waves in the bay of -Hilo. It joined itself with the north wind and the east wind, the two -winds that had been tearing and pushing at Ma-ui’s kite. Now, although -the kite was made of the strongest tapa, and although it had been -strengthened in every cunning way that Ma-ui knew, it was flung here -and flung there. Ma-ui let his line out; the kite was borne up and up -and above the mountains. And now he cried out to the kite that he had -made: - - - “Climb up, climb up - To the highest level of the heavens, - To all the sides of the heavens. - Climb thou to thy ancestor, - To the sacred bird in the heavens.” - - -The three winds joined together, and now they made a fiercer attack -upon Ma-ui’s kite. The winds tore and tossed it. Then the line broke in -Ma-ui’s hands. - -The winds flung the kite across the mountains. And then, to punish it -for having dared to face the heavens, they rammed it down into the -volcano, and stirred up the fires against it. - -Then Ma-ui made for himself another kite. He flew it, and rejoiced in -the flying of it, and all who saw him wondered at how high his kite -went and how gracefully it bore itself in the heavens. But never again -did he call upon the great winds to help him in his sport. Sometimes he -would fasten his line to the black stones in the bed of the Wai-lu-ku -River, and he would let the kite soar upward and range here and there. -He knew by watching his soaring kite whether it would be dry and -pleasant weather, and he showed his neighbors how they might know it. -“Eh, neighbor,” one would say to another, “it is going to be dry -weather; look how Ma-ui’s kite keeps in the sky.” They knew that they -could go to the fields to work and spread out their tapa to dry, for as -long as the kite soared the rain would not fall. - -Ma-ui learned what a strong pull the fierce winds had. He used to bring -his kite with him when he went out on the ocean in his canoe. He would -let it free; then, fastening his line to the canoe, he would let the -wind that pulled the kite pull him along. By flying his kite he learned -how to go more swiftly over the ocean in his canoe, and how to make -further voyages than ever a man made before. - -Nevertheless, his kite-flying is not counted amongst the great deeds of -Ma-ui. - - - - -HOW MA-UI FISHED UP THE GREAT ISLAND. - -Now, although Ma-ui had done deeds as great as these, he was not -thought so very much of in his own house. His brothers complained that -when he went fishing with them he caught no fish, or, if he drew one -up, it was a fish that had been taken on a hook belonging to one of -them, and that Ma-ui had managed to get tangled on to his own line. And -yet Ma-ui had invented many things that his brothers made use of. At -first they had spears with smooth heads on them: if they struck a bird, -the bird was often able to flutter away, drawing from the spear-head -that had pierced a wing. And if they struck through a fish, the fish -was often able to wriggle away. Then Ma-ui put barbs upon his spear, -and his spear-head held the birds and the fish. His brothers copied the -spear-head that he made, and after that they were able to kill and -secure more birds and fish than ever before. - -He made many things that they copied, and yet his brothers thought him -a lazy and a shiftless fellow, and they made their mother think the -same about him. They were the better fishermen—that was true; indeed, -if there were no one but Ma-ui to go fishing, Hina-of-the-Fire, his -mother, and Hina-of-the-Sea, his sister, would often go hungry. - -At last Ma-ui made up his mind to do some wonderful fishing; he might -not be able to catch the fine fish that his brothers desired—the u-lua -and the pi-mo-e—but he would take up something from the bottom of the -sea that would make his brothers forget that he was the lazy and the -shiftless one. - -He had to make many plans and go on many adventures before he was ready -for this great fishing. First he had to get a fish-hook that was -different from any fish-hook that had ever been in the world before. In -those days fish-hooks were made out of bones—there was nothing else to -make fish-hooks out of—and Ma-ui would have to get a wonderful bone to -form into a hook. He went down into the underworld to get that bone. - -He went to where his ancestress was. On one side she was dead and on -the other side she was a living woman. From the side of her that was -dead Ma-ui took a bone—her jaw-bone—and out of this bone he made his -fish-hook. There was never a fish-hook like it in the world before, and -it was called “Ma-nai-i-ka-lani,” meaning “Made fast to the heavens.” -He told no one about the wonderful fish-hook he had made for himself. - -He had to get a different bait from any bait that had ever been used in -the world before. His mother had sacred birds, the alae, and he asked -her to give him one of them for bait. She gave him one of her birds. - -Then Ma-ui, with his bait and his hook hidden, and with a line that he -had made from the strongest olona vines, went down to his brothers’ -canoe. “Here is Ma-ui,” they said when they saw him, “here is Ma-ui, -the lazy and the shiftless, and we have sworn that we will never let -him come again with us in our canoe.” They pushed out when they saw him -coming; they paddled away, although he begged them to take him with -them. - -He waited on the beach. His brothers came back, and they had to tell -him that they had caught no fish. Then he begged them to go back to sea -again and to let him go this time in their canoe. They let him in, and -they paddled off. “Farther and farther out, my brothers,” said Ma-ui; -“out there is where the u-lua and the pi-mo-e are.” They paddled far -out. They let down their lines, but they caught no fish. “Where are the -u-lua and the pi-mo-e that you spoke of?” said his brothers to him. -Still he told them to go farther and farther out. At last they got -tired with paddling, and they wanted to go back. - -Then Ma-ui put a sail upon the canoe. Farther and farther out into the -ocean they went. One of the brothers let down a line, and a great fish -drew on it. They pulled. But what came out of the depths was a shark. -They cut the line and let the shark away. The brothers were very tired -now. “Oh, Ma-ui,” they said, “as ever, thou art lazy and shiftless. -Thou hast brought us out all this way, and thou wilt do nothing to help -us. Thou hast let down no line in all the sea we have crossed.” - -It was then that Ma-ui let down his line with the magic hook upon it, -the hook that was baited with the struggling alae bird. Down, down went -the hook that was named “Ma-nai-i-ka-lani,” “Made fast to the heavens.” -Down through the waters the hook and the bait went. Ka-uni ho-kahi, Old -One Tooth, who holds fast the land to the bottom of the sea, was there. -When the sacred bird came near him he took it in his mouth. And the -magic hook that Ma-ui had made held fast in his jaws. - -Ma-ui felt the pull upon the line. He fastened the line to the canoe, -and he bade his brothers paddle their hardest, for now the great fish -was caught. He dipped his own paddle into the sea, and he made the -canoe dash on. - -The brothers felt a great weight grow behind the canoe. But still they -paddled on and on. Weighty and more weighty became the catch; harder -and harder it became to pull it along. As they struggled on Ma-ui -chanted a magic chant, and the weight came with them. - - - “O Island, O great Island, - O Island, O great Island! - Why art thou - Sulkily biting, biting below? - Beneath the earth - The power is felt, - The foam is seen: - Come, - O thou loved grandchild - Of Kanaloa.” - - -On and on the canoe went, and heavier and heavier grew what was behind -them. At last one of the brothers looked back. At what he saw he -screamed out in affright. For there, rising behind them, a whole land -was rising up, with mountains upon it. The brother dropped his paddle -when he saw what had been fished up; as he dropped his paddle the line -that was fastened to the jaws of old Ka-uni ho-kahi broke. - -What Ma-ui fished up would have been a mainland, only that his -brother’s paddle dropped and the line broke. Then only an island came -up out of the water. If more land had come up, all the Islands that we -know would have been joined in one. - -There are people who say that his sister, Hina-of-the-Sea, was near at -the time of that great fishing. They say she came floating out on a -calabash. When Ma-ui let down the magic hook with their mother’s sacred -bird upon it, Hina-of-the-Sea dived down and put the hook into the -mouth of Old One Tooth, and then pulled at the line to let Ma-ui know -that the hook was in his jaws. Some people say this, and it may be the -truth. But whether or not, every one, on every Island in the Great -Ocean, from Kahiki-mo-e to Hawaii nei, knows that Ma-ui fished up a -great Island for men to live on. And this fishing was the third of -Ma-ui’s great deeds. - - - - -HOW MA-UI SNARED THE SUN AND MADE HIM GO MORE SLOWLY ACROSS THE -HEAVENS. - -The Sky had been lifted up, and another great Island had come from the -grip of Old One Tooth and was above the waters. The world was better -now for men and women to live in. But still there were miseries in it, -and the greatest of these miseries was on account of the heedlessness -of the Sun. - -For the Sun in those days made his way too quickly across the world. He -hurried so that little of his heat got to the plants and the fruits, -and it took years and years for them to ripen. The farmers working on -their patches would not have time in the light of a day to put down -their crop into the ground, so quickly the Sun would rush across the -heavens, and the fishermen would barely have time to launch their -canoes and get to the fishing grounds when the darkness would come on. -And the women’s tasks were never finished. It was theirs to make the -tapa-cloth: a woman would begin at one end of the board to beat the -bark with her four-sided mallet, and she would be only at the middle of -the board by the time the sunset came. When she was ready to go on with -the work next day, the Sun would be already halfway across the heavens. - -Ma-ui, when he was a child, used to watch his mother making tapa, and -as he grew up he pitied her more and more because of all the toil and -trouble that she had. She would break the branches from the ma-ma-ka -trees and from the wau-ke trees and soak them in water until their bark -was easily taken off. Then she would take off the outer bark, leaving -the inner bark to be worked upon. She would take the bundles of the wet -inner bark and lay them on the tapa-board and begin pounding them with -little clubs. And then she would use her four-sided mallet and beat all -the soft stuff into little thin sheets. Then she would paste the little -sheets together, making large cloths. This was tapa—the tapa that it -was every woman’s business in those days to make. As soon as morning -reddened the clouds Ma-ui’s mother, Hina-of-the-Fire, would begin her -task: she would begin beating the softened bark at one end of the -board, and she would be only in the middle of the board when the sunset -came. And when she managed to get the tapa made she could never get it -dried in a single day, so quickly the Sun made his way across the -heavens. Ma-ui pitied his mother because of her unceasing toil. - -He greatly blamed the Sun for his inconsiderateness of the people of -the world. He took to watching the Sun. He began to know the path by -which the Sun came over the great mountain Ha-le-a-ka-la (but in those -days it was not called Ha-le-a-ka-la, the House of the Sun, but -A-hele-a-ka-la, The Rays of the Sun). Through a great chasm in the side -of this mountain the Sun used to come. - -He told his mother that he was going to do something to make the Sun -have more considerateness for the men and women of the world. “You will -not be able to make him do anything about it,” she said; “the Sun -always went swiftly, and he will always go swiftly.” But Ma-ui said -that he would find a way to make the Sun remember that there were -people in the world and that they were not at all pleased with the way -he was going on. - -Then his mother said: “If you are going to force the Sun to go more -slowly you must prepare yourself for a great battle, for the Sun is a -great creature, and he has much energy. Go to your grandmother who -lives on the side of Ha-le-a-ka-la,” said she (but it was called -A-hele-a-ka-la then), “and beg her to give you her counsel, and also to -give you a weapon to battle with the Sun.” - -So Ma-ui went to his grandmother who lived on the side of the great -mountain. Ma-ui’s grandmother was the one who cooked the bananas that -the Sun ate as he came through the great chasm in the mountain. “You -must go to the place where there is a large wili-wili tree growing,” -said his mother. “There the Sun stops to eat the bananas that your -grandmother cooks for him. Stay until the rooster that watches beside -the wili-wili tree crows three times. Your grandmother will come out -then with a bunch of bananas. When she lays them down, do you take them -up. She will bring another bunch out, and do you take that up too. When -all her bananas are gone she will search for the one who took them. -Then do you show yourself to her. Tell her that you are Ma-ui and that -you belong to Hina-of-the-Fire.” - -So Ma-ui went up the side of the mountain that is now called -He-le-a-ka-la, but that then was called A-hele-a-ka-la, The Rays of the -Sun. He came to where a great wili-wili tree was growing. There he -waited. The rooster crew three times, and then an old woman came out -with a bunch of bananas. He knew that this was his grandmother. She -laid the bananas down to cook them, and as she did so Ma-ui snatched -them away. When she went to pick up the bunch she cried out, “Where are -the bananas that I have to cook for my Lord, the Sun?” She went within -and got another bunch, and this one, too, Ma-ui snatched away. This he -did until the last bunch of bananas that his grandmother had was taken. - -She was nearly blind, so she could not find him with her eyes. She -sniffed around, and at last she got the smell of a man. “Who are you?” -she said. “I am Ma-ui, and I belong to Hina-of-the-Fire,” said he. -“What have you come for?” asked his grandmother. “I have come to -chastise the Sun and to make him go more slowly across the heavens. He -goes so fast now that my mother cannot dry the tapa that she takes all -the days of the year to beat out.” - -The old woman considered all that Ma-ui said to her. She knew that he -was a hero born, because the birds sang, the pebbles rumbled, the grass -withered, the smoke hung low, the rainbow appeared, the thunder was -heard, the hairless dogs were seen, and even the ants in the grass were -heard to sing in his praise. She decided to give help to him. And she -told him what preparations he was to make for his battle with the Sun. - -First of all he was to get sixteen of the strongest ropes that ever -were made. So as to be sure they were the strongest, he was to knit -them himself. And he was to make nooses for them out of the hair of the -head of his sister, Hina-of-the-Sea. When the ropes were ready he was -to come back to her, and she would show him what else he had to do. - -Ma-ui made the sixteen ropes; he made them out of the strongest fibre, -and his sister, Hina-of-the-Sea, gave him the hair of her head to make -into nooses. Then, with the ropes and the nooses upon them, Ma-ui went -back to his grandmother. She told him where to set the nooses, and she -gave him a magic stone axe with which to do battle with the Sun. - -He set the nooses as snares for the Sun, and he dug a hole beside the -roots of the wili-wili tree, and in that hole he hid himself. Soon the -first ray of light, the first leg of the Sun, came over the mountain -wall. It was caught in one of the nooses that Ma-ui had set. One by one -the legs of the Sun came over the rim, and one by one they were caught -in the nooses. One leg was left hanging down the side of the mountain: -it was hard for the Sun to move that leg. At last this last leg came -slowly over the edge of the mountain and was caught in the snare. Then -Ma-ui gathered up the ropes and tied them to the great wili-wili tree. - -When the Sun saw that his sixteen legs were held fast by the nooses -that Ma-ui had set he tried to back down the mountain-side and into the -sea again. But the ropes held him, and the wili-wili tree stood the -drag of the ropes. The Sun could not get away. Then he turned all his -burning strength upon Ma-ui. They fought. The man began to strike at -the Sun with his magic axe of stone; and never before did the Sun get -such a beating. “Give me my life,” said the Sun. “I will give you your -life,” said Ma-ui, “if you promise to go slowly across the heavens.” At -last the Sun promised to do what Ma-ui asked him. - -They entered into an agreement with each other, Ma-ui and the Sun. -There should be longer days, the Sun making his course slower. But -every six months, in the winter, the Sun might go as fast as he had -been in the habit of going. Then Ma-ui let the Sun out of the snares -which he had set for him. But, lest he should ever forget the agreement -he had made and take to travelling swiftly again, Ma-ui left all the -ropes and the nooses on the side of Ha-le-a-ka-la, so that he might see -them every day that he came across the rim of the mountain. And the -mountain was not called A-hele-a-ka-la, the Rays of the Sun, any more, -but Ha-le-a-ka-la, the House of the Sun. After that came the saying of -the people, “Long shall be the daily journey of the Sun, and he shall -give light for all the peoples’ toil.” And Ma-ui’s mother, -Hina-of-the-Fire, learned that she could pound on the tapa-board until -she was tired, and the farmers could plant and take care of their -crops, and the fishermen could go out to the deep sea and fish and come -back, and the fruits and the plants got heat enough to make them ripen -in their season. - - - - -HOW MA-UI WON FIRE FOR MEN. - -Ma-ui’s mother must have known about fire and the use of fire; else why -should she have been called Hina-of-the-Fire, and how did it come that -her birds, the alae, knew where fire was hidden and how to make it -blaze up? Hina must have known about fire. But her son had to search -and search for fire. The people who lived in houses on the Islands did -not know of it: they had to eat raw roots and raw fish, and they had to -suffer the cold. It was for them that Ma-ui wanted to get fire; it was -for them that he went down to the lower world, and that he went -searching through the upper world for it. - -In Kahiki-mo-e they have a tale about Ma-ui that the Hawaiians do not -know. There they tell how he went down to the lower world and sought -out his great-great-grandmother, Ma-hui’a. She was glad to see Ma-ui, -of whom she had heard in the lower world; and when he asked her to give -him fire to take to the upper world, she plucked a nail off her finger -and gave it to him. - -In this nail, fire burned. Ma-ui went to the upper world with it. But -in crossing a stream of water he let the nail drop into it. And so he -lost the fire that his great-great-grandmother had given him. - -He went back to her again. And again Ma-hui’a plucked off a finger-nail -and gave it to him. But when he went to the upper world and went to -cross the stream, he let this burning nail also drop into the water. -Again he went back, and his great-great-grandmother plucked off a third -nail for him. And this went on, Ma-ui letting the nails fall into the -water, and Ma-hui’a giving him the nails off her fingers, until at last -all the nails of all her fingers were given to him. - -But still he went on letting the burning nails fall into the water that -he had to cross, and at last the nails of his great-great-grandmother’s -toes as well as the nails of her fingers were given to him—all but the -nail on the last of her toes. Ma-ui went back to her to get this last -nail. Then Ma-hui’a became blazing angry; she plucked the nail off, but -instead of giving it to him she flung it upon the ground. - -Fire poured out of the nail and took hold on everything. Ma-ui ran to -the upper world, and Ma-hui’a in her anger ran after him. He dashed -into the water. But now the forests were blazing, and the earth was -burning, and the water was boiling. Ma-ui ran on, and Ma-hui’a ran -behind him. As he ran he chanted a magic incantation for rain to come, -so that the burning might be put out: - - - “To the roaring thunder; - To the great rain—the long rain; - To the drizzling rain—the small rain; - To the rain pattering on the leaves. - These are the storms, the storms - Cause them to fall; - To pour in torrents.” - - -The rain came on—the long rain, the small rain, the rain that patters -on the leaves; storms came, and rain in torrents. The fire that raged -in the forests and burned on the ground was drowned out. And Ma-hui’a, -who had followed him, was nearly-drowned by the torrents of rain. She -saw her fire, all the fire that was in the lower and in the upper -worlds, being quenched by the rain. - -She gathered up what fragments of fire she could, and she hid them in -barks of different trees so that the rain could not get at them and -quench them. Ma-ui’s mother must have known where his -great-great-grandmother hid the fire. If she did not, her sacred birds, -the alae, knew it. They were able to take the barks of the trees and, -by rubbing them together, to bring out fire. - -In Hawaii they tell how Ma-ui and his brothers used to go out fishing -every day, and how, as soon as they got far out to sea, they would see -smoke rising on the mountain-side. “Behold,” they would say, “there is -a fire. Whose can it be?” “Let us hasten to the shore and cook our fish -at that fire,” another would say. - -So, with the fish that they had caught, Ma-ui and his brothers would -hasten to the shore. The swiftest of them would run up the -mountain-side. But when he would get to where the smoke had been, all -he would see would be the alae scratching clay over burnt-out sticks. -The alae would leave the place where they had been seen, and Ma-ui -would follow them from place to place, hoping to catch them while their -fire was lighted. - -He would send his brothers off fishing, and he himself would watch for -the smoke from the fire that the alae would kindle. But they would -kindle no fire on the days that he did not go out in the canoe with his -brothers. “We cannot have our cooked bananas to-day,” the old bird -would say to the young birds, “for the swift son of Hina is somewhere -near, and he would come upon us before we put out our fire. And -remember that the guardian of the fire told us never to show a man -where it is hidden or how it is taken out of its hiding place.” - -Then Ma-ui understood that the bird watched for his going and that they -made no fire until they saw him out at sea in his canoe. He knew that -they counted the men that went out, and that if he was not in the -number they did no cooking that day. Every time he went in the canoe he -saw smoke rising on the mountain-side. - -Then Ma-ui thought of a trick to play on them—on the stingy alae that -would not give fire, but left men to eat raw roots and raw fish. He -rolled up a piece of tapa, and he put it into the canoe, making it like -a man. Then he hid near the shore. The brothers went fishing, and the -birds counted the figures in the canoe. “The swift son of Hina has gone -fishing: we can have cooked bananas to-day.” “Make the fire, make the -fire, until we cook our bananas,” said the young alae. - -So they gathered the wood together, and they rubbed the barks, and they -made the fire. The smoke rose up from it, and swift Ma-ui ran up the -mountain-side. He came upon the flock of birds just as the old one was -dashing water upon the embers. He caught her by the neck and held her. - -“I will kill you,” he said, “for hiding fire from men.” - -“If you kill me,” said the old alae, “there will be no one to show you -how to get fire.” - -“Show me how to get fire,” said Ma-ui, “and I will let you go.” - -The cunning alae tried to deceive Ma-ui. She thought she would get him -off his guard, that he would let go of her, and that she could fly -away. “Go to the reeds and rub them together, and you will get fire,” -she said. - -Ma-ui went to the reeds and rubbed them together. But still he held the -bird by the neck. Nothing came out of the reeds but moisture. He -squeezed her neck. “If you kill me, there will be no one to tell you -where to get fire,” said the cunning bird, still hoping to get him off -his guard. “Go to the taro leaves and rub them together, and you will -get fire.” - -Ma-ui held to the bird’s neck. He went to the taro leaves and rubbed -them together, but no fire came. He squeezed her neck harder. The bird -was nearly dead now. But still she tried to deceive the man. “Go to the -banana stumps and rub them together, and you will get fire,” she said. - -He went to the banana stumps and rubbed them together. But still no -fire came. Then he gave the bird a squeeze that brought her near her -death. She showed him then the trees to go to—the hau tree and the -sandalwood tree. He took the barks of the trees and rubbed them, and -they gave fire. And the sweet-smelling sandalwood he called -“ili-aha”—that is, “fire bark”—because fire came most easily from the -bark of that tree. With sticks from these trees Ma-ui went to men. He -showed them how to get fire by rubbing them together. And never -afterwards had men to eat fish raw and roots raw. They could always -have fire now. - -The first stick he lighted he rubbed on the head of the bird that -showed him at last where the fire was hidden. And that is the reason -why the alae, the mud-hen, has a red streak on her head to this day. - - - - -HOW MA-UI OVERCAME KUNA LOA THE LONG EEL. - -Hina-of-the-Fire lived in a cave that the waters of the river streamed -over, a cave that always had a beautiful rainbow glimmering across it. -While her sons were away no enemy could come to Hina in this cave, for -the walls of it went up straight and smooth. And there at the opening -of the cave she used to sit, beating out her tapa in the long days that -came after Ma-ui had snared the Sun and had made him go more slowly -across the heavens. - -In the river below there was one who was an enemy to Hina. This was -Kuna Loa, the Long Eel. Once Kuna Loa had seen Hina on the bank of the -river, and he had wanted her to leave her cave and come to his abode. -But Hina-of-the-Fire would not go near the Long Eel. Then he had gone -to her, and he had lashed her with his tail, covering her with the -slime of the river. She told about the insults he had given her, and -Ma-ui drove the Long Eel up the river, where he took shelter in the -deep pools. Ma-ui broke down the banks of the deep pools with thrusts -of his spear, but Kuna Loa, the Long Eel, was still able to escape from -him. Now Ma-ui had gone away, and his mother, Hina-of-the-Fire, kept -within the cave, the smooth rock of which Kuna Loa could not climb. - -The Long Eel came down the river. He saw Hina sitting in the mouth of -the cave that had the rainbow glimmering across it, and he was filled -with rage and a wish to destroy her. He took a great rock and he put it -across the stream, filling it from bank to bank. Then he lashed about -in the water in his delight at the thought of what was going to happen -to Hina. - -She heard a deeper sound in the water than she had ever heard before as -she sat there. She looked down and she saw that the water was nearer to -the mouth of the cave than she had ever seen it before. Higher and -higher it came. And then Hina heard the voice of Kuna Loa rejoicing at -the destruction that was coming to her. He raised himself up in the -water and cried out to her: “Now your mighty son cannot help you. I -will drown you with the waters of the river before he comes back to -you, Hina.” - -And Hina-of-the-Fire cried “Alas, Alas,” as she watched the waters -mount up and up, for she knew that Ma-ui and her other sons were far -away, and that there was none to help her against Kuna Loa, the Long -Eel. But, even as she lamented, something was happening to aid Hina. -For Ma-ui had placed above her cave a cloud that served her—“Ao-opua,” -“The Warning Cloud.” Over the cave it rose now, giving itself a strange -shape: Ma-ui would see it and be sure to know by its sign that -something dire was happening in his mother’s cave. - -He was then on the mountain Ha-le-a-ka-la, the House of the Sun. He saw -the strangely shaped cloud hanging over her cave, and he knew that some -danger threatened his mother, Hina-of-the-Fire. He dashed down the side -of the mountain, bringing with him the magic axe that his grandmother -had given him for his battle with the Sun. He sprang into his canoe. -With two strokes of his paddle he crossed the channel and was at the -mouth of the Wai-lu-ku River. The bed of the river was empty of water, -and Ma-ui left his canoe on the stones and went up towards Hina’s cave. - -The water had mounted up and up and had gone into the cave, and was -spilling over Hina’s tapa-board. She was lamenting, and her heart was -broken with the thought that neither Ma-ui nor his brothers would come -until the river had drowned her in her cave. - -Ma-ui was then coming up the bed of the river. He saw the great stone -across the stream, and he heard Kuna Loa rejoicing over the destruction -that was coming to Hina in her cave. With one stroke of his axe he -broke the rock across. The water came through the break. He struck the -rocks and smashed them. The river flowed down once more, and Hina was -safe in her cave. - -Kuna Loa heard the crash of the axe on the rock, and he knew that Ma-ui -had come. He dashed up the stream to hide himself again in the deep -pools. Ma-ui showed his mother that she was safe, and then he went -following the Long Eel. - -Kuna Loa had gone into a deep pool. Ma-ui flung burning stones into the -water of that pool, making it boil up. Then Kuna Loa dashed into -another pool. From pool to pool Ma-ui chased him, making the pools boil -around him. (And there they boil to this day, although Kuna Loa is no -longer there.) At last the Eel found a cave in the bottom of one of the -pools, and he went and hid in it, and Ma-ui could not find him there, -nor could the hot stones that Ma-ui threw into the water, making it -boil, drive Kuna Loa out. - -Hina thought she was safe from the Long Eel after that. She thought -that his skin was so scalded by the boiling water that he had died in -his cave. Down the river bank for water she would go, and sometimes she -would stand on the bank all wreathed in flowers. - -But one day, as she was standing on the bank of the river, Kuna Loa -suddenly came up. Hina fled before him. The Eel was between her and her -cave, and she could not get back to her shelter. She fled through the -woods. And as she fled she shrieked out chants to Ma-ui: her chants -went through the woods, and along the side of the mountain, and across -the sea; they came at last up the side of Ha-le-a-ka-la, where her son -Ma-ui was. - -There were many people in the places that Hina fled through, but they -could do nothing to help her against the Long Eel. He came swiftly -after her. The people in the villages that they went through stood and -watched the woman and the Eel that pursued her. - -Where would she go now? The Long Eel was close behind her. Then Hina -saw a bread-fruit tree with great branches, and she climbed into it. -Kuna Loa wound himself around the tree and came after her. But the -branch that Hina was in was lifted up and up by the tree, and the Long -Eel could not come to her. - -And then Ma-ui came. He had dashed down the side of the mountain and -had crossed the channel with two strokes of his paddles and had hurried -along the track made by the Long Eel. Now he saw his mother in the -branch that kept mounting up, and he saw Kuna Loa winding himself up -after her. Ma-ui went into the tree. He struck the Eel a terrible blow -and brought him to the ground. Then he sprang down and cut his head -off. With other blows of his axe he cut the Eel all to pieces. He flung -the head and the tail of Kuna Loa into the sea. The head turned into -fish of many kinds, and the tail became the large conger eel of the -sea. Other parts of the body turned into sea monsters of different -kinds. And the blood of Kuna Loa, as it fell into the fresh water, -became the common eels. The fresh and the salt water eels came into the -world in this way, and Ma-ui, by killing the Long Eel, wrought the -sixth of his great deeds. - - - - -THE SEARCH THAT MA-UI’S BROTHER MADE FOR HIS SISTER HINA-OF-THE-SEA. - -Ma-ui had four brothers, and each of them was named Ma-ui. The doer of -the great deeds was known as “the skillful Ma-ui,” and the other four -brothers were called “the forgetful Ma-uis.” - -But there was one brother who should not have been called “forgetful.” -He was the eldest brother, Ma-ui Mua, and he was sometimes called -Lu-pe. He may have been forgetful about many things that the skillful -Ma-ui took account of, but he was not forgetful of his sister, of -Hina-of-the-Sea. - -His great and skillful brother had set Hina-of-the-Sea wandering. She -was married, and her husband often went on journeys with the skillful -Ma-ui. And once Ma-ui became angry with him because he ate the bait -that they had taken with them for fishing; he became angry with his -sister’s husband, and in his anger he uttered a spell over him, and -changed his form into the form of a dog. - -When Hina-of-the-Sea knew that her husband was lost to her she went -down to the shore and she chanted her own death-song: - - - “I weep, I call upon the steep billows of the sea, - And on him, the great, the ocean god; - The monsters, all now hidden, - To come and bury me, - Who am now wrapped in mourning. - Let the waves wear their mourning, too, - And sleep as sleeps the dead.” - - -And after she had chanted this, she threw herself into the sea. - -But the waves did not drown her. They carried her to a far land. There -were no people there; according to the ancient chant— - - - “The houses of Lima Loa stand, - But there are no people; - They are at Mana.” - - -The people were by the sea, and two who were fishermen found her. They -carried her to their hut, and when they had taken the sea-weed and the -sea-moss from her body they saw what a beautiful woman she was. They -brought her to their chief, and the chief took Hina-of-the-Sea for his -wife. - -But after a while he became forgetful of her. After another while he -abused her. She had a child now, but she was very lonely, for she was -in a far and a strange land. - - - “The houses of Lima Loa stand, - But there are no people; - They are at Mana.” - - -She was not forgotten, for Ma-ui Mua, her eldest brother, thought of -her. In Kahiki-mo-e they tell of his search for her, and they say that -when he heard of her casting herself into the sea, he took to his canoe -and went searching all over the sea for her. He found new Islands, -Islands that no one had ever been on before, and he went from Island to -Island, ever hoping to find Hina-of-the-Sea. Far, far he went, and he -found neither his sister nor any one who knew about her. - - - “The houses of Lima Loa stand, - But there are no people; - They are at Mana.” - - -And every day Hina-of-the-Sea would go down to the shore of the land -she was on, and she would call on her eldest brother: - - - “O Lu-pe! Come over! - Take me and my child!” - - -Now one day, as Hina cried out on the beach, there came a canoe towards -her. There was a man in the canoe; but Hina, hardly noticing him, still -cried to the waves and the winds: - - - “O Lu-pe! Come over! - Take me and my child!” - - -The man came up on the beach. He was worn with much travel, and he was -white and old-looking. He heard the cry that was sent to the waves and -the winds, and he cried back an answer: - - - “It is Lu-pe, yes, Lu-pe, - The eldest brother; - And I am here.” - - -He knew Hina-of-the-Sea. He took her and her child in his canoe, -rejoicing that his long search was over at last and that he had a -sister again. He took her and her child to one of the Islands which he -had discovered. - -And there Hina-of-the-Sea lived happily with her eldest brother, Ma-ui -Mua, and there her child grew up to manhood. The story of her eldest -brother’s search for Hina is not told in Hawaii nei, and one has to go -to Kahiki-mo-e to hear it. But in Hawaii nei they tell of a beautiful -land that Ma-ui the Skillful came to in search of some one. It is the -land, perhaps, that his brother and sister lived in—the beautiful land -that is called Moana-liha-i-ka-wao-ke-le. - - - - -HOW MA-UI STROVE TO WIN IMMORTALITY FOR MEN. - -Would you hear the seventh and last of great Ma-ui’s deeds? They do not -tell of this deed in Hawaii nei, but they tell of it in Kahiki-mo-e. -The last was the greatest of all Ma-ui’s deeds, for it was his -dangerous labor then to win the greatest boon for men—the boon of -everlasting life. - -He heard of the Goblin-goddess who is called Hina-nui-ke-po, Great -Hina-of-the-Night. It is she who brings death on all creatures. But if -one could take the heart out of her body and give it to all the -creatures of the earth to eat, they would live for ever, and death -would be no more in the world. - -They tell how the Moon bathes in the Waters of Life, and comes back to -the world with her life renewed. And once Ma-ui caught and held the -Moon. He said to her, “Let Death be short, and as you return with new -strength let it be that men shall come back from Death with new -strength.” But the Moon said to Ma-ui, “Rather let Death be long, so -that men may sigh and have sorrow. When a man dies, let him go into -darkness and become as earth, so that those whom he leaves behind may -weep and mourn for him.” But for all that the Moon said to Ma-ui, he -would not have it that men should go into the darkness for ever and -become as earth. The Moon showed him where Hina-of-the-Night had her -abode. He looked over to her Island and saw her. Her eyes shone through -the distance; he saw her great teeth that were like volcanic glass and -her mouth that was wide like the mouth of a fish; he saw her hair that -floated all around her like seaweed in the sea. - -He saw her and was afraid; even great Ma-ui was made afraid by the -Goblin-goddess, Great Hina-of-the-Night. But he remembered that he had -said that he would find a way of giving everlasting life to men and to -all creatures, and he thought and thought of how he could come to the -Goblin-goddess and take the heart out of her body. - -It was his task then to draw all creatures to him and to have them -promise him that they would help him against the Goblin-goddess. And -when at last he was ready to go against her the birds went with him. He -came to the Island where she was, Great Hina-of-the-Night. She was -sleeping, and all her guards were around her. Ma-ui passed through her -guards. He prepared to enter her terrible open mouth, and bring back -her heart to give to all the creatures of the earth. - -And at last he stood ready to go between the jaws that had the fearful -teeth that were sharp like volcanic glass. He stood there in the light -of a sun-setting, his body tall and fine and tattooed all over with the -histories of his great deeds. He stood there, and then he gave warning -to all the birds that none of them was to sing or to laugh until he was -outside her jaws again with the heart of the Goblin-goddess in his -hands. - -He went within the jaws of Great Hina-of-the-Night. He passed the -fearful teeth that were sharp like volcanic glass. He went down into -her stomach. And then he seized upon her heart. He came back again as -far as her jaws, and he saw the sky beyond them. - -Then a bird sang or a bird laughed—either the e-le-pa-io sang, or -Paka-kai the water-wagtail laughed—and the Goblin-goddess wakened up. -She caught Ma-ui in her great teeth, and she tore him across. There was -darkness then, and the crying of all the birds. - -Thus died Ma-ui who raised the sky and who fished up the land, who made -the Sun go more slowly across the heavens, and who brought fire to men. -Thus died Ma-ui, with the Meat of Immortality in his hands. And since -his death no one has ever ventured near the lair of Hina-nui-ke-po, the -Goblin-goddess. - - - - - - - - -AU-KE-LE THE SEEKER. - - -In a land that is now lost, in Ku-ai-he-lani, the Country that Supports -the Heavens, there lived a King whose name was Iku. He had twelve -children, and of these eleven grew up without ever having received any -favor or any promise from their father. - -But when the twelfth child was born—Au-ke-le was his name—his father -took him up in his arms, and he promised him all the honor and power -and glory that was his, and he promised him the kingship of -Ku-ai-he-lani, the Country that Supports the Heavens. - -The other children were angry when they saw their father take little -Au-ke-le up in his arms, and they were more angry when they heard the -promises that were made to him. And the eldest brother, who was the -angriest of all, said, “I am the eldest born, and my father never made -such promises to me, and he never took me up in his arms and fondled -me.” And this brother, who was now a man grown, went from before his -father, and his other brothers went with him. - -Au-ke-le grew up. His father gave him many of his possessions—feather -cloaks, and whale-tooth necklaces, and many sharp and polished weapons. -He grew up to be the handsomest of handsome youths, with a body that -was straight and faultless. One day, knowing that they had gone to play -games in a certain house, he went to follow his brothers. But Iku, his -father, said to him, “Do not go where your brothers have gone; they are -angry with you, and they have always been angry with you, and it may be -that they will do some harm to you in that place.” But in spite of the -words of his father Au-ke-le followed his brothers. He came to the -house where his brothers were, and he shot his arrow into it. One of -his brothers took up the arrow and said, “This is not a stranger’s -arrow; this is an arrow from our own house; see, it is twisted.” The -eldest brother, who was the angriest of all, took up the arrow and -broke it to pieces. He sent the others outside to invite Au-ke-le -within the house. And Au-ke-le, believing in the kindness of his -brothers, and thinking they were going to let him join in their games, -came within. - -But they had made a plan against him. They laid hold upon him when he -came within the house, and, at the words of the eldest brother, they -uncovered a pit and they flung Au-ke-le down into it. - -In that pit there lived a mo-o whose name was Ka-mo’o-i-na-nea. This -mo-o was really Au-ke-le’s grandmother. She had been a mortal woman; -but she had transformed herself into a mo-o, and now she lived in that -pit, and she devoured any creature that came into it. - -The angry brother called out, “Mo-o, Mo-o, here is your food; eat it.” -Then he went away. But a younger brother who felt kindly to Au-ke-le -whispered down, “Do not eat this youth, Mo-o, for he is your own -grandson.” The mo-o heard the words of both. She came before Au-ke-le -and she signed for him to follow her. He followed, and they came out on -the dry sand that was before the ocean. - -Then the mo-o spoke to Au-ke-le her grandson. “There is a land beyond -this sea,” she said, “a land that I travelled through in my young days -before I took on this dragon-form. Very few people live in that land. -You must sail to it; living there you will become great and wise. - -“The name of that land is Ka-la-ke’e-nui-a-Kane. The mountains are so -high that the stars rest upon them. The people who live there are -Na-maka-o-Kahai, the Queen, and her four brothers, who take the forms -of birds, and two women-servants. The watchers of her land are a dog -called Mo-e-la and a great and fierce bird called Ha-lu-lu. - -“I will give you things to take with you. Here is a calabash that has a -Magic in it. It has an axe in it also that you can use. And here is -food that will last for the longest voyage. It is a leaf, but if you -put it to your lips it will take away your hunger and your thirst. I -give you my skirt of feathers also; the touch of it will bring death to -your enemies.” Then his mo-o grandmother left him, and Au-ke-le was -upon the sea-shore with a calabash that had Magic in it, with the -leaves that stayed his hunger and his thirst, and with the skirt of -feathers that would destroy his enemies. And he had in his heart the -resolve to go to the land that his mo-o grandmother had told him about. - -In the meantime Iku-mai-lani, the kind brother, had gone back to his -father’s house. Iku asked what had happened to his favorite son. Then -Iku-mai-lani, weeping, told his father that the boy had been flung into -the pit where the mo-o was and that he feared the mo-o had devoured him -as she had devoured others. Then the father and mother of Au-ke-le -wept. - -As they were weeping he came within the house. His mother and father -rejoiced over him, and Iku-mai-lani hurried to give the news to his -brothers. They were building a canoe, and when the eldest brother heard -of Au-ke-le’s escape, and heard the sound of rejoicings in his father’s -house, he gave orders to have all preparations made for sailing and to -have the food cooked and every one aboard, that they might sail at once -from the land. - -It was then that Au-ke-le came up to where they were. He called out to -his kind brother, to Iku-mai-lani, and asked him what he might do to be -let go in the canoe with them. His brother said: “How can we take you -when it is on your account only that we are going away from the country -we were born in? We are going because you only of all of us have been -promised the kingdom and the glory that belongs to our father. And we -are going because we tried to kill you, and now are ashamed of what we -did.” - -Still Au-ke-le craved to be let go with them. Then the kind brother -said to him: “You cannot gain your way through us. But with our eldest -brother is a boy—a little son whom he is taking along, and for whom he -has a great love. If the child of our eldest brother should ask you to -come on board you will surely be let come.” - -Then Au-ke-le went to the canoe. And the little boy who was his eldest -brother’s son saw him and clapped his hands and called out to him, “My -uncle, come on board of the ship and be one of us.” - -Au-ke-le then went on board. The eldest brother, he who had been the -most angry with him, let Au-ke-le stay because his young son had -brought him on board. Au-ke-le then sent the men back to his father’s -house for the things that his grandmother had given him—for the -calabash with the Magic in it, and for the feather dress. The men -brought these things to him; then the paddlers took up their paddles; -the canoe went into the deep sea, and Au-ke-le and his brothers -departed from the land of Ku-ai-he-lani, the Country that Supports the -Heavens. - - - -They sailed far and far away, and no land came to their sight. All the -food they had brought in the canoe was eaten, and they no longer had -food or drink. Their men died of hunger and thirst. Au-ke-le’s brothers -went below, and they stayed in the bottom of the canoe, for they were -waiting for death to come to them. - -At last the boy who was the son of the eldest brother went down to seek -his father. He was lying there, too weak to move by reason of his -hunger and thirst. And Au-ke-le’s eldest brother said to his son: “How -pitiful it is for you, my son! For my own life I have no regret, for I -have been many days in the world; but I weep for you, who have lived so -short a time and have but so short a time to live. Here is all I have -to give you—a joint of sugar cane.” Then the boy replied, “I have no -need for food—my uncle Au-ke-le has a certain leaf which he puts to my -lips, and with that leaf my hunger and my thirst are satisfied.” His -father hardly heard what he said, so weak he had become. Then the boy -went back to Au-ke-le. - -And when he came before his uncle again tears were streaming down his -face. “Why do you weep?” Au-ke-le asked. “I am weeping for my father, -who is almost dead from hunger.” Au-ke-le said: “You too would have -died from hunger had I not come with you. I am hated by your father as -his most bitter enemy, but I would act as a brother acts. Now let us go -to where my brothers are.” - -So they went below. Au-ke-le went to each of his brothers and put the -leaf to their lips. It was as if each of them had got food and drink. -Their faintness went from them, and they were able to get about the -ship once more. - -Soon afterwards they came in sight of land; Au-ke-le knew that this was -the country that his mo-o grandmother had told him about. And, -remembering what he had been told about the dangers of this land, he -asked his brothers to let him take charge of the canoe, so that they -might avoid these dangers. His brothers said, “Why did you not build a -canoe for yourself, so that you might take charge of it and give orders -about it?” Au-ke-le said, “If you give me charge of the canoe, we shall -be saved; but if you take charge yourselves, we shall be destroyed.” -His brothers laughed at him. - -In a while they saw birds approaching the ship—four birds. Au-ke-le, -remembering what his mo-o grandmother had told him, knew that these -were the Queen’s brothers. They came and lit on the yards, and asked of -those below what they had come for. Au-ke-le told his brothers to say -that they had not come to make war and that they had come on a voyage -of sight-seeing. His brothers would not say this; instead they cried -out to the birds, “Ours is a ship to make war.” The birds flew back; -they told their sister Na-maka that the ship had come to make war. Then -the Queen put on her war-skirt and went down to the shore. - -Au-ke-le knew that all in the canoe would be destroyed. He took up his -calabash that had the Magic in it, and he threw it into the sea. As he -did this he saw the Queen standing there with her war-skirt on. She -took up her feathered standard and shook it in the air. Au-ke-le sprang -from the ship and swam after the floating calabash. Then the ship and -all who were on it disappeared: Na-maka the Queen made a sign, and they -were seen no more. - - - -And now Au-ke-le was left on the land that his grandmother had told him -about—the land of Ka-la-ke’e-nui-a-Kane, where the stars rest on the -tops of the mountains. He brought the calabash that had his Magic in it -and the skirt of feathers that his mo-o grandmother had given him, and -he rested under a tree by the sea-shore. - -The dog that was called Mo-e-la, the Day Sleeper, smelt his blood and -barked. And, hearing her dog bark, Na-maka the Queen came out of her -house and called to her four bird-brothers: “You must go and find out -what man of flesh and blood my dog is barking at.” But her four -brothers, being sleepy, said, “Send your two women-servants and let us -rest.” So the Queen sent her two women-servants to find out what the -dog was barking at. “And if it be a creature of flesh and blood, kill -him,” said the Queen. - -Then the two servants went towards the shore where Au-ke-le was -resting. But his Magic told him what was coming and what he should do. -“When they come you must call the servants by their names, and they -will be so abashed at a stranger’s knowing them that they will not know -what to do.” - -So when the Queen’s two women-servants came before him Au-ke-le called -out, “It is U-po-ho and it is Hua-pua-i-na-nea.” The two servants were -so abashed because their names were known to this stranger that they -stood there looking at each other. - -Then Au-ke-le called them to him, and they came, and they sat near him. -He asked them to play the game that is played with black and white -stones. He moved the stones, and as he moved them he chanted, and his -chant was to let them know who he was. - - - “This is my turn; your turn now; - Now we pause; the blacks cannot win; - The whites have won: - Nothing can break the boy from Ku-ai-he-lani.” - - -The servants knew then that he was from Ku-ai-he-lani, the Country that -Supports the Heavens. They said to him, “We were sent to kill you, but -we are going back to tell the Queen that in no place could we find a -creature of flesh and blood.” - -They returned, and they told the Queen that neither on the uplands nor -on the sea-shore, neither on the tops of the trees nor on the tops of -the cliffs, were they able to find a creature of flesh and blood. While -they were speaking the Queen’s dog came out and barked again. Her four -bird-brothers had rested, and the Queen sent them to search for the -creature of flesh and blood that the dog had barked at. - -Then the Magic in his calabash spoke again to Au-ke-le. “Four birds are -coming towards you. You must greet them and you must call them by their -names. They will be so abashed at their names being known to a stranger -that they will not know what to do.” - -As the four birds came towards him Au-ke-le called aloud: “This is -Ka-ne-mo-e, and I give greetings to him. This is Ka-ne-a-pua, and I -give greetings to him. This is Le-a-pua, and I give greetings to him. -And this is Ka-hau-mana.” The four bird-brothers were amazed to hear -their names spoken by a stranger, and they said to each other, “What -can we do with this man who knows our names, even?” And another said, -“He can take our lives from us.” And they spoke to each other again and -said, “We have one thing worthy to give to this man: let us give him -our sister, the Queen.” - -So the four brothers came to Au-ke-le, and they offered him the Queen -to be his wife. Au-ke-le was pleased; he told them that he would go to -the Queen’s house. - -The four bird-brothers went back to tell the Queen about the man who -was coming to her and to whom they had promised her. The Queen said, -“If he is such that he can overcome the dangers that are before him, I -will marry him, and he will be the ruler with me of the land of -Ka-la-ke’e-nui-a-Kane.” - -When the brothers had gone his Magic spoke again to Au-ke-le, and it -said: “When you go to the Queen, don’t enter the house at once, for -that would mean your death. If they offer you food in a calabash, don’t -eat it, for that would mean your death. The dog that is called Mo-e-la -will be set upon you, and if you overcome him the four brothers will -attack you. Eat the melons on the vines outside the house, and they -will be meat and drink for you.” - -After hearing the words that his Magic had said to him, Au-ke-le went -to the house of the Queen. He stood outside the door, and as he stood -there the Queen said to her women-servants, “Use your powers now and -destroy this creature of flesh and blood.” But when the servants saw -the man who knew their names, one changed herself into a rat and ran -into a hole, and the other changed herself into a lizard and ran up a -tree. - -Then Mo-e-la the dog came towards him; he opened his mouth wide and he -showed all his teeth. But when he was touched by the skirt that -Au-ke-le had been given, the dog was turned into ashes. And then the -Queen, on seeing the death of her watchdog, bowed down her head and -wept. - -She called upon her brothers to kill the stranger. But they were -abashed at his knowing their names, and they wanted to hide from him. -One turned himself into a rock and lay by the doorway, and another -turned himself into a log of wood and lay beside his brother, and the -third changed himself into a coral reef, and the fourth became a pool -of water. - -Food was brought to Au-ke-le, but he would eat none of it. He went to -the vine, and he ate the melons that were growing there, and he found -that the melons gave food and drink to him. And when the Queen and her -brothers saw him eating the melons they said to each other: “How -wonderful this man is! He is eating the food that we eat. Who could -have told him where to find it?” After that he won the Queen, and she -became his wife. - - - -But it was after his adventure with the bird Ha-lu-lu that Au-ke-le -knew that the Queen had come to love him and was inclined to be kind to -him. One day he was standing by the sea-shore, looking out to the place -where the canoe that had had his brothers on board was sunk, when a -great shadow came over where he was and covered the light of the sun. -He looked up, and he saw above him the outstretched wings of a great -bird. Immediately he picked up the calabash that had his Magic in it; -then the bird Ha-lu-lu seized him and flew off with him. - -The bird flew to a cave that was in the face of a great high cliff. He -stowed Au-ke-le there. And Au-ke-le, searching the cave, found two men -who had been carried off by Ha-lu-lu, the great bird. “We are two that -are to be devoured,” said the men. “What does the bird do when she -comes to devour us?” said Au-ke-le. “She stretches her right wing into -the cave and draws out a man. She devours him. Then she stretches her -left wing into the cave and draws out another man.” “Is the cave deep?” -Au-ke-le asked. “It is deep,” said the men. “Go, then,” said Au-ke-le, -“and make a fire in the depth of the cave.” - -The men did this. Then Au-ke-le opened the calabash that his mo-o -grandmother had given him, and he took out the axe that was in it. He -waited for the giant bird to stretch her wing within. When she did he -cut the wing off with his axe, and the two men took it and threw the -wing on the fire. The other wing reached in; Au-ke-le cut off the other -wing, too. Then the beak was stuck in, and Au-ke-le cut off head and -beak. - -After Ha-lu-lu the great bird had been killed, Au-ke-le took the -feathers from her head and threw them over the cliff. The feathers flew -on until they came to where the Queen was. She saw them, and she knew -them for the head feathers of the bird Ha-lu-lu, and she cried when she -saw them. - -When her brothers came to her she said, “Here are the head-feathers of -the bird Ha-lu-lu, and now there is no great bird to guard the Island.” -But her brothers said, “It is right that Ha-lu-lu should be killed, for -she devoured men.” They waited then to see what their sister would do -to Au-ke-le, who was in the cave. She brought the rainbow, the -short-ended rainbow that has only three colors, red, yellow, and green, -and she set it against the cliff. And by the bridge of the rainbow -Au-ke-le was able to get down from the cliff. - - - -When his wife and her brothers saw him come back they welcomed Au-ke-le -with joy. The Queen gave him her kingdom and everything else that was -at her command. And she sent a message to her uncles, who were in the -sky, to tell them that she had given her husband all her -possessions—the things that were above and below, that were on the -uplands and on the lowlands, the drift iron, the iron that stands in -the ground, the whale’s tooth, the turtle-shell, the things that grow -on the land, and the cluster of stars. All these things were his now. -But with all these things in his possession Au-ke-le was not satisfied, -for he thought upon the canoe that was sunken and on his brothers who -were all drowned. - -He dreamed of his brothers and of his young nephew; and, with the -thoughts that he had, he could not enjoy himself on the land that he -ruled over. And, seeing her husband so sad, sorrow for him entered the -heart of the Queen. He told her that he thought of the men who had come -with him and who were now dead. And when he spoke of what was in his -mind the Queen said: “If you have great strength and courage, your -brothers may come back to life again; but if your strength or your -courage fail, they will never be restored to life, and your own life, -perhaps, will be lost.” Then Au-ke-le said to the Queen, “What is it -that I must do to win them back to life?” And the Queen said: “You must -use all your strength and your courage to gain the Water of Everlasting -Life, the Water of Ka-ne. If you are able to gain it and bring it to -them, your brothers and your nephew will live again.” When Au-ke-le -heard this from the Queen he ceased to be sorrowful; he ate and he -drank, and he had gladness in his possessions. Then he said to the -Queen, “What way must I take to gain the Water of Everlasting Life, the -Water of Ka-ne?” His wife said: “I will show you the way: from the -place where we are standing you must go towards the rising sun, never -turning from the road that I set you on. And at the end of your journey -you will come to the place where you will find the Water of Everlasting -Life, the Water of Ka-ne.” - - - -When Au-ke-le heard this he put on his skirt of feathers that his mo-o -grandmother had given him; he took up the calabash that had his Magic -in it; he kissed his wife farewell; and he took the path from his house -that went straight towards the rising sun. - -After he had been on his way for a month the Queen came to the door of -her house, and she looked towards where he had gone. She saw him, and -he was still upon his way. At the end of another month she went out -again and looked towards where he had gone. He was still upon the path -that led to the rising sun. Another month passed, and she went and -looked towards where he had gone. No trace of her husband could she -see, and she knew that he must have gone off the path she had shown -him. She began to weep, and when her four brothers came before her she -said, “Your brother-in-law has fallen into space, and he is lost.” - -She then sent her brothers to bring all things and creatures together -that they might all mourn for Au-ke-le. They went and they brought the -night and the day, the sun, the stars, the thunder, the rainbow, the -lightning, the waterspout, the mist, the fine rain. And the grandfather -of the Queen, Kau-kihi-ka-malama, who is the Man in the Moon, was sent -for, too. - -But where indeed was Au-ke-le? - -He had left the straight line towards the rising sun; he had fallen -into space, and now he was growing weaker and weaker as he fell. But he -still had the calabash that had his Magic in it. He held it under his -arm; and now he spoke and asked where they were. His Magic said to him: -“We have gone outside the line that was shown to us, and now I think -that we shall never get back. There is nothing in the sky to help us or -to show us the way; all that was in the sky has gone down to the -earth—the night and the day, the sun and the stars, the thunder, the -rainbow, the lightning, the waterspout, the mist, the fine rain. No, I -can see no thing and no creature that can help us.” Au-ke-le asked, -“Who is it that is still up there?” His Magic replied: “Go straight and -lay hold upon him, and we may be saved. That is Kau-kihi-ka-malama, the -Man in the Moon.” - -The reason that Kau-kihi-ka-malama had not gone down to earth with the -others was that he had delayed to prepare food to bring down to the -earth, for he thought that there was no food there. He was just -starting off when Au-ke-le came up to him and held him tightly. “Whose -conceited child are you?” the Man in the Moon asked. “My back has never -been climbed, even by my own granddaughter, and now you come here and -climb over it. Whose conceited child are you?” “Yours,” said Au-ke-le. -“I will take you to earth, and my granddaughter Na-maka will tell me -who you are.” And so Kau-kihi-ka-malama brought Au-ke-le back to earth. -And when he reached the earth all the people there wept with joy to see -him. Then the sun, the day, the night, the lightning, the thunder, the -mist, the fine rain, the waterspout, and the Man in the Moon all -returned back to the heavens. - - - -But nothing would do Au-ke-le but to set out again to find the Water of -Everlasting Life, the Water of Ka-ne. So he started off from the door -of his house, and he went in a straight line towards the rising sun. -And in six months from the time he started he stood by the edge of a -hole at the bottom of which was the Water of Everlasting Life, the -Water of Ka-ne. - -He climbed over the shoulder of the guard, and the guard said to him: -“Eh, there! Whose conceited child are you? My back has never been -climbed over before, and now you come here and do it. Whose conceited -child are you?” “Your own,” said Au-ke-le. “My own by whom?” “My father -is Iku,” said Au-ke-le. “Then you are the grandson of Ka-po-ino and -Ka-mo’o-i-na-nea.” “I am.” “My greetings to you, my lord,” said the -guardian of the edge of the hole. - -Au-ke-le had to go deep down into the hole to get the Water of -Everlasting Life, the Water of Ka-ne. The guardian of the edge of the -hole warned him that he must not strike the bamboo that was growing on -one side, because if he did the sound would reach the ears of one who -would cover up the water. Au-ke-le went down. He came to a second -guardian, and he made himself known to him, claiming relationship with -him through Ka-mo’o-i-na-nea, his mo-o grandmother. This guardian told -him to go on, but he warned him not to fall into the lama trees that -were growing on one side, for if he did the sound would reach the ears -of one who would cover up the Water of Everlasting Life, the Water of -Ka-ne. - -He went on, and he came to the third guardian, and he made himself -known to him, claiming relationship with him through his mo-o -grandmother. This guardian told him to keep on his way, but he warned -him, above all things, not to fall into the loula palms, for if he did -the sound would reach one who would cover up the Water of Everlasting -Life, the Water of Ka-ne. - -At last he came before the fourth guardian. “Who are you?” he was -asked. “The child of Iku.” “What has brought you here?” he was asked. -“To gain the Water of Everlasting Life, the Water of Ka-ne.” “You shall -get it. Go to your grand-aunt who is at the base of the cliff. She is -the Old Woman of the Forbidden Sea. She is blind. You will find her -roasting bananas. When she reaches out to take one to eat, you take it -and eat it. Do this until all the bananas have been taken from her. -When she says, ‘What mischievous fellow has come here?’ take up the -ashes and sprinkle them on her right side, and then climb into her -lap.” - -Au-ke-le kept going and ever going until he came to where his -grand-aunt sat, roasting bananas—his grand-aunt, the Old Woman by the -Forbidden Sea. He took the bananas that she was about to eat; he -sprinkled her with ashes on her right side, and he climbed into her -lap. “Whose conceited child are you?” said the blind old woman. “Your -own,” said Au-ke-le. “My own through whom?” “Your own through Iku.” -When his grand-aunt heard him say this she asked him what he had come -for. He told her he had come for the Water of Everlasting Life, the -Water of Ka-ne. - -Then the Old Woman by the Forbidden Sea made up a plan by which he -might get the water. Ho-a-lii, he who watched above the water, had -hands that were all black, and no hands but his were permitted to take -up the Water of Ka-ne. His grand-aunt made Au-ke-le’s hands black, and -she showed him where to go to come to the water. - -Au-ke-le went there. He put down his blackened hands, and the guards -gave him a gourd of water. But this, as he had been told by the Old -Woman by the Forbidden Sea, was bitter water, and not the Water of -Everlasting Life. He threw the water out. He reached his hands down -again; and this time the Water of Ka-ne was put into his hands, the -Water of Everlasting Life. - -He took the gourd into his hands, and he ran back. But he fell into -loula palms as he ran on, and the sound came to the ears of Ho-a-lii, -who was the guardian of the water. Ho-a-lii listened, but it was two -months before another sound came to him. That was when Au-ke-le got -entangled in the lama trees that grew on the side of the hole that he -had to travel up. Ho-a-lii kept awake and listened. But no sound came -to him for two months more. Then he heard the rustling of the bamboo -trees that Au-ke-le had fallen into. He came in pursuit. But now -Au-ke-le was out of the hole and was flying towards the earth. Ho-a-lii -followed; but when he asked the watcher how long it was since one had -passed that way, he was told that a year and six months had gone by -since one came up through the hole. Ho-a-lii could not catch up with -one who by this time had gone so far; and Au-ke-le, with the Water of -Everlasting Life, the Water of Ka-ne, came back to the earth. - - - -He came to where his brothers and his nephew were drowned in the sea, -and he poured half of the Water of Ka-ne into the sea. Nothing came up -from the sea, and Au-ke-le sat there weeping. Then his wife came to -him, and she blamed him for pouring so much of the water into the sea. -Out of what was left she took water in her hands and poured it over the -sea. Then Au-ke-le looked. In a while there stood a canoe with men -climbing the masts, and folding the sails, and coiling the ropes. They -were his brothers. Au-ke-le greeted them, and his brothers knew him, -and they came to the land. - -Then Au-ke-le gave his brothers all his possessions. But they were not -satisfied to live on that land with him, and after a while they sailed -away for other lands. - -Then after long years Au-ke-le said to his wife: “My wife, we have -lived long together; I would not die in a foreign land, and I beg that -you will let me go so that I may see Ku-ai-he-lani, the country of my -parents.” - -He went, with his wife’s four brothers. And they went by a course that -brought them there in two days and two nights. Upon their arrival -Au-ke-le looked over the land; but he saw no people, and the sound of -birds singing or of cocks crowing did not come to him, and then he saw -that the land of Ku-ai-he-lani was all grown over with weeds. - -He came to the mouth of the cave where his mo-o grandmother used to be. -He shouted down to her, but no sound came back from her to him. He went -down. The coral of the floor of the sea had grown over her, and she was -not able to answer the call of her grandson Au-ke-le. - -He broke away the pieces of coral that were around her. He saw the body -of his mo-o grandmother, and it was reduced to a thread, almost. He -called her name, “Ka-mo’o-i-na-nea.” - -Ka-mo’o-i-na-nea said “Yes,” and she looked up and saw her grandson. -She greeted him and asked him what had brought him to her. “I came to -see you,” he said, “and to ask you where are Iku and the others.” - -“Iku fought with Ma-ku-o-ae,” his grandmother told him. When she said -that, Au-ke-le knew that Death and his father had met. - - - - - - - - -PI-KO-I: THE BOY WHO WAS GOOD AT SHOOTING ARROWS. - - -“What is the cause of all that shouting down there?” said Pi-ko-i to -his father, Ala-la the Raven. “They are playing olohu,” said Ala-la, -his father. “And how is that game played?” said Pi-ko-i. “It is played -in this way,” said his father. “There are two in the game; they roll a -disk of stone, and the crowd shouts for the one who rolls it farthest. -That is the reason of the noise down there.” “I will go down and look -at the games they are playing,” said Pi-ko-i. “You cannot go,” said his -father, “until after to-day.” - -Later on there was more shouting. “What are they shouting for now?” -said Pi-ko-i to Ala-la the Raven. “They are playing a game called pahee -now,” said Ala-la. “They slide a stick down a grassy slope, and when -the stick thrown by one slides farther than the stick thrown by another -the people all shout.” “I will go and watch this game,” said Pi-ko-i. -“You cannot go until after to-day,” said his father. - -The next day there was shouting again at the same place. “What is this -fresh shouting for?” said Pi-ko-i to Ala-la, his father. “They are -playing a game now called ko-ie-ie.” “How is that game played?” said -Pi-ko-i. “It is played in this way,” said his father. “A board is -smoothed and thrown into the river at a place near the rapids. It has -to float steadily in one place without going down the rapids. The one -whose board floats the steadiest without being carried over the rapids -wins. That is the game of ko-ie-ie.” “May I go down to watch that -game?” said Pi-ko-i. “You may go down and join in the game,” said his -father. - -Then Ala-la smoothed a board so that it would float steadily on the -water, and he gave it to his son Pi-ko-i. Pi-ko-i then went where the -crowd was; and this was the first time he had ever been with a crowd. - -He had a sharp face, and he had little bones, and he had hair that was -like a rat’s hair. When the crowd saw him they cried out, “A rat, a -rat! What is a rat doing amongst us?” Pi-ko-i did not mind what they -said; he went to where they were casting their boards on the current, -and he cast on it the board that his father had smoothed for him. - -It floated the steadiest of all the boards. It floated in one place -without being carried down the rapids. The crowd shouted for Pi-ko-i. -Then the other boys got jealous of him; they took his board, and they -flung it over the rapids. Pi-ko-i jumped after his board. He was -carried over the rapids and down to the sea. “A good riddance,” said -the boys to each other. “What business has a rat coming amongst us?” - -Pi-ko-i was carried out to sea. For two days and two nights he floated -on the currents of the ocean, and then he was washed up on the beach of -another Island. - -Now it happened that where he was washed up was near where his older -sisters, I-ol-e and O-pea-pea, lived with their husbands. A man came -down to the beach and found Pi-ko-i, and this man was Kaua, the good -servant of I-ol-e and O-pea-pea. “Where have you come from?” said Kaua -to Pi-ko-i when he found him on the beach, all wearied out, and weak -from hunger and the buffeting of the ocean. “From the sea,” said -Pi-ko-i. “Come with me,” said the good servant, and he brought the boy -to his sisters’ house. - -The servant spoke to the sisters and he said, “I found him lying on the -sand, and all he says is that he has come from the sea.” “Where are you -from? Where were you born, and who are your parents?” said the sisters -to him. Pi-ko-i answered: “I am from Wai-lua on the Island of Kau-ai; -Ala-la is my father, and Kou-kou is my mother.” - -When he told them this, the women of the house knew that the boy was -their brother. They sprang upon him, and they cried over him, and they -told him that they were his sisters. - -And then their husbands came home, and a great feast was prepared for -Pi-ko-i. A pig was killed, yams were made ready, and pig and yams were -put into the underground oven to cook. But while the cooking was being -done, Pi-ko-i left the house and wandered off to where there was a -crowd and where games were being played. - -The King and the Queen were at these games. It was a game of shooting -that was on; a man was shooting arrows at rats, and the King and the -Queen were making wagers on his shooting. - -It was a Prince who was shooting arrows at the rats—Prince -Mai-ne-le—and all thought that his aim was most wonderful. The King was -winning all her property from the Queen, for he was laying wagers all -the time on Mai-ne-le’s shooting. - -Pi-ko-i stood and watched the game for a while. After the Prince had -shot several arrows he said: “How simple all this is! Why, any one -could shoot as this man shoots.” When the Queen heard the stranger boy -say this, she said, “Could you shoot as well as the Prince?” “Yes, -ma’am,” said Pi-ko-i. “Then I will wager my property on your shooting,” -said the Queen. - -The King kept on staking his property on the Prince’s shooting, while -the Queen now staked hers on Pi-ko-i’s. Whoever should strike ten rats -with one arrow would win, and whoever should strike less than ten would -lose the match. Prince Mai-ne-le shot first. His arrow went through ten -rats, and all the people shouted, “Mai-ne-le has won, Mai-ne-le has -won! The stranger boy cannot do better than that!” But Pi-ko-i only -said, “How left-handed that man must be! I thought that he was going to -shoot the rats through their whiskers!” - -Prince Mai-ne-le heard what Pi-ko-i said, and he answered angrily: “You -are a deceiving boy. From the first day I began shooting rats until -this day, I have never seen a man who could shoot rats through their -whiskers.” “You will see one now,” said Pi-ko-i. - -Then bets were made as to whether one could shoot through rats’ -whiskers. These were new bets, and when they were all made, Pi-ko-i -made ready to shoot. But now the rats were all gone; not one was in -sight. Thereupon Pi-ko-i said a charm to bring the rats near: - - - “I, Pi-ko-i, - The offspring of Ala-la the Raven, - The offspring of Kou-kou: - Where are you, my brothers? - Where are you, O Rats? - There they are, - There they are! - The rats are in the pili grass: - They sleep, the rats are asleep: - Let them awaken; - Let them return!” - - -And when he said this charm the rats all came back. Pi-ko-i then let -his arrow fly. It struck ten rats, and the point of it held a bat. The -rats were all made fast by their whiskers. - -When Mai-ne-le saw this he said: “It is a draw. The boy shot ten rats, -and I shot ten rats.” The people all agreed with Mai-ne-le—it was a -draw, they said. But Pi-ko-i would not have it so. “The bat must count -as a rat,” he said. “I have killed, not ten, but eleven rats.” The -crowd would not agree. Pi-ko-i kept saying, “It counts as a rat -according to the old words: - - - “‘The bat is in the stormless season— - He is your younger brother, O Rat: - Squeak to him.’” - - -And when he said that, every one had to agree that the bat counted as a -rat and that Pi-ko-i had killed eleven rats with his single arrow. And -so he won the match against Prince Mai-ne-le. - -While the wagers were being handed over, Pi-ko-i slipped away. He went -back to his sisters’ house; he was there as the food was being taken -out of the oven. He sat down to the food; he would not let any one -speak to him while he ate. He ate nearly the whole oven-full. And when -he had finished that meal he was a changed boy: he was no longer -sharp-faced and small-boned; he still had hair like rat’s hair, but for -all that he was now a fine-looking youth. - -Shortly after this the King and Queen wanted to have a canoe built in -which they could sail far out on the ocean. The King went with his -canoe-builders into the forest, so that they might mark for -cutting-down a large koa tree. They came to a great tree. But before -they could put the axe to it two birds flew up to the very top of the -tree and then cried out in a loud voice, “Say, Ke-awe, you cannot make -a canoe out of this tree; it is hollow.” And then they cried out, “A -worthless canoe, a hollow canoe, a canoe that will never sail the -ocean.” - -When the King heard this he turned from the tree, and he and his -canoe-builders sought out another. They found another fine-looking -tree, but before they put an axe to it, the same two birds flew up to -the very top of it and cried out, “A worthless canoe, a hollow canoe, a -canoe that will never sail the ocean.” And to the top of every tree -that the King and his canoe-builders thought was a good-timbered tree, -the birds flew and made their unlucky cry, “A worthless canoe, a hollow -canoe, a canoe that will never sail the ocean.” - -Day after day the King and his canoe-makers went into the forest, and -day after day the birds flew to the top of every tree that they would -cut down. At last the King saw that he could get no canoe-making tree -out of the forest until he had killed the birds that made the unlucky -cry. - -So he sent for Prince Mai-ne-le to have him kill the birds while they -were crying on the tree-top. And he promised him, or any one else who -would kill the birds, his daughter in marriage and a part of the land -of his kingdom. - -Now when Kaua, the good servant, heard of the King’s offer he made up -his mind that the boy whom he had found on the sand should win the -King’s daughter and a portion of the land of the Island. So he went to -where Pi-ko-i was, and he told him all that he had heard. “And if you -are able to shoot birds as you are able to shoot rats,” he said, “you -will become son-in-law to the King and one of the great men of the -Island. But Prince Mai-ne-le is going to let fly his arrow at the -birds, and perhaps you will not want to match yourself with him,” said -he. - -When the servant said that, Pi-ko-i rose up from where he was sitting, -and he said: “I am going to shoot at the birds that make the unlucky -cry, and you must do this for me.” Thereupon he told Kaua that he -should make a large basket, and that he should tell every one that this -basket was for the safe-keeping of his idol. Into this basket he, -Pi-ko-i, would go and remain hidden there. And Kaua was to go with -Prince Mai-ne-le’s party, and he was to bring the basket with him, -being careful, though, to let no one find out that there was a man in -the basket. Kaua made the basket out of i-e vines, and Pi-ko-i went and -hid in it. Then Kaua took the great basket, and went and joined -Mai-ne-le’s party. - -The canoes made swift passage, for the evening breeze behind them sent -them flying, and by the dawn of the next morning they were able to make -out the waterfalls on the steep cliffs of the land where the forest was -that the King walked in. They landed. Kaua was able to get men to carry -the basket that had, as all supposed, his idol in it. They entered the -forest, and they came to where the King and his canoe-makers were. - -They were under a great koa tree. To mark it the men raised their axes. -As they did so the birds flew to the top of it and cried out their -unlucky cry: “Say, Ke-awe, you cannot make a canoe out of this tree. A -worthless canoe, a hollow canoe, a canoe that will never sail the -ocean!” - -As soon as the cry was heard Prince Mai-ne-le shot at them. His arrow -did not go anywhere near the birds, so high was the tree-top, so far -above were they. Then the King’s men built a platform that was half the -height of the tree. From the platform Mai-ne-le shot at the birds -again, and again his arrow failed to reach them. Then Pi-ko-i from the -basket whispered to Kaua. “Ask Mai-ne-le and ask the King why the birds -still cry out and why they have not been hit. Is it because Mai-ne-le -is not really shooting at them?” Kaua said all this to the King. Prince -Mai-ne-le, when he heard what was said, replied, “Why do you not shoot -at the birds yourself?” And then he said: “There are the birds, and -here is the weapon. Now see if you can hit them.” “Well,” said Kaua, “I -will ask my idol.” He opened the basket then, and Pi-ko-i appeared. He -had changed so much since he had eaten the feast in his sisters’ house -that no one there knew him for the stranger boy who had beaten -Mai-ne-le in the shooting-match before. - -And what he said made all of them amazed. He asked the King to have a -basin of water brought to the tree. It was brought. Pi-ko-i then stood -looking into the water. He saw the reflection of the birds that were on -the tree-top far, far above. He held his arms above his head; his arrow -was aimed at the birds whose reflection he saw in the water. He brought -the arrow into line with them; he let it fly. It struck both of them; -they fell; they came tumbling down. Into the basin of water they fell, -and the people, on seeing the great skill shown by Pi-ko-i, raised a -great shout. - -Then the canoe-makers got to work, and after many days’ labor they -hewed down the great tree. The canoe was built for the King and the -Queen, and they went in it and sailed on the ocean. Pi-ko-i was with -them when they made the voyage. But before that, they had given him -their daughter in marriage, and together with the girl they had given -him a portion of the land of Hawaii. Out of the portion that was given -him Pi-ko-i gave land to Kaua, and the good servant became a rich man. -And as for Mai-ne-le, he was made so ashamed by his second defeat by -young Pi-ko-i that he went straight back to his own land and never -afterwards did he shoot an arrow. - - - - - - - - -PAKA: THE BOY WHO WAS REARED IN THE LAND THAT THE GODS HAVE SINCE -HIDDEN. - - -Paka was reared in Pali-uli, the land that the gods have since hidden -from men. That land he did not leave until he went forth to wed the -fair woman whom one of his foster-fathers had found for him—the -Princess Mako-lea. - -But first I have to tell you about Pali-uli and the two men who found -it in the old days and brought the child Paka there. - -These two men were the brothers of Paka’s mother; they were both named -Ki-i, and one was called Ki-i the Stayer and the other was called Ki-i -the Goer. One night Ki-i the Stayer had a dream: in that dream a spirit -told him: “You must go to Pali-uli and live there, you and your -brother; it is a land in which you can live without labor and without -discontent.” He dreamed this dream for three nights, and, each morning -after, he told his dream to Ki-i the Goer. But Ki-i the Goer paid no -attention to the dream that was told him. And then the dream came to -Ki-i the Goer, and the same words were said to him by the spirit in the -dream: “You must go to Pali-uli and live there, you and your brother, -Ki-i the Stayer; it is a land in which you can live without labor and -without discontent.” - -Then Ki-i the Goer was all for going to the land of Pali-uli. Soon the -two brothers made preparations for going there. One night they went to -bed early; they woke up at the second crowing of the cock; then, in the -early dawn while it was still dark, they started off to seek Pali-uli, -the restful land. - -Guided by a spirit, they found Pali-uli. (No one will ever find it -again; it has since been hidden from men by the gods.) It was a level -land; it was filled with all things that men might desire: the mountain -apple there grew to be as large as the bread-fruit; the sugar-cane grew -until it doubled over, and then it shot up again; the bananas fell -scattering on the ground, ripe always; the pigs grew until their tusks -were as long as a pig is with us; the chickens grew until their spurs -were as big as eggs; the dogs grew until their backs could be made into -seats and cushions; there were fish ponds there, and they were stocked -with all the fish of the ocean except whales and sharks. Such was -Pali-uli when Ki-i the Stayer and Ki-i the Goer came into it. - -They lived there in great plenty and in much content for a while. Then -one day Ki-i the Goer said, “How strange it is that we have all these -things growing, and we have no one to leave them to!” Then Ki-i the -Stayer said: “We will take a young child and rear him up here, and let -him have some of the things that are growing in such plenty. Let us go -back to our sister’s now, and whatever young child she has, we will -take him back with us.” - -So they went back to their sister’s; they found Paka, the child who was -just born, and they took him back with them. Paka had no form at all -when he was born; indeed, he was just like an egg. Ki-i the Goer -wrapped him in a feather cape as they went travelling back to Pali-uli. -After ten days they unwrapped the feather cape, and they saw that the -child was becoming formed. When they looked at him again they saw that -he had become most beautiful, a child with a straight back and an open -face. Then he grew up, and his beauty was such that it lighted Pali-uli -day and night. - -And so he grew to be a youth. One day when they were looking on him, -Ki-i the Goer said to Ki-i the Stayer, “There is one thing wanting -now.” “And what is that?” asked Ki-i the Stayer. “A beautiful wife for -Paka.” Then Ki-i the Stayer said, “You must go search for a wife for -him.” - -Ki-i the Goer consented, and he started off to search for a wife who -would be beautiful enough to wed with Paka. He found one girl who was -very much admired. But when he looked her over he saw that her eyes -bulged like the nuts of the ku-kui. He passed her by. And then in the -land of Kau he heard of another admired girl. But when he looked her -over he saw that her lips were deformed. Her, too, he passed by, and he -went on in his search. And then, in the beautiful land of Kona, he -found Mako-lea, a Princess who was as faultless as the full moon. - -Ki-i the Goer went before the Princess and spoke to her of Paka. “Is he -as handsome as so-and-so?” said she to him. “So-and-so,” said he, “is -as the skin of Paka’s feet.” “Oh, bring him to me,” said the Princess. -“Bring me the youth you want to be my husband, and do not be slow.” -Then back to Pali-uli went Ki-i the Goer. - -They knew that they would have to leave the beautiful land with the -youth whom they had brought up there; Ki-i the Goer and Ki-i the Stayer -knew that, and they knew that they could never come back to it. They -wailed because of their great love for that land and for everything -that was in it. They kissed and they wept over everything in their -beautiful house. Then they committed Pali-uli to the charge of the gods -who had shown that land to them. And never since that day has Pali-uli -been seen by men. - -When they were ready for the journey to Kona, Ki-i the Goer stood up; -taking Paka by the hand, he left the house. But Ki-i the Stayer did not -move. His brother turned to him and said, “How strange of you to want -to remain when the youth whom we reared has to leave this place!” Upon -hearing his brother say this, Ki-i the Stayer stood up and left the -house. Then, with the youth whom they had reared, Ki-i the Goer and -Ki-i the Stayer left Pali-uli, the easeful land. - -Now the King of Kau-ai had long wanted to steal Mako-lea. He sent his -servants Ke-au-miki and Ke-au-ka to carry her off and bring her to him. -On the very day that Paka was to reach Kona, Mako-lea and her -attendants went down to the beach to join in the surf-riding. Standing -on her surf-board the Princess was carried with wonderful speed across -the reef and back to the beach. She brought her surf-board out again. -But this time Ke-au-miki and Ke-au-ka overturned her surf-board and -took her and carried her off to Kau-ai. - -When Paka came to Kona and found that Mako-lea had been taken away, he -took leave of Ki-i the Stayer and Ki-i the Goer. He asked Mako-lea’s -father for a small canoe, and a small canoe was given him. In it he -went over the sea until he came to the Island of Kau-ai. - -When he reached the Island he broke his canoe into small pieces, and he -left the pieces on the shore. Then he went into the land. Now the King -who had taken Mako-lea was a great thrower of the spear, a great boxer, -and a great man for asking and answering riddles. Paka had heard all -about him, and he was prepared to meet him. - -Down to the beach came the King with a great spear in his hand. “Who -shall have the first chance with the spear?” he cried out when he saw -Paka, “the stranger or the son of the soil?” “The son of the soil,” -answered Paka. - -When that answer was made the King threw his spear in the full belief -that it would go through the stranger, for he had never missed his -throw. As the spear neared him Paka moved; he moved aside ever so -slightly. He made a quick motion of his elbow outward, and he allowed -the spear to enter between his arm and his body. He closed his arm on -the spear as the wind whistled by, and the point of the spear quivered -where he held it. The spear was held for a moment; then Paka let it -fall down. - -The King was sure he had struck the stranger, and he uttered his -triumph in a chant. - - - “How could he stand against my spear? - It never misses what it is flung at! - Not the blade of grass, - Not the ant, not the flea! - How then could it miss the stranger, a man?” - - -But when he had uttered all this he saw Paka let the spear drop from -under his arm. The King looked on him with amazement, and he chanted -this: - - - “How did my spear miss the mark? - Was it pushed from its course by the southern storm? - Did a wind ward it off from him?” - - -He waited for the stranger to throw the spear back at him, but Paka did -not throw it. Then the King turned and went to his house. - -When Paka came before it he heard shouts within. “What is going on?” -Paka asked. “It is for a game,” said a by-stander. “Our King is engaged -in a boxing-match; he is winning, for no one can beat him.” Paka then -went within, and he found the place filled with people. The King, -seeing him, said, “Will the stranger join in a boxing-match?” “I know -something of that game,” said Paka, “but not much. I am willing to try -a bout with the son of the soil.” - -Thereupon they took up their positions. The King struck, and his blow -stunned Paka. Then Paka pulled himself together, and he struck. His -blow knocked the King down; he lay on the ground for a time long enough -to bake an oven of food. Then he rose up. He said, “That was a good -stroke; the stranger makes a real opponent.” - -Because Paka had not been defeated in the boxing-bout, he was given a -house and food and clothes. Soon afterwards the King sent a crier -through the country telling the people that they must all come to the -King’s house on the fourth day after to hear the riddles that the King -proposed. Now this crier had never been given any food except what -dropped from the King’s eating place; he had never been given any -clothes, either, and he looked fearful in his naked, unwashed, and -wasted form. No one would go near the man, or speak to him, or give him -anything. Such was the King’s crier. He had a loud voice, however, and -the people all heard what he cried out. - -He came along crying: “Every one is commanded to be in the King’s -presence on the fourth day from this to hear the riddles that the King -will propose. No man, woman, or child may stay at home except those who -are not able to walk.” - -As the crier came along, Paka looked out and saw him, and he said to -those who were with him, “Call that man in and give him something to -eat.” Those who were with him said, “No, we cannot do that; he is a -disgusting-looking man; no one can bear to be near where he is.” But -Paka still said, “Call him to us.” The crier was called over; he came, -but he was ashamed to stand before the people who had called him. - -Paka had the man wash himself. He gave him new clothes, and he bade him -sit down and eat. He ate until he was satisfied. Then said the King’s -crier: “I have travelled all around the Island, and no one has ever -given me food before. Now at last I have found out that pork and yams -and bananas are pleasant to the taste. How can I pay you for this?” - -And then the King’s crier said: “I will pay you by telling you the -answers to the riddles that the King will propose. He will ask you to -join in the game, and if you join and are not able to answer the -riddles, he will have you slain. But if you are able to answer them, he -will have to give you whatever possession of his you ask for. This is -the first riddle that he will ask: - - - “‘Put it all around from top to bottom, - Leave, and leave a place with nothing around.’ - - -The answer is a house, for the thatch goes around from top to bottom, -with a place not thatched for the doorway. And this is the second -riddle that he will ask: - - - “‘The men that stand up, - The men that lie down, - The men that are folded.’ - - -The answer to that, too, is a house, for the timbers stand up, the -beams lie down, the thatch is folded. If you have an answer for these -two riddles, you may join in the game, and the King cannot have you -slain.” - -The fourth day after this Paka went with the rest of the people to the -King’s house. The King saw him, and he called out, “Let the stranger be -seated here.” Paka went and sat near him. And then after a while the -King said, “Will the stranger join in the game?” - -“I will,” Paka said, “but you must tell me the conditions of the game.” -“These are the conditions,” said the King. “I have two riddles to give -out: if you enter the game and cannot answer them correctly, you will -be slain; if you can answer them correctly, you are free to leave my -land and to take with you any possession of mine that you choose.” “I -will enter the game,” said Paka. - -Then said the King: “This is the first riddle: - - - “‘Put it all around from top to bottom, - Leave, and leave a place with nothing around.’” - - -Paka waited. He waited, watching an oven that was being heated. If he -did not give the correct answer, he would be flung into that oven. When -the oven was all heated, he said: - -“It is a house. A house is thatched all around, with a place for the -doorway left open.” - -“Then answer my second riddle,” said the King, and he gave it out: - - - “The men that stand up, - The men that lie down, - The men that are folded.” - - -“The answer to that, too,” said Paka, “is a house. For the timbers of a -house stand up, the beams lie down, the thatch is folded.” - -“That is the answer, but who has told you?” cried the King. - -He was not able to have Paka killed, and he had to give him whatever -Paka chose to ask for. And Paka asked for the Princess Mako-lea who had -been stolen away from him. He asked for her, and he was brought into -another house. And there he beheld the Princess. And when he looked on -her he knew that when his foster-father had said that she was faultless -as the full moon he had spoken the truth. He took her back to Kona, to -the house of her father and her mother, and in Kona they were wed, Paka -and Mako-kea. And his two foster-fathers, Ki-i the Goer and Ki-i the -Stayer, married Mako-lea’s two attendants; and thereafter the two -elders lived so well that they almost came to forget Pali-uli, the -easeful land. - - - - - - - - -THE STORY OF HA-LE-MA-NO AND THE PRINCESS KAMA. - - -In Puna lived the Princess Kama, and she was so beautiful that two -Kings strove to win her—the King of Puna and the King of Hilo. They -sent presents to her mother and to her father and to herself. But Kama -never saw either of those Kings. She was sent to live in a house that -no one was permitted to enter except herself and her brother. “In a -while Kama will come to the height of her beauty,” her parents said, -“and then we will give her to be Queen to one of these Kings. But until -that time comes no one must speak to her.” And so, in a house that was -forbidden to every one else, Kama lived with only her young brother for -her companion. - -Far away, on the Island of Oahu, there lived a youth whose name was -Ha-le-ma-no. Every night he had a dream in which he met a beautiful -maiden who talked to him and whose name in his dream he knew. But when -he wakened up he could not remember what name she had told him to call -her by, nor what words they had said to each other. He remembered only -her beautiful form and face, the dress and the wreaths she wore, and -the scent that was in her dress. The youth became so that he could -think of nothing else except this maiden, and he wasted away because of -this thought that put every other thought out of his mind. Then it came -about that he would eat no food, and at last his fasting and his -wasting thought brought him near his death. - -But Ha-le-ma-no had a sister who had magical powers. Her name was -Lae-ni-hi. She was travelling with her other sisters when she saw -Ha-le-ma-no’s image in the sky, and she knew by that sign that her -brother was near his death. Her sisters wept for Ha-le-ma-no when they -saw that sign in the sky, but Lae-ni-hi uttered a magic spell, and -through that spell Ha-le-ma-no was brought back to life. - -Then she went and she visited her brother, and when she was with him -she asked what it was that had brought him so near his death. “It is -because of a maiden whom I dream of continually,” he told her, “that I -was near my death, and that I may come near my death again.” - -His sister asked him what the maiden was like, and he told her. “She is -tall and very beautiful, and she seems to be a Princess. She has a -wreath of hala on her head and a lei of lehua-blossoms around her neck. -Her dress is of scented tapa, and it is dyed red.” “It is in Puna,” -said his sister, “that the women wear the lehua lei, and have scented -tapa for their dresses.” - -Then she asked, “How do your meetings come about?” “When I fall -asleep,” said Ha-le-ma-no, “the maiden comes to me. Then she tells me -her name. But when I waken up I do not know the name I called her by.” - -He slept, and his wise sister watched over him. In his sleep he again -met the beautiful maiden. She heard him speak the dream-woman’s name. -It was Kama. Soon afterwards Ha-le-ma-no wakened from his sleep. - -“She is Kama, and of her I have heard much,” said his sister. “She is -very beautiful. But no one is permitted to come into the house where -she lives. And in a while, when she has reached the height of her -beauty, she will be given in marriage to the King of Puna or the King -of Hilo.” “Unless I can take her out of that forbidden house and away -from these two Kings,” said Ha-le-ma-no, “I shall surely die.” - -Then his sister promised him that she would strive to find some way of -bringing him and Kama together. He ate his food because she made that -promise, and he became well again. Then, that he might be able to -follow her travels, she told him of the signs she would show. “If it -rains here,” she said, “you will know that I have got as far as the -Island of Mo-lo-kai. If the lightning flashes, you will know that I -have reached the Island of Maui. If it thunders, I am at Kohala. And if -you see red water flowing, I have reached Puna, where your Princess -lives.” - -Ha-le-ma-no’s sister started off. Soon it rained; soon the lightning -flashed; soon thunder was heard; soon red water flowed. Lae-ni-hi had -come to Puna. - -When she came there she began to devise ways by which she could come to -the Princess in her forbidden house. She caused the wind to blow. It -aroused the sea from its repose, and the surf began to roll in on the -beach of Kai-mu. That was a place where the people used to go for -surf-riding. When they saw the surf coming in in great rollers they -began to shout. They got their surf-boards and prepared to ride in on -the rolling surf. - -When Kama’s brother heard the shouting he came down on the beach. He -saw the people riding the surf, and he went back to ask his sister’s -permission to ride the surf like the others. She came down to the beach -with him. And when she saw the surf coming in in such fine rollers she -too became excited, and she longed to go riding it. - -She allowed the first roller to come in until it reached the shore; she -allowed the second roller to come in; then the third. And when that -roller reached the shore she plunged in and swam out with her board to -the place where the rollers began to curve up. When she reached that -place she took the first roller that came along, and, standing on her -surf-board, she rode in on it. The people watching shouted in -admiration for her, so beautiful was her figure as she stood upon the -board that came racing in with the rolling surf. - -She rode the surf three times, and she was becoming more and more -delighted with the sport, when the wind ceased to blow and the surf -went down. Kama was left in shallow water. She looked down, and she saw -a bright fish in the water. And her brother, who was looking towards -her, saw the fish at the same time. He called out to her, “O my sister, -take up and bring to me the bright fish that is in the shallow water.” - -Now the fish was Lae-ni-hi, who had transformed herself. Kama put her -hands under her and took her up. She put the fish into a calabash of -water and gave her to her brother for a plaything. He carried the fish -with him, and in that way Lae-ni-hi came into the house that was -forbidden to all except the Princess and her brother. - -In the middle of the night she changed back into a woman, and she stood -above where the Princess lay. Kama wakened up and saw the strange woman -near her. “Where are you from?” the Princess asked. “I am from near -here.” “There is no woman who is like you anywhere near. Besides, no -one belonging to this place would come into this house, for all know -that it is forbidden.” “I have come from beyond the sea.” “Yes, now you -are telling me the truth.” - -Then Lae-ni-hi asked the Princess if she had ever met a youth in her -dream. The Princess would not answer when she asked this. “If you would -have me bring one to you, give me a wreath that you have worn, and a -dress,” said Ha-le-ma-no’s sister. Kama gave her a wreath that was -withered and one of her scented dresses. - -Lae-ni-hi went back to her brother. She showed him the wreath and the -dress that the Princess had worn. Upon seeing these things Ha-le-ma-no -was sure that his sister had been with the dream-maiden, and he rose up -to go at once to where she was. - -But his sister would not let him go without her. And before she would -go back to Puna she had toys and playthings made—toys and playthings -that would take the fancy of Kama’s young brother. She had wooden birds -made that would float on the waves; she had a toy canoe made and -painted red; in it there were men in red to paddle it; she had other -figures made that could stand upright; then she fixed up a colored and -high-flying kite. - -With the toys and playthings in their canoe, Ha-le-ma-no and Lae-ni-hi -started off for Puna. And when they drew near the shore Ha-le-ma-no let -the kite rise up. As it went up in the air the people on the beach saw -it, and they shouted. The Princess’s brother heard the shouts, and he -came out to see what was happening. - -When he saw the kite he ran down to the beach. He saw a canoe with two -persons in it, and one of them held the string of the kite. He called -out to them, “Oh, let me have the thing that flies!” Lae-ni-hi then -said to her brother, “Let the boy have it,” and he put the string of -the kite into the boy’s hand. Then the birds were put into the water, -and they floated on the waves. Then the toy canoe with its men in red -was let down, and it floated on the water. The boy cried out, “Oh, let -me have these things,” and Lae-ni-hi gave them to him. - -And then she put along the side of the canoe the standing figures that -she had brought. The boy saw them, and them he wanted too. Then -Lae-ni-hi said to him, “Are you a favorite with your sister?” “I am,” -the boy said; “she will do anything I ask her to do.” “Call her so that -she comes near us, and I will give you these figures.” The boy then -called her. “Unless you come here, sister,” he said, “I cannot get -these playthings.” - -Kama came near. Then Ha-le-ma-no saw that she had the very height of -the maiden whom he had seen in his dreams. “Are you a favorite with -your sister, and would she mind if you asked her to turn her back to -us?” Lae-ni-hi said. The boy asked his sister to turn her back, and -then Ha-le-ma-no saw how straight her back was. After this Lae-ni-hi -said, “Are you a favorite with your sister, and would she mind if you -asked her to show her face to us?” After that Kama stood facing the -canoe, and Ha-le-ma-no saw that this was indeed the maiden of his -dream. - -Then they met, Ha-le-ma-no and Kama. The Princess knew him for the -youth she had seen in her dreams. She let him take her by the hands and -bring her into the canoe. When they were in the canoe Lae-ni-hi paddled -it off. The people of Puna and the people of Hilo came in chase of -them. But by the power that Lae-ni-hi had, the canoe was made to go so -swiftly that those who followed were left far behind. - - - -After this the two Kings said to each other: “Yes, we have sent much of -what we owned to her and to her parents with the idea that one or the -other of us would get her for his wife. Now she has been carried off -from us. Let us make war upon those who have taken her, and punish them -for having carried her off.” - -And so the two Kings made war upon Ha-le-ma-no’s people. Ha-le-ma-no -and Kama had to flee away. And after enduring much suffering and much -poverty they came to the Island of Maui. There they lived; but instead -of living in state and having plenty, they had to dig the ground and -live as a farmer and a farmer’s wife. - -Near where they lived there was a beach, and people used to go down to -it for surf-riding. One day Kama went down to this beach. She took a -board and went surf-riding. And when she was racing in on the surf she -remembered how she had once lived as a Princess, and she remembered how -Ha-le-ma-no had come and had taken her away, and how she had nothing -now but a grass hut and the roots that she and her husband pulled out -of the ground. And then she was angry with Ha-le-ma-no, and she longed -to be back again in Puna. - -When she finished surf-riding and came in on to the shore she saw that -there were red canoes there—the canoes of a King. And then she saw -Hua-a, the King of Puna. He came to her, and he took her by the hands. -She went with him, leaving her husband, who was working in his fields. -But in a while she was sorry for what she had done, and she left Hua-a. -And after that Kama went wandering through the Islands. - - - -Now when Ha-le-ma-no knew that his wife had left him, he grew so ill -that again he was near his death. But again his sister saved him. Then, -when he was well, Ha-le-ma-no told his sister that he would learn to be -a fisherman, for he thought that if he were something else than a -farmer Kama would come back to him. - -His sister told him to learn to be a singer and a chanter of verses; -she told him that, if he had that art, he would be most likely to win -his wife back to him. Ha-le-ma-no made up his mind to learn the art of -singing and of chanting verses. - -When he was on his way to learn this art he passed by a grove at -Ke-a-kui. He went within the grove, and he saw the mai-le vine growing -on the ohia trees. Then he began to strip the vine from the trees and -make wreaths of it. He was sitting down making the wreaths when he saw -the top of the mountain Ha-le-a-ka-la, like a pointed cloud in the -evening, with other clouds drifting about it. And when he looked upon -that mountain he thought of the places where he and his wife had -travelled. And as he was thinking of her, his wife, who had been -wandering about that Island, came near where he was. She saw him and -she knew him; she came and she stood behind him. And then Ha-le-ma-no, -looking upon the mountain, was moved to chant these verses: - - - “I was once thought a good deal of, O my love! - My companion of the shady trees. - For we two once lived on the food from the long-speared - grass of the wilderness. - Alas, O my love! - My love from the land of the Kau-mu-ku wind, - As it comes gliding over the ocean, - As it covers the waves of Papa-wai, - For it was the canoe that brought us here. - Alas, O my love! - My love of the home where we were friendless, - Our only friend being our love for one another. - It is hooked, and it bites to the very inside of the bones.” - - -Kama was going to put out her hand to touch him, but, hearing him chant -this, she thought that he was in such sorrow that he would never -forgive her. She wept and she went away, leaving the place without -speaking to him. - -After that Ha-le-ma-no went on his way; he learned the art of singing -and of chanting verses. Afterwards, when he was very famous, it -happened that he was invited to a place where there were games and -singing. - -He came to that place; covered over with a mantle, he sat by himself, -and he watched those who came in. Many people came in, and amongst them -a woman who wanted to be a wife to Ha-le-ma-no—a woman of great riches. -But as Ha-le-ma-no looked towards this woman, he saw sitting there, in -all her beauty and her grace, his own wife Kama. They asked him to -chant to them. Then he remembered how he and she had lived together and -had wandered together in different places; and, remembering this, he -chanted: - - - “We once lived in Hilo, in our own home, - For we had suffered in the home that was not ours, - For I had but one friend, myself. - The streams of Hilo are innumerable, - The high cliff was the home where we lived. - Alas, my love of the lehua blossoms of Moku-pa-ne! - The lehua blossoms that were braided with the hala blossoms, - For our love for one another was all that we had. - The rain fell only at Le-le-wi, - As it came creeping over the hala trees at Po-mai-kai, - At the place where I was punished through love. - Alas, O my love! - My love from the leaping cliffs of Pi-i-kea; - From the waters of Wai-lu-ku where the people are carried under, - Which we had to go through to get to the many cliffs of Hilo, - Those solemn cliffs that are bare of people, - Peopled by you and me alone, my love, - You, my own love!” - - -And when she heard these verses Kama knew who the man was who chanted -them. She bowed her head, and she chanted: - - - “Alas, thou art my bosom companion, my love! - My companion of the cold watery home of Hilo. - I am from Hilo, - From the rain that pelts the leaves of the bread-fruit - of Pi-i-honua; - For we live at the bread-fruit trees of Malama. - Love is shown by the tears, - Love is the friend of my companion, - My companion of the thick forests of Pana-ewa, - Where you and I have trod, - Our only fellow-traveller our love. - Alas, O my companion, my love! - My love of the cold, watery home of Hilo, - The friendless home where you and I lived.” - - -And when she had chanted this, Kama looked towards Ha-le-ma-no, and she -saw that forgiveness was in his eyes. They stood up then, and they -joined each other. Then they went away together. - - - “You will surely see Hai-li, - Hai-li where the blossoming lehua trees - Are haunted by the birds, - The o-o of the forest, - Whose sweet notes can be heard at eventide.” - - -So they sang to each other as they went away together. - - - - - - - - -THE ARROW AND THE SWING. - - -Hi-ku lived on a peak of the mountain, and Ka-we-lu lived in the -lowlands. Ka-we-lu was a princess, but at the time when she was in the -lowlands she had no state nor greatness; she was alone except for some -women who attended her. Hi-ku was a boy; he had a wonderful arrow that -was named Pua-ne. - -One day Hi-ku took his arrow and he went down towards the lowlands. He -met some boys who were casting their arrows, and he offered to cast his -against theirs. He cast his arrow; it went over the heads of a -bald-headed man and a sightless man; it went over the heads of a lame -man and a large-headed man; it went across the fields of many men, and -it fell at last before the door of the girl Ka-we-lu. - -Her women attendants brought the arrow to her. Ka-we-lu took it and hid -it. Then Hi-ku came along. “Have any of you seen my arrow?” he said to -the women attendants. “We have not seen it,” they said. “The arrow fell -here,” said Hi-ku, “for I watched it fall.” “Would you know your arrow -from another arrow?” asked the Princess from her house. “Know it! Why, -my arrow would answer if I called it,” answered Hi-ku. “Call it, then,” -said the Princess. “Pua-ne, Pua-ne,” Hi-ku called. “Here,” said Pua-ne -the arrow. “I knew you had hidden my arrow,” said Hi-ku. “Come and find -it,” said the Princess. - -He went into her house to search for the arrow, and the Princess closed -the door behind him. He found the arrow. He held the arrow in his hand, -and he did not go, for when he looked around he saw so many beautiful -things that he forgot what he had come for. - -He saw beautiful wreaths of flowers and beautiful capes of feathers; he -saw mats of many beautiful colors, and he saw shells and beautiful -pieces of coral. And he saw one thing that was more beautiful than all -these. He saw Ka-we-lu the Princess. In the middle of her dwelling she -stood, and her beauty was so bright that it seemed as if many ku-kui -were blazing up with all their light. Hi-ku forgot his home on the -mountain peak. He looked on the Princess, and he loved her. She had -loved him when she saw him coming towards her house; but she loved him -more when she saw him standing within it, his magic arrow in his hand. - -He stayed in her house for five days. Every day Ka-we-lu would go into -one of the houses outside and eat with her attendants. But neither on -the first day nor the second day, neither on the third day nor the -fourth day, nor yet on the fifth day, did she offer food to Hi-ku, nor -did she tell him where he might go to get it. - -He was hungry on the second day, and he became hungrier and hungrier -and hungrier. He was angry on the third day, and he became angrier and -angrier. And why did the Princess not offer him any food? I do not -know. Some say that it was because her attendants made little of him, -saying that the food they had was all for people of high rank, and that -it might not be given to Hi-ku, whose rank, they said, was a low one. -Perhaps her attendants prevented her giving food to him, saying such -things about him. - -On the fifth day, when Ka-we-lu was eating with her attendants in a -house outside, Hi-ku took up his arrow and went angrily out of the -house. He went towards the mountain. Then Ka-we-lu, coming out of the -house where her attendants were, saw him going. She ran up the side of -the mountain after him. But he went angrily on, and he never looked -backward towards the Princess or towards the lowlands that she lived -in. - -She went swiftly after him, calling to him as the plover calls, flying -here and there. She called to him, for she deeply loved him, and she -looked upon him as her husband. But he, knowing that she was gaining on -him, made an incantation to hold her back. He called upon the mai-le -vines and the i-e vines; he called upon the ohia trees and the other -branching trees to close up the path against her. But still Ka-we-lu -went on, struggling against the tangle that grew across her path. Her -garments were torn, and her body became covered with tears and -scratches. Still she went on. But now Hi-ku was going farther and -farther from her. Then she sang to him aloud, so that he could not but -hear: - - - “My flowers are fallen from me, - And Hi-ku goes on and on: - The flowers that we twined for my wreath. - If Hi-ku would fling back to me - A flower, since all mine are gone!” - - -He did not throw back a flower, nor did he call out a word to her as -she followed him up the mountain ways. The vines and the branches held -her, and she was not able to get through them. Then she raised her -voice, and she sang to him again: - - - “Do you hear, my companion, my friend! - Ka-we-lu will live there below: - My flowers are lost to me now: - Down, down, far down, I will go.” - - -Hi-ku heard what she sang. But he did not look back or make any answer. -He kept on his way up the mountain-side. Ka-we-lu was left behind, -entangled in the vines and the branches. Afterwards he was lost to her -sight, and her voice could not reach him. - -He went up to the peak of the mountain, and he entered his parents’ -house. And still he was angry. But after a night his anger went from -him. And then he thought of the young Princess of Kona, with her deep -eyes and her youth that was like the gush of a spring. More and more -her image came before him, and he looked upon it with love. - -Now one day, when he was again making his way up the mountain-side, a -song about himself and Ka-we-lu came into his mind. It was a song that -was for Lo-lu-pe, the god who brings together friends who have been -lost to each other. - - - “Hi-ku is climbing the mountain-ridge, - Climbing the mountain-ridge. - The branch hangs straggling down; - Its blossoms, flung off by Lo-lu-pe, lie on the ground. - Give me, too, a flower, O Lo-lu-pe, - That I may restore my wreath!” - - -And singing this song he went up to his parents’ house. - -Strangers were in the house. “Who are they, and what have they come -for?” Hi-ku asked. “Ka-we-lu, the young Princess of Kona, is dead,” his -parents told him, “and these people have come for timbers to build a -house around her dead body.” - -When Hi-ku heard this, he wept for his great loss. And then he left his -parents and went seeking the god Lo-lu-pe, for whom he had made a song -on his way up the mountain. - -Now Lo-lu-pe was in the form of a kite, because he went through the air -searching for things that people needed and prayed to him to find for -them. And outside a wizard’s house Hi-ku saw the image of Lo-lu-pe, a -kite that was like a fish, and with tail and wings. Hi-ku went and said -his prayer to Lo-lu-pe, and then he let the kite go in the winds. - -That night Lo-lu-pe came to him in his dream, and showed him where -Ka-we-lu was; she had gone down into the world that Mi-lu rules -over—the world of the dead that is below the ocean. And Lo-lu-pe, in -his dream, told him how he might come to her, and how he might bring -Ka-we-lu’s spirit back to the world of the living. - -He was to take the morning-glory vines, and he was to make out of them -the longest ropes that had ever been made. And to each of the long -ropes he was to fix the cross-piece of a swing. Then he was to let two -swings go down into the ocean’s depths, and he was to lower himself by -one of them. And what he was to do after that was twice told to him by -Lo-lu-pe. - -Hi-ku went where the morning-glory vines grew; he got the longest of -the vines and, with the friends who went with him, made the longest of -ropes. Then, with his friends, he went out over the ocean; he lowered -the two longest ropes that were ever made, each with the cross-piece of -a swing fixed to it. Down by one of the ropes Hi-ku went. And so he -came to the place of the spirits, to the place at the bottom of the sea -that Mi-lu rules over. - -And when he came down to that place he began to swing himself on one of -the swings. The spirits all saw him, and they all wanted to swing. But -Hi-ku kept the swing to himself; he swung himself, and as he swung, he -sang: - - - “I have a swing, a swing, - And the rest of you children have none: - Whom will I let on my swing? - Not one of this crowd, not one.” - - -The spirit of Ka-we-lu was standing there beside Mi-lu, the King. Hi-ku -saw her amongst the crowd of spirits. But Ka-we-lu did not know Hi-ku. - -Mi-lu came to where Hi-ku was swinging. He wanted to go on the swing. -Hi-ku gave him the seat. Then the spirits began to swing him, and Mi-lu -was so delighted with the swinging that he had all the spirits pull on -the ropes to swing him—the ropes that were on the cross-piece and that -were for pulling. - -Then Hi-ku went to Ka-we-lu. “Here is our swing,” he said, and he -brought her where the second vine-rope was hanging. He put her on the -seat, and he began to swing her. And as he swung her he chanted as they -chant in the upper world, the world of the living, when one is being -swung: - - - “Wounded is Wai-mea by the piercing wind; - The bud of the purple ohai is drooping; - Jealous and grieved is the flower of the ko-aie; - Pained is the wood of Wai-ka; - O Love! Wai-ka loves me as a lover; - Like unto a lover is the flower of Koo-lau; - It is the flower in the woods of Ma-he-le. - The wood is a place for journeying, - The wild pili grass has its place in the forests, - Life is but a simple round at Ka-hua. - O Love! Love it was which came to me; - Whither has it vanished? - O Love! Farewell.” - - -He chanted this, thinking that Ka-we-lu would remember her days in the -upper world when she heard what was chanted at the swinging-games. But -Ka-we-lu did not remember. - -Then Hi-ku went on the swing. “Come and swing with me,” he said, when -he got on the seat. “Sit upon my knees,” he said, “and I will cover -myself with my mantle.” - -Ka-we-lu jumped up, and she sat upon Hi-ku’s knees. They began to swing -backward and forward, backward and forward, while Mi-lu, the King of -the Dead, was being swung by the spirits. Then Hi-ku pulled on the -morning-glory vine. This was a signal; his friends did as he had told -them to do; they began to pull up the swing. Up, up, came Hi-ku, and up -came Ka-we-lu, held in Hi-ku’s arms. - -But Ka-we-lu shrank and shrank as she came up near the sunlight; she -shrank until she was smaller than a girl, smaller than a child; until -she was smaller than a bird, even. Hi-ku and she came to the surface of -the ocean. Then he, holding her, went back in his canoe and came to -where, the timbers built around it, her body was laid. He brought the -spirit to the body, the spirit that had shrunken, and he held the -spirit to the soles of the body’s feet. The spirit went in at the soles -of the feet; it passed up; it came to the breast; it came to the -throat. Having reached the throat, the spirit stayed in the body. Then -the body was taken up by Hi-ku; it was warmed, and afterwards Ka-we-lu -was as she had been before. Then these two, Ka-we-lu and Hi-ku, lived -long together in a place between the mountain and the lowlands, and -they wove many wreaths for each other, and they sang many songs to each -other, and they left offerings for Lo-lu-pe often—for Lo-lu-pe, who -brings to the people knowledge of where their lost things are. - - - - - - - - -THE DAUGHTER OF THE KING OF KU-AI-HE-LANI. - - -The Country that Supports the Heavens, Ku-ai-he-lani, was where Maki-i -lived and ruled as King. He came to one of our Islands, and there he -took a wife. After a while he had to go back to Ku-ai-he-lani, and -before he went he said this to the woman he had married: “I know that a -daughter will be born to us. I would have you name the girl -Lau-kia-manu. If, when you have brought her up, she has a desire to -come to live with me, let her make the journey to Ku-ai-he-lani. But -she must come in a red canoe with red sails and red cords, with red -bailing-cups, and with men in red to have charge of it. And she must be -accompanied by a large canoe and a small canoe, by big men and by -little men. And give her these; they will be tokens by which I shall -know her for my daughter—this necklace of whales’ teeth, this bracelet, -and this bright feather cloak.” Maki-i then gave the tokens to his -wife, and he departed for the land of Ku-ai-he-lani. - -A child was born to the wife whom he had left behind, and she named the -child Lau-kia-manu. Meanwhile Maki-i in his own land had planted a -garden and had filled it with lovely flowers, and another garden and -had filled it with pleasant fruits, and had made a bathing pool; he -made the gardens and the pool forbidden places to every one except the -daughter who might come to him in Ku-ai-he-lani. And he had instructed -the guards about the tokens by which they would know Lau-kia-manu, his -daughter. - -The girl grew up under her mother’s care. As she grew older she began -to ask about her father—who was he and where had he gone to? And once -when she asked about him, her mother said to her: “Go to the cliff -yonder; that is your father.” The child went to the cliff and asked: -“Are you my father?” The cliff denied it and said, “I am not your -father.” The child came back and craved of her mother, again, to tell -her who her father was. “Go to the bamboo bush yonder,” said her -mother; “that is your father.” The child went to the bamboo bush and -said, “Are you my father?” “I am not,” said the bamboo bush. “Maki-i is -your father.” “And where is he?” said the child. “He has gone back to -Ku-ai-he-lani.” - -She went back and said to her mother, “Maki-i is my father, and he is -in the land of Ku-ai-he-lani, and you have hidden this from me.” Her -mother said: “I have hidden it because if you went to visit him -terrible things would befall you. For he told me that you should go to -him in a red canoe with red sails and red cords, with red bailing-cups, -and with men in red to have charge of it. And he said that you should -be accompanied by a large canoe and a small canoe, by big men and -little men. He gave me tokens for you to bring also, but there is no -use in giving you these, for you cannot go except in the canoes he -spoke of, and there is no way by which you can come by possessions that -denote such royal state.” - -So her mother said, but Lau-kia-manu still had thoughts of going to -Ku-ai-he-lani, where her father was King. She grew to be a girl, and -then one day she said to her mother, “I have no way by which I can come -into possession of canoes that would denote my royal state, but for all -that I will make a journey to Ku-ai-he-lani; I will not remain here.” -Her mother said, “Go if you will, but terrible things will befall you.” -And then her mother said: “Go on and on until you come to where two old -women are roasting bananas by the wayside. They are your grandmother -and your grand-aunt. Reach down and take away the bananas they are -roasting. Let them search for them until they ask who has taken them. -Tell them then who you are. When they ask ‘What brings you this way?’ -say, ‘I have come because I must have a roadway.’ When you say this to -them, your grandmother and your grand-aunt will give you a roadway to -Ku-ai-he-lani.” - -Lau-kia-manu left her mother and went upon her way. She came where the -two old women were by the wayside, and she did as her mother had told -her. “Whose offspring are you?” asked the old women. “Your own,” said -Lau-kia-manu, and she told them the name of her mother. “What brings -you, lady, to us here?” asked the old women. And the girl answered, “I -have come to you because I want a roadway.” - -Thereupon one of the old women said: “Here is a roadway; it is this -bamboo stalk. Climb to the top of it, and when it leans over it will -reach into Ku-ai-he-lani.” Lau-kia-manu went to the top of the bamboo -stalk and sat there. It began to shoot up. When it reached a great -height it leaned over; the end of it reached Ku-ai-he-lani, the Country -that Supports the Heavens. - -Lau-kia-manu then went along until she came to a garden that was filled -with lovely flowers. She went into it. There grew the ilima and the -me-le ku-le and the mai-le vine. She gathered the vines and the -flowers, and she twined them into wreaths for herself. And she went -from that garden into another garden. There all kinds of pleasant -fruits were growing. She plucked and she ate of them. She saw beyond -that garden the clear, cool surface of a pool. She went there; she -undressed herself, and she bathed in that pool. And when she was in the -water there, a turtle came and rubbed her back. - -She dressed, and she sat on the edge of the pool. And then the guards -who had been placed over the flower garden and the fruit garden and the -bathing pool came to where she was. “You are indeed a strange girl,” -they said to her, “for you have plucked the flowers and the fruit in -the gardens that are forbidden to all except the King’s daughter, and -you have bathed in the pool that is for her alone. You will certainly -die for doing these things,” - -The guards went to Maki-i: they told him about the strange girl and -what she had done. The King ordered that they should tie her hands and -stand guard over her all night, and that when the dawn came they should -take her to the sea-shore and slay her there. - -The guards took Lau-kia-manu; they tied her hands, they flung her into -a pig-pen, and they remained on watch over her all night. At midnight -an owl came and perched over where the girl lay. Then the owl called -out to her: - - - “Say, Lau-kia-manu, - Daughter of Maki-i! - Do you know what will befall you? - Die you will, die you must!” - - -To that the girl made answer: - - - “Wicked owl, wicked owl! - You are bad indeed, - Thus to reveal me: - Lau-kia-manu, Lau-kia-manu, - Daughter of Maki-i.” - - -The call of the owl and the answer of the girl came twice before the -guards heard them. Then they stood up and they listened. They heard the -call again, and they heard the answer of the girl within the pig-pen. -Then one of the guards said, “This must be Lau-kia-manu, the King’s own -daughter; we must tell him about it all.” But the other guard said: -“No. Lau-kia-manu, the King’s daughter, was to come in a red canoe, -having red sails, red cords, and red bailing-cups, with men in red in -charge, and with a large canoe, a small canoe, big men, and little men -accompanying it. This is a low-class girl; she has come with none of -these things.” The owl spoke again, and the girl made answer, and when -they heard what was said the guards agreed that they should go to the -King and tell him all that they had heard. - -The King went back with the two guards. The owl was still above the -pig-pen, and the girl still within it. The owl called out: - - - “Say, Lau-kia-manu, - Daughter of Maki-i! - Do you know what will befall you? - Die you will, die you must!” - - -And to that the girl made answer: - - - “Wicked owl, wicked owl! - You are bad indeed, - Thus to reveal me: - Lau-kia-manu, Lau-kia-manu, - Daughter of Maki-i.” - - -When the King heard this he went into the pig-pen. - -Now, after the guards had gone to inform the King of what they had -heard the owl flew down upon Lau-kia-manu; it clapped its wings over -the girl; it placed the necklace of whales’ teeth around her neck, it -placed the bracelet upon her arm, it put the cloak of bright feathers -around her. For this owl was really her grand-aunt, and it was to her -that Lau-kia-manu’s mother had given the tokens by which the girl was -to be recognized when she came into Maki-i’s kingdom. - -When her father broke into the pig-pen he saw her standing there with -the necklace of whales’ teeth around her neck, with the bracelet upon -her wrist, and with the cloak of bright feathers around her. He took -her up and he wept over her; he gave her the garden of flowers and the -garden of fruits and the bathing pool with the clear cool water. Then, -in a while, he brought Ula to her. - -Ula was a prince from Kahiki-ku, and he was as handsome as she was -lovely. What a sight it was to see them together, Lau-kia-manu and Ula, -the prince from Kahiki-ku! “What light is that in yonder house?” he had -said to her father on the night that he came to Ku-ai-he-lani, “That is -not a light,” said Maki-i; “it is the radiance of the woman who is -within.” He brought Ula into the house, and Ula and Lau-kia-manu met. - -For fifty days they were together. Then Ula had to return to his own -land, to Kahiki-ku. “You cannot go there unless you take me with you,” -said Lau-kia-manu. “You cannot come with me,” said Ula. “If you came -you would meet with terrible suffering at the hands of the Queen of -Kahiki-ku.” - -He went back to his own land. Lau-kia-manu remained in Ku-ai-he-lani, -but she was so overcome by her love for Ula that, every morning when -she saw the clouds in the sky drifting towards Kahiki-ku, she would -chant this poem: - - - “The sun is up, it is up: - My love is ever up before me: - Love is a burthen when one is in love, - And falling tears are its due.” - - -She would weep then. And when she found out that she could not put her -love away from her, either by night or by day, she went down to the -sea-shore and she wept there. Then, when her weeping was at an end, she -called out, “O turtle with the shiny back, O my grandmother of the sea, -come to me.” - -The turtle with the shiny back appeared. She opened her shell at her -back. Lau-kia-manu went within the shell. Then the turtle went under -the water. She swam under the sea, and she swam on and on until she -came with Lau-kia-manu to the land of Kahiki-ku. The girl stepped on -the sea-shore, and the turtle dived into the ocean and disappeared. -Lau-kia-manu went along by the sea-shore. She came to where there was a -fish pond that belonged to the Queen of Kahiki-ku. She stayed beside -the fish pond while she uttered a charm, saying: - - - “Ye forty thousand gods, - Ye four hundred thousand gods, - Ye rows of gods, - Ye assemblies of gods, - Ye older brothers of the gods, - Ye four-fold gods, - Ye five-fold gods, - Take away from me my beauty, make it hidden: - Give me the form of a crone, bowed and blear-eyed.” - - -And when she had said that, her beauty was taken away from her, and she -appeared as an old woman, bent and wandering, with a stick in her hand, -gathering sea-eggs. - -In the fish pond there were many kinds of silver fish. Lau-kia-manu -uttered a spell, and caused them all to disappear a minute after she -had seen them swimming about. Still she stayed near, dragging herself -here and there about the sea-shore. And while she was there, messengers -came to bring from the Queen’s pond silver fish for the Queen. - -There was not a single fish in the pond. When the messengers saw this, -they accused the old woman who was near by of having taken the fish out -of the pond. She made no reply to them. Then nothing would do the -messengers but to take her before the Queen and charge her with having -stolen the silver fish out of her pond. - -So they brought her before the Queen. “There is not a single fish in -your pond,” they said, “and we found this old woman near it, going up -and down.” The Queen said, “Nothing will happen to you, old woman, if -you will take as your name the name of my sickness.” The old woman said -that she would do that. Then the Queen named her Li-pe-wa-le, the name -of the Queen’s sickness; she let her stay in the house, and she gave -her food. - -So Lau-kia-manu became known as Li-pe-wa-le. In the Queen’s house she -did menial tasks. And into the house came the Prince who was to wed the -Queen. He was Ula. Once when she was lying on her mat asleep, Ula came -and kissed Lau-kia-manu. She wakened up and cried out, “Who is kissing -me?” The Queen heard her voice and said, “What is it, Li-pe-wa-le?” -Lau-kia-manu made no answer. We can see by what Ula did that he knew -his sweetheart of Ku-ai-he-lani in spite of her being transformed into -an old woman. - -One day the Queen went down to the sea-shore to bathe. She bade -Li-pe-wa-le stay within the house and decorate a dress that she was to -wear. Li-pe-wa-le did as she was ordered. But she worked so quickly on -the dress that she had it all done very soon, and she was able to -follow the Queen and her attendants down to the sea-shore. And on her -way she caused herself to be transformed back into her own shape, with -her own beauty. She passed the others by; she bathed near where the -Queen bathed, and the Queen and all her attendants were able to look -upon her. Then she dressed herself and hurried away. - -They all hurried after her; the Queen was angry that one who was more -beautiful than she was should be in her country. Lau-kia-manu went more -quickly than they did, and when they came to the Queen’s house she had -already transformed herself, and the only one they saw there was -Li-pe-wa-le, the old and withered woman. - -That night the Queen and her attendants and Ula the Prince went to -dance in a house that the Queen had built. She put on her beautiful -wreaths with the dress that Li-pe-wa-le had decorated for her. But she -ordered Li-pe-wa-le to stay within the house and decorate another -dress. - -There she stayed, and the sounds of the music and the dancing came to -her. And then the girl went without. She looked over to the house where -the dance was going on, and she uttered this charm: - - - “Ye forty thousand gods, - Ye four hundred thousand gods, - Ye rows of gods, - Ye assemblies of gods, - Ye older brothers of the gods, - Ye gods that whisper, - Ye gods that watch by night, - Ye gods that show your gleaming eyes by night, - Come down, awake, make a move, stir yourselves! - There is the house, the house.” - - -And when she uttered this spell the Queen, who was dancing, fell down -on the ground. Fire burst out all around the house. And then -Lau-kia-manu, in the light of the fires, in the light of her own -beauty, stood in the doorway of the house. Ula the Prince saw her -there. “Come to me, oh, come to me, beautiful woman,” he said. But -Lau-kia-manu made answer: “I will not go to you now, nor ever again. In -your own country you did not cherish me, but you left me to sorrow and -affliction. Now I go back to Ku-ai-he-lani.” So she left the burning -house, and she went down to the sea-shore. She called upon the turtle -with the shiny back, her grandmother of the sea; and the turtle came -and opened the shell on her back, and Lau-kia-manu went within it. And -she journeyed through the ocean, under the waves, and came back again -to the land of Ku-ai-he-lani, and there ever afterwards she stayed. - - - - - - -THE FISH-HOOK OF PEARL. - - -There are fish-hooks and fish-hooks, but the most wonderful fish-hook -that any one ever heard of was the fish-hook owned by Ku-ula. It was a -fish-hook of pearl-shell; and every time Ku-ula went fishing he took a -canoe, not five fathoms or eight fathoms in length, but ten fathoms, -and when he fished with that hook (Ka-hu-oi was the name it had) the -canoe would be filled up with the catch. - -And it was the finest of fish, the aku fish, that would rise to that -hook. He would let it down into the water, and the aku would throw -themselves into the canoe. Ku-ula was rich because of all the fine fish -he could catch with his pearl hook. It had been given to him by a bird -that was called Ka-manu-wai, and this bird would sit on the rail of the -canoe that Ku-ula went fishing in and eat some of the fish that Ku-ula -caught. - -One day when Ku-ula went fishing outside of Mamala the King of that -place went fishing there too. The King caught few fish, and none of -them were fine ones. He looked, and he saw Ku-ula fishing, and he saw -that the aku fish were jumping in hundreds around the hook that the -fisherman let down. His attendants told him of the pearl hook that was -called Ka-hu-oi, and the King made up his mind to have this hook. He -sent for Ku-ula, and he made him give up the hook that the bird -Ka-manu-wai had given him. - -After that Ku-ula caught no more aku fish; the bird Ka-manu-wai, not -getting the food it liked, flew away; its eyes were closed with hunger -where it roosted, and the place where that bird roosted is called -Kau-maka-pili, “Roosting with Closed Eyes,” to this day. And Ku-ula got -poorer and poorer, and he and his family got more and more hungry from -that day. - -And so it came about that when his child Ai-ai was born they had no -food for him. They let him float down the stream, putting him in just -above the place where the bird Ka-manu-wai roosted. The child floated -down; a rock in the stream held him, and there little Ai-ai stayed in -the shallow water. That very day the King’s daughter, who was then a -young girl, was bathing in the stream with her attendants. She found -little Ai-ai, and she took him to the King’s house; there Ai-ai grew -up, and he was tended by the King’s daughter while he was a child. - -When he grew up he was a strong and handsome youth. The King’s daughter -who had saved him came to love him; she would have him marry her, and -at last he and she got married. - -It happened that one day after they were married his wife was sick, and -she asked Ai-ai to get her some fish. He took a rod, and he went -fishing along the shore. He caught a few fish, and he brought them home -to her. After a while she was sick again, and she had a longing for -fish again. And this time she wanted the aku, the fine fish from the -depth of the sea. - -He told her then that he could not fish for aku unless he had a canoe -and a fish-hook of pearl. When she heard him say that, she remembered -that her father had a pearl fish-hook. So she went to the King, her -father. When she came before him, he said, “What is it you want, my -daughter?” She said, “A canoe for my husband, and a pearl fish-hook.” -He told her that her husband might take a canoe out of his canoe-shed, -and then he said to her, “I have a pearl fish-hook, and I will give it -to you for him.” - -So he gave a pearl fish-hook to his daughter, and she hurried home with -it. Now Ai-ai, since he had grown up, had known his father and had -heard how the King had taken away the hook Ka-hu-oi from him. So when -he saw the pearl fish-hook in his wife’s hands he was overjoyed; he -took it from her, and he got a canoe in the King’s shed, and he went -out to fish in the sea. - -A bird came down and watched the shining fish-hook that he held. It -rested on the rail of the canoe as he paddled out to sea. It watched -him lower the hook. Its eyes were half closed, but now it opened them -wide and looked down after the shining hook. This was the bird -Ka-manu-wai that had given the hook to his father, Ai-ai knew; now the -bird was going to eat plenty of the fine aku. - -But no aku came on the hook, and no aku dashed up on the canoe on -seeing the shining thing in the water. The bird closed its eyes again. -It gave a croak and then flew away. - -Ai-ai came back to his wife without any aku for her. Again she was -sick, and she begged Ai-ai again to get her the aku fish. “It may be,” -he said, “that the King has another pearl hook. Go to him once more and -ask him for one. Tell him that in the calabash in which he keeps the -fishing utensils that he used long ago there may be another pearl -fish-hook.” - -So again she went before the King. “I have come for a pearl fish-hook -so that my husband may go out and catch me the aku fish that I long -for.” “I gave the pearl fish-hook that I had.” “In the calabash in -which you keep the fishing utensils that you used long ago there may be -another pearl fish-hook.” - -The King ordered that this calabash be brought to him. He searched -amongst all the utensils that were in it, and at last he found the -pearl fish-hook that he had taken. He had left it there and had -forgotten it, for he had gone fishing only once after he had taken it -from Ku-ula. - -And now he gave the hook Ka-hu-oi to his daughter. She hurried home, -and she put the pearl hook into the hands of her husband Ai-ai. He went -straight down to the beach and took out the canoe and went fishing in -the place where his father used to go. As he went the bird Ka-manu-wai -flew down and lighted on the rail of the canoe. It opened wide its eyes -to watch him let down the shining hook. - -When he came to Mamala the aku began to jump to the hook. They threw -themselves up and into the canoe. They filled it up—even that -ten-fathom canoe was deep with them, and Ai-ai was hardly strong enough -to paddle it back. The bird Ka-manu-wai ate of the fish, and as it ate -the gleam came back into its plumage, and it was a wide-eyed, -strong-winged bird once more. - -It took the pearl fish-hook and flew away with it. But every day it -would come back with the hook when Ai-ai took out his canoe. The bird -guarded the hook and would never let it go into a stranger’s hands -again. Sometimes it would bring Ka-hu-oi to Ku-ula, Ai-ai’s father; for -the old man took to going out in his canoe again, and he would fish for -aku outside of Mamala. - - - - - - - - -THE STORY OF KANA, THE YOUTH WHO COULD STRETCH HIMSELF UPWARDS. - - -Kana and Ni-he-u were brothers. Ni-he-u was such a great warrior that -he would fight against a whole army without thinking about the odds, -and he was able to carry such a war-club that, by resting one end of it -in his canoe and putting the other end against a cliff, he could walk -from the canoe on to the land. Certainly an extraordinary man was -Ni-he-u. - -But if Ni-he-u was extraordinary, Kana was many times more -extraordinary. And what an extraordinary life Kana had! When he was -born he was in the form of a piece of rope—just a piece of rope! But -his grandmother (Uli was her name) took him to her house and reared -him. As he began to grow she had to have a special house built for him; -it had to be a very long house, a house that had to be lengthened out -as Kana kept growing. At last the house that Kana lived in stretched -from the mountains to the edge of the sea. - -The name of the mother of Ni-he-u and Kana was Hina. She was carried -away from her husband, the boys’ father. And the way Hina was carried -away was very remarkable. - -There was a Chief named Pe-pe’e who wanted to take Hina. He owned a -hill that was called Hau-pu. He lived on that hill; it was very -strange, but he was able to make that hill move about and do things for -him. I have heard that the hill was really a turtle, and that its real -name was Ka-honu-nunui ma-eleka. And if that was so, it is easy to see -how Pe-pe’e could get it to move about and do things for him. - -One of the things that it did for him was to carry off Hina, the mother -of Ni-he-u and Kana. The hill came across the sea from Mo-lo-kai to -Hilo, carrying Pe-pe’e and his people upon it. Hina saw the hill when -it came over to Hilo. It looked so fresh and so green that she thought -it would be nice to walk upon it. So she went over and she climbed up -Hau-pu. And then, all at once, the hill moved from Hilo and went over -to the Island of Mo-lo-kai. - -When Ni-he-u heard that his mother had been carried off he went to his -father and said: “Neither I nor you can get to her and bring her back. -Only Kana, my brother, can do that. You must go to him yourself, my -father, and ask him to do it. Don’t be afraid of him and run away if he -should turn and look at you. Just keep your eyes away from him, and -then you won’t be frightened.” After Ni-he-u had told him this, the -Chief, his father, went off to find Kana. - -When he came to where his son was living, Kana looked at him, and the -sight of Kana was so terrible that his father turned around and would -have run away. But Kana called to him and said, “What have you come -for?” “I have come to tell you that the mother of you two has been -carried off by Pe-pe’e, the Chief of the Hill of Hau-pu, and she is now -in Mo-lo-kai, and unless you, Kana, go to bring her back, no one can -bring her back.” - -When Kana heard this, he said, “Go and call all your people together -and order them to hew out a canoe by which we can get to Mo-lo-kai.” -The Chief then went back, and he sent out an order to his people: they -should gather together and hew out a great double canoe that would be -ten fathoms in length. His people did as they were ordered. Then they -thought that all was ready for the voyage to Mo-lo-kai. - -But when the double canoe was brought down to where Kana was, he just -stretched out his hand and laid it upon it, and the canoe sank out of -sight. Other canoes of the same length were hewn out. But Kana did the -same thing to them; he laid his hand on one after another of them, and -one after another they all sank down into the sea. His father and the -men of the Island were left without a canoe in which to make the voyage -to Mo-lo-kai. - -When the Chief told this to his son Ni-he-u, Ni-he-u said, “Then the -only thing to do is to go to Uli, my grandmother and Kana’s -grandmother, and ask her what we are to do about it.” The Chief went to -her. And when he came before Uli, she said, “What have you come for?” -“I have come for a canoe for Kana, in which he will be able to make the -voyage to Mo-lo-kai and fight Pe-pe’e, who lives on the hill Hau-pu, -and bring back Hina, my wife, to me.” - -And when he had told her that, Uli said: “There is only one canoe that -Kana can travel in; it is in Pali-uli, and it is buried there. Go, get -all your people together and send them off to get that canoe.” And Uli -chanted: - - - “Go, get it, - Go, get it, - Go, get the canoe: - The canoe that is covered with the cloak of the old woman; - The canoe that jumps playfully in the calm; - The canoe that rises and eats the cords that bind it: - Go, get it, - Go, get it, - Go, get the canoe.” - - -She told the Chief where to dig and how to dig for the canoe that would -bring Kana to Mo-lo-kai. - -So he took his men to Pali-uli, and there they all began to dig. The -men all thought that their labor would be in vain, for they never -expected that they would come by a canoe by digging for it. They worked -in the rain and under the thunder and lightning. And when they had dug -for the whole length of a day they came, first on the sticks at the bow -and stern of the canoe, and then the body of it. It was a great double -canoe. With much labor it was dragged down to the sea. - -Then Ni-he-u and Kana made ready to go aboard it with their father and -his people and sail over to the Island of Mo-lo-kai. And that night -Pe-pe’e’s wizard—Moi was his name—had a dream; he went to Pe-pe’e about -it. He told the Chief what he had dreamt, and it was this: - - - “A long man, a short man, - A stunted youth, a god-man. - The eyes touched the heaven, - The earth was o’ershadowed: - Such was my dream.” - - -And when Pe-pe’e asked him what the dream meant, he said: “It means -that the borders of Hau-pu will be broken and that the hill will fall -to pieces in the sea. Therefore, depart from this place now while your -death is still at a distance.” - -Pe-pe’e was very angry when his wizard told him this. “You are the one -that death is close to, you deceiving wizard. And if my hill is not -conquered in the coming fight, look out, for I shall kill you.” - -Then Pe-pe’e made preparations against the people who were coming -against him. He sent the plover, Ko-lea, and the wandering tattler, -Uli-li, to fly around and look out for Kana and Ni-he-u. And he told -them to go also to his warrior, the one who had charge of. the ocean, -Ke-au-lei-na-kahi the Sword-fish, and command him to pierce the canoe -that was coming and slay Ni-he-u and Kana. - -So Ko-lea the Plover, and Uli-li the Tattler, flew around until they -came to the place where Kana was lying. Said Ko-lea to Uli-li, “Let us -fly so high that we shall be out of reach of his long arms, and then -let us call out to him and tell him that he is going to be killed.” So -the plover and the wandering tattler, flying high, called out to Kana. -He lifted his hands to catch the birds; if he had not been lying down -he would have caught them, so high did his hands stretch up. The birds -went higher. But the wind that was made with the sweep of his arms sent -them far over the sea. There they hovered above Ke-au-lei-na-kahi the -Swordfish. “You are commanded to pierce the double canoe that is coming -over the ocean, and to kill Ni-he-u and Kana,” they said. - -Kana and Ni-he-u boarded the canoe. Kana folded himself into many -folds, but for all his folding he took up the full length of the canoe. -When they were halfway across they were met by Ke-au-lei-na-kahi the -Sword-fish. He smote the canoe with the sword that was in his snout. He -thought he could pierce it and then slay Ni-he-u and Kana. But Ni-he-u -stood up, and with his great war-club he struck at the Sword-fish. He -killed Ke-au-lei-na-kahi there and then, and after that there was no -one to guard the seas before them. - -So they came before where the hill Hau-pu was standing. Hau-pu rolled a -great rock towards the canoe. Kana was lying on the platform of the -canoe, and the people shouted that the rock was coming. “We shall be -killed, we shall all be killed,” they shouted. Then Kana stretched -himself out. He put out his hand, and he stopped the rock. He held the -rock with his right hand, and with his left hand he picked up a small -stone from the beach and placed it under the rock; that stopped it from -rolling any farther. It was stopped halfway down a steep cliff, and -there that rock is to be seen to this day. - -The canoe was saved and the people were saved from destruction. Then -Ni-he-u started off. He wanted to go by himself to the top of Hau-pu -and rescue his mother all alone. He did not know what I have already -told you, that the hill was really a turtle; it was, and it had -flippers on its sides; when it closed these flippers the hill would -rise up; it could keep on rising until it touched the sky. - -Around the house that was on the top of the hill there was a fence of -thick and wide leaves—they were thick enough and wide enough to keep -the wind from the Chief’s house. When Ni-he-u came up to this fence he -began to beat the leaves down with his great war-club. Then the wind -that was around the hill-top blew upon the house that was called -Ha-le-hu-ki. “What has caused the wind to blow on my house?” said -Pe-pe’e. “There is a boy outside with a club, and he has beaten down -your fence,” said his watchmen. “It is Ni-he-u, my brave son. He is -without fear,” said Hina. - -Then Ni-he-u came in. He took hold of Hina and started to carry her off -and down the hill. And as they were going Hina said, very foolishly: -“What great strength you have, my brave son! And who would have known -that all that strength is in the strands of your hair?” Ko-lea and -Uli-li heard what she said. They flew after them; they flew down, and -they held Ni-he-u by the hair. - -Then Ni-he-u had to put Hina down while he took up his club and fought -with the birds. They were drawing his strength away as they pulled out -of his head the strands of his hair. He struck at Ko-lea and Uli-li. -But while he was striking at them, Hina, frightened, ran back to the -Chief’s house. - -When Ni-he-u came down to the canoe he was questioned by Kana. “Where -is our mother?” “I had taken her; we were on our way when I was -attacked by two birds. I had to lay her down; then she was frightened, -and she ran back, and I could not go back to fetch her again, or all my -strength would have been drawn from me by the birds.” “Now you stay and -watch in the canoe while I go to rescue our mother,” said Kana. - -With that he stood up in the canoe and peeped over the hill Hau-pu. -Then Kana rose above the hill. He stretched himself until he was up in -the blue of the sky. The hill rose up too. Kana had to stretch himself -and stretch himself. And as he stretched himself he became thinner and -thinner. When he stood up in the blue of the sky his body was as thin -as the thread of a spider’s web. - -Now all that Ni-he-u could see of his brother was his legs, and he saw -them grow thinner and thinner as the days passed and Kana had no food. -Ni-he-u knew that Kana was starving. He shouted up to him, “Lie over -towards Kona, towards the house of Uli, our grandmother, and she will -give you something to eat.” - -It took three days for the words that Ni-he-u shouted to reach Kana. At -last he heard the words, and he stooped over the sea and over the -mountain He-le-a-ka-la. (It was then that he made the groove in the -mountain that is there to this day.) And so he reached to Kona, and he -put his head down at his grandmother’s door. - -There he stayed until Uli rose up in the morning. She went outside, and -there she saw Kana, her grandson. She began to feed him. She fed him, -and she fed him, and she fed him. He got fat in his body, and then the -fatness of his body began to reach down into his legs. Ni-he-u saw the -fatness coming on the legs that were in the canoe where he watched and -waited. - -Ni-he-u watched the legs getting fatter and fatter. But still he had to -wait, for his brother was doing nothing. Then he became angry, and he -made a cut in one of Kana’s legs. - -It was three days before the numbness of this cut reached up to Kana’s -head. At last it came to him, and then he spoke to his grandmother -about it. “It is because your brother Ni-he-u is angry with you because -you have not remembered him or your mother, but stay here all the time -feeding yourself, and he has made a cut in your leg.” Then his -grandmother said, “The hill keeps towering up, but if you rise up above -it, and then stoop over and break off the flipper on the right side -(for the hill is really a turtle, as I have told you), and then stoop -over and break off the flipper on the left side, it will not be able to -rise up any more, and you will then be able to conquer it.” - -When he heard that said, Kana arose once more. He extended himself up. -He towered over Hau-pu. Then he stooped over, and he reached down, and -he broke off the flipper that was on the right side. Again he stooped -over, and he broke off the flipper that was on the left side. And when -these two flippers were broken off the power went out of Hau-pu. It -rose no more. Then Kana stepped on the hill, and it broke to pieces. -The pieces fell into the sea. They were left there in the forms of -rocks and little hills. There they are to this day, and that is all -that is left of the hill that carried off Hina. - -The Chief Pe-pe’e was conquered, for he had no power after his hill was -destroyed. Kana and Ni-he-u took back their mother in the canoe, and -she lived ever afterwards with her own husband in her own house. But -Kana did not live there. He went to stretch himself in the long house -that went from the mountains to the edge of the sea. And this ends the -story of Kana’s victory over the hill Hau-pu. - - - - - - - - -THE ME-NE-HU-NE. - - -Ka-u-ki-u-ki—that was the name of the Me-ne-hu-ne who boasted to the -rest of his folk that he could catch the Moon by holding on to her -legs; Ka-u-ki-u-ki, the Angry One. - -The Me-ne-hu-ne folk worked only at night; and if one could catch and -hold on to the legs of the Moon, the night would not go so quickly, and -more work could be done by them. They were all very great workers. But -when the Angry One made his boast about catching the legs of the Moon, -the rest of the Me-ne-hu-ne made mock of him. That made Ka-u-ki-u-ki -more angry still. Straightway he went up to the top of the highest -hill. He sat down to rest himself after his climb; then, they say, the -Owl of Ka-ne came and sat on the stones and stared at him. Ka-u-ki-u-ki -might well have been frightened, for the big, round-eyed bird could -easily have flown away with him, or flown away with any of the -Me-ne-hu-ne folk. For they were all little men, and none of them was -higher than the legs of one of us—no, not even their Kings and Chiefs. -Little men, broad-shouldered and sturdy and very active—such were the -Me-ne-hu-ne in the old days, and such are the Me-ne-hu-ne to-day. - -But Ka-u-ki-u-ki was brave: the Me-ne-hu-ne stared back at the Owl, and -the Owl of Ka-ne stared back at the little man, and at last the bird -flew away. Then it was too late for him to try to lay hold on the legs -of the Moon that night. - -That was a long time ago, when the Me-ne-hu-ne were very many in our -land. They lived then in the Valley of Lani-hula. There they planted -taro in plants that still grow there—plants that they brought back with -them from Kahiki-mo-e after they had been there. It was they who -planted the bread-fruit tree first in that valley. - -Our fathers say that when the men-folk of the Me-ne-hu-ne stood -together in those days they could form two rows reaching all the way -from Maka-weli to Wai-lua. And with their women and children there were -so many of them that the only fish of which each of the Me-ne-hu-ne -could have one was the shrimp, the littlest and the most plentiful fish -in our waters. - -For the rest of their food they had hau-pia, a pudding made of -arrow-root sweetened with the milk of coco-nut; they had squash and -they had sweet potato pudding. They ate fern fronds and the cooked -young leaves of the taro. They had carved wooden dishes for their food. -For their games they had spinning-tops which they made out of ku-kui -nuts, and they played at casting the arrow, a game which they called -Kea-pua. They had boxing and wrestling, too, and they had tug-of-war: -when one team was about to be beaten all the others jumped in and -helped them. They had sled races; they would race their sleds down the -steep sides of hills; if the course were not slippery already, they -would cover it with rushes so that the sleds could go more easily and -more swiftly. - -But their great sport was to jump off the cliffs into the sea. They -would throw a stone off the cliff and dive after it and touch the -bottom as it touched the bottom. Once, when some of them were bathing, -a shark nearly caught one of the Me-ne-hu-ne. A-a-ka was his name. Then -they all swam ashore, and they made plans for punishing the shark that -had treated them so. Their wise men told them what to do. They were to -gather the morning-glory vine and make a great basket with it. Then -they were to fill the basket with bait and lower it into the sea. -Always the Me-ne-hu-ne worked together; they worked together very -heartily when they went to punish the shark. - -They made the basket; they filled it with bait, and they lowered it -into the sea. The shark got into the basket, and the Me-ne-hu-ne caught -him. They pulled him within the reef, and they left him there in the -shallow water until the birds came and ate him up. - -One of them caught a large fish there. The fish tried to escape, but -the little man held bravely to him. The fish bit him and lashed him -with its tail and drew blood from the Me-ne-hu-ne. The place where his -blood poured out is called Ka-a-le-le to this day—for that was the name -of the Me-ne-hu-ne who struggled with the fish. - -Once they hollowed out a great stone and they gave it to their head -fisherman for a house. He would sit in his hollow stone all day and -fish for his people. - -No cliff was too steep for them to climb; indeed, it was they who -planted the wild taro on the cliffs; they planted it in the swamps too, -and on cliff and in swamp it grows wild to this day. When they were on -the march they would go in divisions. The work of the first division -would be to clear the road of logs. The work of the second division -would be to lower the hills. The work of the third division would be to -sweep the path. Another division had to carry the sleds and the -sleeping mats for the King. One division had charge of the food, and -another division had charge of the planting of the crop. One division -was composed of wizards and soothsayers and astrologers, and another -division was made up of story-tellers, fun-makers, and musicians who -made entertainment for the King. Some played on the nose-flute, and -others blew trumpets that were made by ripping a ti-leaf away from the -middle ridge and rolling over the torn piece. Through this they blew, -varying the sound by fingering. They played stringed instruments that -they held in their mouths, and they twanged the strings with their -fingers. Others beat on drums that were hollow logs with shark-skin -drawn across them. - -It would have been wonderful to look on the Me-ne-hu-ne when they were -on the march. That would be on the nights of the full moon. Then they -would all come together, and their King would speak to them. - -And that reminds me of Ka-u-ki-u-ki, the Angry One. Perhaps he wanted -to hold the legs of the Moon so that they might be able to listen a -long time to their King, or march far in a night. I told you that he -kept staring at the Owl of Ka-ne until the bird flew away in the night. -But then it was too late to catch hold of the legs of the Moon. The -next night he tried to do it. But although he stood on the top of the -highest hill, and although he reached up to his fullest height, he -could not lay hold on the legs of the Moon. And because he boasted of -doing a thing that he could not do, the rest of the Me-ne-hu-ne -punished him; they turned him into a stone. And a stone the Angry One -is to this day—a stone on the top of the hill from which he tried to -reach up and lay hold upon the legs of the Moon. - -Perhaps it was on the very night which Ka-u-ki-u-ki tried to lengthen -that their King told the Me-ne-hu-ne that they were to leave these -Islands. Some of the Me-ne-hu-ne had married Hawaiian women, and -children that were half Me-ne-hu-ne and half Hawaiian were born. The -King of the Me-ne-hu-ne folk did not like this: he wanted his people to -remain pure Me-ne-hu-ne. So on a bright moonlit night he had them all -come together, men, women, and children, and he spoke to them. “All of -you,” he said, “who have married wives from amongst the Hawaiian people -must leave them, and all of the Me-ne-hu-ne race must go away from -these Islands. The food that we planted in the valley is ripe; that -food we will leave for the wives and children that we do not take with -us—the Hawaiian women and the half-Hawaiian children.” - -When their King said this, no word was spoken for a long time from the -ranks of the Me-ne-hu-ne. Then one whose name was Mo-hi-ki-a spoke up -and said: “Must all of us go, O King, and may none of us stay with the -Hawaiian wives that we have married? I have married an Hawaiian woman, -and I have a son who is now grown to manhood. May he not go with you -while I remain with my wife? He is stronger than I am. I have taught -him all the skill that I possessed in the making of canoes. He can use -the adze and make a canoe out of a tree trunk more quickly than any -other of the Me-ne-hu-ne. And none of the Me-ne-hu-ne is so swift in -the race as he is. Take my son in my place, and if it ever happens that -the Me-ne-hu-ne need me, my son can run quickly for me and bring me -back.” - -The King would not have Mo-hi-ki-a stay behind. “We start on our -journey to-morrow night,” he said. “All the Me-ne-hu-ne will leave the -Islands, and the crop that is now grown will be left for the women and -children.” - -And so the Me-ne-hu-ne in their great force left our Islands, and where -they went there is none of us who know. Perhaps they went back to -Kahiki-mo-e, for in Kahiki-mo-e they had been for a time before they -came back to Hawaii. But not all of the Me-ne-hu-ne left the Islands. -Some stole away from their divisions and hid in hollow logs, and their -descendants we have with us to this day. There are still many -Me-ne-hu-ne away up in the mountains, living in caves and in hollow -logs. - -But the great force of them left the Islands then. Before they went -they made a monument. Upon the top of the highest hill they built it, -carrying up the stones the night after the King had commanded them to -leave. The monument was for the King and the Chiefs of the -Me-ne-hu-ne—the monument of stones that we see. And for the Me-ne-hu-ne -of common birth they made another monument. This they did by hollowing -out a great cave in the mountain. The monument of stones on the top of -the mountain and the cave in the side of the mountain you can see to -this day. - -On the next moonlit night the Me-ne-hu-ne in their thousands looked and -saw the monuments they had raised. They were ready for the march as -they looked, men and women, half-grown men and half-grown women, and -little children. They looked and they saw the monument that they had -raised on the mountain. Thereupon all the little men raised such a -shout that the fish in the pond of No-mi-lu, at the other side of the -Island, jumped in fright, and the moi, the wary fish, left the beaches. -And then, with trumpets sounding, flutes playing, and drums beating, -the Me-ne-hu-ne started off. - - - -O my younger brothers, I wish there were some amongst us, the Hawaiians -of to-day, who knew the Me-ne-hu-ne of the mountains and who could go -to them. All the work that it takes us so long to do, they could do in -a night. Here we go every day to cut sandalwood for our King. We go -away from our homes and our villages, leaving our crops unplanted and -untended. We are up in the mountains by the first light of the morning, -working, working with our axes to cut the sandalwood. And we go back at -the fall of night carrying the loads of sandalwood upon our shoulders -the whole way down the mountain-side. Ah, if there were any amongst us -who knew the Me-ne-hu-ne or who knew how to come to them! In one night -the Me-ne-hu-ne would cut all the sandalwood for us! And the night -after they would carry it down on their shoulders to the beach, where -it would be put on the ships that would take it away to the land of the -Pa-ke. But only those who are descendants of the Me-ne-hu-ne can come -to them. - -A long time ago a King ruled in Kau-ai whose name was Ola. His people -were poor, for the river ran into the stony places and left their -fields without water. “How can I bring water to my people?” said Ola -the King to Pi, his wizard. “I will tell you how you can do it,” Pi -said. And then he told the King what to do so as to get the help of the -Me-ne-hu-ne. - -Pi, the wise man, went into the mountains. He was known to the -Me-ne-hu-ne who had remained in the land, and he went before their -Chief, and he asked him to have his people make a water-course for -Ola’s people: they would have to dam the river with great stones and -then make a trench that would carry the water down to the people’s -fields—a trench that would have stones fitted into its bed and fitted -into its sides. - -All the work that takes us days to do can be done by the Me-ne-hu-ne in -the space of a night. And what they do not finish in a night is left -unfinished. “Ho po hookahi, a ao ua pau,” “In one night and it is -finished,” say the Me-ne-hu-ne. - -Well, in one night all the stones for the dam and the water-course were -made ready: one division went and gathered them, and another cut and -shaped them. The stones were all left together, and the Me-ne-hu-ne -called them “the Pack of Pi.” - -Now King Ola had been told what he was to have done on the night that -followed. There was to be no sound and there was to be no stir amongst -his people. The dogs were to be muzzled so that they could not bark, -and the cocks and the hens were to be put into calabashes so that there -should be no crowing from them. Also a feast was to be ready for the -Me-ne-hu-ne. - -Down from the mountain in the night came the troops of the Me-ne-hu-ne, -each carrying a stone in his hand. Their trampling and the hum of their -voices were heard by Pi as he stayed by the river; they were heard -while they were still a long way off. They came down, and they made a -trench with their digging tools of wood. Then they began to lay the -stones at the bottom and along the sides of the trench; each stone -fitted perfectly into its place. While one division was doing this the -other division was building the dam across the river. The dam was -built, the water was turned into the course, and Pi, standing there in -the moonlight, saw the water come over the stones that the Me-ne-hu-ne -had laid down. - -Pi, and no one else, saw the Me-ne-hu-ne that night: half the size of -our men they were, but broad across the chest and very strong. Pi -admired the way they all worked together; they never got into each -other’s way, and they never waited for some one else to do something or -to help them out. They finished their work just at daybreak; and then -Pi gave them their feast. He gave a shrimp to each; they were well -satisfied, and while it was still dark they departed. They crossed the -water-course that was now bringing water down to the people’s taro -patches. - -And as they went the hum of their voices was so loud that it was heard -in the distant island of Oahu. “Wawa ka Menehune i Puukapele, ma Kauai, -puoho ka manu o ka loko o Kawainui ma Koolaupoko, Oahu,” our people -said afterwards. “The hum of the voices of the Me-ne-hu-ne at -Pu-u-ka-pe-le, Kau-ai, startled the birds of the pond of Ka-wai-nui, at -Ko’o-lau-po-ko, Oahu.” - - - -Look now! The others from our village are going down the mountain-side, -with the loads of sandalwood upon their backs. It is time we put our -loads upon our shoulders and went likewise. As we go I will tell you -the only other story I know about the Me-ne-hu-ne. - -There was once a boy of your age, O my younger brother, and his name -was Laka. As he grew up he was petted very much by his father and his -mother. And while he was still a young boy his father took a canoe and -went across the sea to get a toy for him. Never afterwards did Laka see -his father. - -He grew up, and he would often ask about his father. His mother could -tell him nothing except that his father had gone across the sea in a -canoe and that it was told afterwards that he had been killed in a cave -by a bad man. The more he grew up the more he asked about his father. -He told his mother he would go across the sea in search of him. But the -boy could not go until he had a canoe. “How am I to get a canoe?” he -said to his mother one day. - -“You must go to your grandmother,” said she, “and she will tell you -what to do to get a canoe.” - -So to his grandmother Laka went. He lived in her house for a while, and -then he asked her how he might get a canoe. - -“Go to the mountains and look for a tree that has leaves shaped like -the new moon,” said his grandmother. “Take your axe with you. When you -find such a tree, cut it down, for it is the tree to make a canoe out -of.” - -So Laka went to the mountains. He brought his axe with him. All day he -searched in the woods, and at last he found a tree that had leaves -shaped like the new moon. He commenced to cut through its trunk with -his little axe of stone. At nightfall the trunk was cut through, and -the tree fell down on the ground. - -Then, well content with his day’s work, Laka went back to his -grandmother’s. The next day he would cut off the branches and drag the -trunk down to the beach and begin to make his canoe. He went back to -the mountains. He searched and searched through all the woods, but he -could find no trace of the tree that he had cut down with so much -labor. - -He went to the mountains again the day after. He found another tree -growing with leaves shaped like the new moon. With his little stone axe -he cut through the trunk, and the tree fell down. Then he went back to -his grandmother’s, thinking that he would go the next day and cut off -the branches and bring the trunk down to the beach. - -But the next day when he went to the mountains there was no trace of -the tree that he had cut down with so much labor. He searched for it -all day, but could not find it. The next day he had to begin his labor -all over again: he had to search for a tree that had leaves like the -new moon, he had to cut through the trunk and let it lie on the ground. -After he had cut down the third tree he spoke to his grandmother about -the trees that he had cut and had lost sight of. His wise grandmother -told him that, if the third tree disappeared, he was to dig a trench -beside where the next tree would fall. And when that tree came down he -was to hide in the trench beside it and watch what would happen. - -When Laka went up to the mountain the next day he found that the tree -he had cut was lost to his sight like the others. He found another tree -with leaves shaped like the new moon. He began to cut this one down. -Near where it would fall he dug a trench. - -It was very late in the evening when he cut through this tree. The -trunk fell, and it covered the trench he had made. Then Laka went under -and hid himself. He waited while the night came on. - -Then, while he was waiting, he heard the hum of voices, and he knew -that a band of people were drawing near. They were singing as they came -on. Laka heard what they sang. - - - “O the four thousand gods, - O the forty thousand gods, - O the four hundred thousand gods, - O the file of gods, - O the assembly of gods! - O gods of these woods, - Of the mountain, the knoll, - Of the dam of the water-course, O descend!” - - -Then there was more noise, and Laka, looking up from the trench, saw -that the clearing around him was all filled with a crowd of little men. -They came where the tree lay, and they tried to move it. Then Laka -jumped out of the trench, and he laid hands upon one of the little -people. He threatened to kill him for having moved away the trees he -had cut. - -As he jumped up all the little people disappeared. Laka was left with -the one he held. - -“Do not kill me,” said the little man. “I am of the Me-ne-hu-ne, and we -intend no harm to you. I will say this to you: if you kill me, there -will be no one to make the canoe for you, no one to drag it down to the -beach, making it ready for you to sail in. If you do not kill me, my -friends will make the canoe for you. And if you build a shed for it, we -will bring the canoe finished to you and place it in the shed.” - -Then Laka said he would gladly spare the little man if he and his -friends would make the canoe for him and bring it down to the shed that -he would make. He let the little man go then. The next day he built a -shed for the canoe. - -When he told his grandmother about the crowd of little men he had seen -and about the little man he had caught, she told him that they were the -Me-ne-hu-ne, who lived in hollow logs and in caves in the mountains. No -one knew how many of them there were. - -He went back, and he found that where the trunk of the tree had lain -there was now a canoe perfectly finished; all was there that should be -there, even to the light, well-shaped paddle, and all had been finished -in the night. He went back, and that night he waited beside the shed -which he had built out on the beach. At the dead of the night he heard -the hum of voices. That was when the canoe was being lifted up. Then he -heard a second hum of voices. That was when the canoe was being carried -on the hands of the Me-ne-hu-ne—for they did not drag the canoe, they -carried it. He heard a trampling of feet. Then he heard a third hum of -voices; that was when the canoe was being left down in the shed he had -built. - -Laka’s grandmother, knowing who they were, had left a feast for the -Me-ne-hu-ne—a shrimp for each, and some cooked taro leaves. They ate, -and before it was daylight they returned to the mountain where their -caves were. The boy Laka saw the Me-ne-hu-ne as they went up the side -of the mountain—hundreds of little men tramping away in the waning -darkness. - -His canoe was ready, paddle and all. He took it down to the sea, and he -went across in search of his father. When he landed on the other side -he found a wise man who was able to tell him about his father, and that -he was dead indeed, having been killed by a very wicked man on his -landing. The boy never went back to his grandmother’s. He stayed, and -with the canoe that the Me-ne-hu-ne had made for him he became a famous -fisherman. From him have come my fathers and your fathers, too, O my -younger brothers. - -And you who are the youngest and littlest of all—gather you the ku-kui -nuts as we go down; to-night we will make strings of them and burn -them, lighting the house. And if we have many ku-kui nuts and a light -that is long-lasting, it may be that I will tell more stories. - - - - - - - - -THE STORY OF MO-E MO-E: ALSO A STORY ABOUT PO-O AND ABOUT KAU-HU-HU THE -SHARK-GOD, AND ABOUT MO-E MO-E’S SON, THE MAN WHO WAS BOLD IN HIS WISH. - - -Light it now. One ku-kui nut and then another will burn along the -string as I tell my stories. It is well that you have brought so many -nuts, my younger brother. - -At Ke-kaa lived Ma-ui and Mo-e Mo-e; they were friends, but no two men -could be more different: the great desire of one was to go travelling, -doing mighty deeds, and the great desire of the other was to sleep. -While Ma-ui would be travelling, Mo-e Mo-e would be sleeping. He was -called O-pe-le at first, but afterwards he was called Mo-e Mo-e because -no one before or since ever slept so much as he: he could keep asleep -from the first day of the month to the last day of the month; if a -thunder-storm happened, it would wake him up; if no thunder-storm -happened, he might go on sleeping for a whole year. - -Once he went off travelling. He had not gone far when he lay down by -the roadway and slept. While he was sleeping a freshet of water flowed -down and covered him with pebbles and brambles and grasses—covered all -of him except his nostrils. Then a ku-kui nut rested in his nostril and -began to grow. It grew tall; it began to tickle his nostril; and then -Mo-e Mo-e wakened up. “Here am I,” he said, “at my favorite pastime, -sleeping, and yet I am wakened up by this cursed ku-kui tree.” He -started off then to find his friend Ma-ui. - -He did not find Ma-ui. He found, however, a woman whom he liked, and he -married her and settled down in her part of the country. His wife had -much land, and Mo-e Mo-e went out and worked on it. He needed no more -sleep for a while, and he worked night and day until all the lands that -his wife owned were cleared and planted. Then one day he told her that -he would have to return to his own country. “And if something should -happen to prevent my coming back to you,” said he to his wife, “and if -a child should be born to us, name the child, if it should be a girl, -for yourself; but if it should be a boy, name him Ka-le-lea.” His wife -said she would remember what he told her, and Mo-e Mo-e started off on -his journey. - -On his way he felt sleepy, and he lay down by the roadside. He fell -into one of his long slumbers. He had been sleeping for ten days, or -perhaps for two less than ten days, when two men came along, and, -seeing him lying there, took him up and carried him on their backs to -where their canoe was moored. - -Now these were two men who had been sent out to find a man who might be -sacrificed to one of the gods in the temple. They were highly pleased -when they came upon one who could give them such little trouble. They -put Mo-e Mo-e in their canoe and brought him to the Island of Kau-ai. -He didn’t waken all the time they were at sea. They carried him to the -temple, and still he did not waken. Then they made ready to sacrifice -him to the god who was there. - -While they were waiting for the hour of the sacrifice, a thunder-storm -came. That made Mo-e Mo-e waken up. He saw where he was: and the pig -that was to be sacrificed, and the bananas, the fish, and the awa, were -beside him. He saw the two men who had taken him, squatting down with a -spear between them, and he heard what they were saying. They, like us -here, were telling a story. “And so,” said one, “Ka-ma-lo went on his -way.” Mo-e Mo-e listened, and he heard part of the story. - - - -Ka-ma-lo, a squealing pig upon his shoulder (said the second man), went -hurrying on his way. - -No man going into danger ever went so quickly as Ka-ma-lo did. And he -was going into great danger, for he was on his way to the cavern where -the Shark-God Kau-hu-hu had his abode. And you know, my comrade, that -if a man had ever ventured into that cavern before, he never came out -of it alive. - -He came to it. Before the cavern was the great sea. Inside of it were -Mo-o and Waka, the Shark-God’s watchmen. - -When they saw a man hurrying up to the cavern with a squealing pig upon -his shoulders, Waka and Mo-o shouted to him to go back. But Ka-ma-lo -came right up to them. “Our lord is away,” they said, “and it is lucky -for you, O man, that he is away. Fly for your life, for he will soon -return.” Ka-ma-lo would not go. He put down on the ground the pig which -he had brought. - -Waka and Mo-o ran here and there, beseeching Ka-ma-lo to go away. The -man would not go. “I have brought this pig as an offering to the -Shark-God,” he said, “and I will speak to him even if afterwards he -destroy me.” “It is now too late for you to get away,” said Waka, “for, -lo, our lord returns.” “Hide yourself in the cavern; tie up your pig, -and perhaps when our lord sleeps you will be able to get away,” said -Mo-o. They tied the pig, and they covered it up with seaweed; Ka-ma-lo -went into the cavern and hid behind one of the rocks. - -A great rolling wave came to the cavern; another came, and then -another. With the eighth roller the Shark-God came out of the ocean. -Ka-ma-lo looked out and saw him. And when he looked upon him he -trembled and drew himself farther into the depths of the cavern. - -The Shark-God transformed himself. He was now in the shape of a man, -but he was taller and broader than any two men that Ka-ma-lo had ever -seen. He came within the cavern, and Ka-ma-lo saw that he had still one -mark of the shark upon him: on his back and between his great shoulders -there were, as if made with tattoo, the lines of a shark’s opened -mouth. - -When he came within, Kau-hu-hu began to sniff. “I smell a man, a man,” -he said. Ka-ma-lo quaked with terror: the Shark-God, with his great -height and breadth, seemed fearful to the man. - -And still he moved about the cavern, and Mo-o and Waka, his watchmen, -ran this way and that way, striving to get him to give up his search. -There was a squealing outside. Kau-hu-hu stopped and ordered his -watchmen to bring to him the thing that squealed. They went outside and -came back with Ka-ma-lo’s pig. - -“A pig!” sniffed the Shark-God. “Then there must be a man about. Where -is he?” - -Then, in their terror, the two watchmen pointed to where Ka-ma-lo had -hidden himself. The Shark-God put down his two big hands and drew the -man up. - -“Man, I will eat you,” said the Shark-God. - -“I have brought this pig as an offering to you,” said Ka-ma-lo. “Do not -eat me.” - -Then Kau-hu-hu wondered at a man’s being so bold as to come within his -cavern with an offering for him. “Man, why have you come?” he said. - -Then said Ka-ma-lo: “Kau-hu-hu, you are a shark, but you are also a -god. I have come to ask you to avenge me upon a cruel King and a wicked -people. No one else is able to exact the vengeance that my soul craves, -and so I have come where no man ever ventured before—into your cavern -and into your presence.” - -“I am a shark, but I am also a god,” said Kau-hu-hu, “and if that King -and that people deserve the vengeance that you crave, it shall be -wrought upon them. But if they do not deserve that vengeance, I will -kill you and devour you for having come into my cavern.” - -“I will tell you why I crave vengeance on that King and on that -people.” And thereupon Ka-ma-lo told the Shark-God all that he had -suffered. - - - -The King of the land I live in (said Ka-ma-lo) is the owner of a drum, -and it is a drum that he had brought to him from far Kahiki. He would -not let any one strike on this drum but himself. He made a place for -the drum, a sacred enclosure that no one might go into. Now the King of -my land, Ku-pa, is a cruel King; indeed, so cruel is he that his people -have become cruel, for the kind and the gentle have fled away, and -those who have remained under his rule have become harder and harder. -And at last it has come about that no one will get angry at even the -worst thing that the King will do. - -I wish that I had fled from the land when others fled. But I had two -children, boys, and there was no place that I might have taken them to. -They used to play with the King’s children. Yesterday I went into the -forest to choose a tree that might be made into a new canoe, for I am -the King’s canoe-builder. And while I was away my two boys went towards -the King’s house. They came before the enclosure where the drum was -kept. The King’s children were not there to play with, and my two boys -played with each other for a while. - -Now and then they would stand before where the drum was placed, and -look at it. They did not know that Ku-pa was watching them—watching to -see what the children would do. - -At last the boys went into the sacred enclosure, and their going there -broke the law that the King had made. They sat down there, my two sons, -and they struck upon the drum. They could have struck upon it so that -the whole land would hear, or they could have struck so softly that the -noise would be only like the fall of rain upon leaves. And that was how -they struck the drum; the noise that they made was only a little noise -and like the falling of rain upon the leaves in the forest. - -But the King heard even that little sound; he came very softly up to -the enclosure. The boys looked around. They saw him standing there; his -eyes were hard as I have seen them, and his lips were cruel and -revengeful. He called for his executioner. The executioner came; he -slew my two boys in the enclosure where the King’s drum is kept. - -All that happened while I was in the forest. When I came back I went -into the enclosure where the King’s canoes are sheltered. I stood there -beside the great canoe that was painted red. I put my hands upon it, -for then I greatly rejoiced in this work of my hands. I put my hands -along the outrigger of the canoe. And then I looked down, and it seemed -to me that I saw a hand stretched out from under the canoe. - -I stooped down, and I looked under it. I saw two bodies with their -hands outstretched. I drew them out, and I saw that they were the -bodies of my sons. And when I looked upon them I knew that my sons had -been slain by the King’s executioner. - -I went away from the King’s house. I met many men, and I spoke to them, -telling them of the terrible thing that the King had done to me. But -each one I spoke to said: “Yes, such is Ku-pa, our King. He has not -dealt with you harder than he has dealt with others.” And when they -said this they looked at me; and I saw that their looks were hard, even -as the King’s. - -I went within my house, and I sat there thinking. To whom could I go -for vengeance on the King? Who would be powerful enough to avenge me -upon Ku-pa? And then I thought of you, Kau-hu-hu. You would be able to -avenge me, and no one else would be able. And so I made up my mind to -go to you—even to go into the cavern where no man had ever ventured -before, - -I took a pig as an offering, and I went hurrying on my way; no man -going into danger ever went so swiftly before. - - - -Mo-e Mo-e heard no more of the story then. He stood up. The two who -were guarding him were so startled that they did not lay hands on him. -He took up the spear that was between them, and he went off. - -Back to his wife’s he went, and he left the long spear with its edge of -shark’s teeth in the house. “I will have to make another journey,” he -said, “and if again anything should happen to me that will prevent my -coming back, and if a son is born to us, and if he should want to go in -search of me, give him the spear so that I may know him; and give him -the name that I told you.” - -He went to work in the fields again, and he worked day and night, and -his wife’s brother Po-po-lo-au and her servant Po-o were astonished at -the work he did. And then, on the very night that his son was born, -Mo-e Mo-e fell asleep. He slept for ten days and for another ten days. -His wife, her brother, and her servant tried to waken him; all they -could do could not waken Mo-e Mo-e, Then his wife shook him; she made -noises; she poured water on his eyes, but still he slept. Then she -said, “There is no doubt about it: Mo-e Mo-e is dead.” - -She called her brother and her servant, and she said to them: “The -Chief is dead. Wrap him up and carry him to the beach and cast him into -the sea; that is the best that one can do for a dead man.” Her brother -and her servant did as she ordered, and a wrap was put around Mo-e -Mo-e, and then he was carried down to the beach and cast into the sea. -Then Po-po-lo-au went home, and Po-o went home. - -His wife’s name was Ka-le-ko’o-ka-lau-ae, and concerning her and her -brother Po-po-lo-au and her servant Po-o a strange story is told. After -they had left what they thought was the dead body of Mo-e Mo-e in the -sea, Po-po-lo-au and Po-o went up the mountains to get timbers for the -roofing of a house. They were far from home, and the night came on dark -and rainy. Po-o wanted to go back to the house, but Po-po-lo-au would -not return through the dark and the rain. Nothing would do him but that -they should spend the night in a cave. - -So they went into a cave that no one had ever gone into before. And at -Po-po-lo-au’s desire they lighted a great fire to keep themselves from -the cold. And then, although there were things in the cave that they -should have been fearful about, they both went to sleep. - -In the middle of the night Po-po-lo-au was startled by something that -he thought was happening. He wakened up, and he saw that the fire was -burning Po-o. He called him, but the servant would not waken up. He -went to him and tried to rouse him, but still he would not awaken. The -fire, which had been burning the man’s feet, went farther up his body. -Po-po-lo-au lifted him and tried by every way to bring him to -wakefulness, but there was no stir from Po-o. Then, when the fire had -burned up to his neck, Po-po-lo-au let him lie there and ran out of the -cave. He ran towards a hill. When he reached the top of it he heard a -voice calling to him, “Wait until I come to you, and we will go home -together.” He looked back, and he saw a head with fire streaming out of -it coming up the hill after him. - -He ran to the valley, and the head rolled down the hill after him. He -looked back, and he saw tongues of fire shooting out of the rolling -head, and he became more frightened than before. He ran on and on. -Through many valleys he raced, and always the head raced behind him. He -reached the plain, and then he could hardly go on because of the terror -he was in. - -It happened that at that time a wizard was walking with his friends -along that plain. “Do you see the person who is coming towards us?” he -said. “If he is not caught until he comes up to us, he will be saved. -But if he is caught before that, I do not know what will happen to -him.” As he said that, Po-po-lo-au came running up to them; and then -the head did not come any nearer. - -Po-po-lo-au told the wizard all that had befallen him. Then he went to -his sister, the wife of Mo-e Mo-e. She asked about her servant, and he -told her of how he had been burned and how his head had chased him. - -Then the wizard came into the house. “I have come to you,” he said, -“because I fear you may be burned. The head that chased this man will -come here. It will want to come within and stay in the house, but do -not ask it to come in, or you will come into its power. It will ask you -to go outside to it, but do not go out. It will ask you to send your -child out to it, but do not send him out.” - -And then he said: “When you hear a whistle outside, it will mean that -the head is near. Then move into a corner of the house and keep very -still. When the outside is all lighted up you will know that it has -come, and when the inside is lighted up you will know that it has -entered the house.” - -The woman stayed within the house, and about the middle of the night -she heard a whistle outside; then all outside was lighted up, and the -voice of Po-o called to her asking her to come without. “I will not go -outside, for it is raining,” she said. “There is no rain,” said the -voice of Po-o. - -Then the voice spoke again and said to her, “Send out to me your little -child.” And the voice went on to say: “I have what your child liked -well—ripe bananas. Send him out to me, and I will give them to him.” - -“I will not send him out to you,” the woman said, “for the child is now -asleep.” - -Then the head came within the house, but the woman had hidden herself -and was not to be found. The wizard stole in; he drew the woman out of -the house, and he closed the door. The head called out: “Do not close -the door on me; I wish to come outside.” But those outside blocked up -the door and would not let it out, for they knew that what was within -the house was the demon of the cave that had gone into the man’s head. -Then fire burst out in the house; there were twelve loud sounds; the -head was shattered, and after that there was nothing ever seen of it. -And that is the strange story about Po-o. - - - -And now we can speak of Mo-e Mo-e, or at least we can speak of Mo-e -Mo-e’s son. He grew up with a stepfather, for his mother had married -again. Now, the stepfather was not always kind to Mo-e Mo-e’s son, and -the boy was often punished by him. - -One day he said to his mother: “I will go in search of my real father.” -“Your father is dead and in the sea,” said his mother. “Perhaps he is -not,” said the boy. “I will go in search of him, and I will bring with -me the spear that my father left for me.” - -So he started off in search of Mo-e Mo-e, his father. Now when Mo-e -Mo-e had been flung into the sea long before, he had gone down to the -bottom. He lay there, for his slumber was still deep. The fish bit at -him, but they did not awaken him, and the salt of the deep sea went -into his skin. Still he lay there asleep. Then a thunder-storm came. He -wakened up. He went to the surface of the sea. Then he swam to the -shore. - -He had been made bald by the salt water that had got into his skin. His -skin had been scraped off by the bites of the fishes. He crawled to a -pig-pen, and there he lay down. From that place he crawled to another -place. There a wizard found him; he gave Mo-e Mo-e medicine that cured -him. - -Then he went back to his own home, to the place that he had first come -from. He went on no more trips after that, and he took to sleeping like -an ordinary man. - -And now his son, with the great spear of dark-red wood with the ridges -of shark’s teeth upon it, went off in search of him. He came to the -Island where Mo-e Mo-e had lived when his name was O-pe-le. He went -down into the valley where O-pe-le had had his farm. - -The boy came to a field where a man was planting taro. He sat down to -watch the man, holding the spear in his hands. Two men came along. -Seeing the spear that the boy held, they stopped and looked at it. “Is -it not like the spear we carried when we took away the man who slept -all the way in our canoe and all the time on the black stones of the -temple?” one said to the other. “It is the very same spear,” said the -other. “You laid it down, and I was looking at it while I was telling -you the story of Ka-ma-lo, who went to the cave of the Shark-God.” “I -never heard the rest of that story,” said the first man, “and I should -like to hear it.” - -The two sat together, and then the man who had been telling the story -that Mo-e Mo-e had heard, went on. - - - -When Ka-ma-lo had told him all that had happened, the Shark-God said to -him: “Go back to Ku-pa’s country and live there with his people. But -make ready a great offering for me—an offering of black pigs, white -fowl, and red fish—and when the new moon comes take the offering into -the temple enclosure, and stay there until you see a cloud coming over -the mountains of La-na-i. And when you see that cloud, leave the temple -enclosure and get into your canoe and go out to sea.” So Kau-hu-hu -said; then he lay down in the cavern and went to sleep. Ka-ma-lo did -not stay any longer; he went quickly out of the cavern. - -He went back, and he lived for a while under the cruel King who had -destroyed his children and amongst the hard people that the King ruled -over. He began to put together the offering for Kau-hu-hu the -Shark-God; and by the time he had got all the black pigs and all the -white fowl and all the red fish, the new moon had come. - -He took his offering to the temple enclosure; he left the black pigs -and the white fowl and the red fish within, and he stood upon the black -stones, and he looked towards the mountains of La-na-i. - -He heard the King beating upon his drum: it was to summon all his -people to him. He heard the sound of the drum, but he did not go -towards the King’s house; he stood upon the black stones that made the -temple enclosure, and he watched and he waited, moveless as the stone -that he stood on. Louder and louder beat the King’s drum. The people -all gathered at his house. Then Ka-ma-lo saw a speck of cloud over the -mountains of La-na-i. He watched, and he saw it coming nearer and -nearer. He left the place that he had been watching from, and he went -to the beach. - -As he went he saw the crowd of people that were gathered together by -the King’s drum. They called to him, but he went past them. He came to -the beach, and he pushed but in his canoe. - -When he looked back he saw that the end of the rainbow was now resting -on the temple enclosure, and he knew that the Shark-God had set a guard -on the offering that he had left there. The cloud was coming nearer, -and it was growing bigger and bigger as it came. It made a darkness -over all the land. - -Ka-ma-lo paddled beyond the reef, and he went far out to sea. Out of -the darkness that covered the land there came a fearful storm: down -poured the rain; the trees in the forest cracked and broke; the rivers -suddenly filled up; as they rushed into the valley, trees, houses, and -men were swept away and out to sea. Ka-ma-lo, in his canoe, saw the -red-covered drum of the King go floating by. That was the end of Ku-pa -and his people. And if the spear that this young man holds in his hands -be the same spear that I had when we were in the temple enclosure the -day I told you the beginning of the story, that spear is the only thing -that has come out of his kingdom. - - - -Ka-le-lea then spoke up and said: “Yes, this is the spear you carried -on that occasion, for my father, Mo-e Mo-e, heard you tell the -beginning of that story; he related it to my mother, who told it to me. -And now I am seeking him; I am seeking that man, for he is my father.” -“If you are seeking the man who slept while we brought him to the -temple and slept there while we were making the preparations to -sacrifice him, you have not far to go,” said the men. “We have seen him -since, and we know where he is.” “And where is he?” asked the boy. “The -man planting taro there,” said the man, “is no other than he; he is -O-pe-le, who came to be called Mo-e Mo-e.” - -Then the boy called out to the man who was planting taro in the field, -“Say, your rows of taro are crooked.” The man looked at his rows, and -then he began to straighten them. But no matter how he straightened -them, the boy would call out the same thing. Then the man said to -himself: “How strange this is! Here I have been doing this work night -and day, and my rows were never made crooked before. Now it seems that -I cannot make them straight.” Thereupon he quit working and went to the -edge of the patch where the boy was standing, the great spear in his -hands. “Whose offspring are you?” said he, when he looked at the boy -and looked at the spear. “Yours,” said the boy, “yours and -Ka-li-ko’o-ka-lau-ae’s.” “What name have you?” said the man. “I am -Ka-le-lea,” said the boy. “You have found me, my son,” said Mo-e Mo-e. - -And thereupon the two went into the house. - - - -The boy who came to Mo-e Mo-e, Ka-le-lea, is also known in our stories; -in them he is called “The Mari Who Was Bold in his Wish,” and when you -have lighted some more ku-kui nuts I will tell you how he came to get -that name. - -When he grew up he became a fisherman, and he and another youth had a -house together. Ke-ino was the other youth’s name. Now whenever other -houses were dark, Ka-le-lea’s and Ke-ino’s would be lighted up. They -would have gathered many ku-kui nuts, they would string them together, -and they would light them up. And the light that Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino -had in their house would be seen by travellers and watchmen and those -who looked out of their houses at night. What was being done in the -house where there was so much light, people wondered? - -Well, when Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino came into their house in the evening, -they would, first of all, partake of their evening meal. Then they -would light the ku-kui nuts and keep lighting them as they burned out. -Then they would lie down on their mats with their pillows under their -heads, and they would look up at the roof, Ka-le-lea looking at the -gable end, and Ke-ino looking at the end opposite. They would watch the -mice running along the ridge-pole of the house. Then one would say to -the other: “Here are we, Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino, awake and with lights -burning beside us. Let us keep watching the mice running along the -ridge-pole of our house, and as we watch them, let each of us tell out -his wishes.” - -Then Ke-ino would say: “Here is my wish. I wish that we may sleep until -the first crowing of the cock, then waken up, and go into the field and -pull up a root for fish-bait. Then go down to the beach, pound the root -and set it for eel-bait. Then catch an eel after having waited around -the beach for a bit, go home with it, and wrap it in banana-leaves for -cooking. Put it in the oven after a while. Then, at the second crowing -of the cock, open the oven and put the eel one side to cool. Eat, after -a while, until we have had enough. Then lie down on our mats, put the -pillows under our heads, look up and watch the mice run along the -ridge-pole of our house, and tell out our wishes. That is my wish, -brother.” - -Then Ka-le-lea would say: “It is a wish, but it is not a manly wish. -Listen now, and I will tell out my wishes. - -“I wish that we may eat King Ka-ku-hi-hewa’s dogs that bite the faces -of the people. I wish that we may eat his hogs with the crossing tusks. -I wish that we may eat the fat fish of his ponds. And when we have -eaten all belonging to him, I wish that the King himself may prepare -the drink for us, bring it to us, and put his own cup to our lips. And -then, when we have eaten and drunken, I wish that the King may send for -his two daughters, have them brought in, and have each of them marry -one of us, and then have each couple go to live in a house that he has -had built for them. That is my wish, my brother, and I want you to know -it.” - -But when Ka-le-lea would say this (and he would say it every night) -Ke-ino would pull the mat over his face, and he would say: “No, not -that wish. Never let it pass your lips again. We will surely get killed -on account of that wish.” - -Now the King whom Ka-le-lea had spoken of was at that time engaged in a -war—the war of King Ka-ku-hi-hewa against King Pueo-nui. He had won -nothing so far in the war, and he was becoming disheartened. His -watchmen and his soldiers often saw the light in the house of Ka-le-lea -and Ke-ino, and one day they told the King about it. - -Then the King sent his spy to see or hear what was going on in that -house. The spy stole up and lay outside. He heard Ke-ino tell his wish, -and then he heard Ka-le-lea tell his. He heard nothing more; before the -first cock crew he stole away, leaving his dagger stuck at the entrance -of the house to let Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino know that the King’s servant -had been there. - -When the spy came back to the King’s house, the King was there with his -Councillor beside him, and they were talking about what should be done -to bring to some sort of end the war against King Pueo-nui. Said the -King when the spy came to them: “What is happening in the house that I -sent you to?” - -Said the spy: “This and this.” Thereupon he told all he had heard. When -he spoke about Ka-le-lea’s wish the King became very angry. “Because I -am not winning the war,” he said, “these people think they can make -mock of me! Eat my dogs and my hogs and my fat fish indeed! Have me -prepare the drink for them and put my own cup to their mouths! And then -give my daughters in marriage to two such fellows! Tell me, my -Councillor, how should I have them slain?” - -But the Councillor was not for having Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino put to death -in any way. “Rather carry out the wish that the boldest of them spoke -out,” he said. “If any one can help you in the war, it is that man. -Send for both of them and carry out the bold one’s wish to the very -end. You have a wish too: it is to win the whole Island for yourself. -That man, believe me, is the one who can help you to have that wish of -yours made real.” The King agreed at last to let Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino -live, and he even agreed to carry out to its very end the wish that -Ka-le-lea had made. He ordered his men to cut timber and build houses -for the two fishermen and the wives he was going to give them, and -after that he sent an officer with soldiers to bring Ka-le-lea and -Ke-ino to him. - - - -Ke-ino was the first to waken up that morning. And when he went to the -door he saw the dagger that was stuck at the entrance. Then he knew -that the King’s servant had been listening in the night and that he had -heard all that had been said. “We are going to be killed,” he said to -Ka-le-lea; “your terrible wish has been overheard, and the two of us -are going to die for it.” - -But Ka-le-lea only stirred on the mat he was lying on; he didn’t even -get up to go to the door. And then Ke-ino saw a company of people -coming out of the King’s house. They carried axes. “Here are our -deaths,” said Ke-ino. But the procession he saw was that of the King’s -servants as they went towards the mountain to cut timbers for the two -houses that were to be built, according to the Councillor’s advice and -the King’s orders, for himself and Ka-le-lea and the wives who were to -be given to them—the King’s two daughters. - -Later on, another procession came from the King’s house. This one came -straight towards their house. The men were armed with spears, and the -officers had on their shoulders cloaks of bright feathers, and their -war-helmets were on their heads. Ke-ino said: “Our deaths are now close -to us.” But all that Ka-le-lea answered was: “Keep your eye on them.” - -He did not move until then. Then he rose up from the mat he had been -sleeping on, and he took up his club. He went outside, and by this time -the armed men had come up. The officer said: “We have come to take you -two before the king.” Ka-le-lea said never a word, but with his great -club he struck the house a mighty blow, and he scattered its thatch and -its timbers in all directions. - -Then, very much to their surprise, Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino were put into a -litter and carried on the shoulders of the soldiers. They were brought -before the King. They were served according to the wish of Ka-le-lea: -the dogs and the hogs and the fat fish were given them to eat; the King -prepared the drink for them, and in his own cup he brought it to -Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino. And when they had drunken, the King’s daughters -were brought before them. One was wed to Ka-le-lea, and the other was -wed to Ke-ino. And then each couple was given a house to live in, a -house that the King had had built for them in a single day. - -Ka-le-lea, the one who had uttered the bold wish, was not seen much -after that. He stayed in the house that had been given him. Ke-ino was -the one who was around all the time. And the King took Ke-ino and made -him an officer, and gave him a feather cape for his shoulders and a -war-helmet to go on his head. After that, Ke-ino went into the fight -with a company of men; every day he won a victory. But, for all that, -the war still went on. - - - -Ka-le-lea stayed in the house all day with his wife, the King’s -daughter. He had no war-helmet, no feather cape, and he never took a -company of men out to battle. Ke-ino was the great man now, and -Ka-le-lea was never spoken of. - -Still the war went on. But after the first crow of the cock, a man with -a great club used to go to Ha-la-wa, where the officers and chiefs of -Pueo-nui’s army were, and do battle with them. This the man did every -day. He would come upon a company of them, and fight with them, -striking right and left with his club. He would slay them all. Then he -would gather up their feather capes and their war-helmets, and he would -run, run away. The fighting chiefs were all killed by him, and -Pueo-nui’s army melted away. There were stories about how the chiefs -were killed in the early morning, and of how their feather capes and -their war-helmets were taken away. No one knew the warrior who fought -with them and overcame them. But the King was sure that Ke-ino was the -one who did it all. - -When the last of Pueo-nui’s fighting chiefs was killed, an end came to -the war, and Pueo-nui gave his lands and his kingdom to King -Ka-ku-he-hewa. And that very morning, as the stranger warrior who had -done battle with the chiefs was running back, he was seen by a watchman -in the light of the early morning. The watchman flung a spear at the -running man. It struck him on the arm, just above the wrist. He kept on -running. The spear had a hook, and the watchman knew that it would be -hard for the warrior to draw it out of the flesh of his arm. - -And now the King made, up his mind to give a great reward to Ke-ino, -and to get rid of Ka-le-lea, the fellow whom no one had ever seen -outside his house. He made a proclamation, declaring his victory in the -war, and telling how much of it was due to his son-in-law Ke-ino. And -every one was satisfied, for every one was sure that Ke-ino had won the -war. Every one, that is, except the King’s Councillor and the watchman -who had flung the spear at the running man. The watchman kept on saying -that it was not Ke-ino but another man who had slain the fighting -chiefs of Pueo-nui’s army and had carried off their feather capes and -their war-helmets. - -The Councillor advised the King to bring all his people together, men, -women, and children. All came to a place near the King’s house—all but -those who fell down and who were not able to get up again. “Are all -your people here, O King?” asked the Councillor. “All are here,” said -the King, “except that fellow Ka-le-lea. He is asleep at home. His -father, they say, was a good sleeper, and my son-in-law takes after his -father.” “Nevertheless,” said the Councillor, “send for him, and bring -him here.” - -Then Ka-le-lea was sent for. He came, and he saw all the people -gathered before the King’s house. He saw Ke-ino there in great state, -with a bright feather cape on his shoulders and a war-helmet on his -head. He looked at Ke-ino, and Ke-ino looked at him. The watchman, who -had been looking at all who came, saw him, and he made a sign to the -Councillor. - -Then said the Councillor to the King: “Send to this man’s house, and -have a search made in it. And all that your men find hidden in it, have -them bring here.” Men were sent to Ka-le-lea’s house. They returned -with feather capes and war-helmets enough to make a great pile. And -then the watchman pointed to Ka-le-lea’s arm, and showed the hook of a -spear in the flesh of it. - -And when the watchman told of how he had flung his spear at the warrior -who had slain the last of Pueo-nui’s fighting chiefs, it was seen by -all that Ka-le-lea, and not Ke-ino, was the man who had won the war. -After that he was made the King’s chief officer. But he did nothing -against Ke-ino, who came to serve under him. - -And this is the story of Mo-e Mo-e’s son, Ka-le-lea. Soon after, -Ka-ku-he-hiwa died. Ka-le-lea came to rule in his stead, for all the -people clamored to have over them the Man Who Was Bold in His Wish. - - - - - - - - -THE WOMAN FROM LALO-HANA, THE COUNTRY UNDER THE SEA. - - -Long, long ago, my younger brothers, there lived in Hawaii a King whose -name was Koni-konia. He sent his fishermen out to catch deep-sea fish -for him, and they, without knowing it, let down their lines and -fish-hooks at a place where, before this, strange things had happened. - -In a while after they had let them down, the hooks were taken off the -lines. The fishermen wondered at this, for they knew that no fish had -bitten at their baits. They went back to the King, and they told him -what had happened. There had come no quiver on their lines, they said, -as there would have come if fish had touched their baits, and their -hooks had been cut off the lines as if some one with a knife had done -it. - -Now the King had heard before of strange things happening at the place -in the sea where the fishermen had been; and after they had shown him -the lines with the hooks cut off, he sent for a wizard, that he might -learn from him how these strange things had come to be. - -The wizard (he was called a Kahuna) came before the King, and after he -had been told of what had happened to the fishermen’s lines he said: -“Your fishermen let their lines down over Lalo-hana, a country that is -at the bottom of the sea, just under the place where they let their -canoes rest. A woman lives there, a very beautiful woman of the sea -whose name is Hina; all alone she lives there, for her brothers, who -were given charge of her, have gone to a place far off.” When the King -heard of this beautiful woman of the sea, he longed to see her and to -have her for his wife. - -The Kahuna told him how she might be brought out of the sea to him. The -King was to have a great many images made—images of a man, each image -to be as large as a man, with pearl-shell eyes and dark hair, and with -a malo or dress around it. Some of the images were to be brought out to -sea, and some of them were to be left on the beach and along a path -that went up to the King’s house; and one of them was to be left -standing by the door of the house. - -The Kahuna went with the men who had taken the images in their canoes. -When they came to that part of the sea that the country of Lalo-hana -was under, the Kahuna told the men to let down one of the images. Down, -down, the image went, a rope around it. It rested on the bottom of the -sea. Then another image was let down. But this image was not let as far -as the bottom of the sea: it was held about the height of a house above -the bottom. Then another image was let down and held above that, and -then another image, and another image, all held one above another, -while other images were left standing in canoes that went in a line -back to the beach. And when all the images were in their places, a loud -trumpet was blown. - -The Woman of Lalo-hana, Hina, came out of her house, that was built of -white and red coral, and she saw the image of a man of dark color, with -dark hair and eyes of pearl-shell, standing before her. She was -pleased, for she had never seen even the likeness of a man since her -brothers had gone away from her; and she went to the image, and she -touched it. As she did so she saw an image above her; and she went and -she touched this image too. And all the way up to the top of the sea -there were images; and Hina went upward, touching them all. - -When she came up to the surface of the sea she saw canoes, and in each -canoe there was an image standing. Each one seemed to be more beautiful -than the others; and Hina swam on and on, gazing on each with delight -and touching this one and that one. - -And so Hina, the Woman of the Sea, came to the beach. And on the beach -there were other images; and she went on, touching each of them. And so -she went through the grove of coco-nut trees and came before the King’s -house. Outside the house there was a very tall image with very large -pearl-shell eyes and with a red malo around it. Hina went to that -image. The wreath of sea-flowers that she had in her hair was now -withered with the sun; the Woman of Lalo-hana was wearied now, and she -lay down beside the image and fell asleep. - -When she wakened it was not the image, but the King, who was beside -her. She saw him move his hands, and she was frightened because of the -movements she saw him make and the sounds that were around her after -the quiet of the sea. Her wreath of sea-flowers was all shrivelled up -in the sunlight. The man kissed her, and they went together into the -house. - -And so the Woman of Lalo-hana, the Country under the Sea, came to -Hawaii and lived there as the wife of Koni-konia, the King. - -After a while, when she had learned to speak to him, Hina told -Koni-konia about precious things that she had in her house in -Lalo-hana, the Country under the Sea, and she begged the King to send a -diver to get these things and bring them to her. They were in a -calabash within her house, she said. And she told the King that the -diver who brought it up was not to open the calabash. - -So Koni-konia the King sent the best of his divers to go down to -Lalo-hana, the Country under the Sea, and bring up the calabash that -had Hina’s precious things in it. The diver went down, and found the -house of red and white coral, and went within and took the calabash -that was there. He brought it back without opening it and gave it to -Hina. - -After some days Hina opened the calabash. Within it was the moon. It -flew up to the heavens, and there it shone clear and bright. When it -shone in the heavens it was called Kena. But it shone down on the sea -too, and shining on the sea it was called Ana. - -And then, seeing Ana in the sea, the Woman of Lalo-hana was frightened. -“My brothers will come searching for me,” she said. And the next day -she said, “My brothers will bring a great flood of waters upon this -land when they come searching for me.” And after that she said, “My -brothers will seek me in the forms of pa-o’o fishes, and the Ocean will -lift them up so that they can go seeking me.” When the King heard her -say this he said, “We will go far from where the Ocean is, and we will -seek refuge on the tops of the mountains.” - -So the King with Hina, with all his people, went to the mountains. As -they went they saw the Ocean lifting up. Hina’s brothers in the forms -of pa-o’o fishes were there, and the Ocean lifted them up that they -might go seeking her. - -Over the land and up to the mountains the Ocean went, bearing the -pa-o’o fishes along. Koni-konia and his people climbed to the tops of -the mountains. To the tops of the mountains the Ocean went, bearing the -pa-o’o fishes that were Hina’s brothers. Koni-konia and Hina and all -the people climbed to the tops of the trees that were on the tops of -the mountains. And then the Ocean, having covered the tops of the -mountains, went back again, drawing back the pa-o’o fishes that were -Hina’s brothers. And it was in this way that the Great Flood came to -Hawaii. - -And after the waters of the Ocean had gone back to their own place, -Koni-konia the King, with Hina and his people, went back to the place -where their houses had been. All was washed away; there were mud and -sand where their houses and fields had been. Soon the sun dried up the -puddles and the wetness in the ground; growth came again; they built -their houses and cultivated their fields; and Koni-konia, with Hina and -with his people, lived once again in a wide land beside the great -ocean. - - - - - - - - -HINA, THE WOMAN IN THE MOON. - - -A weary woman was Hina, and as the years grew on her she grew more and -more weary. All day she sat outside her house beating out tapas for -clothes for her family, making cloths out of the bark of a tree by -beating it on a board with a mallet. Weary indeed was Hina with making -tapas all the day outside her house. And when she might see no more to -beat out the tapas, she would have to get her calabash and bring water -to the house. Often she would stumble in the dark, coming back with her -calabash of water. There was no one in her house to help her. Her son -went sailing from island to island, robbing people, and her daughter -went to live with the wild people in the forest. Her husband had become -bad-tempered, and he was always striving to make her do more and more -work. - -As Hina grew old she longed more and more to go to a place where she -might sit and rest herself. And one day, when she was given a new task -and was sent to fish up shrimps amongst the rocks with a net, she cried -out, “Oh, that I might go away from this place, and to a place where I -might stay and rest myself.” - -The Rainbow heard Hina and had pity on her. It made an arching path for -her from the rocks up to the heavens. With the net in her hands she -went along that path. She thought she would go up to the heavens and -then over to the Sun, and that she would go into the Sun and rest -herself there. - -She went higher and higher along the arch of the Rainbow. But as she -went on, the rays of the Sun beat on her more and more strongly. She -held the net over her head and went on and on. But when she went beyond -the clouds and there was nothing to shelter her, the rays of the Sun -burnt her terribly. On and on she went, but as she went higher she -could only crawl along the path. Then the fire of the Sun’s rays began -to torture her and shrivel her. She could go no farther, and, slipping -back along the Rainbow arch, she came to earth again. - -It was dark now. She stood outside her house and saw her husband coming -back from the pool with a calabash of water, stumbling and saying -ill-tempered words about her. And when she showed herself to him he -scolded because she had not been there to bring the calabash of water -to the house. - -Now that the Sun was gone down and his rays were no longer upon her, -her strength came back to Hina. She looked up into the sky, and she saw -the full Moon there; and she said: “To the Moon I will go. It is very -quiet, and there I can sit for a long, long time and rest myself.” - -But first she went into the house for the calabash that held all the -things that on earth were precious to her. She came out of her house -carrying the calabash, and there before her door was a moon-rainbow. - -Her husband came and asked her where she was going; because she carried -her calabash he knew she was going far. “I am going to the Moon, to a -place where I can rest myself,” she said. She began to climb along the -arch of the Rainbow. And now she was almost out of her husband’s reach. -But he sprang up and caught her foot in his hand. He fell back, -twisting and breaking her foot as he fell. - -But Hina went on. She was lamed, and she was filled with pain; and yet -she rejoiced as she went along through the quiet night. On and on she -went. She came to where the Stars were, and she said incantations to -them, that they might show her how to come to the Moon. And the Stars -showed her the way, and she came at last to the Moon. - -She came to the Moon with the calabash that had her precious -possessions; and the Moon gave her a place where she might rest. There -Hina stayed. And the people of Hawaii can look up to the bright Moon -and see her there. She sits, her foot lamed, and with her calabash by -her side. Seeing her there, the people call her, not “Hina” any more, -but “Lono Moku”—that is, “Lame Lono.” And standing outside the door you -can see her now—Hina, the Woman in the Moon. But some say that, instead -of the calabash, she took with her her tapa-board and mallet; and they -say that the fine fleecy clouds that you see around the Moon are really -the fine tapa-cloths that Hina beats out. - - - - - - - - -NOTES. - - -THE BOY PU-NIA AND THE KING OF THE SHARKS - -Given in the Fornander Collection of Hawaiian Antiquities and -Folk-lore, Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Polynesian -Ethnology and Natural History, Vol. V, Part II, with the title Kaao no -Punia, Legend of Pu-nia. - -Like many another Polynesian hero, Pu-nia had a mother whose name was -Hina. The shark’s name, Kai-ale-ale, means “Sea in great commotion.” -But the kindling of the fire inside the shark with the fire-sticks -could not have been so easy as it is made to appear. Melville, in -Typee, describes the operation of fire-making as laborious. This is how -he saw it being done: - -“A straight, dry, and partly decayed stick of the hibiscus, about six -feet in length, and half as many inches in diameter, with a smaller bit -of wood not more than a foot long, and scarcely an inch wide, is as -invariably to be met with in every house in Typee as a box of lucifer -matches in the corner of the kitchen cupboard at home. The islander, -placing the larger stick obliquely against some object, with one end -elevated at an angle of forty-five degrees, mounts astride of it like -an urchin about to gallop off upon a cane, and then grasping the -smaller one firmly in both hands, he rubs its pointed end slowly up and -down the extent of a few inches on the principal stick, until at last -he makes a narrow groove in the wood, with an abrupt termination at the -point furthest from him, where all the dusty particles which the -friction creates are accumulated in a little heap. - -“At first Kory-Kory goes to work quite leisurely, but gradually -quickens his pace, and waxing warm in the employment, drives the stick -furiously along the smoking channel, plying his hands to and fro with -amazing rapidity, the perspiration starting from every pore. As he -approaches the climax of his effort, he pants and gasps for breath, and -his eyes almost start from their sockets with the violence of his -exertions. This is the critical stage of the operation; all his -previous labours are in vain if he cannot sustain the rapidity of the -movement until the reluctant spark is produced. Suddenly he stops, -becomes perfectly motionless. His hands still retain their hold of the -smaller stick, which is pressed convulsively against the further end of -the channel among the fine powder there accumulated, as if he had just -pierced through and through some little viper that was wriggling and -struggling to escape from his clutches. The next moment a delicate -wreath of smoke curls spirally into the air, the heap of dusty -particles glow with fire, and Kory-Kory, almost breathless, dismounts -from his steed.” - - - - -THE SEVEN GREAT DEEDS OF MA-UI - -The number seven has no significance in Polynesian tradition; the -number eight has. It just happened that the number of Ma-ui’s deeds -that had interest for me as a story-teller was seven. Fornander has -only short and passing notices of Ma-ui, and all the material for the -stories given here has been taken from Mr. W. D. Westervelt’s valuable -Ma-ui the Demi-God. Ma-ui is a hero for all the Polynesians, and Mr. -Westervelt tells us that either complete or fragmentary Ma-ui legends -are found in the single islands and island groups of Aneityum, Bowditch -or Fakaofa, Efate, Fiji, Fotuna, Gilbert, Hawaii, Hervey, Huahine, -Mangaia, Manihiki, Marquesas, Marshall, Nauru, New Hebrides, New -Zealand, Samoa, Savage, Tahiti or Society, Tauna, Tokelau, and Tonga. -Ma-ui is, in short, a Pan-Polynesian hero, and it is as a -Pan-Polynesian hero that I have treated him, giving his legend from -other sources than those that are purely Hawaiian. However, I have -tried to make Hawaii the background for all the stories. Note that -Ma-ui’s position in his family is the traditional position for a -Polynesian hero—he is the youngest of his brothers, but, as in the case -of other heroes of the Polynesians, he becomes the leader of his -family. - -Ma-ui’s mother was Hina. She is distinguished from the numerous Hinas -of Polynesian tradition by being “Hina-a-ke-ahi,” “Hina-of-the-Fire.” I -follow the New Zealand tradition that Mr. Westervelt gives in telling -how Ma-ui was thrown into the sea by his mother and how the jelly-fish -took care of him. Ma-ui’s throwing the heavy spear at the house is also -out of New Zealand. His overthrowing of the two posts is out of the -Hawaiian tradition. But in that tradition it is suggested that his two -uncles were named “Tall Post” and “Short Post.” They had been the -guardians of the house, and young Ma-ui had to struggle with them to -win a place for himself in the house. Ma-ui’s taking away invisibility -from the birds and letting the people see the singers is out of the -Hawaiian tradition. So is Ma-ui’s kite-flying. The Polynesian people -all delighted in kite-flying, but the Hawaiians are unique in giving a -kite to a demi-god. The incantation beginning “O winds, winds of -Wai-pio” is Hawaiian; the other incantation, “Climb up, climb up,” is -from New Zealand. - -The fishing up of the islands is supposed by scholars to be a folk-lore -account of the discovery of new islands after the Polynesian tribes had -put off from Indonesia. The story that I give is mainly Hawaiian—it is -out of Mr. Westervelt’s book, of course—but I have borrowed from the -New Zealand and the Tongan accounts too; the fish-hook made from the -jaw-bone of his ancestress is out of the New Zealand tradition, and the -chant “O Island, O great Island” is Tongan. - -The story of Ma-ui’s snaring the sun is Hawaiian, and the scene of -this, the greatest exploit in Polynesian tradition, is on the great -Hawaiian mountain Haleakala. The detail about the nooses of the ropes -that Ma-ui uses—that they were made from the hair of his sister—is out -of the Tahitian tradition as given by Gill. - -The Hawaiian story about Ma-ui’s finding fire is rather tame; he forces -the alae or the mud-hen to give the secret up to him. I have added to -the Hawaiian story the picturesque New Zealand story of his getting -fire hidden in her nails from his ancestress in the lower world. There -is an Hawaiian story, glanced at by Fornander, in which Ma-ui obtains -fire by breaking open the head of his eldest brother. - -The story of Ma-ui and Kuna Loa, the Long Eel, as I give it, is partly -out of the Hawaiian, partly out of the New Zealand tradition, and there -is in it, besides, a reminiscence of a story from Samoa. All of these -stories are given in Mr. Westervelt’s book. That Kuna Loa tried to -drown Ma-ui’s mother in her cave—that is Hawaiian; that Hina was driven -to climb a bread-fruit tree to get away from the Long Eel—that is -derived from the Samoan story. And the transformation of the pieces of -Kuna Loa into eels, sea monsters, and fishes is out of the New Zealand -tradition about Ma-ui. “When the writer was talking with the natives -concerning this part of the old legend,” says Mr. Westervelt, “they -said, ‘Kuna is not a Hawaiian word. It means something like a snake or -a dragon, something we do not have in these islands.’ This, they -thought, made the connection with the Hina legend valueless until they -were shown that Tuna (or Kuna) was the New Zealand name of the reptile -which attacked Hina and struck her with his tail like a crocodile, for -which Ma-ui killed him. When this was understood, the Hawaiians were -greatly interested to give the remainder of the legend, and compare it -with the New Zealand story.” “This dragon,” Mr. Westervelt goes on, -“may be a remembrance of the days when the Polynesians were supposed to -dwell by the banks of the River Ganges in India, when crocodiles were -dangerous enemies and heroes saved families from their destructive -depredations.” Mrs. A. P. Taylor of Honolulu writes me in connection -with this passage: “There is a spring in the Palama district in -Honolulu called Kuna-wai (‘Eel of Water’). In Hawaiian, kuna-kuna means -eczema, a skin disease.” - -The story of the search that Ma-ui’s brother made for his sister is -from New Zealand. Ma-ui’s brother is named Ma-ui Mua and Rupe. His -sister is Hina-te-ngaru-moana, “Hina, the daughter of the Ocean.” - -The splendidly imaginative story of how Ma-ui strove to win immortality -for men is from New Zealand. The Goblin-goddess with whom Ma-ui -struggles is Hina-nui-te-po, “Great Hina of the Night,” or “Hina, Great -Lady of Hades.” According to the New Zealand mythology she was the -daughter and the wife of Kane, the greatest of the Polynesian gods. -There seems to be a reminiscence of the myth that they once possessed -in common with the New Zealanders in the fragmentary tale that the -Hawaiians have about Ma-ui striving to tear a mountain apart. “He -wrenched a great hole in the side. Then the elepaio bird sang and the -charm was broken. The cleft in the mountain could not be enlarged. If -the story could be completed it would not be strange if the death of -Ma-ui came with his failure to open the path through the mountain.” So -Mr. Westervelt writes. - -The Ma-ui stories have flowed over into Melanesia, and there is a -Fijian story given in Lorimer Fison’s Tales of Old Fiji, in which -Ma-ui’s fishing is described. Ma-ui, in that story, is described as the -greatest of the gods; he has brothers, and he has two sons with him. -With his sons he fishes up the islands of Ata, Tonga, Haabai, Vavau, -Niua, Samoa, and Fiji. Ma-ui’s sons depart from the Land of the Gods -and seize upon the islands that their father had fished up. Then -Disease and Death come to the islands that the rebel gods, Ma-ui’s -sons, have seized. Afterwards Ma-ui sent to them “some of the sacred -fire of Bulotu.” - - - - -AU-KE-LE THE SEEKER - -Given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part I, of the Memoirs of -the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title He Moolelo no -Aukelenuiaiku, the Legend of Aukelenuiaiku. - -Like many another Polynesian hero, Au-ke-le (to cut down his name from -the many-syllabled one which means Great Au-ke-le, son of Iku) was the -youngest born of his family. Fornander thought that his story “has -marked resemblances in several features to the Hebrew account of Joseph -and his brethren, and is traced back to Cushite origin through -wanderings and migrations”—an idea which is wholly fantastic. The story -as I have retold it is very much condensed. - -Au-ke-le’s grandmother is a mo-o—literally, a lizard. Dr. Nathaniel -Emerson and Mr. William Hyde Rice translate “mo-o” by “dragon,” and I -fancy that “mo-o” created a sufficiently vague conception to allow the -fantastic and terrifying dragon to become its representative. On the -other hand, “dragon” tends to bring in a conception that is not -Polynesian. I have not rendered “mo-o” by either “lizard” or “dragon.” -I prefer to let “mo-o” remain mysterious. Note what Mr. Westervelt says -about the “mo-o” or “dragon” being a reminiscence of creatures of -another environment. - -The story of Au-ke-le is mythical: it is a story about the Polynesian -gods. Au-ke-le and his brothers go from one land of the gods to -another. The “Magic” that he carries in his calabash is a godling that -his grandmother made over to him. There are many things in this story -that are difficult to make intelligible in a retelling. It is -difficult, for instance, to convey the impression that the maids whom -the Queen sends to Au-ke-le, and her brothers too, were reduced to -abject terror by Au-ke-le’s disclosing their names. But to the -Polynesians, as to other primitive peoples, names were not only -private, and intensely private, but they were sacred. To know one’s -name was to be possessed of some of one’s personality; magic could be -worked against one through the possession of a name. Our names are -public. But suppose that a really private name—a name that was given to -us by our mother as a pet name—was called out in public: how upset we -might be! Stevenson’s mother named him “Smootie” and “Baron Broadnose.” -How startled R. L. S. might have been if a stranger in a strange land -had addressed him by either name! - -Later on Au-ke-le goes on the quest that was the Polynesian equivalent -of the Quest of the Holy Grail; he goes in quest of the Water of -Everlasting Life, the Water of Kane. The Polynesian thought that there -was no blessing greater than that of a long life. There are many -stories dealing with the Quest of the Water of Kane, and there is one -poem that has been translated beautifully by Dr. Nathaniel Emerson. It -is given in his Unwritten Literature of Hawaii. - - - A query, a question, - I put to you: - Where is the Water of Kane? - At the Eastern Gate - Where the Sun comes in at Haehae; - There is the Water of Kane. - - A question I ask of you: - Where is the Water of Kane? - Out there with the floating Sun, - Where cloud-forms rest on the Ocean’s breast, - Uplifting their forms at Nohoa, - This side the base of Lehua; - There is the Water of Kane. - - One question I put to you: - Where is the Water of Kane? - Yonder on mountain peak, - On the ridges steep, - In the valleys deep, - Where the rivers sweep; - There is the Water of Kane. - - This question I ask of you: - Where, pray, is the Water of Kane? - Yonder, at sea, on the ocean, - In the drifting rain, - In the heavenly bow, - In the piled-up mist-wraith, - In the blood-red rainfall, - In the ghost-pale cloud-form; - There is the Water of Kane. - - One question I put to you: - Where, where is the Water of Kane? - Up on high is the Water of Kane, - In the heavenly blue, - In the black-piled cloud, - In the black-black cloud, - In the black-mottled sacred cloud of the gods; - There is the Water of Kane. - - One question I ask of you: - Where flows the Water of Kane? - Deep in the ground, in the gushing spring, - In the ducts of Kane and Loa, - A well-spring of water, to quaff, - A water of magic power— - The water of Life! - Life! O give us this life! - - -The story of Au-ke-le has a solemn if not a tragic ending, which is -unusual in Polynesian stories. Its close makes one think of that chant -that Melville heard the aged Tahitians give “in a low, sad tone”: - - - A harree ta fow, - A toro ta farraro, - A now ta tararta. - The palm-tree shall grow, - The coral shall spread, - But man shall cease. - - - - -PI-KO-I: THE BOY WHO WAS GOOD AT SHOOTING ARROWS - -Given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part III, of the Memoirs of -the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title Kaao No Pikoiakaalala, -Legend of Pikoiakaalala (Pi-ko-i, the son of the Alala). - -His father was Raven or Crow, his sisters were Rat and Bat. The arrows -that Pi-ko-i shot were not from the sort of bow that we are familiar -with; the Hawaiian bow, it must be noted, was not a complete bow. The -string hung untied from the top of the shaft; the shooter put the notch -of the arrow into the hanging string, whipped forward the shaft, and at -the same time cast the arrow, which was light, generally an arrow of -sugar-cane. The arrow was never used in war; it was used in sport—to -shoot over a distance, and at birds and at rats that were held in some -enclosure. The bird that cried out was evidently the elepaio. “Among -the gods of the canoe-makers,” says Mr. Joseph Emerson, “she held the -position of inspector of all koa trees designed for that use.” The -Hawaiian interest in riddles enters into Pi-ko-i’s story. - - - - -PAKA: THE BOY WHO WAS REARED IN THE LAND THAT THE GODS HAVE SINCE -HIDDEN - -Given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. V, Part II, of the Memoirs of -the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title Kaao no Kepakailiula, -the Legend of Kepakailiula. - -Pali-uli, where Paka’s uncles reared him, is the Hawaiian paradise. In -a chant that Fornander quotes it is described: - - - O Pali-uli, hidden Land of Kane, - Land in Kalana i Hauola, - In Kahiki-ku, in Kapakapaua of Kane, - The Land whose foundation shines with fatness, - Land greatly enjoyed by the god. - - -“This land or Paradise,” says Fornander, “was the central part of the -world ... and situated in Kahiki-ku, which was a large and extensive -continent.” Paka emerges from this Fairy-land into a world that is -quite diurnal when he sets about winning Mako-lea. The boxing, -spear-throwing, and riddling contests that he engages in reflect the -life of the Hawaiian courts. - - - - -THE STORY OF HA-LE-MA-NO AND THE PRINCESS KAMA - -Given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. V, Part II, of the Memoirs of -the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title Kaao no Halemano, -Legend of Ha-le-ma-no. - -Kama, or, to give her her full name, Kamalalawalu, was living under a -strict tapu. Ha-le-ma-no is no thoughtless tapu-breaker, as are other -young men in Hawaiian romance; there is very little of the mythical -element in this story; the enchantress-sister, however, is a figure -that often comes into Hawaiian romance. This story is remarkable for -its vivid rendering of episodes belonging to the aristocratic life—the -surf-riding, surely the greatest of sports to participate in, as it is -the most thrilling of sports to watch; the minstrelsy; the gambling. -The poems that Ha-le-ma-no and Kama repeat to each other are very -baffling, and are open to many interpretations. In this respect they -are like most Hawaiian poetry, which has a deliberate obscurity that -might have won Mallarmé’s admiration. - - - - -THE ARROW AND THE SWING - -This is one of the most famous of the Hawaiian stories. It is given in -the Fornander Collection, Vol. V, Part I, of the Memoirs of the Bernice -Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title He Kaao no Hiku a me Kawelu, the -Legend of Hi-ku and Ka-we-lu. It should be remembered that Hi-ku’s -arrow was more for casting than for shooting: the game that he was -playing at the opening of the story consisted in casting his arrow, -Pua-ne, over a distance. Ka-we-lu was living under tapu. But, like many -another heroine of Polynesian romance, she was not reluctant about -having the tapu broken. There is one very puzzling feature in this -story. Why did Ka-we-lu not give her lover food? Her failure to provide -something for him is against all traditions of Hawaiian hospitality. Of -course, in the old days, men and women might not eat together; -Ka-we-lu, however, could have indicated to Hi-ku where to go for food. -The food at hand might have been for women only, and tapu as regards -men. Or it might have been tapu for all except people of high rank. If -this was what was behind Ka-we-lu’s inhospitality it would account for -a bitterness in Hi-ku’s anger—she was treating him as a person of a -class beneath her. But these are guesses merely. I have asked those who -were best acquainted with the Hawaiian tradition to clear up the -mystery of Ka-we-lu’s behavior in this particular, but they all -confessed themselves baffled by it. The poems that Ka-we-lu chants to -Hi-ku, like the poems that Ha-le-ma-no chants to Kama, have a meaning -beneath the ostensible meaning of the words. - -With regard to Ka-we-lu’s death it should be remembered that according -to Polynesian belief the soul was not single, but double. A part of it -could be separated or charmed away from the body; the spirit that could -be so separated from the body was called hau. In making the connection -between Hi-ku and the lost Ka-we-lu I have gone outside the legend as -given in the Fornander Collection. I have brought in Lolupe, who finds -lost and hidden things. This godling is connected with the -Hi-ku-Ka-we-lu story through a chant given by Dr. Nathaniel Emerson in -his notes to David Malo’s Hawaiian Antiquities. - -Mr. Joseph Emerson gives this account of Lua o Milu, the realm of Milu, -the Hawaiian Hades: “Its entrance, according to the usual account of -the natives, was situated at the mouth of the great valley of Waipio, -on the island of Hawaii, in a place called Keoni, where the sands have -long since covered up and concealed from view this passage from the -upper to the nether world.” Fornander says that the realm of Milu was -not entirely dark. “There was light and there was fire in it.” The -swing chant that I have given to Hi-ku does not belong to the legend; -it is out of a collection of chants that accompany games. The Hawaiian -swing was different from ours; it was a single strand with a -cross-piece, and it was pulled and not pushed out. - -Mr. Joseph Emerson, in a paper that I have already quoted from, The -Lesser Hawaiian Gods, says that Hi-ku’s mother was Hina, the wife of -Ku, one of the greater Polynesian gods. In that case, Hi-ku was -originally a demi-god. - - - - -THE DAUGHTER OF THE KING OF KU-AI-HE-LANI - -Given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part III, of the Memoirs of -the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title Kaao no -Laukiamanuikahiki. The girl’s full name means “Bird catching leaf of -Kahiki.” Her mother is Hina, a mortal woman apparently, but her father -is a demi-god, a dweller in “the Country that Supports the Heavens.” In -the original, Ula the Prince is the son of Lau-kia-manu’s father; such -a relation as between lover and lover is quite acceptable in Hawaiian -romance. When she comes into her father’s country the girl incurs the -death-penalty by going into a garden that has been made tapu. -Lau-kia-manu, in Kahiki-ku, seems to have the rôle of Cinderella; -however, the Hawaiian story-teller gives her a ruthlessness that is not -at all in keeping with our notion of a sympathetic character. - - - - -THE FISH-HOOK OF PEARL - -This simple tale is given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part -III, of the Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi Museum, with the title Kaao -no Aiai, the Legend of Aiai. - - - - -THE STORY OF KANA, THE YOUTH WHO COULD STRETCH HIMSELF UPWARDS - -This story is given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part III, -with the title Kaao no Kana a Me Niheu, Legend of Kana and Niheu. Mr. -Thrum speaks of the legend of Kana and Niheu as having “ear-marks of -great antiquity and such popularity as to be known by several -versions.” The chant in which his grandmother prays for a double canoe -for Kana is over a hundred lines long; Miss Beckwith speaks of this -chant as being still used as an incantation. - - - - -THE ME-NE-HU-NE - -There are no stories of the Me-ne-hu-ne in the Fornander Collection. -Fornander uses the name, but only as implying the very early people of -the Islands. According to W. D. Alexander the name Me-ne-hu-ne is -applied in Tahiti to the lowest class of people. - -The account of the Me-ne-hu-ne that I give is taken from two -sources—from Mr. William Hyde Rice’s Hawaiian Legends, published by the -Bishop Museum, and from Mr. Thomas Thrum’s Stories of the Menehunes, -published by A. C. McClurg & Co., Chicago. I am indebted to Mr. Rice -for the part that treats of the history of the Me-ne-hu-ne, and to Mr. -Thrum for the two stories, “Pi’s Watercourse” and “Laka’s Adventure.” - -Beginning with “The Me-ne-hu-ne,” I have treated the stories as if they -were being told to a boy by an older Hawaiian. I have imagined them -both as being with a party who have gone up into the highlands to cut -sandalwood. That would be in the time of the first successors of -Kamehameha, when the sandalwood of the islands was being cut down for -exportation to China, “the land of the Pa-ke.” As the party goes down -the mountain-side the boy gathers the ku-kui or candle-nuts for -lighting the house at night. - - - - -THE STORY OF MO-E MO-E: ALSO A STORY ABOUT PO-O AND ABOUT KAU-HU-HU THE -SHARK-GOD, AND ABOUT MO-E MO-E’S SON, THE MAN WHO WAS BOLD IN HIS WISH - -The story of Opele, who came to be called Mo-e Mo-e, is given in the -Fornander Collection, Vol. V, Part I, of the Memoirs of the Bernice -Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title He Kaao no Opelemoemoe, Legend of -Opelemoemoe; the story about Po-o is given in the Memoirs of the -Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Vol. V, Part III (the stories in this -volume do not belong to the Fornander Collection); the story about the -Shark-God is taken from an old publication of the Islands, the Maile -Quarterly; the story of the Man who was Bold in his Wish is given in -the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part III, of the Memoirs of the -Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title Kaao no Kalelealuaka a Me -Keinohoomanawanui, the Legend of Kalelealuaka and Keinohoomanawanui. - - - - -THE WOMAN FROM LALO-HANA, THE COUNTRY UNDER THE SEA - -This story is taken from David Malo’s Hawaiian Antiquities. A variant -is given in the Fornander Collection. There are many Hinas in Hawaiian -tradition, but the Hina of this story is undoubtedly the Polynesian -moon-goddess. - - - - -HINA, THE WOMAN IN THE MOON - -This story is from Mr. Westervelt’s Ma-ui the Demi-God. The husband of -this Hina was Aikanaka. - - - - - - - - -FOOTNOTES - - -[1] Quoted by Melville in Typee, Chapter XXV. The chronicle of de -Figeroas’s voyage—the voyage by which the Marquesas were discovered and -the Polynesians looked upon for the first time by European man—was -published in Madrid, according to Melville, in 1613. Mendaña’s voyage -was made in 1595. - -[2] By Ivor H. N. Evans, M.A., Cambridge University Press, 1923. - -[3] Written kapu in Hawaiian and taboo by the mariners who came first -amongst the Polynesians. I have been instructed to write the word tapu. -Its meaning is not merely “forbidden”: it means “sacred,” “inviolate,” -“belonging to the gods.” In the four stories in the present collection -where tapu is in operation I have made no attempt to explain its -significance; I have merely said that it was forbidden to go to that -place or go near that person. - -[4] Published by the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Polynesian -Ethnology and Natural History, 1923. - - - - - - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE GATEWAYS OF THE -DAY *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the -Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work -on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the -phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg™ License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format -other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain -Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -provided that: - -• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation.” - -• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ - works. - -• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right -of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you “AS-IS”, WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ - -Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™'s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/69724-0.zip b/old/69724-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1cd242c..0000000 --- a/old/69724-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h.zip b/old/69724-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e4b5dba..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h/69724-h.htm b/old/69724-h/69724-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index bc68bd3..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/69724-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6986 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html -PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd"> -<!-- This HTML file has been automatically generated from an XML source on 2023-01-06T21:09:27Z using SAXON HE 9.9.1.8 . --> -<html lang="en"> -<head> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8"> -<title>At the gateways of the day</title> -<meta name="generator" content="tei2html.xsl, see https://github.com/jhellingman/tei2html"> -<meta name="author" content="Padraic Colum (1881–1972)"> -<link rel="coverpage" href="images/new-cover.jpg"> -<link rel="schema.DC" href="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"> -<meta name="DC.Title" content="At the gateways of the day"> -<meta name="DC.Creator" content="Padraic Colum (1881–1972)"> -<meta name="DC.Contributor" content="Juliette May Fraser (1887–1983)"> -<meta name="DC.Language" content="en"> -<meta name="DC.Format" content="text/html"> -<meta name="DC.Publisher" content="Project Gutenberg"> -<style type="text/css"> /* <![CDATA[ */ -html { -line-height: 1.3; -} -body { -margin: 0; -} -main { -display: block; -} -h1 { -font-size: 2em; -margin: 0.67em 0; -} -hr { -height: 0; -overflow: visible; -} -pre { -font-family: monospace; -font-size: 1em; -} -a { -background-color: transparent; -} -abbr[title] { -border-bottom: none; -text-decoration: underline dotted; -} -b, strong { -font-weight: bolder; -} -code, kbd, samp { -font-family: monospace; -font-size: 1em; -} -small { -font-size: 80%; -} -sub, sup { -font-size: 67%; -line-height: 0; -position: relative; -vertical-align: baseline; -} -sub { -bottom: -0.25em; -} -sup { -top: -0.5em; -} -img { -border-style: none; -} -body { -font-family: serif; -font-size: 100%; -text-align: left; -margin-top: 2.4em; -} -div.front, div.body { -margin-bottom: 7.2em; -} -div.back { -margin-bottom: 2.4em; -} -.div0 { -margin-top: 7.2em; -margin-bottom: 7.2em; -} -.div1 { -margin-top: 5.6em; -margin-bottom: 5.6em; -} -.div2 { -margin-top: 4.8em; -margin-bottom: 4.8em; -} -.div3 { -margin-top: 3.6em; -margin-bottom: 3.6em; -} -.div4 { -margin-top: 2.4em; -margin-bottom: 2.4em; -} -.div5, .div6, .div7 { -margin-top: 1.44em; -margin-bottom: 1.44em; -} -.div0:last-child, .div1:last-child, .div2:last-child, .div3:last-child, -.div4:last-child, .div5:last-child, .div6:last-child, .div7:last-child { -margin-bottom: 0; -} -blockquote div.front, blockquote div.body, blockquote div.back { -margin-top: 0; -margin-bottom: 0; -} -.divBody .div1:first-child, .divBody .div2:first-child, .divBody .div3:first-child, .divBody .div4:first-child, -.divBody .div5:first-child, .divBody .div6:first-child, .divBody .div7:first-child { -margin-top: 0; -} -h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, .h1, .h2, .h3, .h4, .h5, .h6 { -clear: both; -font-style: normal; -text-transform: none; -} -h3, .h3 { -font-size: 1.2em; -} -h3.label { -font-size: 1em; -margin-bottom: 0; -} -h4, .h4 { -font-size: 1em; -} -.alignleft { -text-align: left; -} -.alignright { -text-align: right; -} -.alignblock { -text-align: justify; -} -p.tb, hr.tb, .par.tb { -margin: 1.6em auto; -text-align: center; -} -p.argument, p.note, p.tocArgument, .par.argument, .par.note, .par.tocArgument { -font-size: 0.9em; -text-indent: 0; -} -p.argument, p.tocArgument, .par.argument, .par.tocArgument { -margin: 1.58em 10%; -} -.opener, .address { -margin-top: 1.6em; -margin-bottom: 1.6em; -} -.addrline { -margin-top: 0; -margin-bottom: 0; -} -.dateline { -margin-top: 1.6em; -margin-bottom: 1.6em; -text-align: right; -} -.salute { -margin-top: 1.6em; -margin-left: 3.58em; -text-indent: -2em; -} -.signed { -margin-top: 1.6em; -margin-left: 3.58em; -text-indent: -2em; -} -.epigraph { -font-size: 0.9em; -width: 60%; -margin-left: auto; -} -.epigraph span.bibl { -display: block; -text-align: right; -} -.trailer { -clear: both; -margin-top: 3.6em; -} -span.abbr, abbr { -white-space: nowrap; -} -span.parnum { -font-weight: bold; -} -span.corr, span.gap { -border-bottom: 1px dotted red; -} -span.num, span.trans { -border-bottom: 1px dotted gray; -} -span.measure { -border-bottom: 1px dotted green; -} -.ex { -letter-spacing: 0.2em; -} -.sc { -font-variant: small-caps; -} -.asc { -font-variant: small-caps; -text-transform: lowercase; -} -.uc { -text-transform: uppercase; -} -.tt { -font-family: monospace; -} -.underline { -text-decoration: underline; -} -.overline, .overtilde { -text-decoration: overline; -} -.rm { -font-style: normal; -} -.red { -color: red; -} -hr { -clear: both; -border: none; -border-bottom: 1px solid black; -width: 45%; -margin-left: auto; -margin-right: auto; -margin-top: 1em; -text-align: center; -} -hr.dotted { -border-bottom: 2px dotted black; -} -hr.dashed { -border-bottom: 2px dashed black; -} -.aligncenter { -text-align: center; -} -h1, h2, .h1, .h2 { -font-size: 1.44em; -line-height: 1.5; -} -h1.label, h2.label { -font-size: 1.2em; -margin-bottom: 0; -} -h5, h6 { -font-size: 1em; -font-style: italic; -} -p, .par { -text-indent: 0; -} -p.firstlinecaps:first-line, .par.firstlinecaps:first-line { -text-transform: uppercase; -} -.hangq { -text-indent: -0.32em; -} -.hangqq { -text-indent: -0.42em; -} -.hangqqq { -text-indent: -0.84em; -} -p.dropcap:first-letter, .par.dropcap:first-letter { -float: left; -clear: left; -margin: 0 0.05em 0 0; -padding: 0; -line-height: 0.8; -font-size: 420%; -vertical-align: super; -} -blockquote, p.quote, div.blockquote, div.argument, .par.quote { -font-size: 0.9em; -margin: 1.58em 5%; -} -.pageNum a, a.noteRef:hover, a.pseudoNoteRef:hover, a.hidden:hover, a.hidden { -text-decoration: none; -} -.advertisement, .advertisements { -background-color: #FFFEE0; -border: black 1px dotted; -color: #000; -margin: 2em 5%; -padding: 1em; -} -span.accent { -display: inline-block; -text-align: center; -} -span.accent, span.accent span.top, span.accent span.base { -line-height: 0.40em; -} -span.accent span.top { -font-weight: bold; -font-size: 5pt; -} -span.accent span.base { -display: block; -} -.footnotes .body, .footnotes .div1 { -padding: 0; -} -.fnarrow { -color: #AAAAAA; -font-weight: bold; -text-decoration: none; -} -.fnarrow:hover, .fnreturn:hover { -color: #660000; -} -.fnreturn { -color: #AAAAAA; -font-size: 80%; -font-weight: bold; -text-decoration: none; -vertical-align: 0.25em; -} -a { -text-decoration: none; -} -a:hover { -text-decoration: underline; -background-color: #e9f5ff; -} -a.noteRef, a.pseudoNoteRef { -font-size: 67%; -vertical-align: super; -text-decoration: none; -margin-left: 0.1em; -} -.externalUrl { -font-size: small; -font-family: monospace; -color: gray; -} -.displayfootnote { -display: none; -} -div.footnotes { -font-size: 80%; -margin-top: 1em; -padding: 0; -} -hr.fnsep { -margin-left: 0; -margin-right: 0; -text-align: left; -width: 25%; -} -p.footnote, .par.footnote { -margin-bottom: 0.5em; -margin-top: 0.5em; -} -p.footnote .fnlabel, .par.footnote .fnlabel { -float: left; -margin-left: -0.1em; -min-width: 1.0em; -padding-right: 0.4em; -} -.apparatusnote { -text-decoration: none; -} -.apparatusnote:target, .fndiv:target { -background-color: #eaf3ff; -} -table.tocList { -width: 100%; -margin-left: auto; -margin-right: auto; -border-width: 0; -border-collapse: collapse; -} -td.tocPageNum, td.tocDivNum { -text-align: right; -min-width: 10%; -border-width: 0; -white-space: nowrap; -} -td.tocDivNum { -padding-left: 0; -padding-right: 0.5em; -vertical-align: top; -} -td.tocPageNum { -padding-left: 0.5em; -padding-right: 0; -vertical-align: bottom; -} -td.tocDivTitle { -width: auto; -} -p.tocPart, .par.tocPart { -margin: 1.58em 0; -font-variant: small-caps; -} -p.tocChapter, .par.tocChapter { -margin: 1.58em 0; -} -p.tocSection, .par.tocSection { -margin: 0.7em 5%; -} -table.tocList td { -vertical-align: top; -} -table.tocList td.tocPageNum { -vertical-align: bottom; -} -table.inner { -display: inline-table; -border-collapse: collapse; -width: 100%; -} -td.itemNum { -text-align: right; -min-width: 5%; -padding-right: 0.8em; -} -td.innerContainer { -padding: 0; -margin: 0; -} -.index { -font-size: 80%; -} -.index p { -text-indent: -1em; -margin-left: 1em; -} -.indexToc { -text-align: center; -} -.transcriberNote { -background-color: #DDE; -border: black 1px dotted; -color: #000; -font-family: sans-serif; -font-size: 80%; -margin: 2em 5%; -padding: 1em; -} -.missingTarget { -text-decoration: line-through; -color: red; -} -.correctionTable { -width: 75%; -} -.width20 { -width: 20%; -} -.width40 { -width: 40%; -} -p.smallprint, li.smallprint, .par.smallprint { -color: #666666; -font-size: 80%; -} -span.musictime { -vertical-align: middle; -display: inline-block; -text-align: center; -} -span.musictime, span.musictime span.top, span.musictime span.bottom { -padding: 1px 0.5px; -font-size: xx-small; -font-weight: bold; -line-height: 0.7em; -} -span.musictime span.bottom { -display: block; -} -ul { -list-style-type: none; -} -.splitListTable { -margin-left: 0; -} -.splitListTable td { -vertical-align: top; -} -.numberedItem { -text-indent: -3em; -margin-left: 3em; -} -.numberedItem .itemNumber { -float: left; -position: relative; -left: -3.5em; -width: 3em; -display: inline-block; -text-align: right; -} -.itemGroupTable { -border-collapse: collapse; -margin-left: 0; -} -.itemGroupTable td { -padding: 0; -margin: 0; -vertical-align: middle; -} -.itemGroupBrace { -padding: 0 0.5em !important; -} -.titlePage { -border: #DDDDDD 2px solid; -margin: 3em 0 7em; -padding: 5em 10% 6em; -text-align: center; -} -.titlePage .docTitle { -line-height: 1.7; -margin: 2em 0; -font-weight: bold; -} -.titlePage .docTitle .mainTitle { -font-size: 1.8em; -} -.titlePage .docTitle .subTitle, .titlePage .docTitle .seriesTitle, -.titlePage .docTitle .volumeTitle { -font-size: 1.44em; -} -.titlePage .byline { -margin: 2em 0; -font-size: 1.2em; -line-height: 1.5; -} -.titlePage .byline .docAuthor { -font-size: 1.2em; -font-weight: bold; -} -.titlePage .figure { -margin: 2em auto; -} -.titlePage .docImprint { -margin: 4em 0 0; -font-size: 1.2em; -line-height: 1.5; -} -.titlePage .docImprint .docDate { -font-size: 1.2em; -font-weight: bold; -} -div.figure { -text-align: center; -} -.figure { -margin-left: auto; -margin-right: auto; -} -.floatLeft { -float: left; -margin: 10px 10px 10px 0; -} -.floatRight { -float: right; -margin: 10px 0 10px 10px; -} -p.figureHead, .par.figureHead { -font-size: 100%; -text-align: center; -} -.figAnnotation { -font-size: 80%; -position: relative; -margin: 0 auto; -} -.figTopLeft, .figBottomLeft { -float: left; -} -.figTopRight, .figBottomRight { -float: right; -} -.figure p, .figure .par { -font-size: 80%; -margin-top: 0; -text-align: center; -} -img { -border-width: 0; -} -td.galleryFigure { -text-align: center; -vertical-align: middle; -} -td.galleryCaption { -text-align: center; -vertical-align: top; -} -tr, td, th { -vertical-align: top; -} -tr.bottom, td.bottom, th.bottom { -vertical-align: bottom; -} -td.label, tr.label td { -font-weight: bold; -} -td.unit, tr.unit td { -font-style: italic; -} -td.leftbrace, td.rightbrace { -vertical-align: middle; -} -span.sum { -padding-top: 2px; -border-top: solid black 1px; -} -table.inlineTable { -display: inline-table; -} -table.borderOutside { -border-collapse: collapse; -} -table.borderOutside td { -padding-left: 4px; -padding-right: 4px; -} -table.borderOutside .cellHeadTop, table.borderOutside .cellTop { -border-top: 2px solid black; -} -table.borderOutside .cellHeadBottom { -border-bottom: 1px solid black; -} -table.borderOutside .cellBottom { -border-bottom: 2px solid black; -} -table.borderOutside .cellLeft, table.borderOutside .cellHeadLeft { -border-left: 2px solid black; -} -table.borderOutside .cellRight, table.borderOutside .cellHeadRight { -border-right: 2px solid black; -} -table.verticalBorderInside { -border-collapse: collapse; -} -table.verticalBorderInside td { -padding-left: 4px; -padding-right: 4px; -border-left: 1px solid black; -} -table.verticalBorderInside .cellHeadTop, table.verticalBorderInside .cellTop { -border-top: 2px solid black; -} -table.verticalBorderInside .cellHeadBottom { -border-bottom: 1px solid black; -} -table.verticalBorderInside .cellBottom { -border-bottom: 2px solid black; -} -table.verticalBorderInside .cellLeft, table.verticalBorderInside .cellHeadLeft { -border-left: 0 solid black; -} -table.borderAll, -table.rtlBorderAll { -border-collapse: collapse; -} -table.borderAll td, -table.rtlBorderAll td { -padding-left: 4px; -padding-right: 4px; -border: 1px solid black; -} -table.borderAll .cellHeadTop, table.borderAll .cellTop, -table.rtlBorderAll .cellHeadTop, table.rtlBorderAll .cellTop { -border-top: 2px solid black; -} -table.borderAll .cellHeadBottom, -table.rtlBorderAll .cellHeadBottom { -border-bottom: 1px solid black; -} -table.borderAll .cellBottom, -table.rtlBorderAll .cellBottom { -border-bottom: 2px solid black; -} -table.borderAll .cellLeft, -table.borderAll .cellHeadLeft { -border-left: 2px solid black; -} -table.borderAll .cellRight, -table.borderAll .cellHeadRight { -border-right: 2px solid black; -} -table.rtlBorderAll .cellLeft, -table.rtlBorderAll .cellHeadLeft { -border-right: 2px solid black; -} -table.rtlBorderAll .cellRight, -table.rtlBorderAll .cellHeadRight { -border-left: 2px solid black; -} -tr.borderTop td, tr.borderTop th, th.borderTop, td.borderTop { -border-top: 1px solid black !important; -} -tr.borderRight td, tr.borderRight th, th.borderRight, td.borderRight { -border-right: 1px solid black !important; -} -tr.borderLeft td, tr.borderLeft th, th.borderLeft, td.borderLeft { -border-left: 1px solid black !important; -} -tr.borderBottom td, tr.borderBottom th, th.borderBottom, td.borderBottom { -border-bottom: 1px solid black !important; -} -tr.borderHorizontal td, tr.borderHorizontal th, th.borderHorizontal, td.borderHorizontal { -border-top: 1px solid black !important; -border-bottom: 1px solid black !important; -} -tr.borderVertical td, tr.borderVertical th, th.borderVertical, td.borderVertical { -border-right: 1px solid black !important; -border-left: 1px solid black !important; -} -tr.borderAll td, tr.borderAll th, th.borderAll, td.borderAll { -border: 1px solid black !important; -} -tr.noBorderTop td, tr.noBorderTop th, th.noBorderTop, td.noBorderTop { -border-top: none !important; -} -tr.noBorderRight td, tr.noBorderRight th, th.noBorderRight, td.noBorderRight { -border-right: none !important; -} -tr.noBorderLeft td, tr.noBorderLeft th, th.noBorderLeft, td.noBorderLeft { -border-left: none !important; -} -tr.noBorderBottom td, tr.noBorderBottom th, th.noBorderBottom, td.noBorderBottom { -border-bottom: none !important; -} -tr.noBorderHorizontal td, tr.noBorderHorizontal th, th.noBorderHorizontal, td.noBorderHorizontal { -border-top: none !important; -border-bottom: none !important; -} -tr.noBorderVertical td, tr.noBorderVertical th, th.noBorderVertical, td.noBorderVertical { -border-right: none !important; -border-left: none !important; -} -tr.borderAll td, tr.borderAll th, th.borderAll, td.noBorderAll { -border: none !important; -} -.cellDoubleUp { -border-width: 0 !important; -width: 1em; -} -.cellDummy { -border-width: 0 !important; -} -td.alignDecimalIntegerPart { -text-align: right; -border-right: none !important; -padding-right: 0 !important; -margin-right: 0 !important; -} -td.alignDecimalFractionPart { -text-align: left; -border-left: none !important; -padding-left: 0 !important; -margin-left: 0 !important; -} -td.alignDecimalNotNumber { -text-align: center; -} -.lgouter { -margin-left: auto; -margin-right: auto; -display: table; -} -.lg { -text-align: left; -padding: .5em 0; -} -.lg h4, .lgouter h4 { -font-weight: normal; -} -.lg .lineNum, .sp .lineNum, .lgouter .lineNum { -color: #777; -font-size: 90%; -left: 16%; -margin: 0; -position: absolute; -text-align: center; -text-indent: 0; -top: auto; -width: 1.75em; -} -p.line, .par.line { -margin: 0; -} -span.hemistich { -visibility: hidden; -} -.verseNum { -font-weight: bold; -} -.speaker { -font-weight: bold; -margin-bottom: 0.4em; -} -.sp .line { -margin: 0 10%; -text-align: left; -} -.castlist, .castitem { -list-style-type: none; -} -.castGroupTable { -border-collapse: collapse; -margin-left: 0; -} -.castGroupTable td { -padding: 0; -margin: 0; -vertical-align: middle; -} -.castGroupBrace { -padding: 0 0.5em !important; -} -body { -padding: 1.58em 16%; -} -.pageNum { -display: inline; -font-size: 8.4pt; -font-style: normal; -margin: 0; -padding: 0; -position: absolute; -right: 1%; -text-align: right; -letter-spacing: normal; -} -.marginnote { -font-size: 0.8em; -height: 0; -left: 1%; -position: absolute; -text-indent: 0; -width: 14%; -text-align: left; -} -.right-marginnote { -font-size: 0.8em; -height: 0; -right: 3%; -position: absolute; -text-indent: 0; -text-align: right; -width: 11% -} -.cut-in-left-note { -font-size: 0.8em; -left: 1%; -float: left; -text-indent: 0; -width: 14%; -text-align: left; -padding: 0.8em 0.8em 0.8em 0; -} -.cut-in-right-note { -font-size: 0.8em; -left: 1%; -float: right; -text-indent: 0; -width: 14%; -text-align: right; -padding: 0.8em 0 0.8em 0.8em; -} -span.tocPageNum, span.flushright { -position: absolute; -right: 16%; -top: auto; -text-indent: 0; -} -.pglink::after { -content: "\0000A0\01F4D8"; -font-size: 80%; -font-style: normal; -font-weight: normal; -} -.catlink::after { -content: "\0000A0\01F4C7"; -font-size: 80%; -font-style: normal; -font-weight: normal; -} -.exlink::after, .wplink::after, .biblink::after, .qurlink::after, .seclink::after { -content: "\0000A0\002197\00FE0F"; -color: blue; -font-size: 80%; -font-style: normal; -font-weight: normal; -} -.pglink:hover { -background-color: #DCFFDC; -} -.catlink:hover { -background-color: #FFFFDC; -} -.exlink:hover, .wplink:hover, .biblink:hover, .qurlink:hover, .seclin:hover { -background-color: #FFDCDC; -} -body { -background: #FFFFFF; -font-family: serif; -} -body, a.hidden { -color: black; -} -h1, h2, .h1, .h2 { -text-align: center; -font-variant: small-caps; -font-weight: normal; -} -p.byline { -text-align: center; -font-style: italic; -margin-bottom: 2em; -} -.div2 p.byline, .div3 p.byline, .div4 p.byline, .div5 p.byline, .div6 p.byline, .div7 p.byline { -text-align: left; -} -.figureHead, .noteRef, .pseudoNoteRef, .marginnote, .right-marginnote, p.legend, .verseNum { -color: #660000; -} -.rightnote, .pageNum, .lineNum, .pageNum a { -color: #AAAAAA; -} -a.hidden:hover, a.noteRef:hover, a.pseudoNoteRef:hover { -color: red; -} -h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 { -font-weight: normal; -} -table { -margin-left: auto; -margin-right: auto; -} -.tableCaption { -text-align: center; -} -.arab { font-family: Scheherazade, serif; } -.aran { font-family: 'Awami Nastaliq', serif; } -.grek { font-family: 'Charis SIL', serif; } -.hebr { font-family: Shlomo, 'Ezra SIL', serif; } -.syrc { font-family: 'Serto Jerusalem', serif; } -/* CSS rules generated from rendition elements in TEI file */ -.small { -font-size: small; -} -.large { -font-size: large; -} -.center { -text-align: center; -} -/* CSS rules generated from @rend attributes in TEI file */ -.cover-imagewidth { -width:480px; -} -.threefishwidth { -width:301px; -} -.titlepage-imagewidth { -width:442px; -} -.wavewidth { -width:544px; -} -.yale-logowidth { -width:153px; -} -.plate01width { -width:541px; -} -.plate02width { -width:536px; -} -.xd31e1728 { -text-indent:2em; -} -.plate03width { -width:475px; -} -.plate04width { -width:556px; -} -.plate05width { -width:550px; -} -/* ]]> */ </style> -</head> -<body> -<p style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of At the gateways of the day, by Padraic Colum</p> -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online -at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you -are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the -country where you are located before using this eBook. -</div> - -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: At the gateways of the day</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Padraic Colum</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Illustrator: Juliette May Fraser</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: January 7, 2023 [eBook #69724]</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</p> - <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; text-align:left'>Produced by: Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project Gutenberg (This file was produced from images generously made available by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)</p> -<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE GATEWAYS OF THE DAY ***</div> -<div class="front"> -<div class="div1 cover"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divBody"> -<p class="first"></p> -<div class="figure cover-imagewidth"><img src="images/new-cover.jpg" alt="Newly Designed Front Cover." width="480" height="720"></div><p> -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div1 frenchtitle"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divBody"> -<p class="first center large"><i>Tales & Legends of Hawaii · Volume I</i> -</p> -<p></p> -<div class="figure threefishwidth"><img src="images/threefish.png" alt="Three fish jumping out of the water." width="301" height="242"></div><p> -</p> -<p class="center large"><i>At the Gateways of the Day</i> -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div1 titlepage"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divBody"> -<p class="first center large"><i>Tales & Legends of Hawaii</i> -</p> -<p class="center"><i>Volume I. At the Gateways of the Day.</i> -</p> -<p class="center"><i>Volume II. The Bright Islands.</i> (<i>In Preparation.</i>) -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div1 titlepage"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divBody"> -<p class="first"></p> -<div class="figure titlepage-imagewidth"><img src="images/titlepage.png" alt="Original Title Page." width="442" height="720"></div><p> -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="titlePage"> -<div class="figure wavewidth"><img src="images/wave.png" alt="Large wave engulfing island." width="544" height="196"></div> -<div class="docTitle"> -<div class="mainTitle"><i>At the<br> -Gateways of the Day</i></div> -</div> -<div class="byline"><span class="docAuthor"><i>by Padraic Colum</i></span><br> -<i>with illustrations by Juliette May Fraser</i></div> -<div class="figure yale-logowidth"><img src="images/yale-logo.png" alt="Yale University Logo with motto “Lux et Veritas” and “אורים ותמים”." width="153" height="186"></div> -<div class="docImprint"><i>New Haven</i><br> -<i>Published for The Hawaiian Legend & Folklore Commission by the Yale University Press</i><br> -<i>London · Humphrey Milford · Oxford University Press</i><br> -<span class="docDate"><i>1924</i></span></div> -</div> -<p></p> -<div class="div1 copyright"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divBody"> -<p class="first center"><i>Copyright 1924 by Yale University Press</i> -</p> -<p class="center small"><i>Printed in the United States of America</i> -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div1 dedication"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divBody"> -<p class="first center large">I DEDICATE THIS VOLUME<br> -TO THE MEMBERS OF<br> -THE HAWAIIAN LEGEND AND FOLKLORE COMMISSION -</p> -<p class="center">JOHN R. GALT<br> -EDNA J. HILL<br> -MARY S. LAWRENCE<br> -EMMA AHUENA D. TAYLOR -</p> -<p class="center large">AND TO FIVE KAMA AINA WHO HELPED ME -</p> -<p class="center">JOSEPH S. EMERSON<br> -WILLIAM HYDE RICE<br> -JULIE JUDD SWANZY<br> -THOMAS G. THRUM<br> -WILLIAM DRAKE WESTERVELT -<span class="pageNum" id="pb.vii">[<a href="#pb.vii">vii</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="toc" class="div1 contents"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>Table of Contents.</i></h2> -<table class="tocList"> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#intro" id="xd31e214">Introduction</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">xiii</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch1" id="xd31e220">The Boy Pu-nia and the King of the Sharks</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">1</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch2" id="xd31e226">The Seven Great Deeds of Ma-ui</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">7</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch2.1" id="xd31e232">How Ma-ui won a place for himself in the House</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">7</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch2.2" id="xd31e238">How Ma-ui lifted up the Sky</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">10</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch2.3" id="xd31e244">How Ma-ui fished up the Great Island</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">15</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch2.4" id="xd31e250">How Ma-ui snared the Sun and made Him go more slowly across the Heavens</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">20</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch2.5" id="xd31e256">How Ma-ui won fire for Men</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">27</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch2.6" id="xd31e262">How Ma-ui overcame Kuna Loa the Long Eel</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">32</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch2.7" id="xd31e268">The Search that Ma-ui’s Brother made for his Sister Hina-of-the-Sea</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">38</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch2.8" id="xd31e274">How Ma-ui strove to win Immortality for Men</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">41</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch3" id="xd31e281">Au-ke-le the Seeker</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">45</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch4" id="xd31e287">Pi-ko-i: The Boy Who Was Good at Shooting Arrows</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">69</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch5" id="xd31e293">Paka: The Boy Who Was Reared in the Land that the Gods Have Since Hidden</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">81</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch6" id="xd31e299">The Story of Ha-le-ma-no and the Princess Kama</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">93</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch7" id="xd31e305">The Arrow and the Swing</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">107</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch8" id="xd31e311">The Daughter of the King of Ku-ai-he-lani</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">117</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch9" id="xd31e317">The Fish-Hook of Pearl</a> <span class="pageNum" id="pb.viii">[<a href="#pb.viii">viii</a>]</span></td> -<td class="tocPageNum">131</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch10" id="xd31e324">The Story of Kana, the Youth Who Could Stretch Himself Upwards</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">137</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch11" id="xd31e330">The Me-ne-hu-ne</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">149</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch12" id="xd31e336">The Story of Mo-e Mo-e: Also a Story about Po-o and about Kau-hu-hu the Shark-God, -and about Mo-e Mo-e’s Son, the Man Who Was Bold in His Wish</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">165</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch13" id="xd31e342">The Woman from Lalo-hana, the Country under the Sea</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">193</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#ch14" id="xd31e349">Hina, the Woman in the Moon</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">199</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"><a href="#notes" id="xd31e355">Notes</a> </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">203</td> -</tr> -</table> -<p><span class="pageNum" id="pb.ix">[<a href="#pb.ix">ix</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div1 contents"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>List of Illustrations.</i></h2> -<table class="tocList"> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle"> -</td> -<td class="tocPageNum"><i>Facing page</i></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle">“<a href="#plate01">Then Pu-nia dived … into the cave, took two lobsters in his hands, and came up on -the place that he had spoken from</a>” </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">2</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle">“<a href="#plate02">Four birds … came and lit on the yards, and asked of those below what they had come -for</a>” </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">52</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle">“<a href="#plate03">The owl of Ka-ne came and sat on the stones and stared at him</a>” </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">150</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle">“<a href="#plate04">Koni-konia and Hina … climbed to the tops of the trees that were on the tops of the -mountains</a>” </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">198</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tocDivNum"></td> -<td class="tocDivTitle">“<a href="#plate05">It made an arching path for her from the rocks up to the heavens. With the net in -her hands she went along that path</a>” </td> -<td class="tocPageNum">200</td> -</tr> -</table> -<p><span class="pageNum" id="pb.xi">[<a href="#pb.xi">xi</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div1 notice"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>Helps to Pronunciation.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">There are three simple rules which practically control Hawaiian pronunciation: (1) -Pronounce each vowel. (2) Never allow a consonant to close a syllable. (3) Give the -vowels the following values: -</p> -<div class="table"> -<table> -<tr> -<td class="cellLeft cellTop">a </td> -<td class="cellTop">= </td> -<td class="cellTop">a </td> -<td class="cellRight cellTop">in <i>father</i></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="cellLeft">e </td> -<td>= </td> -<td>ey </td> -<td class="cellRight">in <i>they</i></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="cellLeft">i </td> -<td>= </td> -<td>i </td> -<td class="cellRight">in <i>machine</i></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="cellLeft">o </td> -<td>= </td> -<td>o </td> -<td class="cellRight">in <i>note</i></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="cellLeft cellBottom">u </td> -<td class="cellBottom">= </td> -<td class="cellBottom">oo </td> -<td class="cellRight cellBottom">in <i>tool</i></td> -</tr> -</table> -</div><p> -<span class="pageNum" id="pb.xiii">[<a href="#pb.xiii">xiii</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="intro" class="div1 last-child introduction"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e214">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>Introduction.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">If you draw a line from the tip of New Zealand to the top of the Hawaiian Islands, -you will be able to indicate the true Polynesian area. On the islands towards the -Malay Peninsula there is a mixed people who show the Papuan strain that is in them. -They are the Melanesians. On the American side of the line there is a singularly homogeneous -people who are of a type like to our own. They are the Polynesians. We have been able -to pay ourselves the compliment of admiring them ever since the chronicler of Mendaña’s -voyages looked upon the men and women of the Marquesas and found that “they had beautiful -faces and the most promising animation of countenance; and were in all things so becoming -that the pilot-mayor Quiros affirmed nothing in his life caused him so much regret -as leaving such fine creatures to be lost in that country.”<a class="noteRef" id="xd31e470src" href="#xd31e470">1</a> -</p> -<p>And yet the Polynesians, so like us physically, have in their romances none of the -familiar veins that one can discover in, let us say, the folk-tales of the darker -peoples in the lands around India. I take up <i>Studies in Religion, Folk-lore, and Custom in North Borneo and the Malay Peninsula</i>,<a class="noteRef" id="xd31e479src" href="#xd31e479">2</a> and I strike at once into: -<span class="pageNum" id="pb.xiv">[<a href="#pb.xiv">xiv</a>]</span></p> -<blockquote> -<p class="first">Now the Raja had given it out that whoever could remove the dragon’s head should marry -his daughter, who was shut up in an inner room and enclosed by a seven-fold fence -of ivory; but nobody could do it, for the dragon’s head was as big as a mountain.</p> -</blockquote><p> -</p> -<p>This is from a folk-tale told amongst the aboriginal tribes of the Malay Peninsula. -And when I read the opening of another tale I am in an imaginative land so familiar -that I know every turn and track in it.— -</p> -<blockquote> -<p class="first">“Oh,” said Serunggal, “it is no use my stopping here. I had better go and marry a -Raja’s daughter.”</p> -</blockquote><p> -</p> -<p>The tale goes on, and we have the Raja setting the adventurous youth three tasks, -just as the King or the Enchanter sets the youth three tasks in a story that has been -told in every village in Ireland and Serbia, in Spain and Sweden, in Russia and Italy; -in a story that was given literary form in classic Greece in Jason and Medea, and -in mediæval Wales in Kulhwch and Olwen. And this tale of Serunggal and the Raja’s -daughter belongs to one of the dark tribes of Borneo. -</p> -<p>There are animal helpers in this particular tale, just as there are animal helpers -in the ancient Greek folk-tale of Cupid and Psyche. Indeed, the stories belonging -to Borneo and the Malay Peninsula are well filled with animals—turtles and deer, elephants -and ant-eaters; they might be the material out of which Rudyard Kipling made his unforgettable -<i>Jungle Book</i> and his <i>Just-So Stories</i>. -</p> -<p>In Polynesia we find no romance that is based on formulæ familiar to us. Only occasionally -does a helping creature appear. There are practically no animal stories, <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xv">[<a href="#pb.xv">xv</a>]</span>for the sufficient reason that the Polynesian did not have opportunities for forming -a wide animal acquaintanceship. He brought the pig and the dog to the Islands with -him; and the shark and the turtle, the owl and the plover, were the only creatures -that aroused an interest in him. Even the way of counting things is changed when we -get into Polynesian romance: instead of three, seven, and nine, we have four, eight, -and sixteen for the cabalistic numbers. -</p> -<p>And yet, as all human desire is the same, and as human mentality compels a certain -sequence of incident, and there seem to be patterns in incident that all human beings -find it delightful to work out, the Polynesian stories have the elements and the combination -of elements that make fine narrative. Often the Polynesian story-teller rediscovers -a formula that we have used to make a memorable tale. Thus, in the present collection, -the daughter of the King of Ku-ai-he-lani will recall Cinderella, and the story of -Au-ke-le will recall the story of the Irish hero Oisin and all the other stories of -men who travelled far and returned to their own land; it will remind us of Odysseus -and Rip Van Winkle. -</p> -<p>In the folk-romance and in the mythological stories of Europe there are places that -may not be entered, and there are women whom a man must not approach. There is Blue -Beard’s Chamber; there is Danaë, and there is the Eithlinn of Celtic mythology. Polynesian -romance has places that may not be entered, and women who must not be approached by -men. And it has these instances in almost every story. Indeed, without the guarded -maiden and the forbidden place a Polynesian story-teller would find it difficult to -carry on. And one knows that when he was <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xvi">[<a href="#pb.xvi">xvi</a>]</span>dealing with one or the other he was dealing with the life around him: the place was -<i>tapu</i>,<a class="noteRef" id="xd31e509src" href="#xd31e509">3</a> the maiden was <i>tapu</i>. And the place or the maiden was <i>tapu</i> simply because a king or a chief with the privilege of declaring <i>tapu</i> had so declared it. When we read the story of Ka-we-lu in <i>The Arrow and the Swing</i>, or of Kama in <i>The Story of Ha-le-ma-no and the Princess Kama</i>, we can easily see how, as the simplicity of <i>tapu</i> was forgotten, the maiden would be given a fantastic security like that of Danaë -in her brazen tower, or like that of Eithlinn in her inaccessible island, and we can -see how motives would be invented for keeping her apart: Danaë’s son and Eithlinn’s -son are destined to slay their grandfathers. Every race has had <i>tapu</i>. But the Polynesians held to it and made it their single discipline. In these Polynesian -stories we are at the very beginning of a romance that for Europeans has grown to -be fraught with magic and mystery. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>I spent the months of January, February, March, and April of 1923 in the Hawaiian -Islands. I went there under the following circumstances: The Hawaiian Legislature -had formed a Commission on Myth and Folk-lore; the function of the Commission was -to have a survey made of the stories that had been collected and that belonged to -<span class="pageNum" id="pb.xvii">[<a href="#pb.xvii">xvii</a>]</span>myth and folk-lore of the Islands, and to have them made over into stories for children—primarily -for the children of the Hawaiian Islands. By an arrangement made between the Commission -and the Yale University Press, I was invited to make the survey and to reshape the -stories. -</p> -<p>I learned something of the language; I sought out those who still had the tradition -of Hawaiian romance and who could recite it in the traditional way; I made a study -of all the material that had been collected; I placed myself in the hands of the very -distinguished group of Polynesian scholars that is in Honolulu. Quite early in my -researches I came to the conclusion that my work should be based on the Fornander -Collection of Hawaiian Antiquities and Folk-lore, published by the Bernice Pauahi -Bishop Museum of Polynesian Ethnology and Natural History, in Honolulu, and I made -it my main task to understand the background of the stories given in that collection, -and to hear as many of them as possible from the lips of the surviving custodians -of the Polynesian tradition in Hawaii. -</p> -<p>I found in the Hawaiian Islands conditions that are lamentably like the conditions -in certain European countries where separate and interesting cultures are being pushed -aside by this or that culture that is politically and commercially important. In Hawaii -there is a great breach in the native tradition: I have been in houses where a grandmother -or grandfather knew traditional Hawaiian poems (<i lang="haw">mele</i>) and could chant them in the traditional way, while a son or daughter would be able -to translate them, but not able to chant them, and a grandchild would be able neither -to chant the poems nor translate them. Once, I remember, in such a house, I went to -see what a little girl, <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xviii">[<a href="#pb.xviii">xviii</a>]</span>the granddaughter of a lady who had chanted <i lang="haw">mele</i> to me for about an hour, was studying. This child had not allowed herself to be interrupted -either by the chanting of her grandmother or by the translating that her father did -for me; she was bent on mastering a lesson in a book that she kept before her—an American -school geography. “Stockholm is the capital of Sweden, Vienna is the capital of Austria,” -was one of the items that had kept her absorbed. -</p> -<p>I discovered that of the stories which I knew from the Fornander Collection, few lived -in the memory of the generations at present in the Islands. On the Island of Maui -I met a distinguished Hawaiian lady who had been at the court of King Kalakaua, and -who, in her youth, had been a trained story-teller. She tried to give me some of the -stories that belonged to her repertoire. But no sooner had she begun than she declared -that she was no longer familiar with the language in which the stories were told—they -were in the idiom of the Alii or the Chiefs, an idiom that she had not used since -her days at court. -</p> -<p>I heard many stories told, some by men, some by women. One of the best story-tellers -that I came across was a young man whom I met on the Island of Molokai. His father -was Chinese, and he had learnt the stories from his grandmother. He told me several -stories; one of them was the story of the rescue of Hina by her son Kana, a story -given in Fornander, and evidently belonging to the folk. -</p> -<p>What impressed me most in these recitals was the gesture of the story-teller. Every -feature, every finger of the man or woman becomes alive, becomes dramatic, as the -recital is entered on. The gesture of the Hawaiian makes <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xix">[<a href="#pb.xix">xix</a>]</span>the telling of a story a dramatic entertainment. Scholars have written of the long -and monotonous stories told in the old days in Hawaii. The stories were long, but -the gesture of the story-teller must have saved them from an unrelieved monotony. -I was made to recall again and again Melville’s description of an entertainment given -him by a genial Marquesan youth; it is a description that gives the spirit in which -the unspoiled Polynesian dramatizes his moods and his reactions. Says Melville: “Upon -my signifying my desire that he should pluck me the young fruit of some particular -tree, the handsome savage, throwing himself into a sudden attitude of surprise, feigns -astonishment at the apparent absurdity of the request. Maintaining this position for -a moment, the strange emotions depicted on his countenance soften down into one of -humorous resignation to my will, and then looking wistfully up to the tufted top of -the tree, he stands on tip-toe, straining his neck and elevating his arm, as though -endeavoring to reach the fruit from the ground where he stands. As if defeated in -this childish attempt, he now sinks to the earth despondingly, beating his breast -in well-acted despair; and then, starting to his feet all at once, and throwing back -his head, raises both hands, like a school boy about to catch a falling ball. And -continuing this for a moment or two, as if in expectation that the fruit was going -to be tossed down to him by some good spirit on the tree-top, he turns wildly round -in another fit of despair, and scampers off to a distance of thirty or forty yards. -Here he remains a while, eyeing the tree, the very picture of misery; but the next -moment, receiving, as it were, a flash of inspiration, he rushes again towards it, -and clasping both <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xx">[<a href="#pb.xx">xx</a>]</span>arms about the trunk, with one elevated a little above the other, he presses the soles -of his feet close together against the tree, extending his legs from it until they -are nearly horizontal, and his body becomes doubled into an arch; then, hand over -hand and foot after foot he rises from the earth with steady rapidity, and almost -before you are aware of it, has gained the cradled and embowered nest of nuts, and -with boisterous glee flings the fruit to the ground.” Imagine this spontaneous gesture -applied to the telling of a story, every incident of which gives rise to gesture. -But the gesture in the story-recital was not merely spontaneous; it was trained, as -was the gesture in the hula or Polynesian ballet. Dr. Nathaniel Emerson has a chapter -on gesture in his <i>Unwritten Literature of Hawaii</i>, and he gives this instance amongst others: “To indicate death, the death of a person, -the finger-tips, placed in apposition, are drawn away from each other with a sweeping -gesture and at the same time lowered till the palms face the ground. In this case -also we find diversity. One old man, well acquainted with hula matters, being asked -to signify in pantomimic fashion ‘The king is sick,’ went through the following motions: -He first pointed upward, to indicate the heaven-born one, the king; then he brought -his hands to his body and threw his face into a painful grimace. To indicate the death -of the king he threw his hands upward towards the sky, as if to signify a removal -by flight.” -</p> -<p>This unconstrained, dramatic gesture is being lost. There is no longer a school for -gesture in the hula. And the Hawaiian is checking his movements towards gesture. It -used to be said: “Tie an Hawaiian’s hands and he can’t <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xxi">[<a href="#pb.xxi">xxi</a>]</span>talk.” The older men and women still have that wonderful command of their features -and their hands—a command that made them the greatest ballet-performers that the world, -I believe, has ever had—but the younger generation feel that to use gesture is to -be rustic, to be “Kanaka.”. -</p> -<p>There is still, amongst the Hawaiians who live in the old Polynesian way, in villages -along the beaches, with the taro patches near, a great treasury of poetry and native -lore. But the newspaper and the victrola are taking up the time and the interest that -used to be devoted to poetry, traditional games, riddles, and the like. I have been -in cottages where the people still sit or lie on their mats on the floor, ignoring -tables, chairs, and beds, and where they eat with their fingers, lifting the poi out -of the common bowl. In such houses I have found a real scholarship, a delight in poetry, -and the possession of such a quantity of it as would put to shame a cultivated American, -Englishman, or Frenchman. But even in such houses I was aware that the tradition was -passing. Sitting on the floor in one such house, around a petroleum lamp also on the -floor, I have spelled out news items in an Hawaiian newspaper that told of the French -in the Ruhr and preparations for elections in Ireland. -</p> -<p>The world surges in on the Hawaiian Islands. And the Hawaiian can no longer give himself -solely to the tradition that bound him to the valleys and the mountains, and that -knit him to Wakea and Papa, who begat and brought forth the islands and the men and -women upon them. That separate tradition, which for thousands of years he lived by, -is being broken up, as the surge breaks up the lava on <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xxii">[<a href="#pb.xxii">xxii</a>]</span>his coast. The Hawaiian who, at the time when the Americans were making their declaration -of independence, was still working with tools of stone, knowing nothing of metals, -of pottery, of the loom, and knowing of no animal larger than a dog or a pig, has -now to take some account of the continents. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>With one exception the titles in this collection cover stories that are Hawaiian in -the sense that they were given their shape upon the Hawaiian Islands. That exception -is <i>The Seven Great Deeds of Ma-ui</i>. Although the scene of the demi-god’s adventures is Hawaiian, I have used incidents -related of him in other Polynesian islands—in New Zealand, Samoa, and the lesser islands. -I have treated Ma-ui, not as an Hawaiian, but as the Pan-Polynesian hero that he is. -With this exception the stories are all out of the Hawaiian tradition, or rather out -of the Polynesian tradition as it has been shaped in Hawaii. -</p> -<p>And the stories are mainly taken from that treasure house of Hawaiian lore, the Fornander -Collection of Hawaiian Antiquities and Folk-lore, which form Volumes IV–VI of the -Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Honolulu, published 1916–1919. I have -gone outside the Fornander Collection in several instances. <i>The Seven Great Deeds of Ma-ui</i> comes out of Mr. Westervelt’s valuable book, <i>Ma-ui the Demi-God</i>; the stories of the Me-ne-hu-ne come out of Mr. Thrum’s <i>Stories of the Menehunes</i> and Mr. Rice’s <i>Hawaiian Legends</i>; and I have drawn the story about Hina, the Woman of Lalo-hana, from David Malo’s -<i>Hawaiian Antiquities</i>, and the story about the <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xxiii">[<a href="#pb.xxiii">xxiii</a>]</span>Shark-god from an old publication of the Islands, <i>The Maile Quarterly</i>. But it is the Fornander Collection that has given a cast to this book, and I must -now give a brief account of it. -</p> -<p>Abraham Fornander, the author of <i>The Polynesian Race</i>, lived on the Islands for over forty years. He edited a journal called <i>The Polynesian</i>, and he was Superintendent of Public Instruction on the Islands in 1865–1866. He -had married an Hawaiian lady, and he was a strong partisan of the native race. -</p> -<p>The theory which he expounds in <i>The Polynesian Race</i> is that the Polynesian people carried with them into the islands of the Pacific a -culture and a set of ideas that connect them with the East Indians—with the pre-Sanscrit -culture and with an Arabian culture that touched both the Hebrews and the East Indians. -There is no reason to take this theory into account now. The important thing is that -Abraham Fornander, in order to substantiate it, made an appeal to the traditions that -were then current amongst the natives of Hawaii. -</p> -<p>At that time, over forty years ago, there was considerable native scholarship. Haleole, -who made an attempt to found a native literature with his romance <i>Laieikawai</i>, was writing and publishing. The Mission School in Lahainaluna on the Island of Maui -had become a sort of Hawaiian university. Abraham Fornander had the good sense to -appeal to native scholars, and he was able to get the best of them to interest themselves -in his project of collecting all the native lore that could throw a light on the migrations -of the Polynesian people. The Hawaiian monarchy <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xxiv">[<a href="#pb.xxiv">xxiv</a>]</span>was then in undisputed existence; native institutions were still vigorous; everywhere -there were men and women whose memories were stocked with the historical traditions -and the romances of Hawaii. -</p> -<p>With the help of a corps of native scholars a great deal of the surviving tradition -of Hawaii was collected by Fornander. Some of it was published in the Hawaiian newspapers -of the time, but no extensive publication was given to it. The manuscripts were kept -together; then, on the death of Abraham Fornander in 1887, the collection was acquired -by Charles R. Bishop, the husband of Bernice Pauahi, an Hawaiian royalty whose estate -went to the foundation of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Polynesian Ethnology -and Natural History in Honolulu. -</p> -<p>Forty years after it had been got together, the publication of the material was begun -by the Bishop Museum. That was in 1916. The volumes have appeared under the editorship -of that veteran Hawaiian scholar, Mr. Thomas Thrum, with the Hawaiian text on one -page and the English translation by Mr. John Wise on the other. It is Mr. Wise’s translations -that have furnished me with the bulk of the material for this book. -</p> -<p>Although the stories are described in the Museum publications as folk-lore, I doubted -from the time of my first reading of them that they were folk-lore in the strict sense -of the word; that is, I doubted their coming out of an unlearned and popular tradition. -The greater number of them seemed to me to be deliberate compositions intended for -a rather select audience. And then I found that a great master of Hawaiian tradition, -Mr. William <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xxv">[<a href="#pb.xxv">xxv</a>]</span>Hyde Rice, favored this opinion. In the Introduction to his <i>Hawaiian Legends</i><a class="noteRef" id="xd31e620src" href="#xd31e620">4</a> it is said: -</p> -<blockquote> -<p class="first">Mr. Rice’s theory as to the origin of these legends is based on the fact that in the -old days, before the discovery of the Islands by Captain Cook, there were bards and -story-tellers, either itinerant or attached to the courts of the chiefs, similar to -the minstrels and tale-tellers of mediæval Europe. These men formed a distinct class, -and lived only at the courts of the high chiefs. Accordingly, their stories were heard -by none except those people attached to the service of the chiefs. This accounts for -the loss of many legends, in later years, as they were not commonly known. These bards -or story-tellers sometimes used historical incidents or natural phenomena for the -foundation of their stories, which were handed down from generation to generation. -Other legends were simply fabrications of the imagination, in which the greatest “teller -of tales” was awarded the highest place in the chief’s favor. All these elements, -fiction combined with fact, and shrouded in the mist of antiquity, came, by repetition, -to be more or less believed as true. This class of men were skillful in the art of -the “apo”—that is, “catching,” literally, or memorizing instantly at the first hearing. -One man would recite or chant for two or three hours at a stretch, and when he had -finished, his auditor would start at the beginning of the chant and go through the -whole <i lang="haw">mele</i> or story without missing or changing a word. These trained men received through their -ears as we receive through our eyes, and in that way the ancient Hawaiians had a spoken -literature much as we have a written one.</p> -</blockquote><p> -</p> -<p>And as to the substance of this spoken literature, Miss Martha Warren Beckwith, who -has made by her edition of Haleole’s romance of <i>Laieikawai</i> a valuable contribution to the knowledge of Polynesian poetry and romance, states -<span class="pageNum" id="pb.xxvi">[<a href="#pb.xxvi">xxvi</a>]</span>that the traditional Hawaiian romance belongs to no isolated group but to the whole -Polynesian area. “We find,” she says, “the same story told in New Zealand and Hawaii, -scarcely changed, even in name.” Miss Beckwith thinks that the bulk of Hawaiian romance -consists of stories about the demi-gods—beings descended from the gods, or adopted -or endowed by them. These legendary tales reflect actual Polynesian conditions—“Gods -and men are, in fact, to the Polynesian mind, one family under different forms, the -gods having superior control over certain phenomena, a control which they can impart -to their offspring on earth.… The supernatural blends with the natural in exactly -the same way as to the Polynesian mind gods relate themselves to men, facts about -one being regarded as, even though removed to the heavens, quite as objective as those -which belong to the other, and being employed to explain social customs and physical -appearances in actual experience.” -</p> -<p>The bulk of the stories in the present volume are founded, then, on Polynesian literature -rather than on Polynesian folk-lore. They are based on the compositions of men who -were trained in the handling of character and incident. There are stories in the volume -that obviously belong to folk-lore, however. The stories of the Me-ne-hu-ne, which -are not given in the Fornander Collection, but are taken from the work of Mr. Thrum -and Mr. Rice, are folk-lore, I believe. The stories of Ma-ui the demi-god are folk-lore, -too. The story of Hina coming from the land under the sea, and the other story of -her going to the moon and becoming the woman in the moon, undoubtedly belong to Polynesian -folk-lore. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb.xxvii">[<a href="#pb.xxvii">xxvii</a>]</span></p> -<p>I do not believe that the Polynesian language, with its sounds that seem to belong -to the forest and the sea, is going or that it has to go. Indeed, there may be a Polynesian -revival similar to the national revivals which we have seen in European countries; -the Polynesian, with tragic exceptions in the case of the people of the Marquesas, -is coming back. He has turned the corner; our diseases no longer threaten his very -existence. And yet, although his language and parts of his culture will probably remain -for many generations, his children, if they are in the American territory of Hawaii, -and if they are to read the romances of old Hawaii, will have to read them in English. -For them, and for the neo-Hawaiian children—the children of American, British, Portuguese, -Japanese, and Chinese parents, mixed or unmixed with Hawaiian blood—these stories -have been reshaped. I have had to condense, expand, heighten, subdue, rearrange—in -a word, I have had to retell the stories, using the old romances as material for wonder-stories. -The old stories were not for children; they gave an image of life to kings and soldiers, -to courtiers and to ruling women. As in all stories not originally intended for children, -much has had to be suppressed in retelling them for a youthful audience. -</p> -<p>And retelling them has meant that I have had to find a new form for the stories. The -form that I choose to give them is that of the European folk-tale. -</p> -<p>In Hawaiian romance there is a feeling that is rare in any body of popular European -romance—a feeling for the beauty of nature, for flowers and trees, the aspect of the -clouds, the look of the sea, the sight of mountains, for the beauty of the rainbow -and the waterfall. And part of the <span class="pageNum" id="pb.xxviii">[<a href="#pb.xxviii">xxviii</a>]</span>delight in retelling these stories is in recalling the beauties of places that are -beautifully named. To be true in any measure to the originals these stories of my -retelling should have in them the rainbow and the waterfall, the volcano, the forest, -the surf as it foams over the reef of coral. In the hula or Hawaiian ballet, and in -the poetry that is related to the hula, there is, as Dr. Nathaniel Emerson has observed, -always an idyllic feeling. This idyllic feeling pervades Hawaiian romance also. The -scene of many of the stories, when not laid in lands that are frankly mythical, is -laid in an Hawaiian Arcadia. And how memorable these lands are!—Ku-ai-he-lani, the -Country that Supports the Heavens, and Pali-uli, the easeful land that the gods have -since hidden. Who would not roam through these lands with those who first told of -them and who first heard of them—the gracious and vivid children of Wakea and Papa? -</p> -<p class="signed">PADRAIC COLUM. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb1">[<a href="#pb1">1</a>]</span></p> -</div> -<div class="footnotes"> -<hr class="fnsep"> -<div class="footnote-body"> -<div class="fndiv" id="xd31e470"> -<p class="footnote"><span class="fnlabel"><a class="noteRef" href="#xd31e470src">1</a></span> Quoted by Melville in <i>Typee</i>, Chapter XXV. The chronicle of de Figeroas’s voyage—the voyage by which the Marquesas -were discovered and the Polynesians looked upon for the first time by European man—was -published in Madrid, according to Melville, in 1613. Mendaña’s voyage was made in -1595. <a class="fnarrow" href="#xd31e470src" title="Return to note 1 in text.">↑</a></p> -</div> -<div class="fndiv" id="xd31e479"> -<p class="footnote"><span class="fnlabel"><a class="noteRef" href="#xd31e479src">2</a></span> By Ivor H. N. Evans, M.A., Cambridge University Press, 1923. <a class="fnarrow" href="#xd31e479src" title="Return to note 2 in text.">↑</a></p> -</div> -<div class="fndiv" id="xd31e509"> -<p class="footnote"><span class="fnlabel"><a class="noteRef" href="#xd31e509src">3</a></span> Written <i lang="haw">kapu</i> in Hawaiian and <i>taboo</i> by the mariners who came first amongst the Polynesians. I have been instructed to -write the word <i>tapu</i>. Its meaning is not merely “forbidden”: it means “sacred,” “inviolate,” “belonging -to the gods.” In the four stories in the present collection where <i>tapu</i> is in operation I have made no attempt to explain its significance; I have merely -said that it was forbidden to go to that place or go near that person. <a class="fnarrow" href="#xd31e509src" title="Return to note 3 in text.">↑</a></p> -</div> -<div class="fndiv" id="xd31e620"> -<p class="footnote"><span class="fnlabel"><a class="noteRef" href="#xd31e620src">4</a></span> Published by the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Polynesian Ethnology and Natural -History, 1923. <a class="fnarrow" href="#xd31e620src" title="Return to note 4 in text.">↑</a></p> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="body"> -<div id="ch1" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e220">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>The Boy Pu-nia and the King of the Sharks.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">On one side of the Island there lived a great shark: Kai-ale-ale he was named; he -was the King of the Sharks of that place, and he had ten sharks under him. He lived -near a cave that was filled with lobsters. But no one dared to dive down, and go into -that cave, and take lobsters out of it, on account of Kai-ale-ale and the ten sharks -he had under him; they stayed around the cave night and day, and if a diver ventured -near they would bite him and devour him. -</p> -<p>There was a boy named Pu-nia, whose father had been killed by the sharks. Now after -his father had been killed, there was no one to catch fish for Pu-nia and his mother; -they had sweet potatoes to eat, but they never had any fish to eat with them. Often -Pu-nia heard his mother say that she wished she had a fish or lobster to eat with -the sweet potatoes. He made up his mind that they should have lobsters. -</p> -<p>He came above the cave where the lobsters were. Looking down he saw the sharks—Kai-ale-ale -and his ten sharks; they were all asleep. While he was watching them, they wakened -up. Pu-nia pretended that he did not know that the sharks had wakened. He spoke loudly -so that they would hear him, and he said: “Here am I, Pu-nia, and I am going into -<span class="pageNum" id="pb2">[<a href="#pb2">2</a>]</span>the cave to get lobsters for myself and my mother. That great shark, Kai-ale-ale, -is asleep now, and I can dive to the point over there, and then go into the cave; -I will take two lobsters in my hands, and my mother and I will have something to eat -with our sweet potatoes.” So Pu-nia said, speaking loudly and pretending that he thought -the sharks were still asleep. -</p> -<p>Said Kai-ale-ale, speaking softly to the other sharks: “Let us rush to the place where -Pu-nia dives, and let us devour him as we devoured his father.” But Pu-nia was a very -cunning boy and not at all the sort that could be caught by the stupid sharks. He -had a stone upon his hand while he was speaking, and he flung it towards the point -that he said he was going to dive to. Just as soon as the stone struck the water the -sharks made a rush to the place, leaving the cave of the lobsters unguarded. Then -Pu-nia dived. He went into the cave, took two lobsters in his hands, and came up on -the place that he had spoken from before. -</p> -<p>He shouted down to the sharks: “Here is Pu-nia, and he has come back safely. He has -two lobsters, and he and his mother have something to live on. It was the first shark, -the second shark, the third shark, the fourth shark, the fifth shark, the sixth shark, -the seventh shark, the eighth shark, the ninth shark, the tenth shark—it was the tenth -shark, the one with the thin tail, that showed Pu-nia what to do.” -<span class="pageNum" id="pb3">[<a href="#pb3">3</a>]</span></p> -<p>When the King of the Sharks, Kai-ale-ale, heard this from Pu-nia, he ordered all the -sharks to come together and stay in a row. He counted them, and there were ten of -them, and the tenth one had a thin tail. “So it was you, Thin Tail,” he said, “that -told the boy Pu-nia what to do. You shall die.” Then, according to the orders of Kai-ale-ale, -the thin-tailed shark was killed. Pu-nia called out to them, “You have killed one -of your own kind.” With the two lobsters in his hands, he went back to his mother’s. -</p> -<p>Pu-nia and his mother now had something to eat with their sweet potatoes. And when -the lobsters were all eaten, Pu-nia went back to the place above the cave. He called -out, the same as he had done the first time: “I can dive to the place over there and -then slip into the cave, for the sharks are all asleep; I can get two lobsters for -myself and my mother, so that we’ll have something to eat with our sweet potatoes.” -Then he threw down a stone and made ready to dive to another point. -</p> -<p></p> -<div class="figure plate01width" id="plate01"><img src="images/plate01.jpg" alt="“Then Pu-nia dived ... into the cave, took two lobsters in his hands, and came up on the place that he had spoken from.”" width="541" height="720"><p class="figureHead">“<i>Then Pu-nia dived … into the cave, took two lobsters in his hands, and came up on -the place that he had spoken from.</i>”</p> -</div><p> -</p> -<p>When the stone struck the water the sharks rushed over, leaving the cave unguarded. -Then Pu-nia dived down and went into the cave. He took two lobsters in his hands and -got back to the top of the water, and when he got to the place that he had spoken -from before, he shouted down to the sharks: “It was the first shark, the second shark, -the third shark, the fourth shark, the fifth shark, the <span class="pageNum" id="pb4">[<a href="#pb4">4</a>]</span>sixth shark, the seventh shark, the eighth shark, the ninth shark—it was the ninth -shark, the one with the big stomach, that told Pu-nia what to do.” -</p> -<p>Then the King of the Sharks, Kai-ale-ale, ordered the sharks to get into a line. He -counted them, and he found that the ninth shark had a big stomach. “So it was you -that told Pu-nia what to do,” he said; and he ordered the big-stomached shark to be -killed. After that Pu-nia went home with his two lobsters, and he and his mother had -something to eat with their sweet potatoes. -</p> -<p>Pu-nia continued to do this. He would deceive the sharks by throwing a stone to the -place that he said he was going to dive to; when he got the sharks away from the cave, -he would dive down, slip in, and take two lobsters in his hands. And always, when -he got to the top of the water, he would name a shark. “The first shark, the second -shark, the third shark—the shark with the little eye, the shark with the grey spot -on him—told Pu-nia what to do,” he would say; and each time he would get one of the -sharks killed. He kept on doing this until only one of the sharks was left; this one -was Kai-ale-ale, the King of the Sharks. -</p> -<p>After that, Pu-nia went into the forest; he hewed out two hard pieces of wood, each -about a yard long; then he took sticks for lighting a fire—the au-li-ma to rub with, -and the au-na-ki to rub on; he got charcoal to burn as a fire, and he got food. He -<span class="pageNum" id="pb5">[<a href="#pb5">5</a>]</span>put all into a bag, and he carried the bag down to the beach. He came above the cave -that Kai-ale-ale was watching, and he said, speaking in a loud voice: “If I dive now, -and if Kai-ale-ale bites me, my blood will come to the top of the water, and my mother -will see the blood and will bring me back to life again. But if I dive down and Kai-ale-ale -takes me into his mouth whole, I shall die and never come back to life again.” Kai-ale-ale -was listening, of course. He said to himself: “No, I will not bite you, you cunning -boy; I will take you into my mouth and swallow you whole, and then you will never -come back to life again. I shall open my mouth wide enough to take you in. Yes, indeed, -this time I will get you.” -</p> -<p>Pu-nia dived, holding his bag. Kai-ale-ale opened his mouth wide and got Pu-nia into -it. But as soon as the boy got within, he opened his bag and took out the two pieces -of wood which he had hewn out in the forest. He put them between the jaws of the shark -so that Kai-ale-ale was not able to close his jaws. With his mouth held open, Kai-ale-ale -went dashing through the water. -</p> -<p>Pu-nia was now inside the big shark; he took the fire-sticks out of his bag and rubbed -them together, making a fire. He kindled the charcoal that he had brought, and he -cooked his food at the fire that he had made. With the fire in his insides, the shark -<span class="pageNum" id="pb6">[<a href="#pb6">6</a>]</span>could not keep still; he went dashing here and there through the ocean. -</p> -<p>At last the shark came near the Island of Hawaii again. “If he brings me near the -breakers, I am saved,” said Pu-nia, speaking aloud; “but if he takes me to the sand -near where the grass grows, I shall die; I cannot be saved.” Kai-ale-ale, when he -heard Pu-nia say this, said to himself: “I will not take him near the breakers; I -will take him where the dry sand is, near the grass.” Saying this, he dashed in from -the ocean and up to where the shrubs grew on the shore. No shark had ever gone there -before; and when Kai-ale-ale got there, he could not get back again. -</p> -<p>Then Pu-nia came out of the shark. He shouted out, “Kai-ale-ale, Kai-ale-ale, the -King of the Sharks, has come to visit us.” And the people, hearing about their enemy -Kai-ale-ale, came down to the shore with their spears and their knives and killed -him. And that was the end of the ugly and wicked King of the Sharks. -</p> -<p>Every day after that, Pu-nia was able to go down into the cave and get lobsters for -himself and his mother. And all the people rejoiced when they knew that the eleven -sharks that guarded the cave had been got rid of by the boy Pu-nia. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb7">[<a href="#pb7">7</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch2" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e226">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>The Seven Great Deeds of Ma-ui.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">There is no hero who is more famous than Ma-ui. In all the Islands of the Great Ocean, -from Kahiki-mo-e to Hawaii nei, his name and his deeds are spoken of. His deeds were -many, but seven of them were very great, and it is about those seven great deeds that -I shall tell you. -</p> -<div id="ch2.1" class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e232">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main"><i>How Ma-ui won a place for himself in the House.</i></h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">When Ma-ui, the last of her five sons, was born, his mother thought she would have -no food for him. So she took him down to the shore of the sea, she cut off her hair -and tied it around him, and she gave him to the waves. But Ma-ui was not drowned in -the sea: first of all the jelly-fish came; it folded him in its softness, and it kept -him warm while he floated on. And then the God of the Sea found the child and took -charge of him: he brought him to his house and warmed and cherished him, and little -Ma-ui grew up in the land where lived the God of the Sea. -</p> -<p>But while he was still a boy he went back to his mother’s country. He saw his mother -and his four brothers, and he followed them into a house; it was a house that all -the people of the country were going into. He sat there with his brothers. And when -his mother called her children to take them <span class="pageNum" id="pb8">[<a href="#pb8">8</a>]</span>home, she found this strange child with them. She did not know him, and she would -not take him with the rest of the children. But Ma-ui followed them. And when his -four brothers came out of their own house they found him there, and he played with -them. At first they played hide-and-seek, but then they made themselves spears from -canes and began throwing the spears at the house. -</p> -<p>The slight spears did not go through the thatch of grass that was at the outside of -the house. And then Ma-ui made a charm over the cane that was his spear—a charm that -toughened it and made it heavy. He flung it again, and a great hole was made in the -grass-thatch of the house. His mother came out to chastise the boy and drive him away. -But when she stood at the door and saw him standing there so angry, and saw how he -was able to break down the house with the throws of his spear, she knew in him the -great power that his father had, and she called to him to come into the house. He -would not come in until she had laid her hands upon him. When she did this his brothers -were jealous that their mother made so much of this strange boy, and they did not -want to have him with them. It was then that the elder brother spoke and said, “Never -mind; let him be with us and be our dear brother.” And then they all asked him to -come into the house. -</p> -<p>The door-posts, Short Post and Tall Post, that had been put there to guard the house, -would not <span class="pageNum" id="pb9">[<a href="#pb9">9</a>]</span>let him come in. Then Ma-ui lifted up his spear, and he threw it at Tall Post and -overthrew him. He threw his spear again and overthrew Short Post. And after that he -went into his mother’s house and was with his brothers. The overthrowing of the two -posts that guarded the house was the first of the great deeds of Ma-ui. -</p> -<p>In those days, say the people who know the stories of the old times, the birds were -not seen by the men and women of the Islands. They flew around the houses, and the -flutter of their wings was heard, and the stirring of the branches and the leaves -as they were lit upon. Then there would be music. But the people who had never seen -the birds thought that this was music made by gods who wanted to remain unseen by -the people. Ma-ui could see the birds; he rejoiced in their brilliant colors, and -when he called to them they would come and rest upon the branches around the place -where he was; there they would sing their happiest songs to him. -</p> -<p>There was a visitor who came from another land to the country that Ma-ui lived in. -He boasted of all the wonderful things that were in his country, and it seemed to -the people of Ma-ui’s land that they had nothing that was fine or that could be spoken -about. Then Ma-ui called to the birds. They came and they made music on every side. -The visitor who had boasted so much was made to wonder, and he <span class="pageNum" id="pb10">[<a href="#pb10">10</a>]</span>said that there was nothing in his country that was so marvellous as the music made -by Ma-ui’s friends, the birds. -</p> -<p>Then, that they might be honored by all, Ma-ui said a charm by which the birds came -to be seen by men—the red birds, the i-i-wi and the aha-hani, and the yellow birds, -the o-o and the mamo, and all the other bright birds. The delight of seeing them was -equal to the delight of hearing the music that they made. Ever afterwards the birds -were seen and heard, and the people all rejoiced in them. This Ma-ui did when he was -still a boy growing up with his brothers and with his sister in his mother’s house. -But this is not counted amongst the great deeds of Ma-ui the hero. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch2.2" class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e238">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main"><i>How Ma-ui lifted up the Sky.</i></h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Then he lifted up the sky to where it is now. This was the second of Ma-ui’s great -deeds. -</p> -<p>When he was growing up in his mother’s house the sky was so low that the trees touched -it and had their leaves flattened out. Men and women burned with the heat because -the sky was so near to them. The clouds were so close that there was much darkness -on the earth. Something had to be done about it, and Ma-ui made up his mind that he -would lift up the sky. -</p> -<p>Somewhere he got a mark tattooed on his arm that was a magic mark and that gave him -great <span class="pageNum" id="pb11">[<a href="#pb11">11</a>]</span>strength. Then he went to lift up the sky. And from some woman he got a drink that -made his strength greater. “Give me to drink out of your gourd,” he said, “and I will -push up the sky.” The woman gave him her gourd to drink from. Then Ma-ui pushed at -the sky. He lifted it high, to where the trees have their tops now. He pushed at it -again, and he put it where the mountains have their tops now. And then he pushed it -to where it rests, on the tops of the highest mountains. -</p> -<p>Then the men and women were able to walk about all over the earth, and they had light -now and clear air. The trees grew higher and higher, and they grew more and more fruit. -But even to this day their leaves are flattened out: it is from the time when their -leaves were flattened against the sky. -</p> -<p>When the sky was lifted up Ma-ui went and made a kite for himself. From his mother -he got the largest and strongest piece of tapa-cloth she had ever made, and he formed -it into a kite with a frame and cross-sticks of hau wood. The tail of the kite was -fifteen fathoms long, and he got a line of olona vine for it that was twenty times -forty fathoms in length. He started the kite. But it rose very slowly; the wind barely -held it up. -</p> -<p>Then the people said: “Look at Ma-ui! He lifted the sky up, and now he can’t fly a -kite.” Ma-ui was made angry when he heard them say this: he drew the kite this way -and that way, but still he was not <span class="pageNum" id="pb12">[<a href="#pb12">12</a>]</span>able to make it rise up. He cried out his incantation— -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Strong wind, come; -</p> -<p class="line">Soft wind, come”—</p> -</div> -<p class="first">but still the kite would not rise. -</p> -<p>Then he remembered that in the Valley of Wai-pio there was a wizard who had control -of the winds. Over the mountains and down into the valley Ma-ui went. He saw the calabash -that the wizard kept the winds in, and he asked him to loose them and direct them -to blow along the river to the place where he was going to fly his kite. Then Ma-ui -went back. He stood with his feet upon the rocks along the bank of the Wai-lu-ku River; -he stood there braced to hold his kite, and where he stood are the marks of his feet -to this day. He called out: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“O winds, winds of Wai-pio, -</p> -<p class="line">Come from the calabash—‘the Calabash of perpetual winds.’ -</p> -<p class="line">O wind, O wind of Hilo, -</p> -<p class="line">Come quickly; come with power.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">The call that Ma-ui gave went across the mountains and down into the valley of Wai-pio. -No sooner did he hear it than the wizard opened his calabash. The winds rushed out. -They went into the bay of Hilo, and they dashed themselves against the water. The -call of Ma-ui came to them: -<span class="pageNum" id="pb13">[<a href="#pb13">13</a>]</span></p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“O winds, winds of Hilo, -</p> -<p class="line">Hurry, hurry and come to me.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">The winds turned from the sea. They rushed along the river. They came to where Ma-ui -stood, and then they saw the great, strange bird that he held. -</p> -<p>They wanted to fall upon that bird and dash it up against the sky. But the great kite -was strong. The winds flung it up and flung it this way and that way. But they could -not carry it off or dash it against the sky as they wanted to. -</p> -<p>Ma-ui rejoiced. How grand it was to hold a kite that the winds strove to tear away! -He called out again: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“O winds, O winds of Hilo, -</p> -<p class="line">Come to the mountains, come.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">Then came the west wind that had been dashing up waves in the bay of Hilo. It joined -itself with the north wind and the east wind, the two winds that had been tearing -and pushing at Ma-ui’s kite. Now, although the kite was made of the strongest tapa, -and although it had been strengthened in every cunning way that Ma-ui knew, it was -flung here and flung there. Ma-ui let his line out; the kite was borne up and up and -above the mountains. And now he cried out to the kite that he had made: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Climb up, climb up -</p> -<p class="line">To the highest level of the heavens, -<span class="pageNum" id="pb14">[<a href="#pb14">14</a>]</span></p> -<p class="line">To all the sides of the heavens. -</p> -<p class="line">Climb thou to thy ancestor, -</p> -<p class="line">To the sacred bird in the heavens.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">The three winds joined together, and now they made a fiercer attack upon Ma-ui’s kite. -The winds tore and tossed it. Then the line broke in Ma-ui’s hands. -</p> -<p>The winds flung the kite across the mountains. And then, to punish it for having dared -to face the heavens, they rammed it down into the volcano, and stirred up the fires -against it. -</p> -<p>Then Ma-ui made for himself another kite. He flew it, and rejoiced in the flying of -it, and all who saw him wondered at how high his kite went and how gracefully it bore -itself in the heavens. But never again did he call upon the great winds to help him -in his sport. Sometimes he would fasten his line to the black stones in the bed of -the Wai-lu-ku River, and he would let the kite soar upward and range here and there. -He knew by watching his soaring kite whether it would be dry and pleasant weather, -and he showed his neighbors how they might know it. “Eh, neighbor,” one would say -to another, “it is going to be dry weather; look how Ma-ui’s kite keeps in the sky.” -They knew that they could go to the fields to work and spread out their tapa to dry, -for as long as the kite soared the rain would not fall. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb15">[<a href="#pb15">15</a>]</span></p> -<p>Ma-ui learned what a strong pull the fierce winds had. He used to bring his kite with -him when he went out on the ocean in his canoe. He would let it free; then, fastening -his line to the canoe, he would let the wind that pulled the kite pull him along. -By flying his kite he learned how to go more swiftly over the ocean in his canoe, -and how to make further voyages than ever a man made before. -</p> -<p>Nevertheless, his kite-flying is not counted amongst the great deeds of Ma-ui. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch2.3" class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e244">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main"><i>How Ma-ui fished up the Great Island.</i></h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Now, although Ma-ui had done deeds as great as these, he was not thought so very much -of in his own house. His brothers complained that when he went fishing with them he -caught no fish, or, if he drew one up, it was a fish that had been taken on a hook -belonging to one of them, and that Ma-ui had managed to get tangled on to his own -line. And yet Ma-ui had invented many things that his brothers made use of. At first -they had spears with smooth heads on them: if they struck a bird, the bird was often -able to flutter away, drawing from the spear-head that had pierced a wing. And if -they struck through a fish, the fish was often able to wriggle away. Then Ma-ui put -barbs upon his spear, and his spear-head held the birds and the fish. His brothers -copied the spear-head that he made, and after that <span class="pageNum" id="pb16">[<a href="#pb16">16</a>]</span>they were able to kill and secure more birds and fish than ever before. -</p> -<p>He made many things that they copied, and yet his brothers thought him a lazy and -a shiftless fellow, and they made their mother think the same about him. They were -the better fishermen—that was true; indeed, if there were no one but Ma-ui to go fishing, -Hina-of-the-Fire, his mother, and Hina-of-the-Sea, his sister, would often go hungry. -</p> -<p>At last Ma-ui made up his mind to do some wonderful fishing; he might not be able -to catch the fine fish that his brothers desired—the u-lua and the pi-mo-e—but he -would take up something from the bottom of the sea that would make his brothers forget -that he was the lazy and the shiftless one. -</p> -<p>He had to make many plans and go on many adventures before he was ready for this great -fishing. First he had to get a fish-hook that was different from any fish-hook that -had ever been in the world before. In those days fish-hooks were made out of bones—there -was nothing else to make fish-hooks out of—and Ma-ui would have to get a wonderful -bone to form into a hook. He went down into the underworld to get that bone. -</p> -<p>He went to where his ancestress was. On one side she was dead and on the other side -she was a living woman. From the side of her that was dead Ma-ui took a bone—her jaw-bone—and -out of this bone he made his fish-hook. There was never a fish-hook <span class="pageNum" id="pb17">[<a href="#pb17">17</a>]</span>like it in the world before, and it was called “Ma-nai-i-ka-lani,” meaning “Made fast -to the heavens.” He told no one about the wonderful fish-hook he had made for himself. -</p> -<p>He had to get a different bait from any bait that had ever been used in the world -before. His mother had sacred birds, the alae, and he asked her to give him one of -them for bait. She gave him one of her birds. -</p> -<p>Then Ma-ui, with his bait and his hook hidden, and with a line that he had made from -the strongest olona vines, went down to his brothers’ canoe. “Here is Ma-ui,” they -said when they saw him, “here is Ma-ui, the lazy and the shiftless, and we have sworn -that we will never let him come again with us in our canoe.” They pushed out when -they saw him coming; they paddled away, although he begged them to take him with them. -</p> -<p>He waited on the beach. His brothers came back, and they had to tell him that they -had caught no fish. Then he begged them to go back to sea again and to let him go -this time in their canoe. They let him in, and they paddled off. “Farther and farther -out, my brothers,” said Ma-ui; “out there is where the u-lua and the pi-mo-e are.” -They paddled far out. They let down their lines, but they caught no fish. “Where are -the u-lua and the pi-mo-e that you spoke of?” said his brothers to him. Still he told -them <span class="pageNum" id="pb18">[<a href="#pb18">18</a>]</span>to go farther and farther out. At last they got tired with paddling, and they wanted -to go back. -</p> -<p>Then Ma-ui put a sail upon the canoe. Farther and farther out into the ocean they -went. One of the brothers let down a line, and a great fish drew on it. They pulled. -But what came out of the depths was a shark. They cut the line and let the shark away. -The brothers were very tired now. “Oh, Ma-ui,” they said, “as ever, thou art lazy -and shiftless. Thou hast brought us out all this way, and thou wilt do nothing to -help us. Thou hast let down no line in all the sea we have crossed.” -</p> -<p>It was then that Ma-ui let down his line with the magic hook upon it, the hook that -was baited with the struggling alae bird. Down, down went the hook that was named -“Ma-nai-i-ka-lani,” “Made fast to the heavens.” Down through the waters the hook and -the bait went. Ka-uni ho-kahi, Old One Tooth, who holds fast the land to the bottom -of the sea, was there. When the sacred bird came near him he took it in his mouth. -And the magic hook that Ma-ui had made held fast in his jaws. -</p> -<p>Ma-ui felt the pull upon the line. He fastened the line to the canoe, and he bade -his brothers paddle their hardest, for now the great fish was caught. He dipped his -own paddle into the sea, and he made the canoe dash on. -</p> -<p>The brothers felt a great weight grow behind the canoe. But still they paddled on -and on. <span class="pageNum" id="pb19">[<a href="#pb19">19</a>]</span>Weighty and more weighty became the catch; harder and harder it became to pull it -along. As they struggled on Ma-ui chanted a magic chant, and the weight came with -them. -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“O Island, O great Island, -</p> -<p class="line">O Island, O great Island! -</p> -<p class="line">Why art thou -</p> -<p class="line">Sulkily biting, biting below? -</p> -<p class="line">Beneath the earth -</p> -<p class="line">The power is felt, -</p> -<p class="line">The foam is seen: -</p> -<p class="line">Come, -</p> -<p class="line">O thou loved grandchild -</p> -<p class="line">Of Kanaloa.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">On and on the canoe went, and heavier and heavier grew what was behind them. At last -one of the brothers looked back. At what he saw he screamed out in affright. For there, -rising behind them, a whole land was rising up, with mountains upon it. The brother -dropped his paddle when he saw what had been fished up; as he dropped his paddle the -line that was fastened to the jaws of old Ka-uni ho-kahi broke. -</p> -<p>What Ma-ui fished up would have been a mainland, only that his brother’s paddle dropped -and the line broke. Then only an island came up out of the water. If more land had -come up, all the Islands that we know would have been joined in one. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb20">[<a href="#pb20">20</a>]</span></p> -<p>There are people who say that his sister, Hina-of-the-Sea, was near at the time of -that great fishing. They say she came floating out on a calabash. When Ma-ui let down -the magic hook with their mother’s sacred bird upon it, Hina-of-the-Sea dived down -and put the hook into the mouth of Old One Tooth, and then pulled at the line to let -Ma-ui know that the hook was in his jaws. Some people say this, and it may be the -truth. But whether or not, every one, on every Island in the Great Ocean, from Kahiki-mo-e -to Hawaii nei, knows that Ma-ui fished up a great Island for men to live on. And this -fishing was the third of Ma-ui’s great deeds. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch2.4" class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e250">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main"><i>How Ma-ui snared the Sun and made Him go more slowly across the Heavens.</i></h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">The Sky had been lifted up, and another great Island had come from the grip of Old -One Tooth and was above the waters. The world was better now for men and women to -live in. But still there were miseries in it, and the greatest of these miseries was -on account of the heedlessness of the Sun. -</p> -<p>For the Sun in those days made his way too quickly across the world. He hurried so -that little of his heat got to the plants and the fruits, and it took years and years -for them to ripen. The farmers working on their patches would not have time in the -light of a day to put down their crop into the <span class="pageNum" id="pb21">[<a href="#pb21">21</a>]</span>ground, so quickly the Sun would rush across the heavens, and the fishermen would -barely have time to launch their canoes and get to the fishing grounds when the darkness -would come on. And the women’s tasks were never finished. It was theirs to make the -tapa-cloth: a woman would begin at one end of the board to beat the bark with her -four-sided mallet, and she would be only at the middle of the board by the time the -sunset came. When she was ready to go on with the work next day, the Sun would be -already halfway across the heavens. -</p> -<p>Ma-ui, when he was a child, used to watch his mother making tapa, and as he grew up -he pitied her more and more because of all the toil and trouble that she had. She -would break the branches from the ma-ma-ka trees and from the wau-ke trees and soak -them in water until their bark was easily taken off. Then she would take off the outer -bark, leaving the inner bark to be worked upon. She would take the bundles of the -wet inner bark and lay them on the tapa-board and begin pounding them with little -clubs. And then she would use her four-sided mallet and beat all the soft stuff into -little thin sheets. Then she would paste the little sheets together, making large -cloths. This was tapa—the tapa that it was every woman’s business in those days to -make. As soon as morning reddened the clouds Ma-ui’s mother, Hina-of-the-Fire, would -begin her task: she would begin beating the softened bark at <span class="pageNum" id="pb22">[<a href="#pb22">22</a>]</span>one end of the board, and she would be only in the middle of the board when the sunset -came. And when she managed to get the tapa made she could never get it dried in a -single day, so quickly the Sun made his way across the heavens. Ma-ui pitied his mother -because of her unceasing toil. -</p> -<p>He greatly blamed the Sun for his inconsiderateness of the people of the world. He -took to watching the Sun. He began to know the path by which the Sun came over the -great mountain Ha-le-a-ka-la (but in those days it was not called Ha-le-a-ka-la, the -House of the Sun, but A-hele-a-ka-la, The Rays of the Sun). Through a great chasm -in the side of this mountain the Sun used to come. -</p> -<p>He told his mother that he was going to do something to make the Sun have more considerateness -for the men and women of the world. “You will not be able to make him do anything -about it,” she said; “the Sun always went swiftly, and he will always go swiftly.” -But Ma-ui said that he would find a way to make the Sun remember that there were people -in the world and that they were not at all pleased with the way he was going on. -</p> -<p>Then his mother said: “If you are going to force the Sun to go more slowly you must -prepare yourself for a great battle, for the Sun is a great creature, and he has much -energy. Go to your grandmother who lives on the side of Ha-le-a-ka-la,” said she (but -it was called A-hele-a-ka-la then), “and <span class="pageNum" id="pb23">[<a href="#pb23">23</a>]</span>beg her to give you her counsel, and also to give you a weapon to battle with the -Sun.” -</p> -<p>So Ma-ui went to his grandmother who lived on the side of the great mountain. Ma-ui’s -grandmother was the one who cooked the bananas that the Sun ate as he came through -the great chasm in the mountain. “You must go to the place where there is a large -wili-wili tree growing,” said his mother. “There the Sun stops to eat the bananas -that your grandmother cooks for him. Stay until the rooster that watches beside the -wili-wili tree crows three times. Your grandmother will come out then with a bunch -of bananas. When she lays them down, do you take them up. She will bring another bunch -out, and do you take that up too. When all her bananas are gone she will search for -the one who took them. Then do you show yourself to her. Tell her that you are Ma-ui -and that you belong to Hina-of-the-Fire.” -</p> -<p>So Ma-ui went up the side of the mountain that is now called He-le-a-ka-la, but that -then was called A-hele-a-ka-la, The Rays of the Sun. He came to where a great wili-wili -tree was growing. There he waited. The rooster crew three times, and then an old woman -came out with a bunch of bananas. He knew that this was his grandmother. She laid -the bananas down to cook them, and as she did so Ma-ui snatched them away. When she -went to pick up the bunch she cried out, “Where are the bananas that I <span class="pageNum" id="pb24">[<a href="#pb24">24</a>]</span>have to cook for my Lord, the Sun?” She went within and got another bunch, and this -one, too, Ma-ui snatched away. This he did until the last bunch of bananas that his -grandmother had was taken. -</p> -<p>She was nearly blind, so she could not find him with her eyes. She sniffed around, -and at last she got the smell of a man. “Who are you?” she said. “I am Ma-ui, and -I belong to Hina-of-the-Fire,” said he. “What have you come for?” asked his grandmother. -“I have come to chastise the Sun and to make him go more slowly across the heavens. -He goes so fast now that my mother cannot dry the tapa that she takes all the days -of the year to beat out.” -</p> -<p>The old woman considered all that Ma-ui said to her. She knew that he was a hero born, -because the birds sang, the pebbles rumbled, the grass withered, the smoke hung low, -the rainbow appeared, the thunder was heard, the hairless dogs were seen, and even -the ants in the grass were heard to sing in his praise. She decided to give help to -him. And she told him what preparations he was to make for his battle with the Sun. -</p> -<p>First of all he was to get sixteen of the strongest ropes that ever were made. So -as to be sure they were the strongest, he was to knit them himself. And he was to -make nooses for them out of the hair of the head of his sister, Hina-of-the-Sea. When -the <span class="pageNum" id="pb25">[<a href="#pb25">25</a>]</span>ropes were ready he was to come back to her, and she would show him what else he had -to do. -</p> -<p>Ma-ui made the sixteen ropes; he made them out of the strongest fibre, and his sister, -Hina-of-the-Sea, gave him the hair of her head to make into nooses. Then, with the -ropes and the nooses upon them, Ma-ui went back to his grandmother. She told him where -to set the nooses, and she gave him a magic stone axe with which to do battle with -the Sun. -</p> -<p>He set the nooses as snares for the Sun, and he dug a hole beside the roots of the -wili-wili tree, and in that hole he hid himself. Soon the first ray of light, the -first leg of the Sun, came over the mountain wall. It was caught in one of the nooses -that Ma-ui had set. One by one the legs of the Sun came over the rim, and one by one -they were caught in the nooses. One leg was left hanging down the side of the mountain: -it was hard for the Sun to move that leg. At last this last leg came slowly over the -edge of the mountain and was caught in the snare. Then Ma-ui gathered up the ropes -and tied them to the great wili-wili tree. -</p> -<p>When the Sun saw that his sixteen legs were held fast by the nooses that Ma-ui had -set he tried to back down the mountain-side and into the sea again. But the ropes -held him, and the wili-wili tree stood the drag of the ropes. The Sun could not get -away. Then he turned all his burning strength upon <span class="pageNum" id="pb26">[<a href="#pb26">26</a>]</span>Ma-ui. They fought. The man began to strike at the Sun with his magic axe of stone; -and never before did the Sun get such a beating. “Give me my life,” said the Sun. -“I will give you your life,” said Ma-ui, “if you promise to go slowly across the heavens.” -At last the Sun promised to do what Ma-ui asked him. -</p> -<p>They entered into an agreement with each other, Ma-ui and the Sun. There should be -longer days, the Sun making his course slower. But every six months, in the winter, -the Sun might go as fast as he had been in the habit of going. Then Ma-ui let the -Sun out of the snares which he had set for him. But, lest he should ever forget the -agreement he had made and take to travelling swiftly again, Ma-ui left all the ropes -and the nooses on the side of Ha-le-a-ka-la, so that he might see them every day that -he came across the rim of the mountain. And the mountain was not called A-hele-a-ka-la, -the Rays of the Sun, any more, but Ha-le-a-ka-la, the House of the Sun. After that -came the saying of the people, “Long shall be the daily journey of the Sun, and he -shall give light for all the peoples’ toil.” And Ma-ui’s mother, Hina-of-the-Fire, -learned that she could pound on the tapa-board until she was tired, and the farmers -could plant and take care of their crops, and the fishermen could go out to the deep -sea and fish and come back, and the fruits and the plants got heat enough to make -them ripen in their season. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb27">[<a href="#pb27">27</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch2.5" class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e256">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main"><i>How Ma-ui won fire for Men.</i></h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Ma-ui’s mother must have known about fire and the use of fire; else why should she -have been called Hina-of-the-Fire, and how did it come that her birds, the alae, knew -where fire was hidden and how to make it blaze up? Hina must have known about fire. -But her son had to search and search for fire. The people who lived in houses on the -Islands did not know of it: they had to eat raw roots and raw fish, and they had to -suffer the cold. It was for them that Ma-ui wanted to get fire; it was for them that -he went down to the lower world, and that he went searching through the upper world -for it. -</p> -<p>In Kahiki-mo-e they have a tale about Ma-ui that the Hawaiians do not know. There -they tell how he went down to the lower world and sought out his great-great-grandmother, -Ma-hui’a. She was glad to see Ma-ui, of whom she had heard in the lower world; and -when he asked her to give him fire to take to the upper world, she plucked a nail -off her finger and gave it to him. -</p> -<p>In this nail, fire burned. Ma-ui went to the upper world with it. But in crossing -a stream of water he let the nail drop into it. And so he lost the fire that his great-great-grandmother -had given him. -</p> -<p>He went back to her again. And again Ma-hui’a plucked off a finger-nail and gave it -to him. But when he went to the upper world and went to cross <span class="pageNum" id="pb28">[<a href="#pb28">28</a>]</span>the stream, he let this burning nail also drop into the water. Again he went back, -and his great-great-grandmother plucked off a third nail for him. And this went on, -Ma-ui letting the nails fall into the water, and Ma-hui’a giving him the nails off -her fingers, until at last all the nails of all her fingers were given to him. -</p> -<p>But still he went on letting the burning nails fall into the water that he had to -cross, and at last the nails of his great-great-grandmother’s toes as well as the -nails of her fingers were given to him—all but the nail on the last of her toes. Ma-ui -went back to her to get this last nail. Then Ma-hui’a became blazing angry; she plucked -the nail off, but instead of giving it to him she flung it upon the ground. -</p> -<p>Fire poured out of the nail and took hold on everything. Ma-ui ran to the upper world, -and Ma-hui’a in her anger ran after him. He dashed into the water. But now the forests -were blazing, and the earth was burning, and the water was boiling. Ma-ui ran on, -and Ma-hui’a ran behind him. As he ran he chanted a magic incantation for rain to -come, so that the burning might be put out: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“To the roaring thunder; -</p> -<p class="line">To the great rain—the long rain; -</p> -<p class="line">To the drizzling rain—the small rain; -</p> -<p class="line">To the rain pattering on the leaves. -</p> -<p class="line">These are the storms, the storms -<span class="pageNum" id="pb29">[<a href="#pb29">29</a>]</span></p> -<p class="line">Cause them to fall; -</p> -<p class="line">To pour in torrents.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">The rain came on—the long rain, the small rain, the rain that patters on the leaves; -storms came, and rain in torrents. The fire that raged in the forests and burned on -the ground was drowned out. And Ma-hui’a, who had followed him, was nearly-drowned -by the torrents of rain. She saw her fire, all the fire that was in the lower and -in the upper worlds, being quenched by the rain. -</p> -<p>She gathered up what fragments of fire she could, and she hid them in barks of different -trees so that the rain could not get at them and quench them. Ma-ui’s mother must -have known where his great-great-grandmother hid the fire. If she did not, her sacred -birds, the alae, knew it. They were able to take the barks of the trees and, by rubbing -them together, to bring out fire. -</p> -<p>In Hawaii they tell how Ma-ui and his brothers used to go out fishing every day, and -how, as soon as they got far out to sea, they would see smoke rising on the mountain-side. -“Behold,” they would say, “there is a fire. Whose can it be?” “Let us hasten to the -shore and cook our fish at that fire,” another would say. -</p> -<p>So, with the fish that they had caught, Ma-ui and his brothers would hasten to the -shore. The swiftest of them would run up the mountain-side. But when <span class="pageNum" id="pb30">[<a href="#pb30">30</a>]</span>he would get to where the smoke had been, all he would see would be the alae scratching -clay over burnt-out sticks. The alae would leave the place where they had been seen, -and Ma-ui would follow them from place to place, hoping to catch them while their -fire was lighted. -</p> -<p>He would send his brothers off fishing, and he himself would watch for the smoke from -the fire that the alae would kindle. But they would kindle no fire on the days that -he did not go out in the canoe with his brothers. “We cannot have our cooked bananas -to-day,” the old bird would say to the young birds, “for the swift son of Hina is -somewhere near, and he would come upon us before we put out our fire. And remember -that the guardian of the fire told us never to show a man where it is hidden or how -it is taken out of its hiding place.” -</p> -<p>Then Ma-ui understood that the bird watched for his going and that they made no fire -until they saw him out at sea in his canoe. He knew that they counted the men that -went out, and that if he was not in the number they did no cooking that day. Every -time he went in the canoe he saw smoke rising on the mountain-side. -</p> -<p>Then Ma-ui thought of a trick to play on them—on the stingy alae that would not give -fire, but left men to eat raw roots and raw fish. He rolled up a piece of tapa, and -he put it into the canoe, making it like a man. Then he hid near the shore. The brothers -<span class="pageNum" id="pb31">[<a href="#pb31">31</a>]</span>went fishing, and the birds counted the figures in the canoe. “The swift son of Hina -has gone fishing: we can have cooked bananas to-day.” “Make the fire, make the fire, -until we cook our bananas,” said the young alae. -</p> -<p>So they gathered the wood together, and they rubbed the barks, and they made the fire. -The smoke rose up from it, and swift Ma-ui ran up the mountain-side. He came upon -the flock of birds just as the old one was dashing water upon the embers. He caught -her by the neck and held her. -</p> -<p>“I will kill you,” he said, “for hiding fire from men.” -</p> -<p>“If you kill me,” said the old alae, “there will be no one to show you how to get -fire.” -</p> -<p>“Show me how to get fire,” said Ma-ui, “and I will let you go.” -</p> -<p>The cunning alae tried to deceive Ma-ui. She thought she would get him off his guard, -that he would let go of her, and that she could fly away. “Go to the reeds and rub -them together, and you will get fire,” she said. -</p> -<p>Ma-ui went to the reeds and rubbed them together. But still he held the bird by the -neck. Nothing came out of the reeds but moisture. He squeezed her neck. “If you kill -me, there will be no one to tell you where to get fire,” said the cunning bird, still -hoping to get him off his guard. “Go to the taro leaves and rub them together, and -you will get fire.” -<span class="pageNum" id="pb32">[<a href="#pb32">32</a>]</span></p> -<p>Ma-ui held to the bird’s neck. He went to the taro leaves and rubbed them together, -but no fire came. He squeezed her neck harder. The bird was nearly dead now. But still -she tried to deceive the man. “Go to the banana stumps and rub them together, and -you will get fire,” she said. -</p> -<p>He went to the banana stumps and rubbed them together. But still no fire came. Then -he gave the bird a squeeze that brought her near her death. She showed him then the -trees to go to—the hau tree and the sandalwood tree. He took the barks of the trees -and rubbed them, and they gave fire. And the sweet-smelling sandalwood he called “ili-aha”—that -is, “fire bark”—because fire came most easily from the bark of that tree. With sticks -from these trees Ma-ui went to men. He showed them how to get fire by rubbing them -together. And never afterwards had men to eat fish raw and roots raw. They could always -have fire now. -</p> -<p>The first stick he lighted he rubbed on the head of the bird that showed him at last -where the fire was hidden. And that is the reason why the alae, the mud-hen, has a -red streak on her head to this day. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch2.6" class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e262">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main"><i>How Ma-ui overcame Kuna Loa the Long Eel.</i></h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Hina-of-the-Fire lived in a cave that the waters of the river streamed over, a cave -that always had a beautiful rainbow glimmering across it. While her <span class="pageNum" id="pb33">[<a href="#pb33">33</a>]</span>sons were away no enemy could come to Hina in this cave, for the walls of it went -up straight and smooth. And there at the opening of the cave she used to sit, beating -out her tapa in the long days that came after Ma-ui had snared the Sun and had made -him go more slowly across the heavens. -</p> -<p>In the river below there was one who was an enemy to Hina. This was Kuna Loa, the -Long Eel. Once Kuna Loa had seen Hina on the bank of the river, and he had wanted -her to leave her cave and come to his abode. But Hina-of-the-Fire would not go near -the Long Eel. Then he had gone to her, and he had lashed her with his tail, covering -her with the slime of the river. She told about the insults he had given her, and -Ma-ui drove the Long Eel up the river, where he took shelter in the deep pools. Ma-ui -broke down the banks of the deep pools with thrusts of his spear, but Kuna Loa, the -Long Eel, was still able to escape from him. Now Ma-ui had gone away, and his mother, -Hina-of-the-Fire, kept within the cave, the smooth rock of which Kuna Loa could not -climb. -</p> -<p>The Long Eel came down the river. He saw Hina sitting in the mouth of the cave that -had the rainbow glimmering across it, and he was filled with rage and a wish to destroy -her. He took a great rock and he put it across the stream, filling it from bank to -bank. Then he lashed about in the water in his <span class="pageNum" id="pb34">[<a href="#pb34">34</a>]</span>delight at the thought of what was going to happen to Hina. -</p> -<p>She heard a deeper sound in the water than she had ever heard before as she sat there. -She looked down and she saw that the water was nearer to the mouth of the cave than -she had ever seen it before. Higher and higher it came. And then Hina heard the voice -of Kuna Loa rejoicing at the destruction that was coming to her. He raised himself -up in the water and cried out to her: “Now your mighty son cannot help you. I will -drown you with the waters of the river before he comes back to you, Hina.” -</p> -<p>And Hina-of-the-Fire cried “Alas, Alas,” as she watched the waters mount up and up, -for she knew that Ma-ui and her other sons were far away, and that there was none -to help her against Kuna Loa, the Long Eel. But, even as she lamented, something was -happening to aid Hina. For Ma-ui had placed above her cave a cloud that served her—“Ao-opua,” -“The Warning Cloud.” Over the cave it rose now, giving itself a strange shape: Ma-ui -would see it and be sure to know by its sign that something dire was happening in -his mother’s cave. -</p> -<p>He was then on the mountain Ha-le-a-ka-la, the House of the Sun. He saw the strangely -shaped cloud hanging over her cave, and he knew that some danger threatened his mother, -Hina-of-the-Fire. He dashed down the side of the mountain, bringing with <span class="pageNum" id="pb35">[<a href="#pb35">35</a>]</span>him the magic axe that his grandmother had given him for his battle with the Sun. -He sprang into his canoe. With two strokes of his paddle he crossed the channel and -was at the mouth of the Wai-lu-ku River. The bed of the river was empty of water, -and Ma-ui left his canoe on the stones and went up towards Hina’s cave. -</p> -<p>The water had mounted up and up and had gone into the cave, and was spilling over -Hina’s tapa-board. She was lamenting, and her heart was broken with the thought that -neither Ma-ui nor his brothers would come until the river had drowned her in her cave. -</p> -<p>Ma-ui was then coming up the bed of the river. He saw the great stone across the stream, -and he heard Kuna Loa rejoicing over the destruction that was coming to Hina in her -cave. With one stroke of his axe he broke the rock across. The water came through -the break. He struck the rocks and smashed them. The river flowed down once more, -and Hina was safe in her cave. -</p> -<p>Kuna Loa heard the crash of the axe on the rock, and he knew that Ma-ui had come. -He dashed up the stream to hide himself again in the deep pools. Ma-ui showed his -mother that she was safe, and then he went following the Long Eel. -</p> -<p>Kuna Loa had gone into a deep pool. Ma-ui flung burning stones into the water of that -pool, <span class="pageNum" id="pb36">[<a href="#pb36">36</a>]</span>making it boil up. Then Kuna Loa dashed into another pool. From pool to pool Ma-ui -chased him, making the pools boil around him. (And there they boil to this day, although -Kuna Loa is no longer there.) At last the Eel found a cave in the bottom of one of -the pools, and he went and hid in it, and Ma-ui could not find him there, nor could -the hot stones that Ma-ui threw into the water, making it boil, drive Kuna Loa out. -</p> -<p>Hina thought she was safe from the Long Eel after that. She thought that his skin -was so scalded by the boiling water that he had died in his cave. Down the river bank -for water she would go, and sometimes she would stand on the bank all wreathed in -flowers. -</p> -<p>But one day, as she was standing on the bank of the river, Kuna Loa suddenly came -up. Hina fled before him. The Eel was between her and her cave, and she could not -get back to her shelter. She fled through the woods. And as she fled she shrieked -out chants to Ma-ui: her chants went through the woods, and along the side of the -mountain, and across the sea; they came at last up the side of Ha-le-a-ka-la, where -her son Ma-ui was. -</p> -<p>There were many people in the places that Hina fled through, but they could do nothing -to help her against the Long Eel. He came swiftly after her. The people in the villages -that they went through <span class="pageNum" id="pb37">[<a href="#pb37">37</a>]</span>stood and watched the woman and the Eel that pursued her. -</p> -<p>Where would she go now? The Long Eel was close behind her. Then Hina saw a bread-fruit -tree with great branches, and she climbed into it. Kuna Loa wound himself around the -tree and came after her. But the branch that Hina was in was lifted up and up by the -tree, and the Long Eel could not come to her. -</p> -<p>And then Ma-ui came. He had dashed down the side of the mountain and had crossed the -channel with two strokes of his paddles and had hurried along the track made by the -Long Eel. Now he saw his mother in the branch that kept mounting up, and he saw Kuna -Loa winding himself up after her. Ma-ui went into the tree. He struck the Eel a terrible -blow and brought him to the ground. Then he sprang down and cut his head off. With -other blows of his axe he cut the Eel all to pieces. He flung the head and the tail -of Kuna Loa into the sea. The head turned into fish of many kinds, and the tail became -the large conger eel of the sea. Other parts of the body turned into sea monsters -of different kinds. And the blood of Kuna Loa, as it fell into the fresh water, became -the common eels. The fresh and the salt water eels came into the world in this way, -and Ma-ui, by killing the Long Eel, wrought the sixth of his great deeds. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb38">[<a href="#pb38">38</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch2.7" class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e268">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main"><i>The Search that Ma-ui’s Brother made for his Sister Hina-of-the-Sea.</i></h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Ma-ui had four brothers, and each of them was named Ma-ui. The doer of the great deeds -was known as “the skillful Ma-ui,” and the other four brothers were called “the forgetful -Ma-uis.” -</p> -<p>But there was one brother who should not have been called “forgetful.” He was the -eldest brother, Ma-ui Mua, and he was sometimes called Lu-pe. He may have been forgetful -about many things that the skillful Ma-ui took account of, but he was not forgetful -of his sister, of Hina-of-the-Sea. -</p> -<p>His great and skillful brother had set Hina-of-the-Sea wandering. She was married, -and her husband often went on journeys with the skillful Ma-ui. And once Ma-ui became -angry with him because he ate the bait that they had taken with them for fishing; -he became angry with his sister’s husband, and in his anger he uttered a spell over -him, and changed his form into the form of a dog. -</p> -<p>When Hina-of-the-Sea knew that her husband was lost to her she went down to the shore -and she chanted her own death-song: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“I weep, I call upon the steep billows of the sea, -</p> -<p class="line">And on him, the great, the ocean god; -</p> -<p class="line">The monsters, all now hidden, -</p> -<p class="line">To come and bury me, -</p> -<p class="line">Who am now wrapped in mourning. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb39">[<a href="#pb39">39</a>]</span></p> -<p class="line">Let the waves wear their mourning, too, -</p> -<p class="line">And sleep as sleeps the dead.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And after she had chanted this, she threw herself into the sea. -</p> -<p>But the waves did not drown her. They carried her to a far land. There were no people -there; according to the ancient chant— -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“The houses of Lima Loa stand, -</p> -<p class="line">But there are no people; -</p> -<p class="line">They are at Mana.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">The people were by the sea, and two who were fishermen found her. They carried her -to their hut, and when they had taken the sea-weed and the sea-moss from her body -they saw what a beautiful woman she was. They brought her to their chief, and the -chief took Hina-of-the-Sea for his wife. -</p> -<p>But after a while he became forgetful of her. After another while he abused her. She -had a child now, but she was very lonely, for she was in a far and a strange land. -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“The houses of Lima Loa stand, -</p> -<p class="line">But there are no people; -</p> -<p class="line">They are at Mana.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">She was not forgotten, for Ma-ui Mua, her eldest brother, thought of her. In Kahiki-mo-e -they tell of his search for her, and they say that when he <span class="pageNum" id="pb40">[<a href="#pb40">40</a>]</span>heard of her casting herself into the sea, he took to his canoe and went searching -all over the sea for her. He found new Islands, Islands that no one had ever been -on before, and he went from Island to Island, ever hoping to find Hina-of-the-Sea. -Far, far he went, and he found neither his sister nor any one who knew about her. -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“The houses of Lima Loa stand, -</p> -<p class="line">But there are no people; -</p> -<p class="line">They are at Mana.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And every day Hina-of-the-Sea would go down to the shore of the land she was on, and -she would call on her eldest brother: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“O Lu-pe! Come over! -</p> -<p class="line">Take me and my child!”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">Now one day, as Hina cried out on the beach, there came a canoe towards her. There -was a man in the canoe; but Hina, hardly noticing him, still cried to the waves and -the winds: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“O Lu-pe! Come over! -</p> -<p class="line">Take me and my child!”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">The man came up on the beach. He was worn with much travel, and he was white and old-looking. -He heard the cry that was sent to the waves and the winds, and he cried back an answer: -<span class="pageNum" id="pb41">[<a href="#pb41">41</a>]</span></p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“It is Lu-pe, yes, Lu-pe, -</p> -<p class="line">The eldest brother; -</p> -<p class="line">And I am here.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">He knew Hina-of-the-Sea. He took her and her child in his canoe, rejoicing that his -long search was over at last and that he had a sister again. He took her and her child -to one of the Islands which he had discovered. -</p> -<p>And there Hina-of-the-Sea lived happily with her eldest brother, Ma-ui Mua, and there -her child grew up to manhood. The story of her eldest brother’s search for Hina is -not told in Hawaii nei, and one has to go to Kahiki-mo-e to hear it. But in Hawaii -nei they tell of a beautiful land that Ma-ui the Skillful came to in search of some -one. It is the land, perhaps, that his brother and sister lived in—the beautiful land -that is called Moana-liha-i-ka-wao-ke-le. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch2.8" class="div2 last-child section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e274">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main"><i>How Ma-ui strove to win Immortality for Men.</i></h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Would you hear the seventh and last of great Ma-ui’s deeds? They do not tell of this -deed in Hawaii nei, but they tell of it in Kahiki-mo-e. The last was the greatest -of all Ma-ui’s deeds, for it was his dangerous labor then to win the greatest boon -for men—the boon of everlasting life. -</p> -<p>He heard of the Goblin-goddess who is called Hina-nui-ke-po, Great Hina-of-the-Night. -It is she <span class="pageNum" id="pb42">[<a href="#pb42">42</a>]</span>who brings death on all creatures. But if one could take the heart out of her body -and give it to all the creatures of the earth to eat, they would live for ever, and -death would be no more in the world. -</p> -<p>They tell how the Moon bathes in the Waters of Life, and comes back to the world with -her life renewed. And once Ma-ui caught and held the Moon. He said to her, “Let Death -be short, and as you return with new strength let it be that men shall come back from -Death with new strength.” But the Moon said to Ma-ui, “Rather let Death be long, so -that men may sigh and have sorrow. When a man dies, let him go into darkness and become -as earth, so that those whom he leaves behind may weep and mourn for him.” But for -all that the Moon said to Ma-ui, he would not have it that men should go into the -darkness for ever and become as earth. The Moon showed him where Hina-of-the-Night -had her abode. He looked over to her Island and saw her. Her eyes shone through the -distance; he saw her great teeth that were like volcanic glass and her mouth that -was wide like the mouth of a fish; he saw her hair that floated all around her like -seaweed in the sea. -</p> -<p>He saw her and was afraid; even great Ma-ui was made afraid by the Goblin-goddess, -Great Hina-of-the-Night. But he remembered that he had said that he would find a way -of giving everlasting life to men and to all creatures, and he thought and <span class="pageNum" id="pb43">[<a href="#pb43">43</a>]</span>thought of how he could come to the Goblin-goddess and take the heart out of her body. -</p> -<p>It was his task then to draw all creatures to him and to have them promise him that -they would help him against the Goblin-goddess. And when at last he was ready to go -against her the birds went with him. He came to the Island where she was, Great Hina-of-the-Night. -She was sleeping, and all her guards were around her. Ma-ui passed through her guards. -He prepared to enter her terrible open mouth, and bring back her heart to give to -all the creatures of the earth. -</p> -<p>And at last he stood ready to go between the jaws that had the fearful teeth that -were sharp like volcanic glass. He stood there in the light of a sun-setting, his -body tall and fine and tattooed all over with the histories of his great deeds. He -stood there, and then he gave warning to all the birds that none of them was to sing -or to laugh until he was outside her jaws again with the heart of the Goblin-goddess -in his hands. -</p> -<p>He went within the jaws of Great Hina-of-the-Night. He passed the fearful teeth that -were sharp like volcanic glass. He went down into her stomach. And then he seized -upon her heart. He came back again as far as her jaws, and he saw the sky beyond them. -</p> -<p>Then a bird sang or a bird laughed—either the e-le-pa-io sang, or Paka-kai the water-wagtail -<span class="pageNum" id="pb44">[<a href="#pb44">44</a>]</span>laughed—and the Goblin-goddess wakened up. She caught Ma-ui in her great teeth, and -she tore him across. There was darkness then, and the crying of all the birds. -</p> -<p>Thus died Ma-ui who raised the sky and who fished up the land, who made the Sun go -more slowly across the heavens, and who brought fire to men. Thus died Ma-ui, with -the Meat of Immortality in his hands. And since his death no one has ever ventured -near the lair of Hina-nui-ke-po, the Goblin-goddess. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb45">[<a href="#pb45">45</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch3" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e281">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>Au-ke-le the Seeker.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">In a land that is now lost, in Ku-ai-he-lani, the Country that Supports the Heavens, -there lived a King whose name was Iku. He had twelve children, and of these eleven -grew up without ever having received any favor or any promise from their father. -</p> -<p>But when the twelfth child was born—Au-ke-le was his name—his father took him up in -his arms, and he promised him all the honor and power and glory that was his, and -he promised him the kingship of Ku-ai-he-lani, the Country that Supports the Heavens. -</p> -<p>The other children were angry when they saw their father take little Au-ke-le up in -his arms, and they were more angry when they heard the promises that were made to -him. And the eldest brother, who was the angriest of all, said, “I am the eldest born, -and my father never made such promises to me, and he never took me up in his arms -and fondled me.” And this brother, who was now a man grown, went from before his father, -and his other brothers went with him. -</p> -<p>Au-ke-le grew up. His father gave him many of his possessions—feather cloaks, and -whale-tooth necklaces, and many sharp and polished weapons. He grew up to be the handsomest -of handsome youths, with a body that was straight and faultless. <span class="pageNum" id="pb46">[<a href="#pb46">46</a>]</span>One day, knowing that they had gone to play games in a certain house, he went to follow -his brothers. But Iku, his father, said to him, “Do not go where your brothers have -gone; they are angry with you, and they have always been angry with you, and it may -be that they will do some harm to you in that place.” But in spite of the words of -his father Au-ke-le followed his brothers. He came to the house where his brothers -were, and he shot his arrow into it. One of his brothers took up the arrow and said, -“This is not a stranger’s arrow; this is an arrow from our own house; see, it is twisted.” -The eldest brother, who was the angriest of all, took up the arrow and broke it to -pieces. He sent the others outside to invite Au-ke-le within the house. And Au-ke-le, -believing in the kindness of his brothers, and thinking they were going to let him -join in their games, came within. -</p> -<p>But they had made a plan against him. They laid hold upon him when he came within -the house, and, at the words of the eldest brother, they uncovered a pit and they -flung Au-ke-le down into it. -</p> -<p>In that pit there lived a mo-o whose name was Ka-mo’o-i-na-nea. This mo-o was really -Au-ke-le’s grandmother. She had been a mortal woman; but she had transformed herself -into a mo-o, and now she lived in that pit, and she devoured any creature that came -into it. -</p> -<p>The angry brother called out, “Mo-o, Mo-o, here <span class="pageNum" id="pb47">[<a href="#pb47">47</a>]</span>is your food; eat it.” Then he went away. But a younger brother who felt kindly to -Au-ke-le whispered down, “Do not eat this youth, Mo-o, for he is your own grandson.” -The mo-o heard the words of both. She came before Au-ke-le and she signed for him -to follow her. He followed, and they came out on the dry sand that was before the -ocean. -</p> -<p>Then the mo-o spoke to Au-ke-le her grandson. “There is a land beyond this sea,” she -said, “a land that I travelled through in my young days before I took on this dragon-form. -Very few people live in that land. You must sail to it; living there you will become -great and wise. -</p> -<p>“The name of that land is Ka-la-ke’e-nui-a-Kane. The mountains are so high that the -stars rest upon them. The people who live there are Na-maka-o-Kahai, the Queen, and -her four brothers, who take the forms of birds, and two women-servants. The watchers -of her land are a dog called Mo-e-la and a great and fierce bird called Ha-lu-lu. -</p> -<p>“I will give you things to take with you. Here is a calabash that has a Magic in it. -It has an axe in it also that you can use. And here is food that will last for the -longest voyage. It is a leaf, but if you put it to your lips it will take away your -hunger and your thirst. I give you my skirt of feathers also; the touch of it will -bring death to your enemies.” Then his mo-o grandmother left him, and Au-ke-le was -upon the sea-shore with a calabash that had Magic in it, <span class="pageNum" id="pb48">[<a href="#pb48">48</a>]</span>with the leaves that stayed his hunger and his thirst, and with the skirt of feathers -that would destroy his enemies. And he had in his heart the resolve to go to the land -that his mo-o grandmother had told him about. -</p> -<p>In the meantime Iku-mai-lani, the kind brother, had gone back to his father’s house. -Iku asked what had happened to his favorite son. Then Iku-mai-lani, weeping, told -his father that the boy had been flung into the pit where the mo-o was and that he -feared the mo-o had devoured him as she had devoured others. Then the father and mother -of Au-ke-le wept. -</p> -<p>As they were weeping he came within the house. His mother and father rejoiced over -him, and Iku-mai-lani hurried to give the news to his brothers. They were building -a canoe, and when the eldest brother heard of Au-ke-le’s escape, and heard the sound -of rejoicings in his father’s house, he gave orders to have all preparations made -for sailing and to have the food cooked and every one aboard, that they might sail -at once from the land. -</p> -<p>It was then that Au-ke-le came up to where they were. He called out to his kind brother, -to Iku-mai-lani, and asked him what he might do to be let go in the canoe with them. -His brother said: “How can we take you when it is on your account only that we are -going away from the country we were born in? We are going because you only of all -of us have <span class="pageNum" id="pb49">[<a href="#pb49">49</a>]</span>been promised the kingdom and the glory that belongs to our father. And we are going -because we tried to kill you, and now are ashamed of what we did.” -</p> -<p>Still Au-ke-le craved to be let go with them. Then the kind brother said to him: “You -cannot gain your way through us. But with our eldest brother is a boy—a little son -whom he is taking along, and for whom he has a great love. If the child of our eldest -brother should ask you to come on board you will surely be let come.” -</p> -<p>Then Au-ke-le went to the canoe. And the little boy who was his eldest brother’s son -saw him and clapped his hands and called out to him, “My uncle, come on board of the -ship and be one of us.” -</p> -<p>Au-ke-le then went on board. The eldest brother, he who had been the most angry with -him, let Au-ke-le stay because his young son had brought him on board. Au-ke-le then -sent the men back to his father’s house for the things that his grandmother had given -him—for the calabash with the Magic in it, and for the feather dress. The men brought -these things to him; then the paddlers took up their paddles; the canoe went into -the deep sea, and Au-ke-le and his brothers departed from the land of Ku-ai-he-lani, -the Country that Supports the Heavens. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>They sailed far and far away, and no land came to their sight. All the food they had -brought in the <span class="pageNum" id="pb50">[<a href="#pb50">50</a>]</span>canoe was eaten, and they no longer had food or drink. Their men died of hunger and -thirst. Au-ke-le’s brothers went below, and they stayed in the bottom of the canoe, -for they were waiting for death to come to them. -</p> -<p>At last the boy who was the son of the eldest brother went down to seek his father. -He was lying there, too weak to move by reason of his hunger and thirst. And Au-ke-le’s -eldest brother said to his son: “How pitiful it is for you, my son! For my own life -I have no regret, for I have been many days in the world; but I weep for you, who -have lived so short a time and have but so short a time to live. Here is all I have -to give you—a joint of sugar cane.” Then the boy replied, “I have no need for food—my -uncle Au-ke-le has a certain leaf which he puts to my lips, and with that leaf my -hunger and my thirst are satisfied.” His father hardly heard what he said, so weak -he had become. Then the boy went back to Au-ke-le. -</p> -<p>And when he came before his uncle again tears were streaming down his face. “Why do -you weep?” Au-ke-le asked. “I am weeping for my father, who is almost dead from hunger.” -Au-ke-le said: “You too would have died from hunger had I not come with you. I am -hated by your father as his most bitter enemy, but I would act as a brother acts. -Now let us go to where my brothers are.” -</p> -<p>So they went below. Au-ke-le went to each of his <span class="pageNum" id="pb51">[<a href="#pb51">51</a>]</span>brothers and put the leaf to their lips. It was as if each of them had got food and -drink. Their faintness went from them, and they were able to get about the ship once -more. -</p> -<p>Soon afterwards they came in sight of land; Au-ke-le knew that this was the country -that his mo-o grandmother had told him about. And, remembering what he had been told -about the dangers of this land, he asked his brothers to let him take charge of the -canoe, so that they might avoid these dangers. His brothers said, “Why did you not -build a canoe for yourself, so that you might take charge of it and give orders about -it?” Au-ke-le said, “If you give me charge of the canoe, we shall be saved; but if -you take charge yourselves, we shall be destroyed.” His brothers laughed at him. -</p> -<p>In a while they saw birds approaching the ship—four birds. Au-ke-le, remembering what -his mo-o grandmother had told him, knew that these were the Queen’s brothers. They -came and lit on the yards, and asked of those below what they had come for. Au-ke-le -told his brothers to say that they had not come to make war and that they had come -on a voyage of sight-seeing. His brothers would not say this; instead they cried out -to the birds, “Ours is a ship to make war.” The birds flew back; they told their sister -Na-maka that the ship had come to make war. Then the Queen put on her war-skirt and -went down to the shore. -</p> -<p></p> -<div class="figure plate02width" id="plate02"><img src="images/plate02.jpg" alt="“Four birds ... came and lit on the yards, and asked of those below what they had come for.”" width="536" height="720"><p class="figureHead">“<i>Four birds … came and lit on the yards, and asked of those below what they had come -for.</i>”</p> -</div><p> -<span class="pageNum" id="pb52">[<a href="#pb52">52</a>]</span></p> -<p>Au-ke-le knew that all in the canoe would be destroyed. He took up his calabash that -had the Magic in it, and he threw it into the sea. As he did this he saw the Queen -standing there with her war-skirt on. She took up her feathered standard and shook -it in the air. Au-ke-le sprang from the ship and swam after the floating calabash. -Then the ship and all who were on it disappeared: Na-maka the Queen made a sign, and -they were seen no more. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>And now Au-ke-le was left on the land that his grandmother had told him about—the -land of Ka-la-ke’e-nui-a-Kane, where the stars rest on the tops of the mountains. -He brought the calabash that had his Magic in it and the skirt of feathers that his -mo-o grandmother had given him, and he rested under a tree by the sea-shore. -</p> -<p>The dog that was called Mo-e-la, the Day Sleeper, smelt his blood and barked. And, -hearing her dog bark, Na-maka the Queen came out of her house and called to her four -bird-brothers: “You must go and find out what man of flesh and blood my dog is barking -at.” But her four brothers, being sleepy, said, “Send your two women-servants and -let us rest.” So the Queen sent her two women-servants to find out what the dog was -barking at. “And if it be a creature of flesh and blood, kill him,” said the Queen. -</p> -<p>Then the two servants went towards the shore <span class="pageNum" id="pb53">[<a href="#pb53">53</a>]</span>where Au-ke-le was resting. But his Magic told him what was coming and what he should -do. “When they come you must call the servants by their names, and they will be so -abashed at a stranger’s knowing them that they will not know what to do.” -</p> -<p>So when the Queen’s two women-servants came before him Au-ke-le called out, “It is -U-po-ho and it is Hua-pua-i-na-nea.” The two servants were so abashed because their -names were known to this stranger that they stood there looking at each other. -</p> -<p>Then Au-ke-le called them to him, and they came, and they sat near him. He asked them -to play the game that is played with black and white stones. He moved the stones, -and as he moved them he chanted, and his chant was to let them know who he was. -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“This is my turn; your turn now; -</p> -<p class="line">Now we pause; the blacks cannot win; -</p> -<p class="line">The whites have won: -</p> -<p class="line">Nothing can break the boy from Ku-ai-he-lani.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">The servants knew then that he was from Ku-ai-he-lani, the Country that Supports the -Heavens. They said to him, “We were sent to kill you, but we are going back to tell -the Queen that in no place could we find a creature of flesh and blood.” -</p> -<p>They returned, and they told the Queen that neither on the uplands nor on the sea-shore, -neither on the tops of the trees nor on the tops of the cliffs, were they able to -find a creature of flesh and blood. <span class="pageNum" id="pb54">[<a href="#pb54">54</a>]</span>While they were speaking the Queen’s dog came out and barked again. Her four bird-brothers -had rested, and the Queen sent them to search for the creature of flesh and blood -that the dog had barked at. -</p> -<p>Then the Magic in his calabash spoke again to Au-ke-le. “Four birds are coming towards -you. You must greet them and you must call them by their names. They will be so abashed -at their names being known to a stranger that they will not know what to do.” -</p> -<p>As the four birds came towards him Au-ke-le called aloud: “This is Ka-ne-mo-e, and -I give greetings to him. This is Ka-ne-a-pua, and I give greetings to him. This is -Le-a-pua, and I give greetings to him. And this is Ka-hau-mana.” The four bird-brothers -were amazed to hear their names spoken by a stranger, and they said to each other, -“What can we do with this man who knows our names, even?” And another said, “He can -take our lives from us.” And they spoke to each other again and said, “We have one -thing worthy to give to this man: let us give him our sister, the Queen.” -</p> -<p>So the four brothers came to Au-ke-le, and they offered him the Queen to be his wife. -Au-ke-le was pleased; he told them that he would go to the Queen’s house. -</p> -<p>The four bird-brothers went back to tell the Queen about the man who was coming to -her and to <span class="pageNum" id="pb55">[<a href="#pb55">55</a>]</span>whom they had promised her. The Queen said, “If he is such that he can overcome the -dangers that are before him, I will marry him, and he will be the ruler with me of -the land of Ka-la-ke’e-nui-a-Kane.” -</p> -<p>When the brothers had gone his Magic spoke again to Au-ke-le, and it said: “When you -go to the Queen, don’t enter the house at once, for that would mean your death. If -they offer you food in a calabash, don’t eat it, for that would mean your death. The -dog that is called Mo-e-la will be set upon you, and if you overcome him the four -brothers will attack you. Eat the melons on the vines outside the house, and they -will be meat and drink for you.” -</p> -<p>After hearing the words that his Magic had said to him, Au-ke-le went to the house -of the Queen. He stood outside the door, and as he stood there the Queen said to her -women-servants, “Use your powers now and destroy this creature of flesh and blood.” -But when the servants saw the man who knew their names, one changed herself into a -rat and ran into a hole, and the other changed herself into a lizard and ran up a -tree. -</p> -<p>Then Mo-e-la the dog came towards him; he opened his mouth wide and he showed all -his teeth. But when he was touched by the skirt that Au-ke-le had been given, the -dog was turned into ashes. And then the Queen, on seeing the death of her watchdog, -bowed down her head and wept. -</p> -<p>She called upon her brothers to kill the stranger. <span class="pageNum" id="pb56">[<a href="#pb56">56</a>]</span>But they were abashed at his knowing their names, and they wanted to hide from him. -One turned himself into a rock and lay by the doorway, and another turned himself -into a log of wood and lay beside his brother, and the third changed himself into -a coral reef, and the fourth became a pool of water. -</p> -<p>Food was brought to Au-ke-le, but he would eat none of it. He went to the vine, and -he ate the melons that were growing there, and he found that the melons gave food -and drink to him. And when the Queen and her brothers saw him eating the melons they -said to each other: “How wonderful this man is! He is eating the food that we eat. -Who could have told him where to find it?” After that he won the Queen, and she became -his wife. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>But it was after his adventure with the bird Ha-lu-lu that Au-ke-le knew that the -Queen had come to love him and was inclined to be kind to him. One day he was standing -by the sea-shore, looking out to the place where the canoe that had had his brothers -on board was sunk, when a great shadow came over where he was and covered the light -of the sun. He looked up, and he saw above him the outstretched wings of a great bird. -Immediately he picked up the calabash that had his Magic in it; then the bird Ha-lu-lu -seized him and flew off with him. -</p> -<p>The bird flew to a cave that was in the face of a <span class="pageNum" id="pb57">[<a href="#pb57">57</a>]</span>great high cliff. He stowed Au-ke-le there. And Au-ke-le, searching the cave, found -two men who had been carried off by Ha-lu-lu, the great bird. “We are two that are -to be devoured,” said the men. “What does the bird do when she comes to devour us?” -said Au-ke-le. “She stretches her right wing into the cave and draws out a man. She -devours him. Then she stretches her left wing into the cave and draws out another -man.” “Is the cave deep?” Au-ke-le asked. “It is deep,” said the men. “Go, then,” -said Au-ke-le, “and make a fire in the depth of the cave.” -</p> -<p>The men did this. Then Au-ke-le opened the calabash that his mo-o grandmother had -given him, and he took out the axe that was in it. He waited for the giant bird to -stretch her wing within. When she did he cut the wing off with his axe, and the two -men took it and threw the wing on the fire. The other wing reached in; Au-ke-le cut -off the other wing, too. Then the beak was stuck in, and Au-ke-le cut off head and -beak. -</p> -<p>After Ha-lu-lu the great bird had been killed, Au-ke-le took the feathers from her -head and threw them over the cliff. The feathers flew on until they came to where -the Queen was. She saw them, and she knew them for the head feathers of the bird Ha-lu-lu, -and she cried when she saw them. -</p> -<p>When her brothers came to her she said, “Here are the head-feathers of the bird Ha-lu-lu, -and now <span class="pageNum" id="pb58">[<a href="#pb58">58</a>]</span>there is no great bird to guard the Island.” But her brothers said, “It is right that -Ha-lu-lu should be killed, for she devoured men.” They waited then to see what their -sister would do to Au-ke-le, who was in the cave. She brought the rainbow, the short-ended -rainbow that has only three colors, red, yellow, and green, and she set it against -the cliff. And by the bridge of the rainbow Au-ke-le was able to get down from the -cliff. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>When his wife and her brothers saw him come back they welcomed Au-ke-le with joy. -The Queen gave him her kingdom and everything else that was at her command. And she -sent a message to her uncles, who were in the sky, to tell them that she had given -her husband all her possessions—the things that were above and below, that were on -the uplands and on the lowlands, the drift iron, the iron that stands in the ground, -the whale’s tooth, the turtle-shell, the things that grow on the land, and the cluster -of stars. All these things were his now. But with all these things in his possession -Au-ke-le was not satisfied, for he thought upon the canoe that was sunken and on his -brothers who were all drowned. -</p> -<p>He dreamed of his brothers and of his young nephew; and, with the thoughts that he -had, he could not enjoy himself on the land that he ruled over. And, seeing her husband -so sad, sorrow for <span class="pageNum" id="pb59">[<a href="#pb59">59</a>]</span>him entered the heart of the Queen. He told her that he thought of the men who had -come with him and who were now dead. And when he spoke of what was in his mind the -Queen said: “If you have great strength and courage, your brothers may come back to -life again; but if your strength or your courage fail, they will never be restored -to life, and your own life, perhaps, will be lost.” Then Au-ke-le said to the Queen, -“What is it that I must do to win them back to life?” And the Queen said: “You must -use all your strength and your courage to gain the Water of Everlasting Life, the -Water of Ka-ne. If you are able to gain it and bring it to them, your brothers and -your nephew will live again.” When Au-ke-le heard this from the Queen he ceased to -be sorrowful; he ate and he drank, and he had gladness in his possessions. Then he -said to the Queen, “What way must I take to gain the Water of Everlasting Life, the -Water of Ka-ne?” His wife said: “I will show you the way: from the place where we -are standing you must go towards the rising sun, never turning from the road that -I set you on. And at the end of your journey you will come to the place where you -will find the Water of Everlasting Life, the Water of Ka-ne.” -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>When Au-ke-le heard this he put on his skirt of feathers that his mo-o grandmother -had given him; he took up the calabash that had his Magic in it; <span class="pageNum" id="pb60">[<a href="#pb60">60</a>]</span>he kissed his wife farewell; and he took the path from his house that went straight -towards the rising sun. -</p> -<p>After he had been on his way for a month the Queen came to the door of her house, -and she looked towards where he had gone. She saw him, and he was still upon his way. -At the end of another month she went out again and looked towards where he had gone. -He was still upon the path that led to the rising sun. Another month passed, and she -went and looked towards where he had gone. No trace of her husband could she see, -and she knew that he must have gone off the path she had shown him. She began to weep, -and when her four brothers came before her she said, “Your brother-in-law has fallen -into space, and he is lost.” -</p> -<p>She then sent her brothers to bring all things and creatures together that they might -all mourn for Au-ke-le. They went and they brought the night and the day, the sun, -the stars, the thunder, the rainbow, the lightning, the waterspout, the mist, the -fine rain. And the grandfather of the Queen, Kau-kihi-ka-malama, who is the Man in -the Moon, was sent for, too. -</p> -<p>But where indeed was Au-ke-le? -</p> -<p>He had left the straight line towards the rising sun; he had fallen into space, and -now he was growing weaker and weaker as he fell. But he still had the calabash that -had his Magic in it. He held it <span class="pageNum" id="pb61">[<a href="#pb61">61</a>]</span>under his arm; and now he spoke and asked where they were. His Magic said to him: -“We have gone outside the line that was shown to us, and now I think that we shall -never get back. There is nothing in the sky to help us or to show us the way; all -that was in the sky has gone down to the earth—the night and the day, the sun and -the stars, the thunder, the rainbow, the lightning, the waterspout, the mist, the -fine rain. No, I can see no thing and no creature that can help us.” Au-ke-le asked, -“Who is it that is still up there?” His Magic replied: “Go straight and lay hold upon -him, and we may be saved. That is Kau-kihi-ka-malama, the Man in the Moon.” -</p> -<p>The reason that Kau-kihi-ka-malama had not gone down to earth with the others was -that he had delayed to prepare food to bring down to the earth, for he thought that -there was no food there. He was just starting off when Au-ke-le came up to him and -held him tightly. “Whose conceited child are you?” the Man in the Moon asked. “My -back has never been climbed, even by my own granddaughter, and now you come here and -climb over it. Whose conceited child are you?” “Yours,” said Au-ke-le. “I will take -you to earth, and my granddaughter Na-maka will tell me who you are.” And so Kau-kihi-ka-malama -brought Au-ke-le back to earth. And when he reached the earth all the people there -wept with joy to see him. Then the sun, the day, the <span class="pageNum" id="pb62">[<a href="#pb62">62</a>]</span>night, the lightning, the thunder, the mist, the fine rain, the waterspout, and the -Man in the Moon all returned back to the heavens. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>But nothing would do Au-ke-le but to set out again to find the Water of Everlasting -Life, the Water of Ka-ne. So he started off from the door of his house, and he went -in a straight line towards the rising sun. And in six months from the time he started -he stood by the edge of a hole at the bottom of which was the Water of Everlasting -Life, the Water of Ka-ne. -</p> -<p>He climbed over the shoulder of the guard, and the guard said to him: “Eh, there! -Whose conceited child are you? My back has never been climbed over before, and now -you come here and do it. Whose conceited child are you?” “Your own,” said Au-ke-le. -“My own by whom?” “My father is Iku,” said Au-ke-le. “Then you are the grandson of -Ka-po-ino and Ka-mo’o-i-na-nea.” “I am.” “My greetings to you, my lord,” said the -guardian of the edge of the hole. -</p> -<p>Au-ke-le had to go deep down into the hole to get the Water of Everlasting Life, the -Water of Ka-ne. The guardian of the edge of the hole warned him that he must not strike -the bamboo that was growing on one side, because if he did the sound would reach the -ears of one who would cover up the water. Au-ke-le went down. He came to a second -<span class="pageNum" id="pb63">[<a href="#pb63">63</a>]</span>guardian, and he made himself known to him, claiming relationship with him through -Ka-mo’o-i-na-nea, his mo-o grandmother. This guardian told him to go on, but he warned -him not to fall into the lama trees that were growing on one side, for if he did the -sound would reach the ears of one who would cover up the Water of Everlasting Life, -the Water of Ka-ne. -</p> -<p>He went on, and he came to the third guardian, and he made himself known to him, claiming -relationship with him through his mo-o grandmother. This guardian told him to keep -on his way, but he warned him, above all things, not to fall into the loula palms, -for if he did the sound would reach one who would cover up the Water of Everlasting -Life, the Water of Ka-ne. -</p> -<p>At last he came before the fourth guardian. “Who are you?” he was asked. “The child -of Iku.” “What has brought you here?” he was asked. “To gain the Water of Everlasting -Life, the Water of Ka-ne.” “You shall get it. Go to your grand-aunt who is at the -base of the cliff. She is the Old Woman of the Forbidden Sea. She is blind. You will -find her roasting bananas. When she reaches out to take one to eat, you take it and -eat it. Do this until all the bananas have been taken from her. When she says, ‘What -mischievous fellow has come here?’ take up the ashes and sprinkle them on her right -side, and then climb into her lap.” -<span class="pageNum" id="pb64">[<a href="#pb64">64</a>]</span></p> -<p>Au-ke-le kept going and ever going until he came to where his grand-aunt sat, roasting -bananas—his grand-aunt, the Old Woman by the Forbidden Sea. He took the bananas that -she was about to eat; he sprinkled her with ashes on her right side, and he climbed -into her lap. “Whose conceited child are you?” said the blind old woman. “Your own,” -said Au-ke-le. “My own through whom?” “Your own through Iku.” When his grand-aunt -heard him say this she asked him what he had come for. He told her he had come for -the Water of Everlasting Life, the Water of Ka-ne. -</p> -<p>Then the Old Woman by the Forbidden Sea made up a plan by which he might get the water. -Ho-a-lii, he who watched above the water, had hands that were all black, and no hands -but his were permitted to take up the Water of Ka-ne. His grand-aunt made Au-ke-le’s -hands black, and she showed him where to go to come to the water. -</p> -<p>Au-ke-le went there. He put down his blackened hands, and the guards gave him a gourd -of water. But this, as he had been told by the Old Woman by the Forbidden Sea, was -bitter water, and not the Water of Everlasting Life. He threw the water out. He reached -his hands down again; and this time the Water of Ka-ne was put into his hands, the -Water of Everlasting Life. -</p> -<p>He took the gourd into his hands, and he ran back. But he fell into loula palms as -he ran on, and <span class="pageNum" id="pb65">[<a href="#pb65">65</a>]</span>the sound came to the ears of Ho-a-lii, who was the guardian of the water. Ho-a-lii -listened, but it was two months before another sound came to him. That was when Au-ke-le -got entangled in the lama trees that grew on the side of the hole that he had to travel -up. Ho-a-lii kept awake and listened. But no sound came to him for two months more. -Then he heard the rustling of the bamboo trees that Au-ke-le had fallen into. He came -in pursuit. But now Au-ke-le was out of the hole and was flying towards the earth. -Ho-a-lii followed; but when he asked the watcher how long it was since one had passed -that way, he was told that a year and six months had gone by since one came up through -the hole. Ho-a-lii could not catch up with one who by this time had gone so far; and -Au-ke-le, with the Water of Everlasting Life, the Water of Ka-ne, came back to the -earth. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>He came to where his brothers and his nephew were drowned in the sea, and he poured -half of the Water of Ka-ne into the sea. Nothing came up from the sea, and Au-ke-le -sat there weeping. Then his wife came to him, and she blamed him for pouring so much -of the water into the sea. Out of what was left she took water in her hands and poured -it over the sea. Then Au-ke-le looked. In a while there stood a canoe with men climbing -the masts, and folding the sails, and coiling the ropes. They were <span class="pageNum" id="pb66">[<a href="#pb66">66</a>]</span>his brothers. Au-ke-le greeted them, and his brothers knew him, and they came to the -land. -</p> -<p>Then Au-ke-le gave his brothers all his possessions. But they were not satisfied to -live on that land with him, and after a while they sailed away for other lands. -</p> -<p>Then after long years Au-ke-le said to his wife: “My wife, we have lived long together; -I would not die in a foreign land, and I beg that you will let me go so that I may -see Ku-ai-he-lani, the country of my parents.” -</p> -<p>He went, with his wife’s four brothers. And they went by a course that brought them -there in two days and two nights. Upon their arrival Au-ke-le looked over the land; -but he saw no people, and the sound of birds singing or of cocks crowing did not come -to him, and then he saw that the land of Ku-ai-he-lani was all grown over with weeds. -</p> -<p>He came to the mouth of the cave where his mo-o grandmother used to be. He shouted -down to her, but no sound came back from her to him. He went down. The coral of the -floor of the sea had grown over her, and she was not able to answer the call of her -grandson Au-ke-le. -</p> -<p>He broke away the pieces of coral that were around her. He saw the body of his mo-o -grandmother, and it was reduced to a thread, almost. He called her name, “Ka-mo’o-i-na-nea.” -</p> -<p>Ka-mo’o-i-na-nea said “Yes,” and she looked up <span class="pageNum" id="pb67">[<a href="#pb67">67</a>]</span>and saw her grandson. She greeted him and asked him what had brought him to her. “I -came to see you,” he said, “and to ask you where are Iku and the others.” -</p> -<p>“Iku fought with Ma-ku-o-ae,” his grandmother told him. When she said that, Au-ke-le -knew that Death and his father had met. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb69">[<a href="#pb69">69</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch4" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e287">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>Pi-ko-i: The Boy Who Was Good at Shooting Arrows.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">“What is the cause of all that shouting down there?” said Pi-ko-i to his father, Ala-la -the Raven. “They are playing olohu,” said Ala-la, his father. “And how is that game -played?” said Pi-ko-i. “It is played in this way,” said his father. “There are two -in the game; they roll a disk of stone, and the crowd shouts for the one who rolls -it farthest. That is the reason of the noise down there.” “I will go down and look -at the games they are playing,” said Pi-ko-i. “You cannot go,” said his father, “until -after to-day.” -</p> -<p>Later on there was more shouting. “What are they shouting for now?” said Pi-ko-i to -Ala-la the Raven. “They are playing a game called pahee now,” said Ala-la. “They slide -a stick down a grassy slope, and when the stick thrown by one slides farther than -the stick thrown by another the people all shout.” “I will go and watch this game,” -said Pi-ko-i. “You cannot go until after to-day,” said his father. -</p> -<p>The next day there was shouting again at the same place. “What is this fresh shouting -for?” said Pi-ko-i to Ala-la, his father. “They are playing a game now called ko-ie-ie.” -“How is that game played?” said Pi-ko-i. “It is played in this way,” <span class="pageNum" id="pb70">[<a href="#pb70">70</a>]</span>said his father. “A board is smoothed and thrown into the river at a place near the -rapids. It has to float steadily in one place without going down the rapids. The one -whose board floats the steadiest without being carried over the rapids wins. That -is the game of ko-ie-ie.” “May I go down to watch that game?” said Pi-ko-i. “You may -go down and join in the game,” said his father. -</p> -<p>Then Ala-la smoothed a board so that it would float steadily on the water, and he -gave it to his son Pi-ko-i. Pi-ko-i then went where the crowd was; and this was the -first time he had ever been with a crowd. -</p> -<p>He had a sharp face, and he had little bones, and he had hair that was like a rat’s -hair. When the crowd saw him they cried out, “A rat, a rat! What is a rat doing amongst -us?” Pi-ko-i did not mind what they said; he went to where they were casting their -boards on the current, and he cast on it the board that his father had smoothed for -him. -</p> -<p>It floated the steadiest of all the boards. It floated in one place without being -carried down the rapids. The crowd shouted for Pi-ko-i. Then the other boys got jealous -of him; they took his board, and they flung it over the rapids. Pi-ko-i jumped after -his board. He was carried over the rapids and down to the sea. “A good riddance,” -said the boys to each other. “What business has a rat coming amongst us?” -<span class="pageNum" id="pb71">[<a href="#pb71">71</a>]</span></p> -<p>Pi-ko-i was carried out to sea. For two days and two nights he floated on the currents -of the ocean, and then he was washed up on the beach of another Island. -</p> -<p>Now it happened that where he was washed up was near where his older sisters, I-ol-e -and O-pea-pea, lived with their husbands. A man came down to the beach and found Pi-ko-i, -and this man was Kaua, the good servant of I-ol-e and O-pea-pea. “Where have you come -from?” said Kaua to Pi-ko-i when he found him on the beach, all wearied out, and weak -from hunger and the buffeting of the ocean. “From the sea,” said Pi-ko-i. “Come with -me,” said the good servant, and he brought the boy to his sisters’ house. -</p> -<p>The servant spoke to the sisters and he said, “I found him lying on the sand, and -all he says is that he has come from the sea.” “Where are you from? Where were you -born, and who are your parents?” said the sisters to him. Pi-ko-i answered: “I am -from Wai-lua on the Island of Kau-ai; Ala-la is my father, and Kou-kou is my mother.” -</p> -<p>When he told them this, the women of the house knew that the boy was their brother. -They sprang upon him, and they cried over him, and they told him that they were his -sisters. -</p> -<p>And then their husbands came home, and a great feast was prepared for Pi-ko-i. A pig -was killed, yams were made ready, and pig and yams were put <span class="pageNum" id="pb72">[<a href="#pb72">72</a>]</span>into the underground oven to cook. But while the cooking was being done, Pi-ko-i left -the house and wandered off to where there was a crowd and where games were being played. -</p> -<p>The King and the Queen were at these games. It was a game of shooting that was on; -a man was shooting arrows at rats, and the King and the Queen were making wagers on -his shooting. -</p> -<p>It was a Prince who was shooting arrows at the rats—Prince Mai-ne-le—and all thought -that his aim was most wonderful. The King was winning all her property from the Queen, -for he was laying wagers all the time on Mai-ne-le’s shooting. -</p> -<p>Pi-ko-i stood and watched the game for a while. After the Prince had shot several -arrows he said: “How simple all this is! Why, any one could shoot as this man shoots.” -When the Queen heard the stranger boy say this, she said, “Could you shoot as well -as the Prince?” “Yes, ma’am,” said Pi-ko-i. “Then I will wager my property on your -shooting,” said the Queen. -</p> -<p>The King kept on staking his property on the Prince’s shooting, while the Queen now -staked hers on Pi-ko-i’s. Whoever should strike ten rats with one arrow would win, -and whoever should strike less than ten would lose the match. Prince Mai-ne-le shot -first. His arrow went through ten rats, and all the people shouted, “Mai-ne-le has -won, Mai-ne-le has won! The stranger boy cannot do better than <span class="pageNum" id="pb73">[<a href="#pb73">73</a>]</span>that!” But Pi-ko-i only said, “How left-handed that man must be! I thought that he -was going to shoot the rats through their whiskers!” -</p> -<p>Prince Mai-ne-le heard what Pi-ko-i said, and he answered angrily: “You are a deceiving -boy. From the first day I began shooting rats until this day, I have never seen a -man who could shoot rats through their whiskers.” “You will see one now,” said Pi-ko-i. -</p> -<p>Then bets were made as to whether one could shoot through rats’ whiskers. These were -new bets, and when they were all made, Pi-ko-i made ready to shoot. But now the rats -were all gone; not one was in sight. Thereupon Pi-ko-i said a charm to bring the rats -near: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“I, Pi-ko-i, -</p> -<p class="line">The offspring of Ala-la the Raven, -</p> -<p class="line">The offspring of Kou-kou: -</p> -<p class="line">Where are you, my brothers? -</p> -<p class="line">Where are you, O Rats? -</p> -<p class="line">There they are, -</p> -<p class="line">There they are! -</p> -<p class="line">The rats are in the pili grass: -</p> -<p class="line">They sleep, the rats are asleep: -</p> -<p class="line">Let them awaken; -</p> -<p class="line">Let them return!”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And when he said this charm the rats all came back. Pi-ko-i then let his arrow fly. -It struck ten rats, and <span class="pageNum" id="pb74">[<a href="#pb74">74</a>]</span>the point of it held a bat. The rats were all made fast by their whiskers. -</p> -<p>When Mai-ne-le saw this he said: “It is a draw. The boy shot ten rats, and I shot -ten rats.” The people all agreed with Mai-ne-le—it was a draw, they said. But Pi-ko-i -would not have it so. “The bat must count as a rat,” he said. “I have killed, not -ten, but eleven rats.” The crowd would not agree. Pi-ko-i kept saying, “It counts -as a rat according to the old words: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“ ‘The bat is in the stormless season— -</p> -<p class="line">He is your younger brother, O Rat: -</p> -<p class="line">Squeak to him.’ ”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And when he said that, every one had to agree that the bat counted as a rat and that -Pi-ko-i had killed eleven rats with his single arrow. And so he won the match against -Prince Mai-ne-le. -</p> -<p>While the wagers were being handed over, Pi-ko-i slipped away. He went back to his -sisters’ house; he was there as the food was being taken out of the oven. He sat down -to the food; he would not let any one speak to him while he ate. He ate nearly the -whole oven-full. And when he had finished that meal he was a changed boy: he was no -longer sharp-faced and small-boned; he still had hair like rat’s hair, but for all -that he was now a fine-looking youth. -</p> -<p>Shortly after this the King and Queen wanted to <span class="pageNum" id="pb75">[<a href="#pb75">75</a>]</span>have a canoe built in which they could sail far out on the ocean. The King went with -his canoe-builders into the forest, so that they might mark for cutting-down a large -koa tree. They came to a great tree. But before they could put the axe to it two birds -flew up to the very top of the tree and then cried out in a loud voice, “Say, Ke-awe, -you cannot make a canoe out of this tree; it is hollow.” And then they cried out, -“A worthless canoe, a hollow canoe, a canoe that will never sail the ocean.” -</p> -<p>When the King heard this he turned from the tree, and he and his canoe-builders sought -out another. They found another fine-looking tree, but before they put an axe to it, -the same two birds flew up to the very top of it and cried out, “A worthless canoe, -a hollow canoe, a canoe that will never sail the ocean.” And to the top of every tree -that the King and his canoe-builders thought was a good-timbered tree, the birds flew -and made their unlucky cry, “A worthless canoe, a hollow canoe, a canoe that will -never sail the ocean.” -</p> -<p>Day after day the King and his canoe-makers went into the forest, and day after day -the birds flew to the top of every tree that they would cut down. At last the King -saw that he could get no canoe-making tree out of the forest until he had killed the -birds that made the unlucky cry. -</p> -<p>So he sent for Prince Mai-ne-le to have him kill the birds while they were crying -on the tree-top. <span class="pageNum" id="pb76">[<a href="#pb76">76</a>]</span>And he promised him, or any one else who would kill the birds, his daughter in marriage -and a part of the land of his kingdom. -</p> -<p>Now when Kaua, the good servant, heard of the King’s offer he made up his mind that -the boy whom he had found on the sand should win the King’s daughter and a portion -of the land of the Island. So he went to where Pi-ko-i was, and he told him all that -he had heard. “And if you are able to shoot birds as you are able to shoot rats,” -he said, “you will become son-in-law to the King and one of the great men of the Island. -But Prince Mai-ne-le is going to let fly his arrow at the birds, and perhaps you will -not want to match yourself with him,” said he. -</p> -<p>When the servant said that, Pi-ko-i rose up from where he was sitting, and he said: -“I am going to shoot at the birds that make the unlucky cry, and you must do this -for me.” Thereupon he told Kaua that he should make a large basket, and that he should -tell every one that this basket was for the safe-keeping of his idol. Into this basket -he, Pi-ko-i, would go and remain hidden there. And Kaua was to go with Prince Mai-ne-le’s -party, and he was to bring the basket with him, being careful, though, to let no one -find out that there was a man in the basket. Kaua made the basket out of i-e vines, -and Pi-ko-i went and hid in it. Then Kaua took the great basket, and went and joined -Mai-ne-le’s party. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb77">[<a href="#pb77">77</a>]</span></p> -<p>The canoes made swift passage, for the evening breeze behind them sent them flying, -and by the dawn of the next morning they were able to make out the waterfalls on the -steep cliffs of the land where the forest was that the King walked in. They landed. -Kaua was able to get men to carry the basket that had, as all supposed, his idol in -it. They entered the forest, and they came to where the King and his canoe-makers -were. -</p> -<p>They were under a great koa tree. To mark it the men raised their axes. As they did -so the birds flew to the top of it and cried out their unlucky cry: “Say, Ke-awe, -you cannot make a canoe out of this tree. A worthless canoe, a hollow canoe, a canoe -that will never sail the ocean!” -</p> -<p>As soon as the cry was heard Prince Mai-ne-le shot at them. His arrow did not go anywhere -near the birds, so high was the tree-top, so far above were they. Then the King’s -men built a platform that was half the height of the tree. From the platform Mai-ne-le -shot at the birds again, and again his arrow failed to reach them. Then Pi-ko-i from -the basket whispered to Kaua. “Ask Mai-ne-le and ask the King why the birds still -cry out and why they have not been hit. Is it because Mai-ne-le is not really shooting -at them?” Kaua said all this to the King. Prince Mai-ne-le, when he heard what was -said, replied, “Why do you not shoot at the birds yourself?” And then he said: “There -are the birds, <span class="pageNum" id="pb78">[<a href="#pb78">78</a>]</span>and here is the weapon. Now see if you can hit them.” “Well,” said Kaua, “I will ask -my idol.” He opened the basket then, and Pi-ko-i appeared. He had changed so much -since he had eaten the feast in his sisters’ house that no one there knew him for -the stranger boy who had beaten Mai-ne-le in the shooting-match before. -</p> -<p>And what he said made all of them amazed. He asked the King to have a basin of water -brought to the tree. It was brought. Pi-ko-i then stood looking into the water. He -saw the reflection of the birds that were on the tree-top far, far above. He held -his arms above his head; his arrow was aimed at the birds whose reflection he saw -in the water. He brought the arrow into line with them; he let it fly. It struck both -of them; they fell; they came tumbling down. Into the basin of water they fell, and -the people, on seeing the great skill shown by Pi-ko-i, raised a great shout. -</p> -<p>Then the canoe-makers got to work, and after many days’ labor they hewed down the -great tree. The canoe was built for the King and the Queen, and they went in it and -sailed on the ocean. Pi-ko-i was with them when they made the voyage. But before that, -they had given him their daughter in marriage, and together with the girl they had -given him a portion of the land of Hawaii. Out of the portion that was given him Pi-ko-i -gave land to Kaua, and the good servant became a rich man. And as <span class="pageNum" id="pb79">[<a href="#pb79">79</a>]</span>for Mai-ne-le, he was made so ashamed by his second defeat by young Pi-ko-i that he -went straight back to his own land and never afterwards did he shoot an arrow. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb81">[<a href="#pb81">81</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch5" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e293">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>Paka: The Boy Who Was Reared in the Land that the Gods Have Since Hidden.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Paka was reared in Pali-uli, the land that the gods have since hidden from men. That -land he did not leave until he went forth to wed the fair woman whom one of his foster-fathers -had found for him—the Princess Mako-lea. -</p> -<p>But first I have to tell you about Pali-uli and the two men who found it in the old -days and brought the child Paka there. -</p> -<p>These two men were the brothers of Paka’s mother; they were both named Ki-i, and one -was called Ki-i the Stayer and the other was called Ki-i the Goer. One night Ki-i -the Stayer had a dream: in that dream a spirit told him: “You must go to Pali-uli -and live there, you and your brother; it is a land in which you can live without labor -and without discontent.” He dreamed this dream for three nights, and, each morning -after, he told his dream to Ki-i the Goer. But Ki-i the Goer paid no attention to -the dream that was told him. And then the dream came to Ki-i the Goer, and the same -words were said to him by the spirit in the dream: “You must go to Pali-uli and live -there, you and your brother, Ki-i the Stayer; it is a land in which you can live without -labor and without discontent.” -<span class="pageNum" id="pb82">[<a href="#pb82">82</a>]</span></p> -<p>Then Ki-i the Goer was all for going to the land of Pali-uli. Soon the two brothers -made preparations for going there. One night they went to bed early; they woke up -at the second crowing of the cock; then, in the early dawn while it was still dark, -they started off to seek Pali-uli, the restful land. -</p> -<p>Guided by a spirit, they found Pali-uli. (No one will ever find it again; it has since -been hidden from men by the gods.) It was a level land; it was filled with all things -that men might desire: the mountain apple there grew to be as large as the bread-fruit; -the sugar-cane grew until it doubled over, and then it shot up again; the bananas -fell scattering on the ground, ripe always; the pigs grew until their tusks were as -long as a pig is with us; the chickens grew until their spurs were as big as eggs; -the dogs grew until their backs could be made into seats and cushions; there were -fish ponds there, and they were stocked with all the fish of the ocean except whales -and sharks. Such was Pali-uli when Ki-i the Stayer and Ki-i the Goer came into it. -</p> -<p>They lived there in great plenty and in much content for a while. Then one day Ki-i -the Goer said, “How strange it is that we have all these things growing, and we have -no one to leave them to!” Then Ki-i the Stayer said: “We will take a young child and -rear him up here, and let him have some of the things that are growing in such plenty. -Let <span class="pageNum" id="pb83">[<a href="#pb83">83</a>]</span>us go back to our sister’s now, and whatever young child she has, we will take him -back with us.” -</p> -<p>So they went back to their sister’s; they found Paka, the child who was just born, -and they took him back with them. Paka had no form at all when he was born; indeed, -he was just like an egg. Ki-i the Goer wrapped him in a feather cape as they went -travelling back to Pali-uli. After ten days they unwrapped the feather cape, and they -saw that the child was becoming formed. When they looked at him again they saw that -he had become most beautiful, a child with a straight back and an open face. Then -he grew up, and his beauty was such that it lighted Pali-uli day and night. -</p> -<p>And so he grew to be a youth. One day when they were looking on him, Ki-i the Goer -said to Ki-i the Stayer, “There is one thing wanting now.” “And what is that?” asked -Ki-i the Stayer. “A beautiful wife for Paka.” Then Ki-i the Stayer said, “You must -go search for a wife for him.” -</p> -<p>Ki-i the Goer consented, and he started off to search for a wife who would be beautiful -enough to wed with Paka. He found one girl who was very much admired. But when he -looked her over he saw that her eyes bulged like the nuts of the ku-kui. He passed -her by. And then in the land of Kau he heard of another admired girl. But when he -looked her over he saw that her lips were deformed. Her, too, he passed by, and he -went on in his search. And <span class="pageNum" id="pb84">[<a href="#pb84">84</a>]</span>then, in the beautiful land of Kona, he found Mako-lea, a Princess who was as faultless -as the full moon. -</p> -<p>Ki-i the Goer went before the Princess and spoke to her of Paka. “Is he as handsome -as so-and-so?” said she to him. “So-and-so,” said he, “is as the skin of Paka’s feet.” -“Oh, bring him to me,” said the Princess. “Bring me the youth you want to be my husband, -and do not be slow.” Then back to Pali-uli went Ki-i the Goer. -</p> -<p>They knew that they would have to leave the beautiful land with the youth whom they -had brought up there; Ki-i the Goer and Ki-i the Stayer knew that, and they knew that -they could never come back to it. They wailed because of their great love for that -land and for everything that was in it. They kissed and they wept over everything -in their beautiful house. Then they committed Pali-uli to the charge of the gods who -had shown that land to them. And never since that day has Pali-uli been seen by men. -</p> -<p>When they were ready for the journey to Kona, Ki-i the Goer stood up; taking Paka -by the hand, he left the house. But Ki-i the Stayer did not move. His brother turned -to him and said, “How strange of you to want to remain when the youth whom we reared -has to leave this place!” Upon hearing his brother say this, Ki-i the Stayer stood -up and left the house. Then, with the youth whom they had <span class="pageNum" id="pb85">[<a href="#pb85">85</a>]</span>reared, Ki-i the Goer and Ki-i the Stayer left Pali-uli, the easeful land. -</p> -<p>Now the King of Kau-ai had long wanted to steal Mako-lea. He sent his servants Ke-au-miki -and Ke-au-ka to carry her off and bring her to him. On the very day that Paka was -to reach Kona, Mako-lea and her attendants went down to the beach to join in the surf-riding. -Standing on her surf-board the Princess was carried with wonderful speed across the -reef and back to the beach. She brought her surf-board out again. But this time Ke-au-miki -and Ke-au-ka overturned her surf-board and took her and carried her off to Kau-ai. -</p> -<p>When Paka came to Kona and found that Mako-lea had been taken away, he took leave -of Ki-i the Stayer and Ki-i the Goer. He asked Mako-lea’s father for a small canoe, -and a small canoe was given him. In it he went over the sea until he came to the Island -of Kau-ai. -</p> -<p>When he reached the Island he broke his canoe into small pieces, and he left the pieces -on the shore. Then he went into the land. Now the King who had taken Mako-lea was -a great thrower of the spear, a great boxer, and a great man for asking and answering -riddles. Paka had heard all about him, and he was prepared to meet him. -</p> -<p>Down to the beach came the King with a great spear in his hand. “Who shall have the -first chance with the spear?” he cried out when he saw Paka, <span class="pageNum" id="pb86">[<a href="#pb86">86</a>]</span>“the stranger or the son of the soil?” “The son of the soil,” answered Paka. -</p> -<p>When that answer was made the King threw his spear in the full belief that it would -go through the stranger, for he had never missed his throw. As the spear neared him -Paka moved; he moved aside ever so slightly. He made a quick motion of his elbow outward, -and he allowed the spear to enter between his arm and his body. He closed his arm -on the spear as the wind whistled by, and the point of the spear quivered where he -held it. The spear was held for a moment; then Paka let it fall down. -</p> -<p>The King was sure he had struck the stranger, and he uttered his triumph in a chant. -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“How could he stand against my spear? -</p> -<p class="line">It never misses what it is flung at! -</p> -<p class="line">Not the blade of grass, -</p> -<p class="line">Not the ant, not the flea! -</p> -<p class="line">How then could it miss the stranger, a man?”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">But when he had uttered all this he saw Paka let the spear drop from under his arm. -The King looked on him with amazement, and he chanted this: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“How did my spear miss the mark? -</p> -<p class="line">Was it pushed from its course by the southern storm? -</p> -<p class="line">Did a wind ward it off from him?”</p> -</div> -<p><span class="pageNum" id="pb87">[<a href="#pb87">87</a>]</span></p> -<p>He waited for the stranger to throw the spear back at him, but Paka did not throw -it. Then the King turned and went to his house. -</p> -<p>When Paka came before it he heard shouts within. “What is going on?” Paka asked. “It -is for a game,” said a by-stander. “Our King is engaged in a boxing-match; he is winning, -for no one can beat him.” Paka then went within, and he found the place filled with -people. The King, seeing him, said, “Will the stranger join in a boxing-match?” “I -know something of that game,” said Paka, “but not much. I am willing to try a bout -with the son of the soil.” -</p> -<p>Thereupon they took up their positions. The King struck, and his blow stunned Paka. -Then Paka pulled himself together, and he struck. His blow knocked the King down; -he lay on the ground for a time long enough to bake an oven of food. Then he rose -up. He said, “That was a good stroke; the stranger makes a real opponent.” -</p> -<p>Because Paka had not been defeated in the boxing-bout, he was given a house and food -and clothes. Soon afterwards the King sent a crier through the country telling the -people that they must all come to the King’s house on the fourth day after to hear -the riddles that the King proposed. Now this crier had never been given any food except -what dropped from the King’s eating place; he had never been given any clothes, either, -and he looked fearful in <span class="pageNum" id="pb88">[<a href="#pb88">88</a>]</span>his naked, unwashed, and wasted form. No one would go near the man, or speak to him, -or give him anything. Such was the King’s crier. He had a loud voice, however, and -the people all heard what he cried out. -</p> -<p>He came along crying: “Every one is commanded to be in the King’s presence on the -fourth day from this to hear the riddles that the King will propose. No man, woman, -or child may stay at home except those who are not able to walk.” -</p> -<p>As the crier came along, Paka looked out and saw him, and he said to those who were -with him, “Call that man in and give him something to eat.” Those who were with him -said, “No, we cannot do that; he is a disgusting-looking man; no one can bear to be -near where he is.” But Paka still said, “Call him to us.” The crier was called over; -he came, but he was ashamed to stand before the people who had called him. -</p> -<p>Paka had the man wash himself. He gave him new clothes, and he bade him sit down and -eat. He ate until he was satisfied. Then said the King’s crier: “I have travelled -all around the Island, and no one has ever given me food before. Now at last I have -found out that pork and yams and bananas are pleasant to the taste. How can I pay -you for this?” -</p> -<p>And then the King’s crier said: “I will pay you by telling you the answers to the -riddles that the King will propose. He will ask you to join in the <span class="pageNum" id="pb89">[<a href="#pb89">89</a>]</span>game, and if you join and are not able to answer the riddles, he will have you slain. -But if you are able to answer them, he will have to give you whatever possession of -his you ask for. This is the first riddle that he will ask: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“ ‘Put it all around from top to bottom, -</p> -<p class="line">Leave, and leave a place with nothing around.’</p> -</div> -<p class="first">The answer is <i>a house</i>, for the thatch goes around from top to bottom, with a place not thatched for the -doorway. And this is the second riddle that he will ask: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“ ‘The men that stand up, -</p> -<p class="line">The men that lie down, -</p> -<p class="line">The men that are folded.’</p> -</div> -<p class="first">The answer to that, too, is <i>a house</i>, for the timbers stand up, the beams lie down, the thatch is folded. If you have -an answer for these two riddles, you may join in the game, and the King cannot have -you slain.” -</p> -<p>The fourth day after this Paka went with the rest of the people to the King’s house. -The King saw him, and he called out, “Let the stranger be seated here.” Paka went -and sat near him. And then after a while the King said, “Will the stranger join in -the game?” -</p> -<p>“I will,” Paka said, “but you must tell me the conditions of the game.” “These are -the conditions,” <span class="pageNum" id="pb90">[<a href="#pb90">90</a>]</span>said the King. “I have two riddles to give out: if you enter the game and cannot answer -them correctly, you will be slain; if you can answer them correctly, you are free -to leave my land and to take with you any possession of mine that you choose.” “I -will enter the game,” said Paka. -</p> -<p>Then said the King: “This is the first riddle: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“ ‘Put it all around from top to bottom, -</p> -<p class="line">Leave, and leave a place with nothing around.’ ”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">Paka waited. He waited, watching an oven that was being heated. If he did not give -the correct answer, he would be flung into that oven. When the oven was all heated, -he said: -</p> -<p>“It is <i>a house</i>. A house is thatched all around, with a place for the doorway left open.” -</p> -<p>“Then answer my second riddle,” said the King, and he gave it out: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“The men that stand up, -</p> -<p class="line">The men that lie down, -</p> -<p class="line">The men that are folded.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">“The answer to that, too,” said Paka, “is <i>a house</i>. For the timbers of a house stand up, the beams lie down, the thatch is folded.” -</p> -<p>“That is the answer, but who has told you?” cried the King. -</p> -<p>He was not able to have Paka killed, and he had to give him whatever Paka chose to -ask for. And <span class="pageNum" id="pb91">[<a href="#pb91">91</a>]</span>Paka asked for the Princess Mako-lea who had been stolen away from him. He asked for -her, and he was brought into another house. And there he beheld the Princess. And -when he looked on her he knew that when his foster-father had said that she was faultless -as the full moon he had spoken the truth. He took her back to Kona, to the house of -her father and her mother, and in Kona they were wed, Paka and Mako-kea. And his two -foster-fathers, Ki-i the Goer and Ki-i the Stayer, married Mako-lea’s two attendants; -and thereafter the two elders lived so well that they almost came to forget Pali-uli, -the easeful land. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb93">[<a href="#pb93">93</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch6" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e299">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>The Story of Ha-le-ma-no and the Princess Kama.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">In Puna lived the Princess Kama, and she was so beautiful that two Kings strove to -win her—the King of Puna and the King of Hilo. They sent presents to her mother and -to her father and to herself. But Kama never saw either of those Kings. She was sent -to live in a house that no one was permitted to enter except herself and her brother. -“In a while Kama will come to the height of her beauty,” her parents said, “and then -we will give her to be Queen to one of these Kings. But until that time comes no one -must speak to her.” And so, in a house that was forbidden to every one else, Kama -lived with only her young brother for her companion. -</p> -<p>Far away, on the Island of Oahu, there lived a youth whose name was Ha-le-ma-no. Every -night he had a dream in which he met a beautiful maiden who talked to him and whose -name in his dream he knew. But when he wakened up he could not remember what name -she had told him to call her by, nor what words they had said to each other. He remembered -only her beautiful form and face, the dress and the wreaths she wore, and the scent -that was in her dress. The youth became so that he could think of nothing else except -this maiden, and he wasted away because of this thought that put every other <span class="pageNum" id="pb94">[<a href="#pb94">94</a>]</span>thought out of his mind. Then it came about that he would eat no food, and at last -his fasting and his wasting thought brought him near his death. -</p> -<p>But Ha-le-ma-no had a sister who had magical powers. Her name was Lae-ni-hi. She was -travelling with her other sisters when she saw Ha-le-ma-no’s image in the sky, and -she knew by that sign that her brother was near his death. Her sisters wept for Ha-le-ma-no -when they saw that sign in the sky, but Lae-ni-hi uttered a magic spell, and through -that spell Ha-le-ma-no was brought back to life. -</p> -<p>Then she went and she visited her brother, and when she was with him she asked what -it was that had brought him so near his death. “It is because of a maiden whom I dream -of continually,” he told her, “that I was near my death, and that I may come near -my death again.” -</p> -<p>His sister asked him what the maiden was like, and he told her. “She is tall and very -beautiful, and she seems to be a Princess. She has a wreath of hala on her head and -a lei of lehua-blossoms around her neck. Her dress is of scented tapa, and it is dyed -red.” “It is in Puna,” said his sister, “that the women wear the lehua lei, and have -scented tapa for their dresses.” -</p> -<p>Then she asked, “How do your meetings come about?” “When I fall asleep,” said Ha-le-ma-no, -“the maiden comes to me. Then she tells me her <span class="pageNum" id="pb95">[<a href="#pb95">95</a>]</span>name. But when I waken up I do not know the name I called her by.” -</p> -<p>He slept, and his wise sister watched over him. In his sleep he again met the beautiful -maiden. She heard him speak the dream-woman’s name. It was Kama. Soon afterwards Ha-le-ma-no -wakened from his sleep. -</p> -<p>“She is Kama, and of her I have heard much,” said his sister. “She is very beautiful. -But no one is permitted to come into the house where she lives. And in a while, when -she has reached the height of her beauty, she will be given in marriage to the King -of Puna or the King of Hilo.” “Unless I can take her out of that forbidden house and -away from these two Kings,” said Ha-le-ma-no, “I shall surely die.” -</p> -<p>Then his sister promised him that she would strive to find some way of bringing him -and Kama together. He ate his food because she made that promise, and he became well -again. Then, that he might be able to follow her travels, she told him of the signs -she would show. “If it rains here,” she said, “you will know that I have got as far -as the Island of Mo-lo-kai. If the lightning flashes, you will know that I have reached -the Island of Maui. If it thunders, I am at Kohala. And if you see red water flowing, -I have reached Puna, where your Princess lives.” -</p> -<p>Ha-le-ma-no’s sister started off. Soon it rained; <span class="pageNum" id="pb96">[<a href="#pb96">96</a>]</span>soon the lightning flashed; soon thunder was heard; soon red water flowed. Lae-ni-hi -had come to Puna. -</p> -<p>When she came there she began to devise ways by which she could come to the Princess -in her forbidden house. She caused the wind to blow. It aroused the sea from its repose, -and the surf began to roll in on the beach of Kai-mu. That was a place where the people -used to go for surf-riding. When they saw the surf coming in in great rollers they -began to shout. They got their surf-boards and prepared to ride in on the rolling -surf. -</p> -<p>When Kama’s brother heard the shouting he came down on the beach. He saw the people -riding the surf, and he went back to ask his sister’s permission to ride the surf -like the others. She came down to the beach with him. And when she saw the surf coming -in in such fine rollers she too became excited, and she longed to go riding it. -</p> -<p>She allowed the first roller to come in until it reached the shore; she allowed the -second roller to come in; then the third. And when that roller reached the shore she -plunged in and swam out with her board to the place where the rollers began to curve -up. When she reached that place she took the first roller that came along, and, standing -on her surf-board, she rode in on it. The people watching shouted in admiration for -her, so beautiful was her figure as she stood upon the board that came racing in with -the rolling surf. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb97">[<a href="#pb97">97</a>]</span></p> -<p>She rode the surf three times, and she was becoming more and more delighted with the -sport, when the wind ceased to blow and the surf went down. Kama was left in shallow -water. She looked down, and she saw a bright fish in the water. And her brother, who -was looking towards her, saw the fish at the same time. He called out to her, “O my -sister, take up and bring to me the bright fish that is in the shallow water.” -</p> -<p>Now the fish was Lae-ni-hi, who had transformed herself. Kama put her hands under -her and took her up. She put the fish into a calabash of water and gave her to her -brother for a plaything. He carried the fish with him, and in that way Lae-ni-hi came -into the house that was forbidden to all except the Princess and her brother. -</p> -<p>In the middle of the night she changed back into a woman, and she stood above where -the Princess lay. Kama wakened up and saw the strange woman near her. “Where are you -from?” the Princess asked. “I am from near here.” “There is no woman who is like you -anywhere near. Besides, no one belonging to this place would come into this house, -for all know that it is forbidden.” “I have come from beyond the sea.” “Yes, now you -are telling me the truth.” -</p> -<p>Then Lae-ni-hi asked the Princess if she had ever met a youth in her dream. The Princess -would not answer when she asked this. “If you would have me <span class="pageNum" id="pb98">[<a href="#pb98">98</a>]</span>bring one to you, give me a wreath that you have worn, and a dress,” said Ha-le-ma-no’s -sister. Kama gave her a wreath that was withered and one of her scented dresses. -</p> -<p>Lae-ni-hi went back to her brother. She showed him the wreath and the dress that the -Princess had worn. Upon seeing these things Ha-le-ma-no was sure that his sister had -been with the dream-maiden, and he rose up to go at once to where she was. -</p> -<p>But his sister would not let him go without her. And before she would go back to Puna -she had toys and playthings made—toys and playthings that would take the fancy of -Kama’s young brother. She had wooden birds made that would float on the waves; she -had a toy canoe made and painted red; in it there were men in red to paddle it; she -had other figures made that could stand upright; then she fixed up a colored and high-flying -kite. -</p> -<p>With the toys and playthings in their canoe, Ha-le-ma-no and Lae-ni-hi started off -for Puna. And when they drew near the shore Ha-le-ma-no let the kite rise up. As it -went up in the air the people on the beach saw it, and they shouted. The Princess’s -brother heard the shouts, and he came out to see what was happening. -</p> -<p>When he saw the kite he ran down to the beach. He saw a canoe with two persons in -it, and one of them held the string of the kite. He called out to them, “Oh, let me -have the thing that flies!” Lae-ni-hi <span class="pageNum" id="pb99">[<a href="#pb99">99</a>]</span>then said to her brother, “Let the boy have it,” and he put the string of the kite -into the boy’s hand. Then the birds were put into the water, and they floated on the -waves. Then the toy canoe with its men in red was let down, and it floated on the -water. The boy cried out, “Oh, let me have these things,” and Lae-ni-hi gave them -to him. -</p> -<p>And then she put along the side of the canoe the standing figures that she had brought. -The boy saw them, and them he wanted too. Then Lae-ni-hi said to him, “Are you a favorite -with your sister?” “I am,” the boy said; “she will do anything I ask her to do.” “Call -her so that she comes near us, and I will give you these figures.” The boy then called -her. “Unless you come here, sister,” he said, “I cannot get these playthings.” -</p> -<p>Kama came near. Then Ha-le-ma-no saw that she had the very height of the maiden whom -he had seen in his dreams. “Are you a favorite with your sister, and would she mind -if you asked her to turn her back to us?” Lae-ni-hi said. The boy asked his sister -to turn her back, and then Ha-le-ma-no saw how straight her back was. After this Lae-ni-hi -said, “Are you a favorite with your sister, and would she mind if you asked her to -show her face to us?” After that Kama stood facing the canoe, and Ha-le-ma-no saw -that this was indeed the maiden of his dream. -</p> -<p>Then they met, Ha-le-ma-no and Kama. The Princess knew him for the youth she had seen -in her <span class="pageNum" id="pb100">[<a href="#pb100">100</a>]</span>dreams. She let him take her by the hands and bring her into the canoe. When they -were in the canoe Lae-ni-hi paddled it off. The people of Puna and the people of Hilo -came in chase of them. But by the power that Lae-ni-hi had, the canoe was made to -go so swiftly that those who followed were left far behind. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>After this the two Kings said to each other: “Yes, we have sent much of what we owned -to her and to her parents with the idea that one or the other of us would get her -for his wife. Now she has been carried off from us. Let us make war upon those who -have taken her, and punish them for having carried her off.” -</p> -<p>And so the two Kings made war upon Ha-le-ma-no’s people. Ha-le-ma-no and Kama had -to flee away. And after enduring much suffering and much poverty they came to the -Island of Maui. There they lived; but instead of living in state and having plenty, -they had to dig the ground and live as a farmer and a farmer’s wife. -</p> -<p>Near where they lived there was a beach, and people used to go down to it for surf-riding. -One day Kama went down to this beach. She took a board and went surf-riding. And when -she was racing in on the surf she remembered how she had once lived as a Princess, -and she remembered how Ha-le-ma-no had come and had taken her away, and how <span class="pageNum" id="pb101">[<a href="#pb101">101</a>]</span>she had nothing now but a grass hut and the roots that she and her husband pulled -out of the ground. And then she was angry with Ha-le-ma-no, and she longed to be back -again in Puna. -</p> -<p>When she finished surf-riding and came in on to the shore she saw that there were -red canoes there—the canoes of a King. And then she saw Hua-a, the King of Puna. He -came to her, and he took her by the hands. She went with him, leaving her husband, -who was working in his fields. But in a while she was sorry for what she had done, -and she left Hua-a. And after that Kama went wandering through the Islands. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>Now when Ha-le-ma-no knew that his wife had left him, he grew so ill that again he -was near his death. But again his sister saved him. Then, when he was well, Ha-le-ma-no -told his sister that he would learn to be a fisherman, for he thought that if he were -something else than a farmer Kama would come back to him. -</p> -<p>His sister told him to learn to be a singer and a chanter of verses; she told him -that, if he had that art, he would be most likely to win his wife back to him. Ha-le-ma-no -made up his mind to learn the art of singing and of chanting verses. -</p> -<p>When he was on his way to learn this art he passed by a grove at Ke-a-kui. He went -within the grove, and he saw the mai-le vine growing on the <span class="pageNum" id="pb102">[<a href="#pb102">102</a>]</span>ohia trees. Then he began to strip the vine from the trees and make wreaths of it. -He was sitting down making the wreaths when he saw the top of the mountain Ha-le-a-ka-la, -like a pointed cloud in the evening, with other clouds drifting about it. And when -he looked upon that mountain he thought of the places where he and his wife had travelled. -And as he was thinking of her, his wife, who had been wandering about that Island, -came near where he was. She saw him and she knew him; she came and she stood behind -him. And then Ha-le-ma-no, looking upon the mountain, was moved to chant these verses: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“I was once thought a good deal of, O my love! -</p> -<p class="line">My companion of the shady trees. -</p> -<p class="line">For we two once lived on the food from the long-speared grass of the wilderness. -</p> -<p class="line">Alas, O my love! -</p> -<p class="line">My love from the land of the Kau-mu-ku wind, -</p> -<p class="line">As it comes gliding over the ocean, -</p> -<p class="line">As it covers the waves of Papa-wai, -</p> -<p class="line">For it was the canoe that brought us here. -</p> -<p class="line">Alas, O my love! -</p> -<p class="line">My love of the home where we were friendless, -</p> -<p class="line">Our only friend being our love for one another. -</p> -<p class="line">It is hooked, and it bites to the very inside of the bones.”</p> -</div> -<p><span class="pageNum" id="pb103">[<a href="#pb103">103</a>]</span></p> -<p>Kama was going to put out her hand to touch him, but, hearing him chant this, she -thought that he was in such sorrow that he would never forgive her. She wept and she -went away, leaving the place without speaking to him. -</p> -<p>After that Ha-le-ma-no went on his way; he learned the art of singing and of chanting -verses. Afterwards, when he was very famous, it happened that he was invited to a -place where there were games and singing. -</p> -<p>He came to that place; covered over with a mantle, he sat by himself, and he watched -those who came in. Many people came in, and amongst them a woman who wanted to be -a wife to Ha-le-ma-no—a woman of great riches. But as Ha-le-ma-no looked towards this -woman, he saw sitting there, in all her beauty and her grace, his own wife Kama. They -asked him to chant to them. Then he remembered how he and she had lived together and -had wandered together in different places; and, remembering this, he chanted: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“We once lived in Hilo, in our own home, -</p> -<p class="line">For we had suffered in the home that was not ours, -</p> -<p class="line">For I had but one friend, myself. -</p> -<p class="line">The streams of Hilo are innumerable, -</p> -<p class="line">The high cliff was the home where we lived. -</p> -<p class="line">Alas, my love of the lehua blossoms of Moku-pa-ne! -<span class="pageNum" id="pb104">[<a href="#pb104">104</a>]</span></p> -<p class="line">The lehua blossoms that were braided with the hala blossoms, -</p> -<p class="line">For our love for one another was all that we had. -</p> -<p class="line">The rain fell only at Le-le-wi, -</p> -<p class="line">As it came creeping over the hala trees at Po-mai-kai, -</p> -<p class="line">At the place where I was punished through love. -</p> -<p class="line">Alas, O my love! -</p> -<p class="line">My love from the leaping cliffs of Pi-i-kea; -</p> -<p class="line">From the waters of Wai-lu-ku where the people are carried under, -</p> -<p class="line">Which we had to go through to get to the many cliffs of Hilo, -</p> -<p class="line">Those solemn cliffs that are bare of people, -</p> -<p class="line">Peopled by you and me alone, my love, -</p> -<p class="line">You, my own love!”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And when she heard these verses Kama knew who the man was who chanted them. She bowed -her head, and she chanted: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Alas, thou art my bosom companion, my love! -</p> -<p class="line">My companion of the cold watery home of Hilo. -</p> -<p class="line">I am from Hilo, -</p> -<p class="line">From the rain that pelts the leaves of the bread-fruit of Pi-i-honua; -</p> -<p class="line">For we live at the bread-fruit trees of Malama. -</p> -<p class="line">Love is shown by the tears, -</p> -<p class="line">Love is the friend of my companion, -</p> -<p class="line">My companion of the thick forests of Pana-ewa, -<span class="pageNum" id="pb105">[<a href="#pb105">105</a>]</span></p> -<p class="line">Where you and I have trod, -</p> -<p class="line">Our only fellow-traveller our love. -</p> -<p class="line">Alas, O my companion, my love! -</p> -<p class="line">My love of the cold, watery home of Hilo, -</p> -<p class="line">The friendless home where you and I lived.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And when she had chanted this, Kama looked towards Ha-le-ma-no, and she saw that forgiveness -was in his eyes. They stood up then, and they joined each other. Then they went away -together. -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“You will surely see Hai-li, -</p> -<p class="line">Hai-li where the blossoming lehua trees -</p> -<p class="line">Are haunted by the birds, -</p> -<p class="line">The o-o of the forest, -</p> -<p class="line">Whose sweet notes can be heard at eventide.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">So they sang to each other as they went away together. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb107">[<a href="#pb107">107</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch7" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e305">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>The Arrow and the Swing.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Hi-ku lived on a peak of the mountain, and Ka-we-lu lived in the lowlands. Ka-we-lu -was a princess, but at the time when she was in the lowlands she had no state nor -greatness; she was alone except for some women who attended her. Hi-ku was a boy; -he had a wonderful arrow that was named Pua-ne. -</p> -<p>One day Hi-ku took his arrow and he went down towards the lowlands. He met some boys -who were casting their arrows, and he offered to cast his against theirs. He cast -his arrow; it went over the heads of a bald-headed man and a sightless man; it went -over the heads of a lame man and a large-headed man; it went across the fields of -many men, and it fell at last before the door of the girl Ka-we-lu. -</p> -<p>Her women attendants brought the arrow to her. Ka-we-lu took it and hid it. Then Hi-ku -came along. “Have any of you seen my arrow?” he said to the women attendants. “We -have not seen it,” they said. “The arrow fell here,” said Hi-ku, “for I watched it -fall.” “Would you know your arrow from another arrow?” asked the Princess from her -house. “Know it! Why, my arrow would answer if I called it,” answered Hi-ku. “Call -it, then,” said the Princess. “Pua-ne, Pua-ne,” Hi-ku called. “Here,” said Pua-ne -the arrow. “I knew you had <span class="pageNum" id="pb108">[<a href="#pb108">108</a>]</span>hidden my arrow,” said Hi-ku. “Come and find it,” said the Princess. -</p> -<p>He went into her house to search for the arrow, and the Princess closed the door behind -him. He found the arrow. He held the arrow in his hand, and he did not go, for when -he looked around he saw so many beautiful things that he forgot what he had come for. -</p> -<p>He saw beautiful wreaths of flowers and beautiful capes of feathers; he saw mats of -many beautiful colors, and he saw shells and beautiful pieces of coral. And he saw -one thing that was more beautiful than all these. He saw Ka-we-lu the Princess. In -the middle of her dwelling she stood, and her beauty was so bright that it seemed -as if many ku-kui were blazing up with all their light. Hi-ku forgot his home on the -mountain peak. He looked on the Princess, and he loved her. She had loved him when -she saw him coming towards her house; but she loved him more when she saw him standing -within it, his magic arrow in his hand. -</p> -<p>He stayed in her house for five days. Every day Ka-we-lu would go into one of the -houses outside and eat with her attendants. But neither on the first day nor the second -day, neither on the third day nor the fourth day, nor yet on the fifth day, did she -offer food to Hi-ku, nor did she tell him where he might go to get it. -</p> -<p>He was hungry on the second day, and he became <span class="pageNum" id="pb109">[<a href="#pb109">109</a>]</span>hungrier and hungrier and hungrier. He was angry on the third day, and he became angrier -and angrier. And why did the Princess not offer him any food? I do not know. Some -say that it was because her attendants made little of him, saying that the food they -had was all for people of high rank, and that it might not be given to Hi-ku, whose -rank, they said, was a low one. Perhaps her attendants prevented her giving food to -him, saying such things about him. -</p> -<p>On the fifth day, when Ka-we-lu was eating with her attendants in a house outside, -Hi-ku took up his arrow and went angrily out of the house. He went towards the mountain. -Then Ka-we-lu, coming out of the house where her attendants were, saw him going. She -ran up the side of the mountain after him. But he went angrily on, and he never looked -backward towards the Princess or towards the lowlands that she lived in. -</p> -<p>She went swiftly after him, calling to him as the plover calls, flying here and there. -She called to him, for she deeply loved him, and she looked upon him as her husband. -But he, knowing that she was gaining on him, made an incantation to hold her back. -He called upon the mai-le vines and the i-e vines; he called upon the ohia trees and -the other branching trees to close up the path against her. But still Ka-we-lu went -on, struggling against the tangle that grew across her path. Her garments were torn, -<span class="pageNum" id="pb110">[<a href="#pb110">110</a>]</span>and her body became covered with tears and scratches. Still she went on. But now Hi-ku -was going farther and farther from her. Then she sang to him aloud, so that he could -not but hear: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“My flowers are fallen from me, -</p> -<p class="line">And Hi-ku goes on and on: -</p> -<p class="line">The flowers that we twined for my wreath. -</p> -<p class="line">If Hi-ku would fling back to me -</p> -<p class="line">A flower, since all mine are gone!”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">He did not throw back a flower, nor did he call out a word to her as she followed -him up the mountain ways. The vines and the branches held her, and she was not able -to get through them. Then she raised her voice, and she sang to him again: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Do you hear, my companion, my friend! -</p> -<p class="line">Ka-we-lu will live there below: -</p> -<p class="line">My flowers are lost to me now: -</p> -<p class="line">Down, down, far down, I will go.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">Hi-ku heard what she sang. But he did not look back or make any answer. He kept on -his way up the mountain-side. Ka-we-lu was left behind, entangled in the vines and -the branches. Afterwards he was lost to her sight, and her voice could not reach him. -</p> -<p>He went up to the peak of the mountain, and he entered his parents’ house. And still -he was angry. <span class="pageNum" id="pb111">[<a href="#pb111">111</a>]</span>But after a night his anger went from him. And then he thought of the young Princess -of Kona, with her deep eyes and her youth that was like the gush of a spring. More -and more her image came before him, and he looked upon it with love. -</p> -<p>Now one day, when he was again making his way up the mountain-side, a song about himself -and Ka-we-lu came into his mind. It was a song that was for Lo-lu-pe, the god who -brings together friends who have been lost to each other. -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Hi-ku is climbing the mountain-ridge, -</p> -<p class="line">Climbing the mountain-ridge. -</p> -<p class="line">The branch hangs straggling down; -</p> -<p class="line">Its blossoms, flung off by Lo-lu-pe, lie on the ground. -</p> -<p class="line">Give me, too, a flower, O Lo-lu-pe, -</p> -<p class="line">That I may restore my wreath!”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And singing this song he went up to his parents’ house. -</p> -<p>Strangers were in the house. “Who are they, and what have they come for?” Hi-ku asked. -“Ka-we-lu, the young Princess of Kona, is dead,” his parents told him, “and these -people have come for timbers to build a house around her dead body.” -</p> -<p>When Hi-ku heard this, he wept for his great loss. And then he left his parents and -went seeking the god Lo-lu-pe, for whom he had made a song on his way up the mountain. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb112">[<a href="#pb112">112</a>]</span></p> -<p>Now Lo-lu-pe was in the form of a kite, because he went through the air searching -for things that people needed and prayed to him to find for them. And outside a wizard’s -house Hi-ku saw the image of Lo-lu-pe, a kite that was like a fish, and with tail -and wings. Hi-ku went and said his prayer to Lo-lu-pe, and then he let the kite go -in the winds. -</p> -<p>That night Lo-lu-pe came to him in his dream, and showed him where Ka-we-lu was; she -had gone down into the world that Mi-lu rules over—the world of the dead that is below -the ocean. And Lo-lu-pe, in his dream, told him how he might come to her, and how -he might bring Ka-we-lu’s spirit back to the world of the living. -</p> -<p>He was to take the morning-glory vines, and he was to make out of them the longest -ropes that had ever been made. And to each of the long ropes he was to fix the cross-piece -of a swing. Then he was to let two swings go down into the ocean’s depths, and he -was to lower himself by one of them. And what he was to do after that was twice told -to him by Lo-lu-pe. -</p> -<p>Hi-ku went where the morning-glory vines grew; he got the longest of the vines and, -with the friends who went with him, made the longest of ropes. Then, with his friends, -he went out over the ocean; he lowered the two longest ropes that were ever made, -each with the cross-piece of a swing fixed to it. Down by one of the ropes Hi-ku went. -And so he <span class="pageNum" id="pb113">[<a href="#pb113">113</a>]</span>came to the place of the spirits, to the place at the bottom of the sea that Mi-lu -rules over. -</p> -<p>And when he came down to that place he began to swing himself on one of the swings. -The spirits all saw him, and they all wanted to swing. But Hi-ku kept the swing to -himself; he swung himself, and as he swung, he sang: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“I have a swing, a swing, -</p> -<p class="line">And the rest of you children have none: -</p> -<p class="line">Whom will I let on my swing? -</p> -<p class="line">Not one of this crowd, not one.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">The spirit of Ka-we-lu was standing there beside Mi-lu, the King. Hi-ku saw her amongst -the crowd of spirits. But Ka-we-lu did not know Hi-ku. -</p> -<p>Mi-lu came to where Hi-ku was swinging. He wanted to go on the swing. Hi-ku gave him -the seat. Then the spirits began to swing him, and Mi-lu was so delighted with the -swinging that he had all the spirits pull on the ropes to swing him—the ropes that -were on the cross-piece and that were for pulling. -</p> -<p>Then Hi-ku went to Ka-we-lu. “Here is our swing,” he said, and he brought her where -the second vine-rope was hanging. He put her on the seat, and he began to swing her. -And as he swung her he chanted as they chant in the upper world, the world of the -living, when one is being swung: -<span class="pageNum" id="pb114">[<a href="#pb114">114</a>]</span></p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Wounded is Wai-mea by the piercing wind; -</p> -<p class="line">The bud of the purple ohai is drooping; -</p> -<p class="line">Jealous and grieved is the flower of the ko-aie; -</p> -<p class="line">Pained is the wood of Wai-ka; -</p> -<p class="line">O Love! Wai-ka loves me as a lover; -</p> -<p class="line">Like unto a lover is the flower of Koo-lau; -</p> -<p class="line">It is the flower in the woods of Ma-he-le. -</p> -<p class="line">The wood is a place for journeying, -</p> -<p class="line">The wild pili grass has its place in the forests, -</p> -<p class="line">Life is but a simple round at Ka-hua. -</p> -<p class="line">O Love! Love it was which came to me; -</p> -<p class="line">Whither has it vanished? -</p> -<p class="line">O Love! Farewell.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">He chanted this, thinking that Ka-we-lu would remember her days in the upper world -when she heard what was chanted at the swinging-games. But Ka-we-lu did not remember. -</p> -<p>Then Hi-ku went on the swing. “Come and swing with me,” he said, when he got on the -seat. “Sit upon my knees,” he said, “and I will cover myself with my mantle.” -</p> -<p>Ka-we-lu jumped up, and she sat upon Hi-ku’s knees. They began to swing backward and -forward, backward and forward, while Mi-lu, the King of the Dead, was being swung -by the spirits. Then Hi-ku pulled on the morning-glory vine. This was a signal; his -friends did as he had told them to do; they <span class="pageNum" id="pb115">[<a href="#pb115">115</a>]</span>began to pull up the swing. Up, up, came Hi-ku, and up came Ka-we-lu, held in Hi-ku’s -arms. -</p> -<p>But Ka-we-lu shrank and shrank as she came up near the sunlight; she shrank until -she was smaller than a girl, smaller than a child; until she was smaller than a bird, -even. Hi-ku and she came to the surface of the ocean. Then he, holding her, went back -in his canoe and came to where, the timbers built around it, her body was laid. He -brought the spirit to the body, the spirit that had shrunken, and he held the spirit -to the soles of the body’s feet. The spirit went in at the soles of the feet; it passed -up; it came to the breast; it came to the throat. Having reached the throat, the spirit -stayed in the body. Then the body was taken up by Hi-ku; it was warmed, and afterwards -Ka-we-lu was as she had been before. Then these two, Ka-we-lu and Hi-ku, lived long -together in a place between the mountain and the lowlands, and they wove many wreaths -for each other, and they sang many songs to each other, and they left offerings for -Lo-lu-pe often—for Lo-lu-pe, who brings to the people knowledge of where their lost -things are. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb117">[<a href="#pb117">117</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch8" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e311">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>The Daughter of the King of Ku-ai-he-lani.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">The Country that Supports the Heavens, Ku-ai-he-lani, was where Maki-i lived and ruled -as King. He came to one of our Islands, and there he took a wife. After a while he -had to go back to Ku-ai-he-lani, and before he went he said this to the woman he had -married: “I know that a daughter will be born to us. I would have you name the girl -Lau-kia-manu. If, when you have brought her up, she has a desire to come to live with -me, let her make the journey to Ku-ai-he-lani. But she must come in a red canoe with -red sails and red cords, with red bailing-cups, and with men in red to have charge -of it. And she must be accompanied by a large canoe and a small canoe, by big men -and by little men. And give her these; they will be tokens by which I shall know her -for my daughter—this necklace of whales’ teeth, this bracelet, and this bright feather -cloak.” Maki-i then gave the tokens to his wife, and he departed for the land of Ku-ai-he-lani. -</p> -<p>A child was born to the wife whom he had left behind, and she named the child Lau-kia-manu. -Meanwhile Maki-i in his own land had planted a garden and had filled it with lovely -flowers, and another garden and had filled it with pleasant fruits, and had made a -bathing pool; he made the gardens <span class="pageNum" id="pb118">[<a href="#pb118">118</a>]</span>and the pool forbidden places to every one except the daughter who might come to him -in Ku-ai-he-lani. And he had instructed the guards about the tokens by which they -would know Lau-kia-manu, his daughter. -</p> -<p>The girl grew up under her mother’s care. As she grew older she began to ask about -her father—who was he and where had he gone to? And once when she asked about him, -her mother said to her: “Go to the cliff yonder; that is your father.” The child went -to the cliff and asked: “Are you my father?” The cliff denied it and said, “I am not -your father.” The child came back and craved of her mother, again, to tell her who -her father was. “Go to the bamboo bush yonder,” said her mother; “that is your father.” -The child went to the bamboo bush and said, “Are you my father?” “I am not,” said -the bamboo bush. “Maki-i is your father.” “And where is he?” said the child. “He has -gone back to Ku-ai-he-lani.” -</p> -<p>She went back and said to her mother, “Maki-i is my father, and he is in the land -of Ku-ai-he-lani, and you have hidden this from me.” Her mother said: “I have hidden -it because if you went to visit him terrible things would befall you. For he told -me that you should go to him in a red canoe with red sails and red cords, with red -bailing-cups, and with men in red to have charge of it. And he said that you should -be accompanied by a large canoe and a small canoe, by big men and little men. He gave -me <span class="pageNum" id="pb119">[<a href="#pb119">119</a>]</span>tokens for you to bring also, but there is no use in giving you these, for you cannot -go except in the canoes he spoke of, and there is no way by which you can come by -possessions that denote such royal state.” -</p> -<p>So her mother said, but Lau-kia-manu still had thoughts of going to Ku-ai-he-lani, -where her father was King. She grew to be a girl, and then one day she said to her -mother, “I have no way by which I can come into possession of canoes that would denote -my royal state, but for all that I will make a journey to Ku-ai-he-lani; I will not -remain here.” Her mother said, “Go if you will, but terrible things will befall you.” -And then her mother said: “Go on and on until you come to where two old women are -roasting bananas by the wayside. They are your grandmother and your grand-aunt. Reach -down and take away the bananas they are roasting. Let them search for them until they -ask who has taken them. Tell them then who you are. When they ask ‘What brings you -this way?’ say, ‘I have come because I must have a roadway.’ When you say this to -them, your grandmother and your grand-aunt will give you a roadway to Ku-ai-he-lani.” -</p> -<p>Lau-kia-manu left her mother and went upon her way. She came where the two old women -were by the wayside, and she did as her mother had told her. “Whose offspring are -you?” asked the old women. “Your own,” said Lau-kia-manu, and she told them <span class="pageNum" id="pb120">[<a href="#pb120">120</a>]</span>the name of her mother. “What brings you, lady, to us here?” asked the old women. -And the girl answered, “I have come to you because I want a roadway.” -</p> -<p>Thereupon one of the old women said: “Here is a roadway; it is this bamboo stalk. -Climb to the top of it, and when it leans over it will reach into Ku-ai-he-lani.” -Lau-kia-manu went to the top of the bamboo stalk and sat there. It began to shoot -up. When it reached a great height it leaned over; the end of it reached Ku-ai-he-lani, -the Country that Supports the Heavens. -</p> -<p>Lau-kia-manu then went along until she came to a garden that was filled with lovely -flowers. She went into it. There grew the ilima and the me-le ku-le and the mai-le -vine. She gathered the vines and the flowers, and she twined them into wreaths for -herself. And she went from that garden into another garden. There all kinds of pleasant -fruits were growing. She plucked and she ate of them. She saw beyond that garden the -clear, cool surface of a pool. She went there; she undressed herself, and she bathed -in that pool. And when she was in the water there, a turtle came and rubbed her back. -</p> -<p>She dressed, and she sat on the edge of the pool. And then the guards who had been -placed over the flower garden and the fruit garden and the bathing pool came to where -she was. “You are indeed a <span class="pageNum" id="pb121">[<a href="#pb121">121</a>]</span>strange girl,” they said to her, “for you have plucked the flowers and the fruit in -the gardens that are forbidden to all except the King’s daughter, and you have bathed -in the pool that is for her alone. You will certainly die for doing these things,” -</p> -<p>The guards went to Maki-i: they told him about the strange girl and what she had done. -The King ordered that they should tie her hands and stand guard over her all night, -and that when the dawn came they should take her to the sea-shore and slay her there. -</p> -<p>The guards took Lau-kia-manu; they tied her hands, they flung her into a pig-pen, -and they remained on watch over her all night. At midnight an owl came and perched -over where the girl lay. Then the owl called out to her: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Say, Lau-kia-manu, -</p> -<p class="line">Daughter of Maki-i! -</p> -<p class="line">Do you know what will befall you? -</p> -<p class="line">Die you will, die you must!”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">To that the girl made answer: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Wicked owl, wicked owl! -</p> -<p class="line">You are bad indeed, -</p> -<p class="line">Thus to reveal me: -</p> -<p class="line">Lau-kia-manu, Lau-kia-manu, -</p> -<p class="line">Daughter of Maki-i.”</p> -</div> -<p><span class="pageNum" id="pb122">[<a href="#pb122">122</a>]</span></p> -<p>The call of the owl and the answer of the girl came twice before the guards heard -them. Then they stood up and they listened. They heard the call again, and they heard -the answer of the girl within the pig-pen. Then one of the guards said, “This must -be Lau-kia-manu, the King’s own daughter; we must tell him about it all.” But the -other guard said: “No. Lau-kia-manu, the King’s daughter, was to come in a red canoe, -having red sails, red cords, and red bailing-cups, with men in red in charge, and -with a large canoe, a small canoe, big men, and little men accompanying it. This is -a low-class girl; she has come with none of these things.” The owl spoke again, and -the girl made answer, and when they heard what was said the guards agreed that they -should go to the King and tell him all that they had heard. -</p> -<p>The King went back with the two guards. The owl was still above the pig-pen, and the -girl still within it. The owl called out: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Say, Lau-kia-manu, -</p> -<p class="line">Daughter of Maki-i! -</p> -<p class="line">Do you know what will befall you? -</p> -<p class="line">Die you will, die you must!”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And to that the girl made answer: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Wicked owl, wicked owl! -</p> -<p class="line">You are bad indeed, -<span class="pageNum" id="pb123">[<a href="#pb123">123</a>]</span></p> -<p class="line">Thus to reveal me: -</p> -<p class="line">Lau-kia-manu, Lau-kia-manu, -</p> -<p class="line">Daughter of Maki-i.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">When the King heard this he went into the pig-pen. -</p> -<p>Now, after the guards had gone to inform the King of what they had heard the owl flew -down upon Lau-kia-manu; it clapped its wings over the girl; it placed the necklace -of whales’ teeth around her neck, it placed the bracelet upon her arm, it put the -cloak of bright feathers around her. For this owl was really her grand-aunt, and it -was to her that Lau-kia-manu’s mother had given the tokens by which the girl was to -be recognized when she came into Maki-i’s kingdom. -</p> -<p>When her father broke into the pig-pen he saw her standing there with the necklace -of whales’ teeth around her neck, with the bracelet upon her wrist, and with the cloak -of bright feathers around her. He took her up and he wept over her; he gave her the -garden of flowers and the garden of fruits and the bathing pool with the clear cool -water. Then, in a while, he brought Ula to her. -</p> -<p>Ula was a prince from Kahiki-ku, and he was as handsome as she was lovely. What a -sight it was to see them together, Lau-kia-manu and Ula, the prince from Kahiki-ku! -“What light is that in yonder house?” he had said to her father on the night that -he came to Ku-ai-he-lani, “That is not a <span class="pageNum" id="pb124">[<a href="#pb124">124</a>]</span>light,” said Maki-i; “it is the radiance of the woman who is within.” He brought Ula -into the house, and Ula and Lau-kia-manu met. -</p> -<p>For fifty days they were together. Then Ula had to return to his own land, to Kahiki-ku. -“You cannot go there unless you take me with you,” said Lau-kia-manu. “You cannot -come with me,” said Ula. “If you came you would meet with terrible suffering at the -hands of the Queen of <span class="corr" id="xd31e1701" title="Source: Kahi-ki-ku">Kahiki-ku</span>.” -</p> -<p>He went back to his own land. Lau-kia-manu remained in Ku-ai-he-lani, but she was -so overcome by her love for Ula that, every morning when she saw the clouds in the -sky drifting towards <span class="corr" id="xd31e1706" title="Source: Kahi-kiku">Kahiki-ku</span>, she would chant this poem: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“The sun is up, it is up: -</p> -<p class="line">My love is ever up before me: -</p> -<p class="line">Love is a burthen when one is in love, -</p> -<p class="line">And falling tears are its due.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">She would weep then. And when she found out that she could not put her love away from -her, either by night or by day, she went down to the sea-shore and she wept there. -Then, when her weeping was at an end, she called out, “O turtle with the shiny back, -O my grandmother of the sea, come to me.” -</p> -<p>The turtle with the shiny back appeared. She opened her shell at her back. Lau-kia-manu -went within the shell. Then the turtle went under the <span class="pageNum" id="pb125">[<a href="#pb125">125</a>]</span>water. She swam under the sea, and she swam on and on until she came with Lau-kia-manu -to the land of Kahiki-ku. The girl stepped on the sea-shore, and the turtle dived -into the ocean and disappeared. Lau-kia-manu went along by the sea-shore. She came -to where there was a fish pond that belonged to the Queen of Kahiki-ku. She stayed -beside the fish pond while she uttered a charm, saying: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Ye forty thousand gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye four hundred thousand gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye rows of gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye assemblies of gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye older brothers of the gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye four-fold gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye five-fold gods, -</p> -<p class="line xd31e1728">Take away from me my beauty, make it hidden: -</p> -<p class="line xd31e1728">Give me the form of a crone, bowed and blear-eyed.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And when she had said that, her beauty was taken away from her, and she appeared as -an old woman, bent and wandering, with a stick in her hand, gathering sea-eggs. -</p> -<p>In the fish pond there were many kinds of silver fish. Lau-kia-manu uttered a spell, -and caused them all to disappear a minute after she had seen them swimming about. -Still she stayed near, dragging herself here and there about the sea-shore. And <span class="pageNum" id="pb126">[<a href="#pb126">126</a>]</span>while she was there, messengers came to bring from the Queen’s pond silver fish for -the Queen. -</p> -<p>There was not a single fish in the pond. When the messengers saw this, they accused -the old woman who was near by of having taken the fish out of the pond. She made no -reply to them. Then nothing would do the messengers but to take her before the Queen -and charge her with having stolen the silver fish out of her pond. -</p> -<p>So they brought her before the Queen. “There is not a single fish in your pond,” they -said, “and we found this old woman near it, going up and down.” The Queen said, “Nothing -will happen to you, old woman, if you will take as your name the name of my sickness.” -The old woman said that she would do that. Then the Queen named her Li-pe-wa-le, the -name of the Queen’s sickness; she let her stay in the house, and she gave her food. -</p> -<p>So Lau-kia-manu became known as Li-pe-wa-le. In the Queen’s house she did menial tasks. -And into the house came the Prince who was to wed the Queen. He was Ula. Once when -she was lying on her mat asleep, Ula came and kissed Lau-kia-manu. She wakened up -and cried out, “Who is kissing me?” The Queen heard her voice and said, “What is it, -Li-pe-wa-le?” Lau-kia-manu made no answer. We can see by what Ula did that he knew -his sweetheart of Ku-ai-he-lani in spite of her being transformed into an old woman. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb127">[<a href="#pb127">127</a>]</span></p> -<p>One day the Queen went down to the sea-shore to bathe. She bade Li-pe-wa-le stay within -the house and decorate a dress that she was to wear. Li-pe-wa-le did as she was ordered. -But she worked so quickly on the dress that she had it all done very soon, and she -was able to follow the Queen and her attendants down to the sea-shore. And on her -way she caused herself to be transformed back into her own shape, with her own beauty. -She passed the others by; she bathed near where the Queen bathed, and the Queen and -all her attendants were able to look upon her. Then she dressed herself and hurried -away. -</p> -<p>They all hurried after her; the Queen was angry that one who was more beautiful than -she was should be in her country. Lau-kia-manu went more quickly than they did, and -when they came to the Queen’s house she had already transformed herself, and the only -one they saw there was Li-pe-wa-le, the old and withered woman. -</p> -<p>That night the Queen and her attendants and Ula the Prince went to dance in a house -that the Queen had built. She put on her beautiful wreaths with the dress that Li-pe-wa-le -had decorated for her. But she ordered Li-pe-wa-le to stay within the house and decorate -another dress. -</p> -<p>There she stayed, and the sounds of the music and the dancing came to her. And then -the girl went <span class="pageNum" id="pb128">[<a href="#pb128">128</a>]</span>without. She looked over to the house where the dance was going on, and she uttered -this charm: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Ye forty thousand gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye four hundred thousand gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye rows of gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye assemblies of gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye older brothers of the gods, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye gods that whisper, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye gods that watch by night, -</p> -<p class="line">Ye gods that show your gleaming eyes by night, -</p> -<p class="line xd31e1728">Come down, awake, make a move, stir yourselves! -</p> -<p class="line xd31e1728">There is the house, the house.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And when she uttered this spell the Queen, who was dancing, fell down on the ground. -Fire burst out all around the house. And then Lau-kia-manu, in the light of the fires, -in the light of her own beauty, stood in the doorway of the house. Ula the Prince -saw her there. “Come to me, oh, come to me, beautiful woman,” he said. But Lau-kia-manu -made answer: “I will not go to you now, nor ever again. In your own country you did -not cherish me, but you left me to sorrow and affliction. Now I go back to Ku-ai-he-lani.” -So she left the burning house, and she went down to the sea-shore. She called upon -the turtle with the shiny back, her grandmother of the sea; and the turtle came and -opened the shell on her <span class="pageNum" id="pb129">[<a href="#pb129">129</a>]</span>back, and Lau-kia-manu went within it. And she journeyed through the ocean, under -the waves, and came back again to the land of Ku-ai-he-lani, and there ever afterwards -she stayed. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb131">[<a href="#pb131">131</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch9" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e317">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>The Fish-Hook of Pearl.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">There are fish-hooks and fish-hooks, but the most wonderful fish-hook that any one -ever heard of was the fish-hook owned by Ku-ula. It was a fish-hook of pearl-shell; -and every time Ku-ula went fishing he took a canoe, not five fathoms or eight fathoms -in length, but ten fathoms, and when he fished with that hook (Ka-hu-oi was the name -it had) the canoe would be filled up with the catch. -</p> -<p>And it was the finest of fish, the aku fish, that would rise to that hook. He would -let it down into the water, and the aku would throw themselves into the canoe. Ku-ula -was rich because of all the fine fish he could catch with his pearl hook. It had been -given to him by a bird that was called Ka-manu-wai, and this bird would sit on the -rail of the canoe that Ku-ula went fishing in and eat some of the fish that Ku-ula -caught. -</p> -<p>One day when Ku-ula went fishing outside of Mamala the King of that place went fishing -there too. The King caught few fish, and none of them were fine ones. He looked, and -he saw Ku-ula fishing, and he saw that the aku fish were jumping in hundreds around -the hook that the fisherman let down. His attendants told him of the pearl hook that -was called Ka-hu-oi, and the King made up his mind to have this hook. He sent for -Ku-ula, and he <span class="pageNum" id="pb132">[<a href="#pb132">132</a>]</span>made him give up the hook that the bird Ka-manu-wai had given him. -</p> -<p>After that Ku-ula caught no more aku fish; the bird Ka-manu-wai, not getting the food -it liked, flew away; its eyes were closed with hunger where it roosted, and the place -where that bird roosted is called Kau-maka-pili, “Roosting with Closed Eyes,” to this -day. And Ku-ula got poorer and poorer, and he and his family got more and more hungry -from that day. -</p> -<p>And so it came about that when his child Ai-ai was born they had no food for him. -They let him float down the stream, putting him in just above the place where the -bird Ka-manu-wai roosted. The child floated down; a rock in the stream held him, and -there little Ai-ai stayed in the shallow water. That very day the King’s daughter, -who was then a young girl, was bathing in the stream with her attendants. She found -little Ai-ai, and she took him to the King’s house; there Ai-ai grew up, and he was -tended by the King’s daughter while he was a child. -</p> -<p>When he grew up he was a strong and handsome youth. The King’s daughter who had saved -him came to love him; she would have him marry her, and at last he and she got married. -</p> -<p>It happened that one day after they were married his wife was sick, and she asked -Ai-ai to get her some fish. He took a rod, and he went fishing along <span class="pageNum" id="pb133">[<a href="#pb133">133</a>]</span>the shore. He caught a few fish, and he brought them home to her. After a while she -was sick again, and she had a longing for fish again. And this time she wanted the -aku, the fine fish from the depth of the sea. -</p> -<p>He told her then that he could not fish for aku unless he had a canoe and a fish-hook -of pearl. When she heard him say that, she remembered that her father had a pearl -fish-hook. So she went to the King, her father. When she came before him, he said, -“What is it you want, my daughter?” She said, “A canoe for my husband, and a pearl -fish-hook.” He told her that her husband might take a canoe out of his canoe-shed, -and then he said to her, “I have a pearl fish-hook, and I will give it to you for -him.” -</p> -<p>So he gave a pearl fish-hook to his daughter, and she hurried home with it. Now Ai-ai, -since he had grown up, had known his father and had heard how the King had taken away -the hook Ka-hu-oi from him. So when he saw the pearl fish-hook in his wife’s hands -he was overjoyed; he took it from her, and he got a canoe in the King’s shed, and -he went out to fish in the sea. -</p> -<p>A bird came down and watched the shining fish-hook that he held. It rested on the -rail of the canoe as he paddled out to sea. It watched him lower the hook. Its eyes -were half closed, but now it opened them wide and looked down after the shining hook. -This was the bird Ka-manu-wai that had given the <span class="pageNum" id="pb134">[<a href="#pb134">134</a>]</span>hook to his father, Ai-ai knew; now the bird was going to eat plenty of the fine aku. -</p> -<p>But no aku came on the hook, and no aku dashed up on the canoe on seeing the shining -thing in the water. The bird closed its eyes again. It gave a croak and then flew -away. -</p> -<p>Ai-ai came back to his wife without any aku for her. Again she was sick, and she begged -Ai-ai again to get her the aku fish. “It may be,” he said, “that the King has another -pearl hook. Go to him once more and ask him for one. Tell him that in the calabash -in which he keeps the fishing utensils that he used long ago there may be another -pearl fish-hook.” -</p> -<p>So again she went before the King. “I have come for a pearl fish-hook so that my husband -may go out and catch me the aku fish that I long for.” “I gave the pearl fish-hook -that I had.” “In the calabash in which you keep the fishing utensils that you used -long ago there may be another pearl fish-hook.” -</p> -<p>The King ordered that this calabash be brought to him. He searched amongst all the -utensils that were in it, and at last he found the pearl fish-hook that he had taken. -He had left it there and had forgotten it, for he had gone fishing only once after -he had taken it from Ku-ula. -</p> -<p>And now he gave the hook Ka-hu-oi to his daughter. She hurried home, and she put the -pearl hook into the hands of her husband Ai-ai. He went <span class="pageNum" id="pb135">[<a href="#pb135">135</a>]</span>straight down to the beach and took out the canoe and went fishing in the place where -his father used to go. As he went the bird Ka-manu-wai flew down and lighted on the -rail of the canoe. It opened wide its eyes to watch him let down the shining hook. -</p> -<p>When he came to Mamala the aku began to jump to the hook. They threw themselves up -and into the canoe. They filled it up—even that ten-fathom canoe was deep with them, -and Ai-ai was hardly strong enough to paddle it back. The bird Ka-manu-wai ate of -the fish, and as it ate the gleam came back into its plumage, and it was a wide-eyed, -strong-winged bird once more. -</p> -<p>It took the pearl fish-hook and flew away with it. But every day it would come back -with the hook when Ai-ai took out his canoe. The bird guarded the hook and would never -let it go into a stranger’s hands again. Sometimes it would bring Ka-hu-oi to Ku-ula, -Ai-ai’s father; for the old man took to going out in his canoe again, and he would -fish for aku outside of Mamala. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb137">[<a href="#pb137">137</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch10" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e324">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>The Story of Kana, the Youth Who Could Stretch Himself Upwards.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Kana and Ni-he-u were brothers. Ni-he-u was such a great warrior that he would fight -against a whole army without thinking about the odds, and he was able to carry such -a war-club that, by resting one end of it in his canoe and putting the other end against -a cliff, he could walk from the canoe on to the land. Certainly an extraordinary man -was Ni-he-u. -</p> -<p>But if Ni-he-u was extraordinary, Kana was many times more extraordinary. And what -an extraordinary life Kana had! When he was born he was in the form of a piece of -rope—just a piece of rope! But his grandmother (Uli was her name) took him to her -house and reared him. As he began to grow she had to have a special house built for -him; it had to be a very long house, a house that had to be lengthened out as Kana -kept growing. At last the house that Kana lived in stretched from the mountains to -the edge of the sea. -</p> -<p>The name of the mother of Ni-he-u and Kana was Hina. She was carried away from her -husband, the boys’ father. And the way Hina was carried away was very remarkable. -</p> -<p>There was a Chief named Pe-pe’e who wanted to take Hina. He owned a hill that was -called Hau-pu. <span class="pageNum" id="pb138">[<a href="#pb138">138</a>]</span>He lived on that hill; it was very strange, but he was able to make that hill move -about and do things for him. I have heard that the hill was really a turtle, and that -its real name was Ka-honu-nunui ma-eleka. And if that was so, it is easy to see how -Pe-pe’e could get it to move about and do things for him. -</p> -<p>One of the things that it did for him was to carry off Hina, the mother of Ni-he-u -and Kana. The hill came across the sea from Mo-lo-kai to Hilo, carrying Pe-pe’e and -his people upon it. Hina saw the hill when it came over to Hilo. It looked so fresh -and so green that she thought it would be nice to walk upon it. So she went over and -she climbed up Hau-pu. And then, all at once, the hill moved from Hilo and went over -to the Island of Mo-lo-kai. -</p> -<p>When Ni-he-u heard that his mother had been carried off he went to his father and -said: “Neither I nor you can get to her and bring her back. Only Kana, my brother, -can do that. You must go to him yourself, my father, and ask him to do it. Don’t be -afraid of him and run away if he should turn and look at you. Just keep your eyes -away from him, and then you won’t be frightened.” After Ni-he-u had told him this, -the Chief, his father, went off to find Kana. -</p> -<p>When he came to where his son was living, Kana looked at him, and the sight of Kana -was so terrible that his father turned around and would have run <span class="pageNum" id="pb139">[<a href="#pb139">139</a>]</span>away. But Kana called to him and said, “What have you come for?” “I have come to tell -you that the mother of you two has been carried off by Pe-pe’e, the Chief of the Hill -of Hau-pu, and she is now in Mo-lo-kai, and unless you, Kana, go to bring her back, -no one can bring her back.” -</p> -<p>When Kana heard this, he said, “Go and call all your people together and order them -to hew out a canoe by which we can get to Mo-lo-kai.” The Chief then went back, and -he sent out an order to his people: they should gather together and hew out a great -double canoe that would be ten fathoms in length. His people did as they were ordered. -Then they thought that all was ready for the voyage to Mo-lo-kai. -</p> -<p>But when the double canoe was brought down to where Kana was, he just stretched out -his hand and laid it upon it, and the canoe sank out of sight. Other canoes of the -same length were hewn out. But Kana did the same thing to them; he laid his hand on -one after another of them, and one after another they all sank down into the sea. -His father and the men of the Island were left without a canoe in which to make the -voyage to Mo-lo-kai. -</p> -<p>When the Chief told this to his son Ni-he-u, Ni-he-u said, “Then the only thing to -do is to go to Uli, my grandmother and Kana’s grandmother, and ask her what we are -to do about it.” The Chief went to her. And when he came before Uli, she said, <span class="pageNum" id="pb140">[<a href="#pb140">140</a>]</span>“What have you come for?” “I have come for a canoe for Kana, in which he will be able -to make the voyage to Mo-lo-kai and fight Pe-pe’e, who lives on the hill Hau-pu, and -bring back Hina, my wife, to me.” -</p> -<p>And when he had told her that, Uli said: “There is only one canoe that Kana can travel -in; it is in Pali-uli, and it is buried there. Go, get all your people together and -send them off to get that canoe.” And Uli chanted: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“Go, get it, -</p> -<p class="line">Go, get it, -</p> -<p class="line">Go, get the canoe: -</p> -<p class="line">The canoe that is covered with the cloak of the old woman; -</p> -<p class="line">The canoe that jumps playfully in the calm; -</p> -<p class="line">The canoe that rises and eats the cords that bind it: -</p> -<p class="line">Go, get it, -</p> -<p class="line">Go, get it, -</p> -<p class="line">Go, get the canoe.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">She told the Chief where to dig and how to dig for the canoe that would bring Kana -to Mo-lo-kai. -</p> -<p>So he took his men to Pali-uli, and there they all began to dig. The men all thought -that their labor would be in vain, for they never expected that they would come by -a canoe by digging for it. They worked in the rain and under the thunder and lightning. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb141">[<a href="#pb141">141</a>]</span>And when they had dug for the whole length of a day they came, first on the sticks -at the bow and stern of the canoe, and then the body of it. It was a great double -canoe. With much labor it was dragged down to the sea. -</p> -<p>Then Ni-he-u and Kana made ready to go aboard it with their father and his people -and sail over to the Island of Mo-lo-kai. And that night Pe-pe’e’s wizard—Moi was -his name—had a dream; he went to Pe-pe’e about it. He told the Chief what he had dreamt, -and it was this: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“A long man, a short man, -</p> -<p class="line">A stunted youth, a god-man. -</p> -<p class="line">The eyes touched the heaven, -</p> -<p class="line">The earth was o’ershadowed: -</p> -<p class="line">Such was my dream.”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">And when Pe-pe’e asked him what the dream meant, he said: “It means that the borders -of Hau-pu will be broken and that the hill will fall to pieces in the sea. Therefore, -depart from this place now while your death is still at a distance.” -</p> -<p>Pe-pe’e was very angry when his wizard told him this. “You are the one that death -is close to, you deceiving wizard. And if my hill is not conquered in the coming fight, -look out, for I shall kill you.” -</p> -<p>Then Pe-pe’e made preparations against the people who were coming against him. He -sent the plover, Ko-lea, and the wandering tattler, Uli-li, <span class="pageNum" id="pb142">[<a href="#pb142">142</a>]</span>to fly around and look out for Kana and Ni-he-u. And he told them to go also to his -warrior, the one who had charge of. the ocean, Ke-au-lei-na-kahi the Sword-fish, and -command him to pierce the canoe that was coming and slay Ni-he-u and Kana. -</p> -<p>So Ko-lea the Plover, and Uli-li the Tattler, flew around until they came to the place -where Kana was lying. Said Ko-lea to Uli-li, “Let us fly so high that we shall be -out of reach of his long arms, and then let us call out to him and tell him that he -is going to be killed.” So the plover and the wandering tattler, flying high, called -out to Kana. He lifted his hands to catch the birds; if he had not been lying down -he would have caught them, so high did his hands stretch up. The birds went higher. -But the wind that was made with the sweep of his arms sent them far over the sea. -There they hovered above Ke-au-lei-na-kahi the Swordfish. “You are commanded to pierce -the double canoe that is coming over the ocean, and to kill Ni-he-u and Kana,” they -said. -</p> -<p>Kana and Ni-he-u boarded the canoe. Kana folded himself into many folds, but for all -his folding he took up the full length of the canoe. When they were halfway across -they were met by Ke-au-lei-na-kahi the Sword-fish. He smote the canoe with the sword -that was in his snout. He thought he could pierce it and then slay Ni-he-u and Kana. -But Ni-he-u stood up, and with his great war-club he struck at the Sword-fish. He -killed Ke-au-lei-na-kahi there <span class="pageNum" id="pb143">[<a href="#pb143">143</a>]</span>and then, and after that there was no one to guard the seas before them. -</p> -<p>So they came before where the hill Hau-pu was standing. Hau-pu rolled a great rock -towards the canoe. Kana was lying on the platform of the canoe, and the people shouted -that the rock was coming. “We shall be killed, we shall all be killed,” they shouted. -Then Kana stretched himself out. He put out his hand, and he stopped the rock. He -held the rock with his right hand, and with his left hand he picked up a small stone -from the beach and placed it under the rock; that stopped it from rolling any farther. -It was stopped halfway down a steep cliff, and there that rock is to be seen to this -day. -</p> -<p>The canoe was saved and the people were saved from destruction. Then Ni-he-u started -off. He wanted to go by himself to the top of Hau-pu and rescue his mother all alone. -He did not know what I have already told you, that the hill was really a turtle; it -was, and it had flippers on its sides; when it closed these flippers the hill would -rise up; it could keep on rising until it touched the sky. -</p> -<p>Around the house that was on the top of the hill there was a fence of thick and wide -leaves—they were thick enough and wide enough to keep the wind from the Chief’s house. -When Ni-he-u came up to this fence he began to beat the leaves down with his great -war-club. Then the wind that was around the hill-top blew upon the house that was -<span class="pageNum" id="pb144">[<a href="#pb144">144</a>]</span>called Ha-le-hu-ki. “What has caused the wind to blow on my house?” said Pe-pe’e. -“There is a boy outside with a club, and he has beaten down your fence,” said his -watchmen. “It is Ni-he-u, my brave son. He is without fear,” said Hina. -</p> -<p>Then Ni-he-u came in. He took hold of Hina and started to carry her off and down the -hill. And as they were going Hina said, very foolishly: “What great strength you have, -my brave son! And who would have known that all that strength is in the strands of -your hair?” Ko-lea and Uli-li heard what she said. They flew after them; they flew -down, and they held Ni-he-u by the hair. -</p> -<p>Then Ni-he-u had to put Hina down while he took up his club and fought with the birds. -They were drawing his strength away as they pulled out of his head the strands of -his hair. He struck at Ko-lea and Uli-li. But while he was striking at them, Hina, -frightened, ran back to the Chief’s house. -</p> -<p>When Ni-he-u came down to the canoe he was questioned by Kana. “Where is our mother?” -“I had taken her; we were on our way when I was attacked by two birds. I had to lay -her down; then she was frightened, and she ran back, and I could not go back to fetch -her again, or all my strength would have been drawn from me by the birds.” “Now you -stay and watch in the canoe while I go to rescue our mother,” said Kana. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb145">[<a href="#pb145">145</a>]</span></p> -<p>With that he stood up in the canoe and peeped over the hill Hau-pu. Then Kana rose -above the hill. He stretched himself until he was up in the blue of the sky. The hill -rose up too. Kana had to stretch himself and stretch himself. And as he stretched -himself he became thinner and thinner. When he stood up in the blue of the sky his -body was as thin as the thread of a spider’s web. -</p> -<p>Now all that Ni-he-u could see of his brother was his legs, and he saw them grow thinner -and thinner as the days passed and Kana had no food. Ni-he-u knew that Kana was starving. -He shouted up to him, “Lie over towards Kona, towards the house of Uli, our grandmother, -and she will give you something to eat.” -</p> -<p>It took three days for the words that Ni-he-u shouted to reach Kana. At last he heard -the words, and he stooped over the sea and over the mountain He-le-a-ka-la. (It was -then that he made the groove in the mountain that is there to this day.) And so he -reached to Kona, and he put his head down at his grandmother’s door. -</p> -<p>There he stayed until Uli rose up in the morning. She went outside, and there she -saw Kana, her grandson. She began to feed him. She fed him, and she fed him, and she -fed him. He got fat in his body, and then the fatness of his body began to reach down -into his legs. Ni-he-u saw the fatness coming <span class="pageNum" id="pb146">[<a href="#pb146">146</a>]</span>on the legs that were in the canoe where he watched and waited. -</p> -<p>Ni-he-u watched the legs getting fatter and fatter. But still he had to wait, for -his brother was doing nothing. Then he became angry, and he made a cut in one of Kana’s -legs. -</p> -<p>It was three days before the numbness of this cut reached up to Kana’s head. At last -it came to him, and then he spoke to his grandmother about it. “It is because your -brother Ni-he-u is angry with you because you have not remembered him or your mother, -but stay here all the time feeding yourself, and he has made a cut in your leg.” Then -his grandmother said, “The hill keeps towering up, but if you rise up above it, and -then stoop over and break off the flipper on the right side (for the hill is really -a turtle, as I have told you), and then stoop over and break off the flipper on the -left side, it will not be able to rise up any more, and you will then be able to conquer -it.” -</p> -<p>When he heard that said, Kana arose once more. He extended himself up. He towered -over Hau-pu. Then he stooped over, and he reached down, and he broke off the flipper -that was on the right side. Again he stooped over, and he broke off the flipper that -was on the left side. And when these two flippers were broken off the power went out -of Hau-pu. It rose no more. Then Kana stepped on the hill, and it broke to pieces. -The pieces fell into the sea. They <span class="pageNum" id="pb147">[<a href="#pb147">147</a>]</span>were left there in the forms of rocks and little hills. There they are to this day, -and that is all that is left of the hill that carried off Hina. -</p> -<p>The Chief Pe-pe’e was conquered, for he had no power after his hill was destroyed. -Kana and Ni-he-u took back their mother in the canoe, and she lived ever afterwards -with her own husband in her own house. But Kana did not live there. He went to stretch -himself in the long house that went from the mountains to the edge of the sea. And -this ends the story of Kana’s victory over the hill Hau-pu. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb149">[<a href="#pb149">149</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch11" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e330">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>The Me-ne-hu-ne.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Ka-u-ki-u-ki—that was the name of the Me-ne-hu-ne who boasted to the rest of his folk -that he could catch the Moon by holding on to her legs; Ka-u-ki-u-ki, the Angry One. -</p> -<p>The Me-ne-hu-ne folk worked only at night; and if one could catch and hold on to the -legs of the Moon, the night would not go so quickly, and more work could be done by -them. They were all very great workers. But when the Angry One made his boast about -catching the legs of the Moon, the rest of the Me-ne-hu-ne made mock of him. That -made Ka-u-ki-u-ki more angry still. Straightway he went up to the top of the highest -hill. He sat down to rest himself after his climb; then, they say, the Owl of Ka-ne -came and sat on the stones and stared at him. Ka-u-ki-u-ki might well have been frightened, -for the big, round-eyed bird could easily have flown away with him, or flown away -with any of the Me-ne-hu-ne folk. For they were all little men, and none of them was -higher than the legs of one of us—no, not even their Kings and Chiefs. Little men, -broad-shouldered and sturdy and very active—such were the Me-ne-hu-ne in the old days, -and such are the Me-ne-hu-ne to-day. -</p> -<p></p> -<div class="figure plate03width" id="plate03"><img src="images/plate03.jpg" alt="“The owl of Ka-ne came and sat on the stones and stared at him.”" width="475" height="720"><p class="figureHead">“<i>The owl of Ka-ne came and sat on the stones and stared at him.</i>”</p> -</div><p> -</p> -<p>But Ka-u-ki-u-ki was brave: the Me-ne-hu-ne stared back at the Owl, and the Owl of -Ka-ne stared <span class="pageNum" id="pb150">[<a href="#pb150">150</a>]</span>back at the little man, and at last the bird flew away. Then it was too late for him -to try to lay hold on the legs of the Moon that night. -</p> -<p>That was a long time ago, when the Me-ne-hu-ne were very many in our land. They lived -then in the Valley of Lani-hula. There they planted taro in plants that still grow -there—plants that they brought back with them from Kahiki-mo-e after they had been -there. It was they who planted the bread-fruit tree first in that valley. -</p> -<p>Our fathers say that when the men-folk of the Me-ne-hu-ne stood together in those -days they could form two rows reaching all the way from Maka-weli to Wai-lua. And -with their women and children there were so many of them that the only fish of which -each of the Me-ne-hu-ne could have one was the shrimp, the littlest and the most plentiful -fish in our waters. -</p> -<p>For the rest of their food they had <i lang="haw">hau-pia</i>, a pudding made of arrow-root sweetened with the milk of coco-nut; they had squash -and they had sweet potato pudding. They ate fern fronds and the cooked young leaves -of the taro. They had carved wooden dishes for their food. For their games they had -spinning-tops which they made out of ku-kui nuts, and they played at casting the arrow, -a game which they called <i lang="haw">Kea-pua</i>. They had boxing and wrestling, too, and they had tug-of-war: when one team was about -to be beaten all the others jumped <span class="pageNum" id="pb151">[<a href="#pb151">151</a>]</span>in and helped them. They had sled races; they would race their sleds down the steep -sides of hills; if the course were not slippery already, they would cover it with -rushes so that the sleds could go more easily and more swiftly. -</p> -<p>But their great sport was to jump off the cliffs into the sea. They would throw a -stone off the cliff and dive after it and touch the bottom as it touched the bottom. -Once, when some of them were bathing, a shark nearly caught one of the Me-ne-hu-ne. -A-a-ka was his name. Then they all swam ashore, and they made plans for punishing -the shark that had treated them so. Their wise men told them what to do. They were -to gather the morning-glory vine and make a great basket with it. Then they were to -fill the basket with bait and lower it into the sea. Always the Me-ne-hu-ne worked -together; they worked together very heartily when they went to punish the shark. -</p> -<p>They made the basket; they filled it with bait, and they lowered it into the sea. -The shark got into the basket, and the Me-ne-hu-ne caught him. They pulled him within -the reef, and they left him there in the shallow water until the birds came and ate -him up. -</p> -<p>One of them caught a large fish there. The fish tried to escape, but the little man -held bravely to him. The fish bit him and lashed him with its tail and drew blood -from the Me-ne-hu-ne. The place <span class="pageNum" id="pb152">[<a href="#pb152">152</a>]</span>where his blood poured out is called Ka-a-le-le to this day—for that was the name -of the Me-ne-hu-ne who struggled with the fish. -</p> -<p>Once they hollowed out a great stone and they gave it to their head fisherman for -a house. He would sit in his hollow stone all day and fish for his people. -</p> -<p>No cliff was too steep for them to climb; indeed, it was they who planted the wild -taro on the cliffs; they planted it in the swamps too, and on cliff and in swamp it -grows wild to this day. When they were on the march they would go in divisions. The -work of the first division would be to clear the road of logs. The work of the second -division would be to lower the hills. The work of the third division would be to sweep -the path. Another division had to carry the sleds and the sleeping mats for the King. -One division had charge of the food, and another division had charge of the planting -of the crop. One division was composed of wizards and soothsayers and astrologers, -and another division was made up of story-tellers, fun-makers, and musicians who made -entertainment for the King. Some played on the nose-flute, and others blew trumpets -that were made by ripping a ti-leaf away from the middle ridge and rolling over the -torn piece. Through this they blew, varying the sound by fingering. They played stringed -instruments that they held in their mouths, and they twanged the strings with their -fingers. <span class="pageNum" id="pb153">[<a href="#pb153">153</a>]</span>Others beat on drums that were hollow logs with shark-skin drawn across them. -</p> -<p>It would have been wonderful to look on the Me-ne-hu-ne when they were on the march. -That would be on the nights of the full moon. Then they would all come together, and -their King would speak to them. -</p> -<p>And that reminds me of Ka-u-ki-u-ki, the Angry One. Perhaps he wanted to hold the -legs of the Moon so that they might be able to listen a long time to their King, or -march far in a night. I told you that he kept staring at the Owl of Ka-ne until the -bird flew away in the night. But then it was too late to catch hold of the legs of -the Moon. The next night he tried to do it. But although he stood on the top of the -highest hill, and although he reached up to his fullest height, he could not lay hold -on the legs of the Moon. And because he boasted of doing a thing that he could not -do, the rest of the Me-ne-hu-ne punished him; they turned him into a stone. And a -stone the Angry One is to this day—a stone on the top of the hill from which he tried -to reach up and lay hold upon the legs of the Moon. -</p> -<p>Perhaps it was on the very night which Ka-u-ki-u-ki tried to lengthen that their King -told the Me-ne-hu-ne that they were to leave these Islands. Some of the Me-ne-hu-ne -had married Hawaiian women, and children that were half Me-ne-hu-ne and half Hawaiian -were born. The King of the Me-ne-hu-ne <span class="pageNum" id="pb154">[<a href="#pb154">154</a>]</span>folk did not like this: he wanted his people to remain pure Me-ne-hu-ne. So on a bright -moonlit night he had them all come together, men, women, and children, and he spoke -to them. “All of you,” he said, “who have married wives from amongst the Hawaiian -people must leave them, and all of the Me-ne-hu-ne race must go away from these Islands. -The food that we planted in the valley is ripe; that food we will leave for the wives -and children that we do not take with us—the Hawaiian women and the half-Hawaiian -children.” -</p> -<p>When their King said this, no word was spoken for a long time from the ranks of the -Me-ne-hu-ne. Then one whose name was Mo-hi-ki-a spoke up and said: “Must all of us -go, O King, and may none of us stay with the Hawaiian wives that we have married? -I have married an Hawaiian woman, and I have a son who is now grown to manhood. May -he not go with you while I remain with my wife? He is stronger than I am. I have taught -him all the skill that I possessed in the making of canoes. He can use the adze and -make a canoe out of a tree trunk more quickly than any other of the Me-ne-hu-ne. And -none of the Me-ne-hu-ne is so swift in the race as he is. Take my son in my place, -and if it ever happens that the Me-ne-hu-ne need me, my son can run quickly for me -and bring me back.” -</p> -<p>The King would not have Mo-hi-ki-a stay behind. “We start on our journey to-morrow -night,” <span class="pageNum" id="pb155">[<a href="#pb155">155</a>]</span>he said. “All the Me-ne-hu-ne will leave the Islands, and the crop that is now grown -will be left for the women and children.” -</p> -<p>And so the Me-ne-hu-ne in their great force left our Islands, and where they went -there is none of us who know. Perhaps they went back to Kahiki-mo-e, for in Kahiki-mo-e -they had been for a time before they came back to Hawaii. But not all of the Me-ne-hu-ne -left the Islands. Some stole away from their divisions and hid in hollow logs, and -their descendants we have with us to this day. There are still many Me-ne-hu-ne away -up in the mountains, living in caves and in hollow logs. -</p> -<p>But the great force of them left the Islands then. Before they went they made a monument. -Upon the top of the highest hill they built it, carrying up the stones the night after -the King had commanded them to leave. The monument was for the King and the Chiefs -of the Me-ne-hu-ne—the monument of stones that we see. And for the Me-ne-hu-ne of -common birth they made another monument. This they did by hollowing out a great cave -in the mountain. The monument of stones on the top of the mountain and the cave in -the side of the mountain you can see to this day. -</p> -<p>On the next moonlit night the Me-ne-hu-ne in their thousands looked and saw the monuments -they had raised. They were ready for the march as they looked, men and women, half-grown -men and half-grown <span class="pageNum" id="pb156">[<a href="#pb156">156</a>]</span>women, and little children. They looked and they saw the monument that they had raised -on the mountain. Thereupon all the little men raised such a shout that the fish in -the pond of No-mi-lu, at the other side of the Island, jumped in fright, and the moi, -the wary fish, left the beaches. And then, with trumpets sounding, flutes playing, -and drums beating, the Me-ne-hu-ne started off. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>O my younger brothers, I wish there were some amongst us, the Hawaiians of to-day, -who knew the Me-ne-hu-ne of the mountains and who could go to them. All the work that -it takes us so long to do, they could do in a night. Here we go every day to cut sandalwood -for our King. We go away from our homes and our villages, leaving our crops unplanted -and untended. We are up in the mountains by the first light of the morning, working, -working with our axes to cut the sandalwood. And we go back at the fall of night carrying -the loads of sandalwood upon our shoulders the whole way down the mountain-side. Ah, -if there were any amongst us who knew the Me-ne-hu-ne or who knew how to come to them! -In one night the Me-ne-hu-ne would cut all the sandalwood for us! And the night after -they would carry it down on their shoulders to the beach, where it would be put on -the ships that would take it away to the land of the Pa-ke. But only those <span class="pageNum" id="pb157">[<a href="#pb157">157</a>]</span>who are descendants of the Me-ne-hu-ne can come to them. -</p> -<p>A long time ago a King ruled in Kau-ai whose name was Ola. His people were poor, for -the river ran into the stony places and left their fields without water. “How can -I bring water to my people?” said Ola the King to Pi, his wizard. “I will tell you -how you can do it,” Pi said. And then he told the King what to do so as to get the -help of the Me-ne-hu-ne. -</p> -<p>Pi, the wise man, went into the mountains. He was known to the Me-ne-hu-ne who had -remained in the land, and he went before their Chief, and he asked him to have his -people make a water-course for Ola’s people: they would have to dam the river with -great stones and then make a trench that would carry the water down to the people’s -fields—a trench that would have stones fitted into its bed and fitted into its sides. -</p> -<p>All the work that takes us days to do can be done by the Me-ne-hu-ne in the space -of a night. And what they do not finish in a night is left unfinished. “<i lang="haw">Ho po hookahi, a ao ua pau</i>,” “In one night and it is finished,” say the Me-ne-hu-ne. -</p> -<p>Well, in one night all the stones for the dam and the water-course were made ready: -one division went and gathered them, and another cut and shaped them. The stones were -all left together, and the Me-ne-hu-ne called them “the Pack of Pi.” -<span class="pageNum" id="pb158">[<a href="#pb158">158</a>]</span></p> -<p>Now King Ola had been told what he was to have done on the night that followed. There -was to be no sound and there was to be no stir amongst his people. The dogs were to -be muzzled so that they could not bark, and the cocks and the hens were to be put -into calabashes so that there should be no crowing from them. Also a feast was to -be ready for the Me-ne-hu-ne. -</p> -<p>Down from the mountain in the night came the troops of the Me-ne-hu-ne, each carrying -a stone in his hand. Their trampling and the hum of their voices were heard by Pi -as he stayed by the river; they were heard while they were still a long way off. They -came down, and they made a trench with their digging tools of wood. Then they began -to lay the stones at the bottom and along the sides of the trench; each stone fitted -perfectly into its place. While one division was doing this the other division was -building the dam across the river. The dam was built, the water was turned into the -course, and Pi, standing there in the moonlight, saw the water come over the stones -that the Me-ne-hu-ne had laid down. -</p> -<p>Pi, and no one else, saw the Me-ne-hu-ne that night: half the size of our men they -were, but broad across the chest and very strong. Pi admired the way they all worked -together; they never got into each other’s way, and they never waited for some one -else to do something or to help them out. They finished their work just at daybreak; -and then Pi <span class="pageNum" id="pb159">[<a href="#pb159">159</a>]</span>gave them their feast. He gave a shrimp to each; they were well satisfied, and while -it was still dark they departed. They crossed the water-course that was now bringing -water down to the people’s taro patches. -</p> -<p>And as they went the hum of their voices was so loud that it was heard in the distant -island of Oahu. “<i lang="haw">Wawa ka Menehune i Puukapele, ma Kauai, puoho ka manu o ka loko o Kawainui ma Koolaupoko, -Oahu</i>,” our people said afterwards. “The hum of the voices of the Me-ne-hu-ne at Pu-u-ka-pe-le, -Kau-ai, startled the birds of the pond of Ka-wai-nui, at Ko’o-lau-po-ko, Oahu.” -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>Look now! The others from our village are going down the mountain-side, with the loads -of sandalwood upon their backs. It is time we put our loads upon our shoulders and -went likewise. As we go I will tell you the only other story I know about the Me-ne-hu-ne. -</p> -<p>There was once a boy of your age, O my younger brother, and his name was Laka. As -he grew up he was petted very much by his father and his mother. And while he was -still a young boy his father took a canoe and went across the sea to get a toy for -him. Never afterwards did Laka see his father. -</p> -<p>He grew up, and he would often ask about his father. His mother could tell him nothing -except that his father had gone across the sea in a canoe <span class="pageNum" id="pb160">[<a href="#pb160">160</a>]</span>and that it was told afterwards that he had been killed in a cave by a bad man. The -more he grew up the more he asked about his father. He told his mother he would go -across the sea in search of him. But the boy could not go until he had a canoe. “How -am I to get a canoe?” he said to his mother one day. -</p> -<p>“You must go to your grandmother,” said she, “and she will tell you what to do to -get a canoe.” -</p> -<p>So to his grandmother Laka went. He lived in her house for a while, and then he asked -her how he might get a canoe. -</p> -<p>“Go to the mountains and look for a tree that has leaves shaped like the new moon,” -said his grandmother. “Take your axe with you. When you find such a tree, cut it down, -for it is the tree to make a canoe out of.” -</p> -<p>So Laka went to the mountains. He brought his axe with him. All day he searched in -the woods, and at last he found a tree that had leaves shaped like the new moon. He -commenced to cut through its trunk with his little axe of stone. At nightfall the -trunk was cut through, and the tree fell down on the ground. -</p> -<p>Then, well content with his day’s work, Laka went back to his grandmother’s. The next -day he would cut off the branches and drag the trunk down to the beach and begin to -make his canoe. He went back to the mountains. He searched and searched <span class="pageNum" id="pb161">[<a href="#pb161">161</a>]</span>through all the woods, but he could find no trace of the tree that he had cut down -with so much labor. -</p> -<p>He went to the mountains again the day after. He found another tree growing with leaves -shaped like the new moon. With his little stone axe he cut through the trunk, and -the tree fell down. Then he went back to his grandmother’s, thinking that he would -go the next day and cut off the branches and bring the trunk down to the beach. -</p> -<p>But the next day when he went to the mountains there was no trace of the tree that -he had cut down with so much labor. He searched for it all day, but could not find -it. The next day he had to begin his labor all over again: he had to search for a -tree that had leaves like the new moon, he had to cut through the trunk and let it -lie on the ground. After he had cut down the third tree he spoke to his grandmother -about the trees that he had cut and had lost sight of. His wise grandmother told him -that, if the third tree disappeared, he was to dig a trench beside where the next -tree would fall. And when that tree came down he was to hide in the trench beside -it and watch what would happen. -</p> -<p>When Laka went up to the mountain the next day he found that the tree he had cut was -lost to his sight like the others. He found another tree with leaves shaped like the -new moon. He began to cut this one down. Near where it would fall he dug a trench. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb162">[<a href="#pb162">162</a>]</span></p> -<p>It was very late in the evening when he cut through this tree. The trunk fell, and -it covered the trench he had made. Then Laka went under and hid himself. He waited -while the night came on. -</p> -<p>Then, while he was waiting, he heard the hum of voices, and he knew that a band of -people were drawing near. They were singing as they came on. Laka heard what they -sang. -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">“O the four thousand gods, -</p> -<p class="line">O the forty thousand gods, -</p> -<p class="line">O the four hundred thousand gods, -</p> -<p class="line">O the file of gods, -</p> -<p class="line">O the assembly of gods! -</p> -<p class="line">O gods of these woods, -</p> -<p class="line">Of the mountain, the knoll, -</p> -<p class="line">Of the dam of the water-course, O descend!”</p> -</div> -<p class="first">Then there was more noise, and Laka, looking up from the trench, saw that the clearing -around him was all filled with a crowd of little men. They came where the tree lay, -and they tried to move it. Then Laka jumped out of the trench, and he laid hands upon -one of the little people. He threatened to kill him for having moved away the trees -he had cut. -</p> -<p>As he jumped up all the little people disappeared. Laka was left with the one he held. -</p> -<p>“Do not kill me,” said the little man. “I am of the Me-ne-hu-ne, and we intend no -harm to you. I <span class="pageNum" id="pb163">[<a href="#pb163">163</a>]</span>will say this to you: if you kill me, there will be no one to make the canoe for you, -no one to drag it down to the beach, making it ready for you to sail in. If you do -not kill me, my friends will make the canoe for you. And if you build a shed for it, -we will bring the canoe finished to you and place it in the shed.” -</p> -<p>Then Laka said he would gladly spare the little man if he and his friends would make -the canoe for him and bring it down to the shed that he would make. He let the little -man go then. The next day he built a shed for the canoe. -</p> -<p>When he told his grandmother about the crowd of little men he had seen and about the -little man he had caught, she told him that they were the Me-ne-hu-ne, who lived in -hollow logs and in caves in the mountains. No one knew how many of them there were. -</p> -<p>He went back, and he found that where the trunk of the tree had lain there was now -a canoe perfectly finished; all was there that should be there, even to the light, -well-shaped paddle, and all had been finished in the night. He went back, and that -night he waited beside the shed which he had built out on the beach. At the dead of -the night he heard the hum of voices. That was when the canoe was being lifted up. -Then he heard a second hum of voices. That was when the canoe was being carried on -the hands of the Me-ne-hu-ne—for they did not drag the canoe, <span class="pageNum" id="pb164">[<a href="#pb164">164</a>]</span>they carried it. He heard a trampling of feet. Then he heard a third hum of voices; -that was when the canoe was being left down in the shed he had built. -</p> -<p>Laka’s grandmother, knowing who they were, had left a feast for the Me-ne-hu-ne—a -shrimp for each, and some cooked taro leaves. They ate, and before it was daylight -they returned to the mountain where their caves were. The boy Laka saw the Me-ne-hu-ne -as they went up the side of the mountain—hundreds of little men tramping away in the -waning darkness. -</p> -<p>His canoe was ready, paddle and all. He took it down to the sea, and he went across -in search of his father. When he landed on the other side he found a wise man who -was able to tell him about his father, and that he was dead indeed, having been killed -by a very wicked man on his landing. The boy never went back to his grandmother’s. -He stayed, and with the canoe that the Me-ne-hu-ne had made for him he became a famous -fisherman. From him have come my fathers and your fathers, too, O my younger brothers. -</p> -<p>And you who are the youngest and littlest of all—gather you the ku-kui nuts as we -go down; to-night we will make strings of them and burn them, lighting the house. -And if we have many ku-kui nuts and a light that is long-lasting, it may be that I -will tell more stories. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb165">[<a href="#pb165">165</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch12" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e336">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>The Story of Mo-e Mo-e: Also a Story about Po-o and about Kau-hu-hu the Shark-God, -and about Mo-e Mo-e’s Son, the Man Who Was Bold in His Wish.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Light it now. One ku-kui nut and then another will burn along the string as I tell -my stories. It is well that you have brought so many nuts, my younger brother. -</p> -<p>At Ke-kaa lived Ma-ui and Mo-e Mo-e; they were friends, but no two men could be more -different: the great desire of one was to go travelling, doing mighty deeds, and the -great desire of the other was to sleep. While Ma-ui would be travelling, Mo-e Mo-e -would be sleeping. He was called O-pe-le at first, but afterwards he was called Mo-e -Mo-e because no one before or since ever slept so much as he: he could keep asleep -from the first day of the month to the last day of the month; if a thunder-storm happened, -it would wake him up; if no thunder-storm happened, he might go on sleeping for a -whole year. -</p> -<p>Once he went off travelling. He had not gone far when he lay down by the roadway and -slept. While he was sleeping a freshet of water flowed down and covered him with pebbles -and brambles and grasses<span class="pageNum" id="pb166">[<a href="#pb166">166</a>]</span>—covered all of him except his nostrils. Then a ku-kui nut rested in his nostril and -began to grow. It grew tall; it began to tickle his nostril; and then Mo-e Mo-e wakened -up. “Here am I,” he said, “at my favorite pastime, sleeping, and yet I am wakened -up by this cursed ku-kui tree.” He started off then to find his friend Ma-ui. -</p> -<p>He did not find Ma-ui. He found, however, a woman whom he liked, and he married her -and settled down in her part of the country. His wife had much land, and Mo-e Mo-e -went out and worked on it. He needed no more sleep for a while, and he worked night -and day until all the lands that his wife owned were cleared and planted. Then one -day he told her that he would have to return to his own country. “And if something -should happen to prevent my coming back to you,” said he to his wife, “and if a child -should be born to us, name the child, if it should be a girl, for yourself; but if -it should be a boy, name him Ka-le-lea.” His wife said she would remember what he -told her, and Mo-e Mo-e started off on his journey. -</p> -<p>On his way he felt sleepy, and he lay down by the roadside. He fell into one of his -long slumbers. He had been sleeping for ten days, or perhaps for two less than ten -days, when two men came along, and, seeing him lying there, took him up and carried -him on their backs to where their canoe was moored. -</p> -<p>Now these were two men who had been sent out <span class="pageNum" id="pb167">[<a href="#pb167">167</a>]</span>to find a man who might be sacrificed to one of the gods in the temple. They were -highly pleased when they came upon one who could give them such little trouble. They -put Mo-e Mo-e in their canoe and brought him to the Island of Kau-ai. He didn’t waken -all the time they were at sea. They carried him to the temple, and still he did not -waken. Then they made ready to sacrifice him to the god who was there. -</p> -<p>While they were waiting for the hour of the sacrifice, a thunder-storm came. That -made Mo-e Mo-e waken up. He saw where he was: and the pig that was to be sacrificed, -and the bananas, the fish, and the awa, were beside him. He saw the two men who had -taken him, squatting down with a spear between them, and he heard what they were saying. -They, like us here, were telling a story. “And so,” said one, “Ka-ma-lo went on his -way.” Mo-e Mo-e listened, and he heard part of the story. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>Ka-ma-lo, a squealing pig upon his shoulder (said the second man), went hurrying on -his way. -</p> -<p>No man going into danger ever went so quickly as Ka-ma-lo did. And he was going into -great danger, for he was on his way to the cavern where the Shark-God Kau-hu-hu had -his abode. And you know, my comrade, that if a man had ever ventured into that cavern -before, he never came out of it alive. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb168">[<a href="#pb168">168</a>]</span></p> -<p>He came to it. Before the cavern was the great sea. Inside of it were Mo-o and Waka, -the Shark-God’s watchmen. -</p> -<p>When they saw a man hurrying up to the cavern with a squealing pig upon his shoulders, -Waka and Mo-o shouted to him to go back. But Ka-ma-lo came right up to them. “Our -lord is away,” they said, “and it is lucky for you, O man, that he is away. Fly for -your life, for he will soon return.” Ka-ma-lo would not go. He put down on the ground -the pig which he had brought. -</p> -<p>Waka and Mo-o ran here and there, beseeching Ka-ma-lo to go away. The man would not -go. “I have brought this pig as an offering to the Shark-God,” he said, “and I will -speak to him even if afterwards he destroy me.” “It is now too late for you to get -away,” said Waka, “for, lo, our lord returns.” “Hide yourself in the cavern; tie up -your pig, and perhaps when our lord sleeps you will be able to get away,” said Mo-o. -They tied the pig, and they covered it up with seaweed; Ka-ma-lo went into the cavern -and hid behind one of the rocks. -</p> -<p>A great rolling wave came to the cavern; another came, and then another. With the -eighth roller the Shark-God came out of the ocean. Ka-ma-lo looked out and saw him. -And when he looked upon him he trembled and drew himself farther into the depths of -the cavern. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb169">[<a href="#pb169">169</a>]</span></p> -<p>The Shark-God transformed himself. He was now in the shape of a man, but he was taller -and broader than any two men that Ka-ma-lo had ever seen. He came within the cavern, -and Ka-ma-lo saw that he had still one mark of the shark upon him: on his back and -between his great shoulders there were, as if made with tattoo, the lines of a shark’s -opened mouth. -</p> -<p>When he came within, Kau-hu-hu began to sniff. “I smell a man, a man,” he said. Ka-ma-lo -quaked with terror: the Shark-God, with his great height and breadth, seemed fearful -to the man. -</p> -<p>And still he moved about the cavern, and Mo-o and Waka, his watchmen, ran this way -and that way, striving to get him to give up his search. There was a squealing outside. -Kau-hu-hu stopped and ordered his watchmen to bring to him the thing that squealed. -They went outside and came back with Ka-ma-lo’s pig. -</p> -<p>“A pig!” sniffed the Shark-God. “Then there must be a man about. Where is he?” -</p> -<p>Then, in their terror, the two watchmen pointed to where Ka-ma-lo had hidden himself. -The Shark-God put down his two big hands and drew the man up. -</p> -<p>“Man, I will eat you,” said the Shark-God. -</p> -<p>“I have brought this pig as an offering to you,” said Ka-ma-lo. “Do not eat me.” -</p> -<p>Then Kau-hu-hu wondered at a man’s being so <span class="pageNum" id="pb170">[<a href="#pb170">170</a>]</span>bold as to come within his cavern with an offering for him. “Man, why have you come?” -he said. -</p> -<p>Then said Ka-ma-lo: “Kau-hu-hu, you are a shark, but you are also a god. I have come -to ask you to avenge me upon a cruel King and a wicked people. No one else is able -to exact the vengeance that my soul craves, and so I have come where no man ever ventured -before—into your cavern and into your presence.” -</p> -<p>“I am a shark, but I am also a god,” said Kau-hu-hu, “and if that King and that people -deserve the vengeance that you crave, it shall be wrought upon them. But if they do -not deserve that vengeance, I will kill you and devour you for having come into my -cavern.” -</p> -<p>“I will tell you why I crave vengeance on that King and on that people.” And thereupon -Ka-ma-lo told the Shark-God all that he had suffered. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>The King of the land I live in (said Ka-ma-lo) is the owner of a drum, and it is a -drum that he had brought to him from far Kahiki. He would not let any one strike on -this drum but himself. He made a place for the drum, a sacred enclosure that no one -might go into. Now the King of my land, Ku-pa, is a cruel King; indeed, so cruel is -he that his people have become cruel, for the kind and the gentle have fled away, -and those who have remained under his rule have become harder and harder. And at last -it <span class="pageNum" id="pb171">[<a href="#pb171">171</a>]</span>has come about that no one will get angry at even the worst thing that the King will -do. -</p> -<p>I wish that I had fled from the land when others fled. But I had two children, boys, -and there was no place that I might have taken them to. They used to play with the -King’s children. Yesterday I went into the forest to choose a tree that might be made -into a new canoe, for I am the King’s canoe-builder. And while I was away my two boys -went towards the King’s house. They came before the enclosure where the drum was kept. -The King’s children were not there to play with, and my two boys played with each -other for a while. -</p> -<p>Now and then they would stand before where the drum was placed, and look at it. They -did not know that Ku-pa was watching them—watching to see what the children would -do. -</p> -<p>At last the boys went into the sacred enclosure, and their going there broke the law -that the King had made. They sat down there, my two sons, and they struck upon the -drum. They could have struck upon it so that the whole land would hear, or they could -have struck so softly that the noise would be only like the fall of rain upon leaves. -And that was how they struck the drum; the noise that they made was only a little -noise and like the falling of rain upon the leaves in the forest. -</p> -<p>But the King heard even that little sound; he came very softly up to the enclosure. -The boys <span class="pageNum" id="pb172">[<a href="#pb172">172</a>]</span>looked around. They saw him standing there; his eyes were hard as I have seen them, -and his lips were cruel and revengeful. He called for his executioner. The executioner -came; he slew my two boys in the enclosure where the King’s drum is kept. -</p> -<p>All that happened while I was in the forest. When I came back I went into the enclosure -where the King’s canoes are sheltered. I stood there beside the great canoe that was -painted red. I put my hands upon it, for then I greatly rejoiced in this work of my -hands. I put my hands along the outrigger of the canoe. And then I looked down, and -it seemed to me that I saw a hand stretched out from under the canoe. -</p> -<p>I stooped down, and I looked under it. I saw two bodies with their hands outstretched. -I drew them out, and I saw that they were the bodies of my sons. And when I looked -upon them I knew that my sons had been slain by the King’s executioner. -</p> -<p>I went away from the King’s house. I met many men, and I spoke to them, telling them -of the terrible thing that the King had done to me. But each one I spoke to said: -“Yes, such is Ku-pa, our King. He has not dealt with you harder than he has dealt -with others.” And when they said this they looked at me; and I saw that their looks -were hard, even as the King’s. -</p> -<p>I went within my house, and I sat there thinking. To whom could I go for vengeance -on the King? <span class="pageNum" id="pb173">[<a href="#pb173">173</a>]</span>Who would be powerful enough to avenge me upon Ku-pa? And then I thought of you, Kau-hu-hu. -You would be able to avenge me, and no one else would be able. And so I made up my -mind to go to you—even to go into the cavern where no man had ever ventured before, -</p> -<p>I took a pig as an offering, and I went hurrying on my way; no man going into danger -ever went so swiftly before. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>Mo-e Mo-e heard no more of the story then. He stood up. The two who were guarding -him were so startled that they did not lay hands on him. He took up the spear that -was between them, and he went off. -</p> -<p>Back to his wife’s he went, and he left the long spear with its edge of shark’s teeth -in the house. “I will have to make another journey,” he said, “and if again anything -should happen to me that will prevent my coming back, and if a son is born to us, -and if he should want to go in search of me, give him the spear so that I may know -him; and give him the name that I told you.” -</p> -<p>He went to work in the fields again, and he worked day and night, and his wife’s brother -Po-po-lo-au and her servant Po-o were astonished at the work he did. And then, on -the very night that his son was born, Mo-e Mo-e fell asleep. He slept for ten days -and for another ten days. His wife, her <span class="pageNum" id="pb174">[<a href="#pb174">174</a>]</span>brother, and her servant tried to waken him; all they could do could not waken Mo-e -Mo-e, Then his wife shook him; she made noises; she poured water on his eyes, but -still he slept. Then she said, “There is no doubt about it: Mo-e Mo-e is dead.” -</p> -<p>She called her brother and her servant, and she said to them: “The Chief is dead. -Wrap him up and carry him to the beach and cast him into the sea; that is the best -that one can do for a dead man.” Her brother and her servant did as she ordered, and -a wrap was put around Mo-e Mo-e, and then he was carried down to the beach and cast -into the sea. Then Po-po-lo-au went home, and Po-o went home. -</p> -<p>His wife’s name was Ka-le-ko’o-ka-lau-ae, and concerning her and her brother Po-po-lo-au -and her servant Po-o a strange story is told. After they had left what they thought -was the dead body of Mo-e Mo-e in the sea, Po-po-lo-au and Po-o went up the mountains -to get timbers for the roofing of a house. They were far from home, and the night -came on dark and rainy. Po-o wanted to go back to the house, but Po-po-lo-au would -not return through the dark and the rain. Nothing would do him but that they should -spend the night in a cave. -</p> -<p>So they went into a cave that no one had ever gone into before. And at Po-po-lo-au’s -desire they lighted a great fire to keep themselves from the cold. And then, although -there were things in the cave <span class="pageNum" id="pb175">[<a href="#pb175">175</a>]</span>that they should have been fearful about, they both went to sleep. -</p> -<p>In the middle of the night Po-po-lo-au was startled by something that he thought was -happening. He wakened up, and he saw that the fire was burning Po-o. He called him, -but the servant would not waken up. He went to him and tried to rouse him, but still -he would not awaken. The fire, which had been burning the man’s feet, went farther -up his body. Po-po-lo-au lifted him and tried by every way to bring him to wakefulness, -but there was no stir from Po-o. Then, when the fire had burned up to his neck, Po-po-lo-au -let him lie there and ran out of the cave. He ran towards a hill. When he reached -the top of it he heard a voice calling to him, “Wait until I come to you, and we will -go home together.” He looked back, and he saw a head with fire streaming out of it -coming up the hill after him. -</p> -<p>He ran to the valley, and the head rolled down the hill after him. He looked back, -and he saw tongues of fire shooting out of the rolling head, and he became more frightened -than before. He ran on and on. Through many valleys he raced, and always the head -raced behind him. He reached the plain, and then he could hardly go on because of -the terror he was in. -</p> -<p>It happened that at that time a wizard was walking with his friends along that plain. -“Do you see the person who is coming towards us?” he said. “If <span class="pageNum" id="pb176">[<a href="#pb176">176</a>]</span>he is not caught until he comes up to us, he will be saved. But if he is caught before -that, I do not know what will happen to him.” As he said that, Po-po-lo-au came running -up to them; and then the head did not come any nearer. -</p> -<p>Po-po-lo-au told the wizard all that had befallen him. Then he went to his sister, -the wife of Mo-e Mo-e. She asked about her servant, and he told her of how he had -been burned and how his head had chased him. -</p> -<p>Then the wizard came into the house. “I have come to you,” he said, “because I fear -you may be burned. The head that chased this man will come here. It will want to come -within and stay in the house, but do not ask it to come in, or you will come into -its power. It will ask you to go outside to it, but do not go out. It will ask you -to send your child out to it, but do not send him out.” -</p> -<p>And then he said: “When you hear a whistle outside, it will mean that the head is -near. Then move into a corner of the house and keep very still. When the outside is -all lighted up you will know that it has come, and when the inside is lighted up you -will know that it has entered the house.” -</p> -<p>The woman stayed within the house, and about the middle of the night she heard a whistle -outside; then all outside was lighted up, and the voice of Po-o called to her asking -her to come without. “I <span class="pageNum" id="pb177">[<a href="#pb177">177</a>]</span>will not go outside, for it is raining,” she said. “There is no rain,” said the voice -of Po-o. -</p> -<p>Then the voice spoke again and said to her, “Send out to me your little child.” And -the voice went on to say: “I have what your child liked well—ripe bananas. Send him -out to me, and I will give them to him.” -</p> -<p>“I will not send him out to you,” the woman said, “for the child is now asleep.” -</p> -<p>Then the head came within the house, but the woman had hidden herself and was not -to be found. The wizard stole in; he drew the woman out of the house, and he closed -the door. The head called out: “Do not close the door on me; I wish to come outside.” -But those outside blocked up the door and would not let it out, for they knew that -what was within the house was the demon of the cave that had gone into the man’s head. -Then fire burst out in the house; there were twelve loud sounds; the head was shattered, -and after that there was nothing ever seen of it. And that is the strange story about -Po-o. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>And now we can speak of Mo-e Mo-e, or at least we can speak of Mo-e Mo-e’s son. He -grew up with a stepfather, for his mother had married again. Now, the stepfather was -not always kind to Mo-e Mo-e’s son, and the boy was often punished by him. -</p> -<p>One day he said to his mother: “I will go in search of my real father.” “Your father -is dead and <span class="pageNum" id="pb178">[<a href="#pb178">178</a>]</span>in the sea,” said his mother. “Perhaps he is not,” said the boy. “I will go in search -of him, and I will bring with me the spear that my father left for me.” -</p> -<p>So he started off in search of Mo-e Mo-e, his father. Now when Mo-e Mo-e had been -flung into the sea long before, he had gone down to the bottom. He lay there, for -his slumber was still deep. The fish bit at him, but they did not awaken him, and -the salt of the deep sea went into his skin. Still he lay there asleep. Then a thunder-storm -came. He wakened up. He went to the surface of the sea. Then he swam to the shore. -</p> -<p>He had been made bald by the salt water that had got into his skin. His skin had been -scraped off by the bites of the fishes. He crawled to a pig-pen, and there he lay -down. From that place he crawled to another place. There a wizard found him; he gave -Mo-e Mo-e medicine that cured him. -</p> -<p>Then he went back to his own home, to the place that he had first come from. He went -on no more trips after that, and he took to sleeping like an ordinary man. -</p> -<p>And now his son, with the great spear of dark-red wood with the ridges of shark’s -teeth upon it, went off in search of him. He came to the Island where Mo-e Mo-e had -lived when his name was O-pe-le. He went down into the valley where O-pe-le had had -his farm. -</p> -<p>The boy came to a field where a man was planting <span class="pageNum" id="pb179">[<a href="#pb179">179</a>]</span>taro. He sat down to watch the man, holding the spear in his hands. Two men came along. -Seeing the spear that the boy held, they stopped and looked at it. “Is it not like -the spear we carried when we took away the man who slept all the way in our canoe -and all the time on the black stones of the temple?” one said to the other. “It is -the very same spear,” said the other. “You laid it down, and I was looking at it while -I was telling you the story of Ka-ma-lo, who went to the cave of the Shark-God.” “I -never heard the rest of that story,” said the first man, “and I should like to hear -it.” -</p> -<p>The two sat together, and then the man who had been telling the story that Mo-e Mo-e -had heard, went on. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>When Ka-ma-lo had told him all that had happened, the Shark-God said to him: “Go back -to Ku-pa’s country and live there with his people. But make ready a great offering -for me—an offering of black pigs, white fowl, and red fish—and when the new moon comes -take the offering into the temple enclosure, and stay there until you see a cloud -coming over the mountains of La-na-i. And when you see that cloud, leave the temple -enclosure and get into your canoe and go out to sea.” So Kau-hu-hu said; then he lay -down in the cavern and went to sleep. Ka-ma-lo did not stay any longer; he went quickly -out of the cavern. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb180">[<a href="#pb180">180</a>]</span></p> -<p>He went back, and he lived for a while under the cruel King who had destroyed his -children and amongst the hard people that the King ruled over. He began to put together -the offering for Kau-hu-hu the Shark-God; and by the time he had got all the black -pigs and all the white fowl and all the red fish, the new moon had come. -</p> -<p>He took his offering to the temple enclosure; he left the black pigs and the white -fowl and the red fish within, and he stood upon the black stones, and he looked towards -the mountains of La-na-i. -</p> -<p>He heard the King beating upon his drum: it was to summon all his people to him. He -heard the sound of the drum, but he did not go towards the King’s house; he stood -upon the black stones that made the temple enclosure, and he watched and he waited, -moveless as the stone that he stood on. Louder and louder beat the King’s drum. The -people all gathered at his house. Then Ka-ma-lo saw a speck of cloud over the mountains -of La-na-i. He watched, and he saw it coming nearer and nearer. He left the place -that he had been watching from, and he went to the beach. -</p> -<p>As he went he saw the crowd of people that were gathered together by the King’s drum. -They called to him, but he went past them. He came to the beach, and he pushed but -in his canoe. -</p> -<p>When he looked back he saw that the end of the rainbow was now resting on the temple -enclosure, <span class="pageNum" id="pb181">[<a href="#pb181">181</a>]</span>and he knew that the Shark-God had set a guard on the offering that he had left there. -The cloud was coming nearer, and it was growing bigger and bigger as it came. It made -a darkness over all the land. -</p> -<p>Ka-ma-lo paddled beyond the reef, and he went far out to sea. Out of the darkness -that covered the land there came a fearful storm: down poured the rain; the trees -in the forest cracked and broke; the rivers suddenly filled up; as they rushed into -the valley, trees, houses, and men were swept away and out to sea. Ka-ma-lo, in his -canoe, saw the red-covered drum of the King go floating by. That was the end of Ku-pa -and his people. And if the spear that this young man holds in his hands be the same -spear that I had when we were in the temple enclosure the day I told you the beginning -of the story, that spear is the only thing that has come out of his kingdom. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>Ka-le-lea then spoke up and said: “Yes, this is the spear you carried on that occasion, -for my father, Mo-e Mo-e, heard you tell the beginning of that story; he related it -to my mother, who told it to me. And now I am seeking him; I am seeking that man, -for he is my father.” “If you are seeking the man who slept while we brought him to -the temple and slept there while we were making the preparations to sacrifice him, -you have not far to go,” said the men. “We have seen him since, and we <span class="pageNum" id="pb182">[<a href="#pb182">182</a>]</span>know where he is.<span class="corr" id="xd31e2170" title="Not in source">”</span> “And where is he?” asked the boy. “The man planting taro there,” said the man, “is -no other than he; he is O-pe-le, who came to be called Mo-e Mo-e.” -</p> -<p>Then the boy called out to the man who was planting taro in the field, “Say, your -rows of taro are crooked.” The man looked at his rows, and then he began to straighten -them. But no matter how he straightened them, the boy would call out the same thing. -Then the man said to himself: “How strange this is! Here I have been doing this work -night and day, and my rows were never made crooked before. Now it seems that I cannot -make them straight.” Thereupon he quit working and went to the edge of the patch where -the boy was standing, the great spear in his hands. “Whose offspring are you?” said -he, when he looked at the boy and looked at the spear. “Yours,” said the boy, “yours -and Ka-li-ko’o-ka-lau-ae’s.” “What name have you?” said the man. “I am Ka-le-lea,” -said the boy. “You have found me, my son,” said Mo-e Mo-e. -</p> -<p>And thereupon the two went into the house. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>The boy who came to Mo-e Mo-e, Ka-le-lea, is also known in our stories; in them he -is called “The Mari Who Was Bold in his Wish,” and when you have lighted some more -ku-kui nuts I will tell you how he came to get that name. -</p> -<p>When he grew up he became a fisherman, and he <span class="pageNum" id="pb183">[<a href="#pb183">183</a>]</span>and another youth had a house together. Ke-ino was the other youth’s name. Now whenever -other houses were dark, Ka-le-lea’s and Ke-ino’s would be lighted up. They would have -gathered many ku-kui nuts, they would string them together, and they would light them -up. And the light that Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino had in their house would be seen by travellers -and watchmen and those who looked out of their houses at night. What was being done -in the house where there was so much light, people wondered? -</p> -<p>Well, when Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino came into their house in the evening, they would, -first of all, partake of their evening meal. Then they would light the ku-kui nuts -and keep lighting them as they burned out. Then they would lie down on their mats -with their pillows under their heads, and they would look up at the roof, Ka-le-lea -looking at the gable end, and Ke-ino looking at the end opposite. They would watch -the mice running along the ridge-pole of the house. Then one would say to the other: -“Here are we, Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino, awake and with lights burning beside us. Let us -keep watching the mice running along the ridge-pole of our house, and as we watch -them, let each of us tell out his wishes.” -</p> -<p>Then Ke-ino would say: “Here is my wish. I wish that we may sleep until the first -crowing of the cock, then waken up, and go into the field and pull up a root for fish-bait. -Then go down to the beach, pound <span class="pageNum" id="pb184">[<a href="#pb184">184</a>]</span>the root and set it for eel-bait. Then catch an eel after having waited around the -beach for a bit, go home with it, and wrap it in banana-leaves for cooking. Put it -in the oven after a while. Then, at the second crowing of the cock, open the oven -and put the eel one side to cool. Eat, after a while, until we have had enough. Then -lie down on our mats, put the pillows under our heads, look up and watch the mice -run along the ridge-pole of our house, and tell out our wishes. That is my wish, brother.” -</p> -<p>Then Ka-le-lea would say: “It is a wish, but it is not a manly wish. Listen now, and -I will tell out my wishes. -</p> -<p>“I wish that we may eat King Ka-ku-hi-hewa’s dogs that bite the faces of the people. -I wish that we may eat his hogs with the crossing tusks. I wish that we may eat the -fat fish of his ponds. And when we have eaten all belonging to him, I wish that the -King himself may prepare the drink for us, bring it to us, and put his own cup to -our lips. And then, when we have eaten and drunken, I wish that the King may send -for his two daughters, have them brought in, and have each of them marry one of us, -and then have each couple go to live in a house that he has had built for them. That -is my wish, my brother, and I want you to know it.” -</p> -<p>But when Ka-le-lea would say this (and he would say it every night) Ke-ino would pull -the mat over his face, and he would say: “No, not that wish. <span class="pageNum" id="pb185">[<a href="#pb185">185</a>]</span>Never let it pass your lips again. We will surely get killed on account of that wish.” -</p> -<p>Now the King whom Ka-le-lea had spoken of was at that time engaged in a war—the war -of King Ka-ku-hi-hewa against King Pueo-nui. He had won nothing so far in the war, -and he was becoming disheartened. His watchmen and his soldiers often saw the light -in the house of Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino, and one day they told the King about it. -</p> -<p>Then the King sent his spy to see or hear what was going on in that house. The spy -stole up and lay outside. He heard Ke-ino tell his wish, and then he heard Ka-le-lea -tell his. He heard nothing more; before the first cock crew he stole away, leaving -his dagger stuck at the entrance of the house to let Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino know that -the King’s servant had been there. -</p> -<p>When the spy came back to the King’s house, the King was there with his Councillor -beside him, and they were talking about what should be done to bring to some sort -of end the war against King Pueo-nui. Said the King when the spy came to them: “What -is happening in the house that I sent you to?” -</p> -<p>Said the spy: “This and this.” Thereupon he told all he had heard. When he spoke about -Ka-le-lea’s wish the King became very angry. “Because I am not winning the war,” he -said, “these people think they can make mock of me! Eat my dogs and my <span class="pageNum" id="pb186">[<a href="#pb186">186</a>]</span>hogs and my fat fish indeed! Have me prepare the drink for them and put my own cup -to their mouths! And then give my daughters in marriage to two such fellows! Tell -me, my Councillor, how should I have them slain?” -</p> -<p>But the Councillor was not for having Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino put to death in any way. -“Rather carry out the wish that the boldest of them spoke out,” he said. “If any one -can help you in the war, it is that man. Send for both of them and carry out the bold -one’s wish to the very end. You have a wish too: it is to win the whole Island for -yourself. That man, believe me, is the one who can help you to have that wish of yours -made real.” The King agreed at last to let Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino live, and he even -agreed to carry out to its very end the wish that Ka-le-lea had made. He ordered his -men to cut timber and build houses for the two fishermen and the wives he was going -to give them, and after that he sent an officer with soldiers to bring Ka-le-lea and -Ke-ino to him. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>Ke-ino was the first to waken up that morning. And when he went to the door he saw -the dagger that was stuck at the entrance. Then he knew that the King’s servant had -been listening in the night and that he had heard all that had been said. “We are -going to be killed,” he said to Ka-le-lea; “your <span class="pageNum" id="pb187">[<a href="#pb187">187</a>]</span>terrible wish has been overheard, and the two of us are going to die for it.” -</p> -<p>But Ka-le-lea only stirred on the mat he was lying on; he didn’t even get up to go -to the door. And then Ke-ino saw a company of people coming out of the King’s house. -They carried axes. “Here are our deaths,” said Ke-ino. But the procession he saw was -that of the King’s servants as they went towards the mountain to cut timbers for the -two houses that were to be built, according to the Councillor’s advice and the King’s -orders, for himself and Ka-le-lea and the wives who were to be given to them—the King’s -two daughters. -</p> -<p>Later on, another procession came from the King’s house. This one came straight towards -their house. The men were armed with spears, and the officers had on their shoulders -cloaks of bright feathers, and their war-helmets were on their heads. Ke-ino said: -“Our deaths are now close to us.” But all that Ka-le-lea answered was: “Keep your -eye on them.” -</p> -<p>He did not move until then. Then he rose up from the mat he had been sleeping on, -and he took up his club. He went outside, and by this time the armed men had come -up. The officer said: “We have come to take you two before the king.” Ka-le-lea said -never a word, but with his great club he struck the house a mighty blow, and he scattered -its thatch and its timbers in all directions. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb188">[<a href="#pb188">188</a>]</span></p> -<p>Then, very much to their surprise, Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino were put into a litter and -carried on the shoulders of the soldiers. They were brought before the King. They -were served according to the wish of Ka-le-lea: the dogs and the hogs and the fat -fish were given them to eat; the King prepared the drink for them, and in his own -cup he brought it to Ka-le-lea and Ke-ino. And when they had drunken, the King’s daughters -were brought before them. One was wed to Ka-le-lea, and the other was wed to Ke-ino. -And then each couple was given a house to live in, a house that the King had had built -for them in a single day. -</p> -<p>Ka-le-lea, the one who had uttered the bold wish, was not seen much after that. He -stayed in the house that had been given him. Ke-ino was the one who was around all -the time. And the King took Ke-ino and made him an officer, and gave him a feather -cape for his shoulders and a war-helmet to go on his head. After that, Ke-ino went -into the fight with a company of men; every day he won a victory. But, for all that, -the war still went on. -</p> -<p class="tb"></p><p> -</p> -<p>Ka-le-lea stayed in the house all day with his wife, the King’s daughter. He had no -war-helmet, no feather cape, and he never took a company of men out to battle. Ke-ino -was the great man now, and Ka-le-lea was never spoken of. -</p> -<p>Still the war went on. But after the first crow of <span class="pageNum" id="pb189">[<a href="#pb189">189</a>]</span>the cock, a man with a great club used to go to Ha-la-wa, where the officers and chiefs -of Pueo-nui’s army were, and do battle with them. This the man did every day. He would -come upon a company of them, and fight with them, striking right and left with his -club. He would slay them all. Then he would gather up their feather capes and their -war-helmets, and he would run, run away. The fighting chiefs were all killed by him, -and Pueo-nui’s army melted away. There were stories about how the chiefs were killed -in the early morning, and of how their feather capes and their war-helmets were taken -away. No one knew the warrior who fought with them and overcame them. But the King -was sure that Ke-ino was the one who did it all. -</p> -<p>When the last of Pueo-nui’s fighting chiefs was killed, an end came to the war, and -Pueo-nui gave his lands and his kingdom to King Ka-ku-he-hewa. And that very morning, -as the stranger warrior who had done battle with the chiefs was running back, he was -seen by a watchman in the light of the early morning. The watchman flung a spear at -the running man. It struck him on the arm, just above the wrist. He kept on running. -The spear had a hook, and the watchman knew that it would be hard for the warrior -to draw it out of the flesh of his arm. -</p> -<p>And now the King made, up his mind to give a great reward to Ke-ino, and to get rid -of Ka-le-lea, the fellow whom no one had ever seen outside his <span class="pageNum" id="pb190">[<a href="#pb190">190</a>]</span>house. He made a proclamation, declaring his victory in the war, and telling how much -of it was due to his son-in-law Ke-ino. And every one was satisfied, for every one -was sure that Ke-ino had won the war. Every one, that is, except the King’s Councillor -and the watchman who had flung the spear at the running man. The watchman kept on -saying that it was not Ke-ino but another man who had slain the fighting chiefs of -Pueo-nui’s army and had carried off their feather capes and their war-helmets. -</p> -<p>The Councillor advised the King to bring all his people together, men, women, and -children. All came to a place near the King’s house—all but those who fell down and -who were not able to get up again. “Are all your people here, O King?” asked the Councillor. -“All are here,” said the King, “except that fellow Ka-le-lea. He is asleep at home. -His father, they say, was a good sleeper, and my son-in-law takes after his father.” -“Nevertheless,” said the Councillor, “send for him, and bring him here.” -</p> -<p>Then Ka-le-lea was sent for. He came, and he saw all the people gathered before the -King’s house. He saw Ke-ino there in great state, with a bright feather cape on his -shoulders and a war-helmet on his head. He looked at Ke-ino, and Ke-ino looked at -him. The watchman, who had been looking at all <span class="pageNum" id="pb191">[<a href="#pb191">191</a>]</span>who came, saw him, and he made a sign to the Councillor. -</p> -<p>Then said the Councillor to the King: “Send to this man’s house, and have a search -made in it. And all that your men find hidden in it, have them bring here.” Men were -sent to Ka-le-lea’s house. They returned with feather capes and war-helmets enough -to make a great pile. And then the watchman pointed to Ka-le-lea’s arm, and showed -the hook of a spear in the flesh of it. -</p> -<p>And when the watchman told of how he had flung his spear at the warrior who had slain -the last of Pueo-nui’s fighting chiefs, it was seen by all that Ka-le-lea, and not -Ke-ino, was the man who had won the war. After that he was made the King’s chief officer. -But he did nothing against Ke-ino, who came to serve under him. -</p> -<p>And this is the story of Mo-e Mo-e’s son, Ka-le-lea. Soon after, Ka-ku-he-hiwa died. -Ka-le-lea came to rule in his stead, for all the people clamored to have over them -<i>the Man Who Was Bold in His Wish</i>. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb193">[<a href="#pb193">193</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch13" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e342">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>The Woman from Lalo-hana, the Country under the Sea.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Long, long ago, my younger brothers, there lived in Hawaii a King whose name was Koni-konia. -He sent his fishermen out to catch deep-sea fish for him, and they, without knowing -it, let down their lines and fish-hooks at a place where, before this, strange things -had happened. -</p> -<p>In a while after they had let them down, the hooks were taken off the lines. The fishermen -wondered at this, for they knew that no fish had bitten at their baits. They went -back to the King, and they told him what had happened. There had come no quiver on -their lines, they said, as there would have come if fish had touched their baits, -and their hooks had been cut off the lines as if some one with a knife had done it. -</p> -<p>Now the King had heard before of strange things happening at the place in the sea -where the fishermen had been; and after they had shown him the lines with the hooks -cut off, he sent for a wizard, that he might learn from him how these strange things -had come to be. -</p> -<p>The wizard (he was called a Kahuna) came before the King, and after he had been told -of what had happened to the fishermen’s lines he said: “Your fishermen let their lines -down over Lalo-hana, <span class="pageNum" id="pb194">[<a href="#pb194">194</a>]</span>a country that is at the bottom of the sea, just under the place where they let their -canoes rest. A woman lives there, a very beautiful woman of the sea whose name is -Hina; all alone she lives there, for her brothers, who were given charge of her, have -gone to a place far off.” When the King heard of this beautiful woman of the sea, -he longed to see her and to have her for his wife. -</p> -<p>The Kahuna told him how she might be brought out of the sea to him. The King was to -have a great many images made—images of a man, each image to be as large as a man, -with pearl-shell eyes and dark hair, and with a malo or dress around it. Some of the -images were to be brought out to sea, and some of them were to be left on the beach -and along a path that went up to the King’s house; and one of them was to be left -standing by the door of the house. -</p> -<p>The Kahuna went with the men who had taken the images in their canoes. When they came -to that part of the sea that the country of Lalo-hana was under, the Kahuna told the -men to let down one of the images. Down, down, the image went, a rope around it. It -rested on the bottom of the sea. Then another image was let down. But this image was -not let as far as the bottom of the sea: it was held about the height of a house above -the bottom. Then another image was let down and held above that, and then another -image, and another image, all held <span class="pageNum" id="pb195">[<a href="#pb195">195</a>]</span>one above another, while other images were left standing in canoes that went in a -line back to the beach. And when all the images were in their places, a loud trumpet -was blown. -</p> -<p>The Woman of Lalo-hana, Hina, came out of her house, that was built of white and red -coral, and she saw the image of a man of dark color, with dark hair and eyes of pearl-shell, -standing before her. She was pleased, for she had never seen even the likeness of -a man since her brothers had gone away from her; and she went to the image, and she -touched it. As she did so she saw an image above her; and she went and she touched -this image too. And all the way up to the top of the sea there were images; and Hina -went upward, touching them all. -</p> -<p>When she came up to the surface of the sea she saw canoes, and in each canoe there -was an image standing. Each one seemed to be more beautiful than the others; and Hina -swam on and on, gazing on each with delight and touching this one and that one. -</p> -<p>And so Hina, the Woman of the Sea, came to the beach. And on the beach there were -other images; and she went on, touching each of them. And so she went through the -grove of coco-nut trees and came before the King’s house. Outside the house there -was a very tall image with very large pearl-shell eyes and with a red malo around -it. Hina went to that image. The wreath of sea-flowers that she had <span class="pageNum" id="pb196">[<a href="#pb196">196</a>]</span>in her hair was now withered with the sun; the Woman of Lalo-hana was wearied now, -and she lay down beside the image and fell asleep. -</p> -<p>When she wakened it was not the image, but the King, who was beside her. She saw him -move his hands, and she was frightened because of the movements she saw him make and -the sounds that were around her after the quiet of the sea. Her wreath of sea-flowers -was all shrivelled up in the sunlight. The man kissed her, and they went together -into the house. -</p> -<p>And so the Woman of Lalo-hana, the Country under the Sea, came to Hawaii and lived -there as the wife of Koni-konia, the King. -</p> -<p>After a while, when she had learned to speak to him, Hina told Koni-konia about precious -things that she had in her house in Lalo-hana, the Country under the Sea, and she -begged the King to send a diver to get these things and bring them to her. They were -in a calabash within her house, she said. And she told the King that the diver who -brought it up was not to open the calabash. -</p> -<p>So Koni-konia the King sent the best of his divers to go down to Lalo-hana, the Country -under the Sea, and bring up the calabash that had Hina’s precious things in it. The -diver went down, and found the house of red and white coral, and went within and took -the calabash that was there. He brought it back without opening it and gave it to -Hina. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb197">[<a href="#pb197">197</a>]</span></p> -<p>After some days Hina opened the calabash. Within it was the moon. It flew up to the -heavens, and there it shone clear and bright. When it shone in the heavens it was -called <i>Kena</i>. But it shone down on the sea too, and shining on the sea it was called <i>Ana</i>. -</p> -<p>And then, seeing <i>Ana</i> in the sea, the Woman of Lalo-hana was frightened. “My brothers will come searching -for me,” she said. And the next day she said, “My brothers will bring a great flood -of waters upon this land when they come searching for me.” And after that she said, -“My brothers will seek me in the forms of pa-o’o fishes, and the Ocean will lift them -up so that they can go seeking me.” When the King heard her say this he said, “We -will go far from where the Ocean is, and we will seek refuge on the tops of the mountains.” -</p> -<p>So the King with Hina, with all his people, went to the mountains. As they went they -saw the Ocean lifting up. Hina’s brothers in the forms of pa-o’o fishes were there, -and the Ocean lifted them up that they might go seeking her. -</p> -<p>Over the land and up to the mountains the Ocean went, bearing the pa-o’o fishes along. -Koni-konia and his people climbed to the tops of the mountains. To the tops of the -mountains the Ocean went, bearing the pa-o’o fishes that were Hina’s brothers. Koni-konia -and Hina and all the people climbed to the tops of the trees that were on the tops -of the <span class="pageNum" id="pb198">[<a href="#pb198">198</a>]</span>mountains. And then the Ocean, having covered the tops of the mountains, went back -again, drawing back the pa-o’o fishes that were Hina’s brothers. And it was in this -way that the Great Flood came to Hawaii. -</p> -<p></p> -<div class="figure plate04width" id="plate04"><img src="images/plate04.jpg" alt="“Koni-konia and Hina ... climbed to the tops of the trees that were on the tops of the mountains.”" width="556" height="720"><p class="figureHead">“<i>Koni-konia and Hina … climbed to the tops of the trees that were on the tops of the -mountains.</i>”</p> -</div><p> -</p> -<p>And after the waters of the Ocean had gone back to their own place, Koni-konia the -King, with Hina and his people, went back to the place where their houses had been. -All was washed away; there were mud and sand where their houses and fields had been. -Soon the sun dried up the puddles and the wetness in the ground; growth came again; -they built their houses and cultivated their fields; and Koni-konia, with Hina and -with his people, lived once again in a wide land beside the great ocean. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb199">[<a href="#pb199">199</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div id="ch14" class="div1 last-child chapter"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e349">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>Hina, the Woman in the Moon.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">A weary woman was Hina, and as the years grew on her she grew more and more weary. -All day she sat outside her house beating out tapas for clothes for her family, making -cloths out of the bark of a tree by beating it on a board with a mallet. Weary indeed -was Hina with making tapas all the day outside her house. And when she might see no -more to beat out the tapas, she would have to get her calabash and bring water to -the house. Often she would stumble in the dark, coming back with her calabash of water. -There was no one in her house to help her. Her son went sailing from island to island, -robbing people, and her daughter went to live with the wild people in the forest. -Her husband had become bad-tempered, and he was always striving to make her do more -and more work. -</p> -<p>As Hina grew old she longed more and more to go to a place where she might sit and -rest herself. And one day, when she was given a new task and was sent to fish up shrimps -amongst the rocks with a net, she cried out, “Oh, that I might go away from this place, -and to a place where I might stay and rest myself.” -</p> -<p>The Rainbow heard Hina and had pity on her. It made an arching path for her from the -rocks up to the heavens. With the net in her hands she went <span class="pageNum" id="pb200">[<a href="#pb200">200</a>]</span>along that path. She thought she would go up to the heavens and then over to the Sun, -and that she would go into the Sun and rest herself there. -</p> -<p></p> -<div class="figure plate05width" id="plate05"><img src="images/plate05.jpg" alt="“It made an arching path for her from the rocks up to the heavens. With the net in her hands she went along that path.”" width="550" height="720"><p class="figureHead">“<i>It made an arching path for her from the rocks up to the heavens. With the net in -her hands she went along that path.</i>”</p> -</div><p> -</p> -<p>She went higher and higher along the arch of the Rainbow. But as she went on, the -rays of the Sun beat on her more and more strongly. She held the net over her head -and went on and on. But when she went beyond the clouds and there was nothing to shelter -her, the rays of the Sun burnt her terribly. On and on she went, but as she went higher -she could only crawl along the path. Then the fire of the Sun’s rays began to torture -her and shrivel her. She could go no farther, and, slipping back along the Rainbow -arch, she came to earth again. -</p> -<p>It was dark now. She stood outside her house and saw her husband coming back from -the pool with a calabash of water, stumbling and saying ill-tempered words about her. -And when she showed herself to him he scolded because she had not been there to bring -the calabash of water to the house. -</p> -<p>Now that the Sun was gone down and his rays were no longer upon her, her strength -came back to Hina. She looked up into the sky, and she saw the full Moon there; and -she said: “To the Moon I will go. It is very quiet, and there I can sit for a long, -long time and rest myself.” -</p> -<p>But first she went into the house for the calabash that held all the things that on -earth were precious to her. She came out of her house carrying the calabash, <span class="pageNum" id="pb201">[<a href="#pb201">201</a>]</span>and there before her door was a moon-rainbow. -</p> -<p>Her husband came and asked her where she was going; because she carried her calabash -he knew she was going far. “I am going to the Moon, to a place where I can rest myself,” -she said. She began to climb along the arch of the Rainbow. And now she was almost -out of her husband’s reach. But he sprang up and caught her foot in his hand. He fell -back, twisting and breaking her foot as he fell. -</p> -<p>But Hina went on. She was lamed, and she was filled with pain; and yet she rejoiced -as she went along through the quiet night. On and on she went. She came to where the -Stars were, and she said incantations to them, that they might show her how to come -to the Moon. And the Stars showed her the way, and she came at last to the Moon. -</p> -<p>She came to the Moon with the calabash that had her precious possessions; and the -Moon gave her a place where she might rest. There Hina stayed. And the people of Hawaii -can look up to the bright Moon and see her there. She sits, her foot lamed, and with -her calabash by her side. Seeing her there, the people call her, not “Hina” any more, -but “Lono Moku”—that is, “Lame Lono.” And standing outside the door you can see her -now—Hina, the Woman in the Moon. But some say that, instead of the calabash, she took -with her her tapa-board <span class="pageNum" id="pb202">[<a href="#pb202">202</a>]</span>and mallet; and they say that the fine fleecy clouds that you see around the Moon -are really the fine tapa-cloths that Hina beats out. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb203">[<a href="#pb203">203</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="back"> -<div id="notes" class="div1 notice"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#xd31e355">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h2 class="main"><i>Notes.</i></h2> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">THE BOY PU-NIA AND THE KING OF THE SHARKS</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Given in the Fornander Collection of Hawaiian Antiquities and Folk-lore, Memoirs of -the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Polynesian Ethnology and Natural History, Vol. -V, Part II, with the title <i lang="haw">Kaao no Punia</i>, Legend of Pu-nia. -</p> -<p>Like many another Polynesian hero, Pu-nia had a mother whose name was Hina. The shark’s -name, Kai-ale-ale, means “Sea in great commotion.” But the kindling of the fire inside -the shark with the fire-sticks could not have been so easy as it is made to appear. -Melville, in <i>Typee</i>, describes the operation of fire-making as laborious. This is how he saw it being -done: -</p> -<p>“A straight, dry, and partly decayed stick of the hibiscus, about six feet in length, -and half as many inches in diameter, with a smaller bit of wood not more than a foot -long, and scarcely an inch wide, is as invariably to be met with in every house in -Typee as a box of lucifer matches in the corner of the kitchen cupboard at home. The -islander, placing the larger stick obliquely against some object, with one end elevated -at an angle of forty-five degrees, mounts astride of it like an urchin about to gallop -off upon a cane, and then grasping the smaller one firmly in both hands, he rubs its -pointed end slowly up and down the extent of a few inches on the principal stick, -until at last he makes a narrow groove in the wood, with an abrupt termination at -the point furthest from him, where all the dusty particles which the friction creates -are accumulated in a little heap. -</p> -<p>“At first Kory-Kory goes to work quite leisurely, but gradually quickens his pace, -and waxing warm in the employment, drives the stick furiously along the smoking channel, -plying his hands to and fro with amazing rapidity, the perspiration <span class="pageNum" id="pb204">[<a href="#pb204">204</a>]</span>starting from every pore. As he approaches the climax of his effort, he pants and -gasps for breath, and his eyes almost start from their sockets with the violence of -his exertions. This is the critical stage of the operation; all his previous labours -are in vain if he cannot sustain the rapidity of the movement until the reluctant -spark is produced. Suddenly he stops, becomes perfectly motionless. His hands still -retain their hold of the smaller stick, which is pressed convulsively against the -further end of the channel among the fine powder there accumulated, as if he had just -pierced through and through some little viper that was wriggling and struggling to -escape from his clutches. The next moment a delicate wreath of smoke curls spirally -into the air, the heap of dusty particles glow with fire, and Kory-Kory, almost breathless, -dismounts from his steed.” -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">THE SEVEN GREAT DEEDS OF MA-UI</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">The number seven has no significance in Polynesian tradition; the number eight has. -It just happened that the number of Ma-ui’s deeds that had interest for me as a story-teller -was seven. Fornander has only short and passing notices of Ma-ui, and all the material -for the stories given here has been taken from Mr. W. D. Westervelt’s valuable <i>Ma-ui the Demi-God</i>. Ma-ui is a hero for all the Polynesians, and Mr. Westervelt tells us that either -complete or fragmentary Ma-ui legends are found in the single islands and island groups -of Aneityum, Bowditch or Fakaofa, Efate, Fiji, Fotuna, Gilbert, Hawaii, Hervey, Huahine, -Mangaia, Manihiki, Marquesas, Marshall, Nauru, New Hebrides, New Zealand, Samoa, Savage, -Tahiti or Society, Tauna, Tokelau, and Tonga. Ma-ui is, in short, a Pan-Polynesian -hero, and it is as a Pan-Polynesian hero that I have treated him, giving his legend -from other sources than those that are purely Hawaiian. However, I have tried to make -Hawaii the background for all the stories. Note that Ma-ui’s <span class="pageNum" id="pb205">[<a href="#pb205">205</a>]</span>position in his family is the traditional position for a Polynesian hero—he is the -youngest of his brothers, but, as in the case of other heroes of the Polynesians, -he becomes the leader of his family. -</p> -<p>Ma-ui’s mother was Hina. She is distinguished from the numerous Hinas of Polynesian -tradition by being “Hina-a-ke-ahi,” “Hina-of-the-Fire.” I follow the New Zealand tradition -that Mr. Westervelt gives in telling how Ma-ui was thrown into the sea by his mother -and how the jelly-fish took care of him. Ma-ui’s throwing the heavy spear at the house -is also out of New Zealand. His overthrowing of the two posts is out of the Hawaiian -tradition. But in that tradition it is suggested that his two uncles were named “Tall -Post” and “Short Post.” They had been the guardians of the house, and young Ma-ui -had to struggle with them to win a place for himself in the house. Ma-ui’s taking -away invisibility from the birds and letting the people see the singers is out of -the Hawaiian tradition. So is Ma-ui’s kite-flying. The Polynesian people all delighted -in kite-flying, but the Hawaiians are unique in giving a kite to a demi-god. The incantation -beginning “O winds, winds of Wai-pio” is Hawaiian; the other incantation, “Climb up, -climb up,” is from New Zealand. -</p> -<p>The fishing up of the islands is supposed by scholars to be a folk-lore account of -the discovery of new islands after the Polynesian tribes had put off from Indonesia. -The story that I give is mainly Hawaiian—it is out of Mr. Westervelt’s book, of course—but -I have borrowed from the New Zealand and the Tongan accounts too; the fish-hook made -from the jaw-bone of his ancestress is out of the New Zealand tradition, and the chant -“O Island, O great Island” is Tongan. -</p> -<p>The story of Ma-ui’s snaring the sun is Hawaiian, and the scene of this, the greatest -exploit in Polynesian tradition, is on the great Hawaiian mountain Haleakala. The -detail about <span class="pageNum" id="pb206">[<a href="#pb206">206</a>]</span>the nooses of the ropes that Ma-ui uses—that they were made from the hair of his sister—is -out of the Tahitian tradition as given by Gill. -</p> -<p>The Hawaiian story about Ma-ui’s finding fire is rather tame; he forces the alae or -the mud-hen to give the secret up to him. I have added to the Hawaiian story the picturesque -New Zealand story of his getting fire hidden in her nails from his ancestress in the -lower world. There is an Hawaiian story, glanced at by Fornander, in which Ma-ui obtains -fire by breaking open the head of his eldest brother. -</p> -<p>The story of Ma-ui and Kuna Loa, the Long Eel, as I give it, is partly out of the -Hawaiian, partly out of the New Zealand tradition, and there is in it, besides, a -reminiscence of a story from Samoa. All of these stories are given in Mr. Westervelt’s -book. That Kuna Loa tried to drown Ma-ui’s mother in her cave—that is Hawaiian; that -Hina was driven to climb a bread-fruit tree to get away from the Long Eel—that is -derived from the Samoan story. And the transformation of the pieces of Kuna Loa into -eels, sea monsters, and fishes is out of the New Zealand tradition about Ma-ui. “When -the writer was talking with the natives concerning this part of the old legend,” says -Mr. Westervelt, “they said, ‘Kuna is not a Hawaiian word. It means something like -a snake or a dragon, something we do not have in these islands.’ This, they thought, -made the connection with the Hina legend valueless until they were shown that Tuna -(or Kuna) was the New Zealand name of the reptile which attacked Hina and struck her -with his tail like a crocodile, for which Ma-ui killed him. When this was understood, -the Hawaiians were greatly interested to give the remainder of the legend, and compare -it with the New Zealand story.” “This dragon,” Mr. Westervelt goes on, “may be a remembrance -of the days when the Polynesians were supposed to dwell by the banks of the River -Ganges in India, when <span class="pageNum" id="pb207">[<a href="#pb207">207</a>]</span>crocodiles were dangerous enemies and heroes saved families from their destructive -depredations.” Mrs. A. P. Taylor of Honolulu writes me in connection with this passage: -“There is a spring in the Palama district in Honolulu called Kuna-wai (‘Eel of Water’). -In Hawaiian, kuna-kuna means eczema, a skin disease.” -</p> -<p>The story of the search that Ma-ui’s brother made for his sister is from New Zealand. -Ma-ui’s brother is named Ma-ui Mua and Rupe. His sister is Hina-te-ngaru-moana, “Hina, -the daughter of the Ocean.” -</p> -<p>The splendidly imaginative story of how Ma-ui strove to win immortality for men is -from New Zealand. The Goblin-goddess with whom Ma-ui struggles is Hina-nui-te-po, -“Great Hina of the Night,” or “Hina, Great Lady of Hades.” According to the New Zealand -mythology she was the daughter and the wife of Kane, the greatest of the Polynesian -gods. There seems to be a reminiscence of the myth that they once possessed in common -with the New Zealanders in the fragmentary tale that the Hawaiians have about Ma-ui -striving to tear a mountain apart. “He wrenched a great hole in the side. Then the -elepaio bird sang and the charm was broken. The cleft in the mountain could not be -enlarged. If the story could be completed it would not be strange if the death of -Ma-ui came with his failure to open the path through the mountain.” So Mr. Westervelt -writes. -</p> -<p>The Ma-ui stories have flowed over into Melanesia, and there is a Fijian story given -in Lorimer Fison’s <i>Tales of Old Fiji</i>, in which Ma-ui’s fishing is described. Ma-ui, in that story, is described as the -greatest of the gods; he has brothers, and he has two sons with him. With his sons -he fishes up the islands of Ata, Tonga, Haabai, Vavau, Niua, Samoa, and Fiji. Ma-ui’s -sons depart from the Land of the Gods and seize upon the islands that their father -had fished up. Then Disease and Death <span class="pageNum" id="pb208">[<a href="#pb208">208</a>]</span>come to the islands that the rebel gods, Ma-ui’s sons, have seized. Afterwards Ma-ui -sent to them “some of the sacred fire of Bulotu.” -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">AU-KE-LE THE SEEKER</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part I, of the Memoirs of the Bernice -Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title <i lang="haw">He Moolelo no Aukelenuiaiku</i>, the Legend of Aukelenuiaiku. -</p> -<p>Like many another Polynesian hero, Au-ke-le (to cut down his name from the many-syllabled -one which means Great Au-ke-le, son of Iku) was the youngest born of his family. Fornander -thought that his story “has marked resemblances in several features to the Hebrew -account of Joseph and his brethren, and is traced back to Cushite origin through wanderings -and migrations”—an idea which is wholly fantastic. The story as I have retold it is -very much condensed. -</p> -<p>Au-ke-le’s grandmother is a mo-o—literally, a lizard. Dr. Nathaniel Emerson and Mr. -William Hyde Rice translate “mo-o” by “dragon,” and I fancy that “mo-o” created a -sufficiently vague conception to allow the fantastic and terrifying dragon to become -its representative. On the other hand, “dragon” tends to bring in a conception that -is not Polynesian. I have not rendered “mo-o” by either “lizard” or “dragon.” I prefer -to let “mo-o” remain mysterious. Note what Mr. Westervelt says about the “mo-o” or -“dragon” being a reminiscence of creatures of another environment. -</p> -<p>The story of Au-ke-le is mythical: it is a story about the Polynesian gods. Au-ke-le -and his brothers go from one land of the gods to another. The “Magic” that he carries -in his calabash is a godling that his grandmother made over to him. There are many -things in this story that are difficult to make intelligible in a retelling. It is -difficult, for instance, to convey the impression that the maids whom the Queen sends -to Au-ke-le, <span class="pageNum" id="pb209">[<a href="#pb209">209</a>]</span>and her brothers too, were reduced to abject terror by Au-ke-le’s disclosing their -names. But to the Polynesians, as to other primitive peoples, names were not only -private, and intensely private, but they were sacred. To know one’s name was to be -possessed of some of one’s personality; magic could be worked against one through -the possession of a name. Our names are public. But suppose that a really private -name—a name that was given to us by our mother as a pet name—was called out in public: -how upset we might be! Stevenson’s mother named him “Smootie” and “Baron Broadnose.” -How startled R. L. S. might have been if a stranger in a strange land had addressed -him by either name! -</p> -<p>Later on Au-ke-le goes on the quest that was the Polynesian equivalent of the Quest -of the Holy Grail; he goes in quest of the Water of Everlasting Life, the Water of -Kane. The Polynesian thought that there was no blessing greater than that of a long -life. There are many stories dealing with the Quest of the Water of Kane, and there -is one poem that has been translated beautifully by Dr. Nathaniel Emerson. It is given -in his <i>Unwritten Literature of Hawaii</i>. -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<div class="lg"> -<p class="line">A query, a question, -</p> -<p class="line">I put to you: -</p> -<p class="line">Where is the Water of Kane? -</p> -<p class="line">At the Eastern Gate -</p> -<p class="line">Where the Sun comes in at Haehae; -</p> -<p class="line">There is the Water of Kane. -</p> -</div> -<div class="lg"> -<p class="line">A question I ask of you: -</p> -<p class="line">Where is the Water of Kane? -</p> -<p class="line">Out there with the floating Sun, -</p> -<p class="line">Where cloud-forms rest on the Ocean’s breast, -</p> -<p class="line">Uplifting their forms at Nohoa, -</p> -<p class="line">This side the base of Lehua; -</p> -<p class="line">There is the Water of Kane. -</p> -</div> -<p><span class="pageNum" id="pb210">[<a href="#pb210">210</a>]</span></p> -<div class="lg"> -<p class="line">One question I put to you: -</p> -<p class="line">Where is the Water of Kane? -</p> -<p class="line">Yonder on mountain peak, -</p> -<p class="line">On the ridges steep, -</p> -<p class="line">In the valleys deep, -</p> -<p class="line">Where the rivers sweep; -</p> -<p class="line">There is the Water of Kane. -</p> -</div> -<div class="lg"> -<p class="line">This question I ask of you: -</p> -<p class="line">Where, pray, is the Water of Kane? -</p> -<p class="line">Yonder, at sea, on the ocean, -</p> -<p class="line">In the drifting rain, -</p> -<p class="line">In the heavenly bow, -</p> -<p class="line">In the piled-up mist-wraith, -</p> -<p class="line">In the blood-red rainfall, -</p> -<p class="line">In the ghost-pale cloud-form; -</p> -<p class="line">There is the Water of Kane. -</p> -</div> -<div class="lg"> -<p class="line">One question I put to you: -</p> -<p class="line">Where, where is the Water of Kane? -</p> -<p class="line">Up on high is the Water of Kane, -</p> -<p class="line">In the heavenly blue, -</p> -<p class="line">In the black-piled cloud, -</p> -<p class="line">In the black-black cloud, -</p> -<p class="line">In the black-mottled sacred cloud of the gods; -</p> -<p class="line">There is the Water of Kane. -</p> -</div> -<div class="lg"> -<p class="line">One question I ask of you: -</p> -<p class="line">Where flows the Water of Kane? -</p> -<p class="line">Deep in the ground, in the gushing spring, -</p> -<p class="line">In the ducts of Kane and Loa, -</p> -<p class="line">A well-spring of water, to quaff, -</p> -<p class="line">A water of magic power— -</p> -<p class="line">The water of Life! -</p> -<p class="line">Life! O give us this life!</p> -</div> -</div> -<p><span class="pageNum" id="pb211">[<a href="#pb211">211</a>]</span></p> -<p>The story of Au-ke-le has a solemn if not a tragic ending, which is unusual in Polynesian -stories. Its close makes one think of that chant that Melville heard the aged Tahitians -give “in a low, sad tone”: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p lang="ty" class="line">A harree ta fow, -</p> -<p lang="ty" class="line">A toro ta farraro, -</p> -<p lang="ty" class="line">A now ta tararta. -</p> -<p class="line xd31e1728">The palm-tree shall grow, -</p> -<p class="line xd31e1728">The coral shall spread, -</p> -<p class="line xd31e1728">But man shall cease.</p> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">PI-KO-I: THE BOY WHO WAS GOOD AT SHOOTING ARROWS</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part III, of the Memoirs of the Bernice -Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title <i lang="haw">Kaao No Pikoiakaalala</i>, Legend of Pikoiakaalala (Pi-ko-i, the son of the Alala). -</p> -<p>His father was Raven or Crow, his sisters were Rat and Bat. The arrows that Pi-ko-i -shot were not from the sort of bow that we are familiar with; the Hawaiian bow, it -must be noted, was not a complete bow. The string hung untied from the top of the -shaft; the shooter put the notch of the arrow into the hanging string, whipped forward -the shaft, and at the same time cast the arrow, which was light, generally an arrow -of sugar-cane. The arrow was never used in war; it was used in sport—to shoot over -a distance, and at birds and at rats that were held in some enclosure. The bird that -cried out was evidently the elepaio. “Among the gods of the canoe-makers,” says Mr. -Joseph Emerson, “she held the position of inspector of all <i>koa</i> trees designed for that use.” The Hawaiian interest in riddles enters into Pi-ko-i’s -story. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb212">[<a href="#pb212">212</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">PAKA: THE BOY WHO WAS REARED IN THE LAND THAT THE GODS HAVE SINCE HIDDEN</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. V, Part II, of the Memoirs of the Bernice -Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title <i lang="haw">Kaao no Kepakailiula</i>, the Legend of Kepakailiula. -</p> -<p>Pali-uli, where Paka’s uncles reared him, is the Hawaiian paradise. In a chant that -Fornander quotes it is described: -</p> -<div class="lgouter"> -<p class="line">O Pali-uli, hidden Land of Kane, -</p> -<p class="line">Land in Kalana i Hauola, -</p> -<p class="line">In Kahiki-ku, in Kapakapaua of Kane, -</p> -<p class="line">The Land whose foundation shines with fatness, -</p> -<p class="line">Land greatly enjoyed by the god.</p> -</div> -<p class="first">“This land or Paradise,” says Fornander, “was the central part of the world … and -situated in Kahiki-ku, which was a large and extensive continent.” Paka emerges from -this Fairy-land into a world that is quite diurnal when he sets about winning Mako-lea. -The boxing, spear-throwing, and riddling contests that he engages in reflect the life -of the Hawaiian courts. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">THE STORY OF HA-LE-MA-NO AND THE PRINCESS KAMA</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. V, Part II, of the Memoirs of the Bernice -Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title <i lang="haw">Kaao no Halemano</i>, Legend of Ha-le-ma-no. -</p> -<p>Kama, or, to give her her full name, Kamalalawalu, was living under a strict <i>tapu</i>. Ha-le-ma-no is no thoughtless <i>tapu</i>-breaker, as are other young men in Hawaiian romance; there is very little of the -mythical element in this story; the enchantress-sister, however, is a figure that -often comes into Hawaiian romance. This story is remarkable for its vivid rendering -of episodes belonging to the aristocratic life—the surf-riding, <span class="pageNum" id="pb213">[<a href="#pb213">213</a>]</span>surely the greatest of sports to participate in, as it is the most thrilling of sports -to watch; the minstrelsy; the gambling. The poems that Ha-le-ma-no and Kama repeat -to each other are very baffling, and are open to many interpretations. In this respect -they are like most Hawaiian poetry, which has a deliberate obscurity that might have -won Mallarmé’s admiration. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">THE ARROW AND THE SWING</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">This is one of the most famous of the Hawaiian stories. It is given in the Fornander -Collection, Vol. V, Part I, of the Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, with -the title <i lang="haw">He Kaao no Hiku a me Kawelu</i>, the Legend of Hi-ku and Ka-we-lu. It should be remembered that Hi-ku’s arrow was -more for casting than for shooting: the game that he was playing at the opening of -the story consisted in casting his arrow, <i>Pua-ne</i>, over a distance. Ka-we-lu was living under <i>tapu</i>. But, like many another heroine of Polynesian romance, she was not reluctant about -having the <i>tapu</i> broken. There is one very puzzling feature in this story. Why did Ka-we-lu not give -her lover food? Her failure to provide something for him is against all traditions -of Hawaiian hospitality. Of course, in the old days, men and women might not eat together; -Ka-we-lu, however, could have indicated to Hi-ku where to go for food. The food at -hand might have been for women only, and <i>tapu</i> as regards men. Or it might have been <i>tapu</i> for all except people of high rank. If this was what was behind Ka-we-lu’s inhospitality -it would account for a bitterness in Hi-ku’s anger—she was treating him as a person -of a class beneath her. But these are guesses merely. I have asked those who were -best acquainted with the Hawaiian tradition to clear up the mystery of Ka-we-lu’s -behavior in this particular, but they all confessed themselves baffled by it. The -poems that Ka-we-lu chants to Hi-ku, like the poems that Ha-le-ma-no chants to Kama, -have a meaning beneath the ostensible meaning of the words. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb214">[<a href="#pb214">214</a>]</span></p> -<p>With regard to Ka-we-lu’s death it should be remembered that according to Polynesian -belief the soul was not single, but double. A part of it could be separated or charmed -away from the body; the spirit that could be so separated from the body was called -<i>hau</i>. In making the connection between Hi-ku and the lost Ka-we-lu I have gone outside -the legend as given in the Fornander Collection. I have brought in Lolupe, who finds -lost and hidden things. This godling is connected with the Hi-ku-Ka-we-lu story through -a chant given by Dr. Nathaniel Emerson in his notes to David Malo’s <i>Hawaiian Antiquities</i>. -</p> -<p>Mr. Joseph Emerson gives this account of <i lang="haw">Lua o Milu</i>, the realm of Milu, the Hawaiian Hades: “Its entrance, according to the usual account -of the natives, was situated at the mouth of the great valley of Waipio, on the island -of Hawaii, in a place called Keoni, where the sands have long since covered up and -concealed from view this passage from the upper to the nether world.” Fornander says -that the realm of Milu was not entirely dark. “There was light and there was fire -in it.” The swing chant that I have given to Hi-ku does not belong to the legend; -it is out of a collection of chants that accompany games. The Hawaiian swing was different -from ours; it was a single strand with a cross-piece, and it was pulled and not pushed -out. -</p> -<p>Mr. Joseph Emerson, in a paper that I have already quoted from, <i>The Lesser Hawaiian Gods</i>, says that Hi-ku’s mother was Hina, the wife of Ku, one of the greater Polynesian -gods. In that case, Hi-ku was originally a demi-god. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">THE DAUGHTER OF THE KING OF KU-AI-HE-LANI</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">Given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part III, of the Memoirs of the Bernice -Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title <i lang="haw">Kaao no Laukiamanuikahiki</i>. The girl’s full name means “Bird catching leaf of Kahiki.” Her mother is Hina, a -mortal woman <span class="pageNum" id="pb215">[<a href="#pb215">215</a>]</span>apparently, but her father is a demi-god, a dweller in “the Country that Supports -the Heavens.” In the original, Ula the Prince is the son of Lau-kia-manu’s father; -such a relation as between lover and lover is quite acceptable in Hawaiian romance. -When she comes into her father’s country the girl incurs the death-penalty by going -into a garden that has been made <i>tapu</i>. Lau-kia-manu, in Kahiki-ku, seems to have the rôle of Cinderella; however, the Hawaiian -story-teller gives her a ruthlessness that is not at all in keeping with our notion -of a sympathetic character. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">THE FISH-HOOK OF PEARL</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">This simple tale is given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part III, of the Memoirs -of the Bernice Pauahi Museum, with the title <i lang="haw">Kaao no Aiai</i>, the Legend of Aiai. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">THE STORY OF KANA, THE YOUTH WHO COULD STRETCH HIMSELF UPWARDS</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">This story is given in the Fornander Collection, Vol. IV, Part III, with the title -<i lang="haw">Kaao no Kana a Me Niheu</i>, Legend of Kana and Niheu. Mr. Thrum speaks of the legend of Kana and Niheu as having -“ear-marks of great antiquity and such popularity as to be known by several versions.” -The chant in which his grandmother prays for a double canoe for Kana is over a hundred -lines long; Miss Beckwith speaks of this chant as being still used as an incantation. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">THE ME-NE-HU-NE</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">There are no stories of the Me-ne-hu-ne in the Fornander Collection. Fornander uses -the name, but only as implying the very early people of the Islands. According to -W. D. Alexander the name Me-ne-hu-ne is applied in Tahiti to the lowest class of people. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb216">[<a href="#pb216">216</a>]</span></p> -<p>The account of the Me-ne-hu-ne that I give is taken from two sources—from Mr. William -Hyde Rice’s <i>Hawaiian Legends</i>, published by the Bishop Museum, and from Mr. Thomas Thrum’s <i>Stories of the Menehunes</i>, published by A. C. McClurg & Co., Chicago. I am indebted to Mr. Rice for the part -that treats of the history of the Me-ne-hu-ne, and to Mr. Thrum for the two stories, -“Pi’s Watercourse” and “Laka’s Adventure.” -</p> -<p>Beginning with “The Me-ne-hu-ne,” I have treated the stories as if they were being -told to a boy by an older Hawaiian. I have imagined them both as being with a party -who have gone up into the highlands to cut sandalwood. That would be in the time of -the first successors of Kamehameha, when the sandalwood of the islands was being cut -down for exportation to China, “the land of the Pa-ke.” As the party goes down the -mountain-side the boy gathers the ku-kui or candle-nuts for lighting the house at -night. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">THE STORY OF MO-E MO-E: ALSO A STORY ABOUT PO-O AND ABOUT KAU-HU-HU THE SHARK-GOD, -AND ABOUT MO-E MO-E’S SON, THE MAN WHO WAS BOLD IN HIS WISH</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">The story of Opele, who came to be called Mo-e Mo-e, is given in the Fornander Collection, -Vol. V, Part I, of the Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title -<i lang="haw">He Kaao no Opelemoemoe</i>, Legend of Opelemoemoe; the story about Po-o is given in the Memoirs of the Bernice -Pauahi Bishop Museum, Vol. V, Part III (the stories in this volume do not belong to -the Fornander Collection); the story about the Shark-God is taken from an old publication -of the Islands, the <i>Maile Quarterly</i>; the story of the Man who was Bold in his Wish is given in the Fornander Collection, -Vol. IV, Part III, of the Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, with the title -<i lang="haw">Kaao no Kalelealuaka a Me Keinohoomanawanui</i>, the Legend of Kalelealuaka and Keinohoomanawanui. -<span class="pageNum" id="pb217">[<a href="#pb217">217</a>]</span></p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">THE WOMAN FROM LALO-HANA, THE COUNTRY UNDER THE SEA</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">This story is taken from David Malo’s <i>Hawaiian Antiquities</i>. A variant is given in the Fornander Collection. There are many Hinas in Hawaiian -tradition, but the Hina of this story is undoubtedly the Polynesian moon-goddess. -</p> -</div> -</div> -<div class="div2 last-child section"><span class="pageNum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span><div class="divHead"> -<h3 class="main">HINA, THE WOMAN IN THE MOON</h3> -</div> -<div class="divBody"> -<p class="first">This story is from Mr. Westervelt’s <i>Ma-ui the Demi-God</i>. The husband of this Hina was Aikanaka. -</p> -</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> -<div class="transcriberNote"> -<h2 class="main">Colophon</h2> -<h3 class="main">Availability</h3> -<p class="first">This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project -Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at <a class="seclink xd31e44" title="External link" href="https://www.gutenberg.org/">www.gutenberg.org</a>. -</p> -<p>This eBook is produced by the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at <a class="seclink xd31e44" title="External link" href="https://www.pgdp.net/">www.pgdp.net</a>. -</p> -<h3 class="main">Metadata</h3> -<table class="colophonMetadata" summary="Metadata"> -<tr> -<td><b>Title:</b></td> -<td>At the gateways of the day</td> -<td></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td><b>Author:</b></td> -<td>Padraic Colum (1881–1972)</td> -<td>Info <span class="externalUrl">https://viaf.org/viaf/49223588/</span></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td><b>Illustrator:</b></td> -<td>Juliette May Fraser (1887–1983)</td> -<td>Info <span class="externalUrl">https://viaf.org/viaf/68044151/</span></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td><b>File generation date:</b></td> -<td>2023-01-06 21:09:27 UTC</td> -<td></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td><b>Language:</b></td> -<td>English</td> -<td></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td><b>Original publication date:</b></td> -<td>1924</td> -<td></td> -</tr> -</table> -<h3 class="main">Revision History</h3> -<ul> -<li>2023-01-05 Started. -</li> -</ul> -<h3 class="main">Corrections</h3> -<p>The following corrections have been applied to the text:</p> -<table class="correctionTable" summary="Overview of corrections applied to the text."> -<tr> -<th>Page</th> -<th>Source</th> -<th>Correction</th> -<th>Edit distance</th> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd31e1701">124</a></td> -<td class="width40 bottom" lang="en">Kahi-ki-ku</td> -<td class="width40 bottom" lang="en">Kahiki-ku</td> -<td class="bottom">1</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd31e1706">124</a></td> -<td class="width40 bottom" lang="en">Kahi-kiku</td> -<td class="width40 bottom" lang="en">Kahiki-ku</td> -<td class="bottom">2</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd31e2170">182</a></td> -<td class="width40 bottom" lang="en"> -[<i>Not in source</i>] -</td> -<td class="width40 bottom" lang="en">”</td> -<td class="bottom">1</td> -</tr> -</table> -</div> -</div> -<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AT THE GATEWAYS OF THE DAY ***</div> -<div style='text-align:left'> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will -be renamed. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. -</div> - -<div style='margin-top:1em; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE</div> -<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE</div> -<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person -or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the -Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when -you share it without charge with others. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work -on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the -phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: -</div> - -<blockquote> - <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most - other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions - whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms - of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online - at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you - are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws - of the country where you are located before using this eBook. - </div> -</blockquote> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg™ License. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format -other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain -Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -provided that: -</div> - -<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation.” - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ - works. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. - </div> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right -of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread -public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state -visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. -</div> - -</div> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/69724-h/images/new-cover.jpg b/old/69724-h/images/new-cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 630f4c7..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/images/new-cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h/images/plate01.jpg b/old/69724-h/images/plate01.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b50538d..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/images/plate01.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h/images/plate02.jpg b/old/69724-h/images/plate02.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e1fbf6f..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/images/plate02.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h/images/plate03.jpg b/old/69724-h/images/plate03.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a68968c..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/images/plate03.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h/images/plate04.jpg b/old/69724-h/images/plate04.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6acc552..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/images/plate04.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h/images/plate05.jpg b/old/69724-h/images/plate05.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d105349..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/images/plate05.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h/images/threefish.png b/old/69724-h/images/threefish.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ced6cb5..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/images/threefish.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h/images/titlepage.png b/old/69724-h/images/titlepage.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7718b4b..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/images/titlepage.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h/images/wave.png b/old/69724-h/images/wave.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 159e205..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/images/wave.png +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69724-h/images/yale-logo.png b/old/69724-h/images/yale-logo.png Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 663770d..0000000 --- a/old/69724-h/images/yale-logo.png +++ /dev/null |
